Entries |
Document | Title | Date |
20080198742 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR TESTING STATEFUL NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS DEVICES - The testing of stateful network devices at near wire-speed operation is accomplished by a tester that delivers realistic client-side and the server-side traffic to stateful network device under test, where the realistic traffic can simulate legal packets of a plurality of TCP sessions that are expected to be transferred over each connection between the tester and the device under test. The simulated traffic in a session is independent of previous states of the session or received packets. The packets are generated by the tester based on a predefined scenario. The scenario can define the type of the session (http, ftp, email, any combination of those, etc.) the content, the size of a message, number of connections in the session, missing packets, bit rates, etc. For each scenario, one or more scripts can be created. The scripts can simulate problems so that the operation of the device under test can be monitored. | 08-21-2008 |
20080198743 | DATA FLOW CONTROL FOR SIMULTANEOUS PACKET RECEPTION - Embodiments of the present invention provide methods, a module, and a system for calculating a credit limit for an interface capable of receiving multiple packets simultaneously. Generally, the multiple packets are simultaneously received at an interface on the second device, each packet being one of a plurality of packet types, and a flow control credit limit to be transmitted to the first device is adjusted based on the combination of packet types of the simultaneously received packets. | 08-21-2008 |
20080205267 | Service Differentiation in the IP Multimedia Subsystem Utilizing Context-Aware Signaling - A system and method for service differentiation enabling a user to express the level of importance of a session being established and change the level during the session while satisfying QoS profiles. An extension of the 3GPP IMS architecture includes a Session Prioritization Function (SPF) in communication with a S-CSCF and a Context Information Base (CIB) which provides network contextual information. Upon receiving a session initiation or change request, the S-CSCF queries the SPF for a resource allocation/deallocation decision. The SPF consults session prioritization policies and the contextual information to make an informed decision. If the load on the IMS network is normal or light, the SPF utilizes an upper limit policy to limit resources for each service class. Otherwise, the SPF limits the size of multi-party sessions and utilizes soft and hard preemption to transfer network resources between classes. The SPF may trigger the S-CSCF to re-negotiate media-format parameters if network contextual information changes. | 08-28-2008 |
20080205268 | ADMISSION CONTROL METHOD AND ADMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM - An admission control method for determining a session admission probability with respect to a new session admission of a path, so that a bandwidth measured in the path and corresponding to a sum of bandwidth used converges to a vicinity of a specified target value, includes computing the session admission probability based on a deviation between the measured bandwidth and the bandwidth target value using a feedback control rule, and judging whether or not to accept a new session in the path based on the computed session admission probability, and processing the new session admission based on a result of the judging. | 08-28-2008 |
20080212468 | Apparatus, methods and computer program products providing estimation of activity factor and enhanced radio resource management - In one non-limiting, exemplary embodiment, a method includes: estimating an activity factor for a priority class based at least in part on a provided bit rate for the priority class and a guaranteed bit rate of the priority class; and using the estimated activity factor to estimate at least one network-related parameter. In another non-limiting, exemplary embodiment, a method includes: obtaining a measurement for a priority class; and estimating an activity factor for the priority class based at least in part on the measurement and a quality of service attribute of the priority class. As a non-limiting example, exemplary embodiments of this invention employ a framework providing an estimation of effective activity factor per service priority indicator (SPI) class to provide, for example, enhanced quality of service awareness in radio resource management functionality, such as for estimation of the amount of power used per SPI class/group. | 09-04-2008 |
20080212469 | System and Method of Defense Against Denial of Service of Attacks - A system and method comprise a first buffer having a first capacity and a first threshold level adapted to store data frames having the lowest priority, a second buffer having a second capacity greater than the first capacity and a second threshold level greater than the first threshold level adapted to store data frames having a medium priority, a third buffer having a third capacity greater than the second capacity and a third threshold level greater than the second threshold level adapted to store data frames having the highest priority. The system further includes means for differentiating a data frame as having lowest, medium or highest priority and storing the data frame in the respective first, second or third buffer, and discarding the data frame in response to the first, second or third buffer reaching the respective threshold level. | 09-04-2008 |
20080219158 | Media content distribution system and method - A system and method for media content distribution, including establishing a relation between a content source and a content destination, at least one of the content source and the content destination being external to an entity that establishes the relation. Transmission of the content is permitted from the source to the destination only if the relation exists between the source and the destination. | 09-11-2008 |
20080219159 | PROTOCOL DMA ENGINE - Apparatus and method for accelerating data handling in the protocol stack of a networked device. Embodiments of the disclosed invention may be used to increase the throughput rate of a networked device while offloading processing from the device's host processor. A method includes building a set of descriptors that describe the operations to be performed by a Protocol DMA Engine. A host processor builds the set of descriptors in lieu of performing the operations described by the descriptors. The set of descriptors is provided to the Protocol DMA Engine. The Protocol DMA Engine executes the operations described in the set of descriptors to produce a protocol layer output data unit from a protocol layer input data unit. The protocol layer output data unit is provided to a next layer of a network protocol stack. | 09-11-2008 |
20080219160 | PROGRAMMABLE HARDWARE-BASED TRAFFIC POLICING - A hardware-based technique for policing traffic in a network node involves programming a set of algorithm-specific policing primitives that establishes a relationship between condition primitives and action primitives and populating a searchable memory with a set of indexed action primitives. Action primitives are then selected from the searchable memory in response to condition primitives related to a received datagram. Policing actions related to the datagram are performed in response to the action primitive. Because the algorithm-specific policing primitives are programmable, a network node can be adapted to implement a wide variety of policing algorithms. Additionally, multiple different policing algorithms can be implemented in hardware without the need for a different set of combinational logic for each different policing algorithm. | 09-11-2008 |
20080219161 | Method for generating burst in a communication system - A method for generating a burst in a communication system. The method includes estimating a first allocable PDU according to scheduling priority; generating a first burst in which the first PDU is to be included; and determining whether a total size of bursts to be allocated to a downlink subframe including the generated first burst is less than a maximum size of bursts allocable to the downlink subframe. | 09-11-2008 |
20080225705 | Monitoring, Controlling, And Preventing Traffic Congestion Between Processors - A system for monitoring congestion at processors includes queues and a congestion monitor. The queues receive packets, and each queue is associated with a processor. For each queue, the congestion monitor establishes whether a time-averaged occupancy of a queue exceeds a time-averaged occupancy threshold. The congestion monitor provides a notification if the time-averaged occupancy exceeds the time-averaged occupancy threshold. | 09-18-2008 |
20080225706 | Under-assigning resources to video in triple-play virtual topologies to protect data-class traffic - A method for video-on-demand (VoD) admission control at a network edge assigns to a triple-play network virtual topology lesser resources than there exists in a corresponding underlying physical link bandwidth. This prevents video-on-demand (VoD) starvation of data-class traffic. At least one policy enforcement point (PEP) is attached to an edge of the network, providing for autonomous short-term, application-aware controls to be applied to corresponding network ingress traffic, and also providing for long-term controls on corresponding network ingress traffic. The network ingress traffic to the network comes under management when the traffic nears or exceeds network capacity. It is enabled to do so by computations of current network routing topology and bandwidth reservations. Path tables are used to calculate if a PEP may admit more, or must shed, sessions/calls to maintain service for other existing application traffic. The PEP and a session/call admission controller (S/CAC) may be independently located within the topology of the network, and together implement admission controls that differentiate between triple-play video, voice, and data traffic classes. | 09-18-2008 |
20080225707 | Advanced bandwidth management audit functions - An auditing function detects and corrects reservation and routing topology map errors by monitoring the operation of an advanced bandwidth manager (ABM). A session/call admission controller (S/CAC) attached to a network manages loading with policy enforcement points (PEP's) when the network nears or exceeds its capacity. Ever-changing network topology information is monitored, modeled, and analyzed from remote listeners. A correct model of how traffic is being routed through various parts of the network is critical to admission control. The PEP's at the network edges provide short-term, application-aware controls on their own that are applied to the corresponding network ingress traffic. The S/CAC uses the path tables to calculate whether particular PEP's can admit more traffic, or should they shed sessions/calls to keep service up for the existing application traffic. Long-term controls are periodically downloaded as admission tables from the S/CAC to the PEP's. | 09-18-2008 |
20080225708 | Application-aware policy enforcement - An application-aware policy enforcement point (PEP) attaches to the edge of a packet-switched network to manage loading when the network nears or exceeds its capacity due to changes in the network, e.g., component failures or incremental growth. An advanced bandwidth manager (ABM) comprises a session/call admission controller (S/CAC) that monitors and maps ever-changing network topology information gathered from remote listeners about how traffic is being routed through various parts of the network. These reports are harmonized to build a single view of the network topology, and the point-to-point connections are abstracted into path tables. Autonomous PEP's at the network's edges provide short-term, application-aware controls on their own that are applied to the corresponding network ingress traffic. The S/CAC uses the path tables to calculate whether particular PEP's can admit more traffic, or should they shed sessions/calls to keep service up for the existing application traffic. Long-term controls are periodically downloaded as admission tables from the S/CAC to the PEP's. | 09-18-2008 |
20080225709 | Advanced bandwidth management - An advanced bandwidth manager (ABM) comprises a session/call admission controller (S/CAC) to manage network ingress traffic when a packet-switched network nears or exceeds its capacity due to changes in the network, e.g., component failures or incremental growth. Ever-changing network topology information is gathered from remote listeners about how traffic is being routed through various parts of the network. These reports are harmonized to build a single view of the network topology, and the point-to-point connections are abstracted into path tables. Autonomous policy enforcement points (PEP's) provide short-term, application-aware controls on their own that are applied to the corresponding network ingress traffic. The S/CAC uses the path tables constructed to calculate whether the PEP's can admit more or should shed sessions/calls to keep service up for all existing application traffic. Long-term controls are periodically downloaded as admission tables from the S/CAC to the PEP's. | 09-18-2008 |
20080232248 | MULTIMODAL MULTILEVEL PRECEDENCE AND PREEMPTION - A device comprising a network resource controller to preempt at least one multiple-user session over a primary modality of communication according to a precedence-level associated with users of the multiple-user session and to switch the multiple-user session to an alternate modality of communication without disconnection of the multiple-user session, | 09-25-2008 |
20080239948 | SPECULATIVE CONGESTION CONTROL SYSTEM AND CROSS-LAYER ARCHITECTURE FOR USE IN LOSSY COMPUTER NETWORKS - Methods and apparatus are provided to improve data throughput in a wireless, wireline or a combination wireless and wireline communication system. A congestion control manager selects between an assumption based congestion control algorithm and a speculation based congestion control algorithm. The selected algorithm generates data recovery instructions including instructions for resizing, or not, congestion window sizing for the communication gateways. By making the selection between the assumption based congestion control algorithm and the speculation based congestion control algorithm based upon network information, data recovery and throughput is optimized for networks having lossy data links. | 10-02-2008 |
20080239949 | LOAD-BALANCED CELL SWITCH DEVICE AND PRIORITY CONTROL METHOD - In cell read from a buffer for each priority provided in the intermediate stage buffers | 10-02-2008 |
20080239950 | Telecommunications Method and System involving Active Nodes Having Full Receive State and Isolated Receive State from Non-Allocated Traffic - A telecommunications system. The system includes a communications network. The system includes N nodes, where N is an integer greater than or equal to 2, which run a same or different applications and process a same or different ranges of application level traffic, and which communicate with each other through the network using signaling by SIGTRAN protocols. Each of the N nodes has a full receive state where a node receives any type of traffic from the other nodes and an isolated receive state where the node only receives allocated traffic from the other nodes. The node sends traffic to the other nodes whether the node is in the full receive state or the isolated receive state. A method for communicating. | 10-02-2008 |
20080239951 | METHOD FOR APPLYING STOCHASTIC CONTROL OPTIMIZATION FOR MESSAGING SYSTEMS - A computer implemented method, apparatus, and computer usable program code for controlling when to send messages in a stream processing system. A policy is determined by utilizing probability statistics and a cost function prior to stream processing. The policy specifies under which conditions a message is sent eagerly and under which other conditions the message is delayed. A filter is operated during stream processing that selects which of the messages to send from a sending transform based upon a threshold. A controller is operated during stream processing that observes a current state of a receiving transform and that applies the policy based on the current state to determine whether to change the threshold. | 10-02-2008 |
20080239952 | FLEXIBLE ETHERNET BRIDGE - In one embodiment, an Ethernet bridge operates in either VLAN aware mode or VLAN unaware mode as specified by a user. The width of a CAM used for storing address table can be minimized by using a mapping of VLAN identifiers to small numbers, which are stored in the CAM. Flooding can be minimized by employing various techniques. Communication can be quickly re-established even if the Ethernet address (or the machine having that address) moves to be reachable on different ports of the Ethernet bridge. Sufficiently quick response to bridge protocols may be ensured by using an external processor to generate responses, and providing a higher priority DMA channel to transfer packets related to the bridge protocols. | 10-02-2008 |
20080247310 | Method of Improving Communication Between Mobile Nodes - To improve a method of improving communication between mobile nodes in an ad-hoc wireless network and in particular to reduce the amount of data to be transmitted, all the nodes are organized into application-specific clusters and the information that is relevant to each application is stored in the head element of the cluster. | 10-09-2008 |
20080247311 | SIGNALING IN A CLUSTER - Various techniques for signaling in a cluster are disclosed. The cluster includes a number of nodes that support communications by an apparatus. The apparatus may be configured to support a wireless connection with a first node in the cluster. The apparatus may be further configured to support a first control flow with the first node. The apparatus may be further configured to support a second control flow, through the first node, with a second node in the cluster. The first and second control flows include a plurality of frames each having a field and content, and wherein the field in each of the frames identifies whether the content in that frame is part of the first or second control flow. | 10-09-2008 |
20080247312 | Configurable Multislot Class for Wireless Devices - A solution is provided wherein the mobile device selects a multislot class based on the profile of the traffic to be utilized by the mobile device. This may be performed manually by a user, or may be performed automatically where an application or driver software automatically and dynamically determines the best multislot class for the applications being used. This can be accomplished, for example, by looking at the classification of the transport control protocol (TCP) port numbers used, by examining the data sent and received by the network, and/or looking up a profile for the user or device. If the user changes applications or some other event occurs on the mobile device that might cause a change in the profile of the traffic, the mobile device may terminate its current multislot class assignment and re-announce itself, allowing the system to transfer the mobile device to a new multislot class. | 10-09-2008 |
20080253284 | Controlling a Transmission Rate of Packet Traffic - Controlling a transmission rate of packet traffic includes receiving packets from a network processor. The packets are stored in a buffer associated with a processor. If an occupancy level of the buffer is greater than a predetermined threshold, it is determined that the processor is congested. A message is transmitted to the network processor indicating the processor is congested. | 10-16-2008 |
20080253285 | Apparatus, method, and computer program product providing improved silence suppression detection - Apparatus, methods and computer program products provide improved silence suppression detection that may be utilized, for example, in conjunction with an extended real-time polling service (ertPS) in a worldwide interoperability for microwave access (WiMAX, IEEE 802.16 standard) system. In one non-limiting, exemplary embodiment, a method includes: in response to receiving an uplink frame, setting or resetting a connection-specific timer; and in response to the connection-specific timer expiring, detecting a silence suppression interval and allocating a minimum amount of periodic resources for the associated connection. | 10-16-2008 |
20080259790 | RELIABLE AND RESILIENT END-TO-END CONNECTIVITY FOR HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS - Embodiments of the present invention address deficiencies of the art in respect to connectivity management in a heterogeneous network and provide a method, system and computer program product for resilient and reliable end-to-end connectivity in a heterogeneous network. In one embodiment of the invention, a method for resilient and reliable end-to-end connectivity in a heterogeneous network environment can be provided. The method can include creating an instance of an abstracted network resource model (NRM) for a heterogeneous network environment of different network resource nodes. The method further can include binding an application endpoint in the instance of the abstracted NRM with a connectivity endpoint for a first of the different network resource nodes. The method yet further can include detecting an outage in the first of the different network resource nodes. Finally, the method can include re-binding the application endpoint to a second of the different network resource nodes in response to detecting the outage. | 10-23-2008 |
20080259791 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR NORMALIZING SERVICE LEVEL AGREEMENTS IN A NETWORK - This disclosure provides a method and apparatus for normalizing service level agreements across entire networks. By utilizing a new parameter called the virtual call count, a wholesale network provider can monitor a variety of related network status indications and provide to their customers increased insight into the nature of the service level rejections that they experience. Existing service level agreement processors can be equipped with the additional functionality of calculating the virtual call count to form an apparatus for normalizing service level agreements. | 10-23-2008 |
20080267064 | Communications System and Method for Load Management - A communications system comprising a target node and at least one source node arranged for communication of messages there between; in which the target node comprises means for processing at least some of the messages received from the at least one source node and means for detecting the processing load of the target node; in which the target node comprises means for notifying the at least one source node when a specific processing load level has been reached or exceeded; and in which each source node comprises means for reducing, responsive to the notification, the rate at which messages are sent to the target node. | 10-30-2008 |
20080273459 | FLEXIBLE ETHERNET BRIDGE - In one embodiment, an Ethernet bridge operates in either VLAN aware mode or VLAN unaware mode as specified by a user. The width of a CAM used for storing address table can be minimized by using a mapping of VLAN identifiers to small numbers, which are stored in the CAM. Flooding can be minimized by employing various techniques. Communication can be quickly re-established even if the Ethernet address (or the machine having that address) moves to be reachable on different ports of the Ethernet bridge. Sufficiently quick response to bridge protocols may be ensured by using an external processor to generate responses, and providing a higher priority DMA channel to transfer packets related to the bridge protocols. | 11-06-2008 |
20080279098 | Wireless Receiver Code Download and Boot Sequence - A process for initializing and booting the CPU of a wireless communication device includes a sequence controller, ROM, a ROM controller, a DMA controller, a wireless front end, a memory, and a remote wireless host which contains the download code. The sequence controller causes the ROM controller initially transfers a Source, a Destination and a Length to the DMA controller, which uses these values to copy the ROM contents into the memory. Thereafter, the sequence controller causes the CPU to start executing the code that has been transferred into memory by the ROM controller, and the CPU thereafter downloads the operating system into memory using the wireless front end, which is receiving an original and duplicate packet from the remote host. Upon completion of the download, the CPU executes the downloaded operating system and begins operation of the device. | 11-13-2008 |
20080291824 | Reassigning Virtual Lane Buffer Allocation During Initialization to Maximize IO Performance - A system and method for reassigning buffer space during to maximize IO performance of virtual lanes is set forth. More specifically, the system and method for reassigning buffer space takes buffer space from unused virtual lanes and reassigns the unused buffer space to used virtual lanes. For example, in an embodiment that supports four virtual lanes where only two virtual lanes are in use, the system and method reassign the buffer space from the other two unused virtual lanes for use by the two virtual lanes in use. | 11-27-2008 |
20080291825 | Dynamically Reassigning Virtual Lane Resources - A system and method for dynamically reassigning buffer space during to maximize IO performance of virtual lanes is set forth. More specifically, the system and method for dynamically reassigning buffer space takes buffer space from unused virtual lanes and reassigns the unused buffer space to used virtual lanes, e.g., when changes occur to an IO configuration. For example, in an embodiment that supports four virtual lanes where only two virtual lanes are in use, the system and method reassign the buffer space from the other two unused virtual lanes for use by the two virtual lanes in use. | 11-27-2008 |
20080291826 | Dynamic Load Balancing for Layer-2 Link Aggregation - Load balancing for layer-2 link aggregation involves initial assignment of link aggregation keys (LAGKs) and reassignment of LAGKs when a load imbalance condition that merits action is discovered. Load conditions change dynamically and for this reason load balancing tends to also be dynamic. Load balancing is preferably performed when it is necessary. Thus an imbalance condition that triggers load balancing is preferably limited to conditions such as when there is frame drop, loss of synchronization or physical link capacity exceeded. | 11-27-2008 |
20080298234 | Bandwidth policing method and packet transfer apparatus with bandwidth policing function - In a bandwidth policing apparatus which accommodates a large number of user groups, bandwidth policing for each user group is performed at high speed. When there is any extra bandwidth in bandwidth for a user group, the contracted committed information rate for each user is guaranteed invariably while using this effectively. The bandwidth policing apparatus accumulates packets of a plurality of user groups under bandwidth policing in the same packet accumulate FIFO. Also, for a packet which does not exceed the contracted bandwidth for each user, the contracted bandwidth for each user is guaranteed by deciding that the packet does not exceed the contracted bandwidth for each user group. | 12-04-2008 |
20080304408 | System and Method for Improving Service and Device Discovery in a Upnp-Based Wireless Communication Network - A system and method that improve service and device discovery in a UPnP-based wireless communication network and avoids unnecessary broadcast messages on a MAC sublayer of a DLC layer caused by UPnP multicast messages on an IP layer by intercepting UPnP multicast messages in a network protocol stack below the IP layer. A module intercepts multicast UDP packets destined to a UPnP IP multicast address and port, the multicast UDP packets containing UPnP packets as payload. The module executes DLC/MAC-based service discovery functions to perform wireless network-specific device discovery and to find UPnP-enabled devices in the wireless communication network. Once a wireless network device discovery has returned nodes that fulfill criteria given in the search, the module uses unicast DLC/MAC messages to send UPnP packets to only those nodes that are UPnP-enabled and whose device type matches the respective UPnP device type sought. | 12-11-2008 |
20080304409 | Receiving data in a sensor network - A sensor network has a plurality of wireless sensors which transmit to an intermediate receiving device which relays data to a central server. A method is provided for receiving data packets at the intermediate receiving device from a plurality of the transmitting devices. Data packets are sensed on a communication medium at the receiving device and the total traffic intensity of data packets from the transmitting devices is estimated. A detection threshold for data packets is provided and adapted as a function of the total intensity. The receiving device receives data packets with a signal strength above the current detection threshold. | 12-11-2008 |
20080310300 | Traffic Activity-Based Forwarding Table Updates For Ethernet-Based Mobile Access Networks - A system and method for granting an association request from a mobile terminal, determining, during a predetermined time interval after granting the association request, if the mobile terminal has received traffic from a network and sent traffic to the network and sending a broadcast update packet to the network if it is determined that the mobile terminal has not both received traffic from and sent traffic to the network within the predetermined time interval. | 12-18-2008 |
20080310301 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING PRE-EMPTION OF QUALITY OF SERVICE (QoS) ALLOCATIONS IN A NETWORK - A system and method manages Quality-of-Service (QoS) in a network by allocating resources, such as available network bandwidth. The network devices transmit and receive data traffic streams, each of which includes QoS parameters, including a priority level and bandwidth allocation. The method includes choosing which existing QoS allocations are pre-empted, notifying original requesters of pre-empted allocations, and re-establishing pre-empted allocations with appropriate modifications. If a new QoS request cannot be accommodated due to the previous allocations to lower-priority requesters, the existing lower-priority allocations are released until enough allocations are released to accommodate the new request. Once the new request is allocated, the pre-empted configurations may be reallocated. | 12-18-2008 |
20080310302 | LOAD BALANCING DISTRIBUTION OF DATA TO MULTIPLE RECIPIENTS ON A PEER-TO-PEER NETWORK - A method and system for load balancing the distribution of a file or block of data to multiple recipients on a peer to peer network is disclosed. | 12-18-2008 |
20080316921 | HIERARCHICAL RATE LIMITING WITH PROPORTIONAL LIMITING - A network flow controller to manage network traffic bandwidth is described. Embodiments of the network flow controller include a hierarchical flow creditor, a proportional flow creditor, and a rate limiter. The hierarchical flow creditor is configured to manage a plurality of hierarchical credit accounts. The hierarchical credit accounts include a shared credit account associated with a plurality of distinct network traffic flows for a shared bandwidth resource. The proportional flow creditor is configured to track an oversubscription of the shared bandwidth resource by the plurality of distinct network traffic flows. The rate limiter is coupled to the hierarchical flow creditor and the proportional flow creditor. The rate limiter is configured to limit at least one of the distinct network traffic flows based on the oversubscription tracked by the proportional flow creditor. | 12-25-2008 |
20080316922 | Data and Control Plane Architecture Including Server-Side Triggered Flow Policy Mechanism - A data and control plane architecture for network devices. An example system architecture includes a network processing unit implementing one or more data plane operations, and a network device operably coupled to the network processing unit that implements a control plane. In a particular implementation, the network processing unit is configured to process network traffic according to a data plane configuration, and sample selected packets to the network device. The network device processes the sampled packets and adjusts the data plane configuration responsive to the sampled packets. In particular implementations, the control plane and data plane implement, a server-side triggered policy caching mechanism that allows for previous classification policy decisions made for previous data flows to be applied to subsequent new flows. | 12-25-2008 |
20080316923 | Distributing intelligence across networks - Methods and apparatus relating to distribution of intelligence across a network are described. In one embodiment, one or more content processors may be provided at the edge of a computer network (e.g., prior to a point where data is aggregated or routed by the network). Other embodiments are also disclosed. | 12-25-2008 |
20090003203 | HARDWARE PACKET PACING USING A DMA IN A PARALLEL COMPUTER - Method and system for hardware packet pacing using a direct memory access controller in a parallel, in one aspect, keeps track of a total number of bytes put on the network as a result of a remote get operation, using a hardware token counter. A remote get message is sent as a plurality of sub remote get packets. Each of the sub remote get packets is sent if the total number of bytes put on the network does not exceed a predetermined number. | 01-01-2009 |
20090003204 | Lockless Bandwidth Management for Multiprocessor Networking Devices - An example embodiment of the invention provides a process for lockless processing of hierarchical bandwidth partitions configurations in multiple processor architectures. In one embodiment, the process runs in an NPU's data plane and receives a packet for a partition from a child partition through a work queue. The process determines a suggested target bandwidth rate for the receiving partition's child partitions, based in part on a count of active child partitions, if a predefined time interval has passed. The process adopts a target bandwidth rate for the receiving partition suggested by the receiving partition's parent partition, if the receiving partition is not a root partition and the predefined time interval has passed. The process then transmits the packet to the receiving partition's parent partition through the work queue, if the receiving partition is not a root partition. Otherwise, the process transmits the packet to a port. | 01-01-2009 |
20090003205 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR LOAD DISTRIBUTION CONTROL OF PACKET TRANSMISSION - A method for a load distribution control of packet transmission includes calculating bandwidths of individual physical ports at a time when inputted packets are distributed to the plurality of physical ports, using each of a plurality of hash calculation formulas; selecting one of the hash calculation formulas so that the calculated bandwidths of the packets for the respective physical ports may become uniform; and distributing and delivering the packets to the respective physical ports using the updated hash calculation formula. | 01-01-2009 |
20090010155 | NETWORK COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHODS AND SYSTEMS - Network communication control methods and systems are provided. The length of a sub-time slice is determined according to a network bandwidth, and a transmission threshold of the sub-time slice is determined according to the length of the sub-time slice and the network bandwidth. At least one network transmission is performed within the sub-time slice if a transmission amount of the network transmission within the sub-time slice does not exceed the transmission threshold. | 01-08-2009 |
20090010156 | Method for Changing Service Quality of a Content Adaptively - The present invention relates to a method for changing service quality of a content adaptively. In the present method, when allowance of access to a network is requested, whether transfer speed demanded by the request of access allowance can be provided is checked. If can not be provided, service quality of a connection being serviced is lowered. In the meantime, the present method monitors whether available bandwidth is generated, and upgrades service quality of a connection being serviced when available bandwidth is generated. The above operations can make a given network resource fully used. | 01-08-2009 |
20090016215 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR BALANCING IP GATEWAY SERVICES - A method and system are disclosed for distributing load in a network. A set of routers are configured for providing IP gateway services to a set of hosts where each router in the set of routers all back up all the other routers in the same set. Each router in the set utilizes identical load distribution policies, load distribution properties and load distribution arrangement. A Load Distribution Function (LDF) master router is determined for the set of routers, wherein each one of the set of routers is a backup for the LDF master router. Every router in the set of routers utilize the same algorithm to compute load distribution and the LDF master router provides balancing information to all the other routers by including that information in VRRP advertisement messages to all the routers. | 01-15-2009 |
20090016216 | SYSTEM FOR INTEGRATING A PLURALITY OF MODULES USING A POWER/DATA BACKBONE NETWORK - A Virtual Electrical and Electronic Device Interface and Management System (VEEDIMS) is provided. In one example, the VEEDIMS includes a backbone network formed by cables that are configured to simultaneously carry digital data and power. A controller is coupled to the backbone network and configured to execute control instructions. A plurality of modules are coupled to the controller via the backbone network and receive data and power via the backbone network. The modules receive control signals from the controller based on the control instructions. At least one device is coupled to one of the modules via a direct input/output (I/O) interface positioned in the module. A device specific driver contained in the module provides a communications interface between the device and a generic VEEDIMS controller driver in the controller. | 01-15-2009 |
20090022053 | EXCESSIVE FLOW DETECTION DEVICE, EXCESSIVE FLOW DETECTION CIRCUIT, TERMINAL APPARATUS AND NETWORK NODE - A packet information extraction circuit derives predetermined key information (for example, destination information or transmission source information) from a received packet. A HASH result computation circuit generates m (a plurality of) pseudo-random numbers (HASH results) of fixed length from the derived information. A cache table holds the key information and cumulative packet lengths within a predetermined time period by using the generated pseudo-random numbers as addresses. When a threshold value holding and comparing circuit senses that the cumulative packet length has exceeded a value held therein, it sends a notification signal to judgment means disposed in a packet exchange system. The key information items and the cumulative values of the packet lengths are stored in the cache table on the basis of the received packets in such a way that larger cumulative packet lengths are left behind, whereas smaller cumulative packet lengths are erased. | 01-22-2009 |
20090028045 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR TRAFFIC LOAD BALANCING TO MULTIPLE PROCESSORS - A method for load balancing selects one of a set of distribution formulas to associate packets of each of multiple communications sessions traversing a link to one of a plurality of output links and assigns the associated packets of at least one of the communications sessions to a different output link. | 01-29-2009 |
20090040923 | SYSTEMS, METHODS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCTS FOR DISTRIBUTING APPLICATION OR HIGHER LAYER COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK SIGNALING ENTITY OPERATIONAL STATUS INFORMATION AMONG SESSION INITIATION PROTOCOL (SIP) ENTITIES - Systems, methods, and computer program products for distributing application or higher layer communications network signaling entity operational status information among SIP entities are disclosed. According to one aspect, a method includes determining operational status information for an application or higher layer communications network signaling entity. Further, the method includes identifying at least one second SIP entity to receive the operational status information. The method also includes distributing the operational status information to the at least one second SIP entity. The first SIP entity, the at least one second SIP entity, and the application or higher layer communications network signaling entity are associated with network nodes separate from subscriber communication terminals. | 02-12-2009 |
20090040924 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MOVING DISTINCTIVE TRAFFIC FLOWS TO A DIFFERENT PRIORITY SERVICE FLOW - A cable modem termination system (CMTS) is adapted to move particular traffic flows to a different priority service flow. The CMTS includes detection logic, or is coupled to detection logic, to detect the presence of particular traffic, logic to establish a different priority service flow between a cable modem termination system and a cable modem, and flow control logic to direct a given packet on to the different priority service flow if the given packet contains information that matches one or more classifiers. | 02-12-2009 |
20090040925 | DEVICE HAVING QUALITY OF SERVICE (QoS) CONFIRMATION AND METHOD FOR CONFIGURING QoS - A UE is described herein that has a defined QoS database which is used to organize and store various QoS parameter sets which are used to help establish media flows. In one embodiment, the QoS database includes a plurality of tables, where each table is associated with a particular application, and where each table has a plurality of rows, and where each row includes a media type, a requested QoS parameter set, and an optional minimum QoS parameter set. An operator can use a communication network to populate/provision the QoS database. An operator can also use the communication network to fine-tune (update) the QoS database which enables them to enhance the bearer QoS for existing applications and to enable the appropriate bearer QoS for future applications. | 02-12-2009 |
20090046581 | Flow Estimator - A system for communication flow estimation and method therefore are described. The system comprises a filter array arranged to receive a packet, an index hash unit, a flow count array, and a global average counter. The index hash unit generates an index based on a received index set. The flow count array comprises one or more counters and updates a counter based on a received index. The global average counter updates an average count of received packets based on the received packet. | 02-19-2009 |
20090059785 | Policy-based resource management - In one embodiment, a network device receives a request from a client in association with a connection, where the request indicates an amount of one or more resources that is requested to support the connection. The network device determines whether the amount of the resources is available. The network device may then allocate a level of the resources to the connection according to whether the amount of the resources is available. | 03-05-2009 |
20090059786 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DYNAMIC ASSIGNMENT OF QUALITY OF SERVICE PARAMETERS IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method includes identifying a condition associated with a communication network and/or an industrial control and automation system. The method also includes selecting, based on the identified condition, one or more quality of service (QoS) parameters used to route data through the communication network. In addition, the method includes communicating information identifying the one or more QoS parameters to one or more components in the communication network. The one or more QoS parameters could be contained within one of multiple QoS policies, and the method could include selecting one of the QoS policies. The condition could represent an emergency condition, and the one or more QoS parameters could include a higher QoS priority for traffic (such as voice communications and sensor data) to and from specified personnel (such as first responders). The communication network could represent at least one wired network and/or at least one wireless network. | 03-05-2009 |
20090059787 | APPARATUS AND ASSOCIATED METHODOLOGY OF PROCESSING A NETWORK COMMUNICATION FLOW - The disclosure relates to an apparatus and associated methodology for processing flows. Data packets belonging to various flows are received by a device of a communications network and stored in a queue so as the device retransmits them. In order to re-transmit a data packet, a flow is selected, to which the least memory space in the queue is allocated. A packet from the selected flow is retransmitted and extracted from the queue, and when the memory space available in the queue does not allow a received packet to be stored. Further a flow is selected to which the most memory space in the queue is allocated and a data packet of the selected flow is eliminated from the queue. | 03-05-2009 |
20090067326 | Method to Prioritize Videos Distributed in a Wireless LAN and Device Implementing the Method - The invention concerns method to distinguish between streams received by an access point from a distribution network and transmitted to stations and a way to give better priority to some of them towards others. In a system where streams are transmitted with a level of priority corresponding to there type, it adds a selection criterion to determine priority between streams of the same type. The invention also concerns an access point implementing the method. | 03-12-2009 |
20090067327 | Method for managing network resources and network management device - The invention relates to a method for managing network resources in a network with a network management device (M), a network component (A), and a further network component (B), and a network management device (M), the method comprising the following steps: transmitting a request for an advance reservation of a network resource by the network component (A) to the network management device (M), wherein the request includes information regarding a reservation start time and a reservation end time; transmitting a request for an ad-hoc reservation of a further network resource by the further network component (B) to the network management device (M); allocating the further network resource to the further network component (B) by the network management device (M); and allocating the network resource to the network component (A) by the network management device (M) at the reservation start time, wherein the network resource comprises a part or all of the further network resource. | 03-12-2009 |
20090073877 | PACKET PROCESSING APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, PACKET PROCESSING METHOD AND PROGRAM THAT EXECUTES THIS METHOD - For a system that comprises an information processing apparatus that repetitively transmits a packet and a server apparatus that receives the packet, a packet processing apparatus that can reduce a packet processing load imposed on the server apparatus, a communication system and a packet processing method are disclosed. This packet processing apparatus includes: a packet determination unit for determining whether a packet received by a receiver is a repetitive packet that has been repetitively transmitted by an information processing apparatus to a server apparatus; a transmission determination unit for determining whether the packet that is determined to be a repetitive packet should be transmitted; and a transmitter for transmitting a packet that is determined not to be a repetitive packet and a packet that is determined to be transmitted, and for not transmitting a packet that is determined, by the transmission determination unit, is not to be transmitted. | 03-19-2009 |
20090073878 | Usage based queuing with accounting for wireless access points - One embodiment of a queuing mechanism using an Accounting component | 03-19-2009 |
20090080328 | SYSTEM AND METHOD of COMMUNICATING A MEDIA STREAM - In an embodiment, a method of allocating media streams includes measuring real-time port usage data related to each of a plurality of physical ports associated with a link aggregation group. The method further includes selecting at least one, but not all, of the plurality of physical ports based on the real-time port usage data and sending a media stream to a network via the physical port. | 03-26-2009 |
20090080329 | Egress traffic management system for a data communications system - An egress traffic management system for a data communication system is disclosed. The egress traffic management system makes use of a hierarchical queue ID header paradigm that enables data packets to be directed for egress traffic management to either one of a plurality of assignable queues in a main egress queue module or to one of a plurality of distributed queue modules via a common queue of the main egress queue module. This behavior enables egress traffic management functionality and scale to be varied independently and in a cost-effective manner to meet evolving requirements of a data communications system. | 03-26-2009 |
20090080330 | METHOD FOR SELECTING A DETERMINATOR OF PRIORITY TO ACCESS A NETWORK - The present invention relates to technology for determining priority when an access to a network, e.g., UPnP-based home network is requested. An illustrative method according to the present invention sets one priority determinator among a plurality of determinators to default one, and asks the default priority determinator priority information on a connection for traffic when the connection is requested to be allowed. | 03-26-2009 |
20090086628 | Apparatus and methods for scheduling packets in a broadband data stream - A packet scheduler includes a packet manager interface, a policer, a congestion manager, a scheduler, and a virtual output queue (VOQ) handler. The policer assigns a priority to each packet. Depending on congestion levels, the congestion manager determines whether to send a packet based on the packet's priority assigned by the policer. The scheduler schedules packets in accordance with configured rates for virtual connections and group shapers. A scheduled packet is queued at a virtual output queue (VOQ) by the VOQ handler. In one embodiment, the VOQ handler sends signals to a packet manager (through the packet manager interface) to instruct the packet manager to transmit packets in a scheduled order. | 04-02-2009 |
20090086629 | ADMISSION CONTROL BASED ON QOS PERFORMANCE IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Techniques for performing admission control based on quality-of-service (QoS) performance in a wireless communication network are described. QoS performance (e.g., delay or throughput performance) of admitted data flows may be determined. Whether to admit or reject a new data flow may then be determined based on the QoS performance of the admitted data flows. The admitted and new data flows may have delay bounds. The QoS performance of the admitted data flows may be given by a measured sector delay, which may be determined based on actual delays of packets. A measured flow delay for each admitted data flow may be determined based on delays of packets for that flow. The measured sector delay may then be determined based on the measured flow delays for all admitted data flows. The new data flow may be admitted if the measured sector delay is less than a delay threshold. | 04-02-2009 |
20090086630 | Network monitoring system and method capable of reducing processing load on network monitoring apparatus - A network monitoring system capable of effectively monitoring the behavior of traffic through a network is provided with an aggregation apparatus which is connected to access networks which is connected to a telecommunications network. The aggregation apparatus includes: a receiving unit distinctively receiving input side communication data which is input from the telecommunications network to one of the access network and output side communication data which is output from one of the access network to the telecommunications network; and an abnormal traffic detecting unit detecting abnormal traffic on the basis of both the input side communication data and the output side communication data. | 04-02-2009 |
20090092045 | Method And System For Network Logout For A Mobile Station In Idle Mode - A method for network logout for a mobile station (MS) in IDLE mode. The method includes performing network logout upon the MS by a network side, releasing the resources associated with the MS and deleting the context of the MS. A system for network logout for a mobile station in IDLE mode. MS location update procedures, conducted by the network side, in various situations enables the paging controller or other network entity to delete the context of the MS and also provides network logout processing in the scenarios when the network resources are in congestion, the location update of the network side times out and the network side varies with the service policy. | 04-09-2009 |
20090092046 | Method for Congestion Management of a Network, a Switch, and a Network - A switch for connection in a network of other like switches and includes memory for storing data packets, a control system arranged to control the switch to, upon receipt at one of the ingress or egress ports of notification of congestion at a downstream congested port, either store at said ingress port or egress port data packets received for said congested port or to communicate with an upstream port for storage at said upstream port of data packets destined for the congested port, and in dependence on the current of stored data, to send a message to a further upstream port informing the further upstream port of the congestion downstream. The memory is provided substantially only at the ingress ports or the egress ports of the switch. | 04-09-2009 |
20090097401 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CONFIGURABLE DATA RATE THRESHOLDS FOR ENERGY EFFICIENT ETHERNET - Aspects of a method and system for programmable data rate thresholds for energy efficient Ethernet are provided. In this regard a data rate for communicating over a network link may be selected from a list of permissible data rates, where the list of permissible data rates may be determined based on traffic associated with the network link. Each of the permissible data rates may be determined based on, for example, past and/or expected traffic on the link, a type of traffic associated with the link, and/or one or more applications associated with the link. The selected data rate may be achieved by controlling a number of physical channels of the link that are utilized for communications over the link, voltage and/or current levels utilized for signaling on the link, a signal constellation utilized for representing data on the link, and/or an inter-frame gap or inter-packet gap utilized on the link. | 04-16-2009 |
20090103433 | TELECOMMUNICATION AND MULTIMEDIA MANAGEMENT METHOD AND APPARATUS - A method for reliably transferring media over a network from a sending node to a receiving node. The method includes ascertaining at the sending node if the media to be transmitted is either time-sensitive or not time-sensitive. For media ascertained as non time-sensitive, the media is transmitted by adjusting the rate of transmission at the sending node based on network conditions. As the non time-sensitive media is received, the receiving node generates one or more low priority requests for the retransmission of any missing non time-sensitive media lost during the transmission. The method also includes transmitting the time-sensitive media from the sending node to the receiving node. As the time-sensitive media is received, the receiving node ascertains if a predetermined acceptable network transmission loss level is met. If met, the receiving node generates one or more low priority requests for the retransmission of any missing time-sensitive media lost during transmission. The sending node retransmits the missing time-sensitive and non time-sensitive media in response to the low priority requests when bandwidth on the network becomes available in excess of what is needed for the transmission of time-sensitive media. | 04-23-2009 |
20090109844 | Terminal Of Portable Internet System And Method Of Transmitting Uplink Data In Terminal - A terminal of a portable Internet system comprising a medium access control (MAC) layer and a physical layer, the MAC layer comprising: a classifier classifying packets into classes; a delayer calling queue operating functions when a predetermined period of time is passed after the packets are classified by the classifier; a wait queue storing packets by the queue operating functions; and a packet processor processing the packet in the wait queue and transmitting the processed packet to the physical layer. | 04-30-2009 |
20090109845 | Packet Flow Optimization (PFO) Policy Management in a Communications Network by Rule Name - In one embodiment, a method includes receiving packet flow optimization (PFO) configuration data that associates each rule name of multiple PFO rule names with a corresponding method for processing a data packet in a communications network based on data in a payload of a layer 3 protocol of the data packet. A first policy message is received from a policy management process in the communications network. The first policy message includes rule data that indicates a signaled rule name associated with a particular network address in the communications network. In response to receiving the first policy message, a data packet of the particular network address is processed according to a particular method associated with a particular rule name selected based on the signaled rule name. As a result, a PFO policy is controlled from the policy management process. | 04-30-2009 |
20090116382 | RESOURCE AND ADMISSION CONTROL SUBSYSTEM AND METHOD THEREOF IN NGN - A Resource and Admission Control Subsystem (RACS) in an NGN includes: a Resource Control Function in access network (A-RCF), an Access Admission Control Function (A-ACF), a Resource Control Function in core network (C-RCF), an Interconnection Admission Control Function (I-ACF), and corresponding interfaces. As a logically independent subsystem, RACS can support transport QoS requirements of multiple service subsystems (including IP multimedia service subsystem and PSTN/ISDN service emulation subsystem) simultaneously, implement QoS control for interconnecting links between different administrative domains, balance network load, prevent congestion (especially at bottle necks of network resources), support necessary measurement and protection mechanisms on the transport layer, and solve the problem of competition for transport resources among NGN traffics in the network administrative domains. | 05-07-2009 |
20090116383 | Providing Single Point-of-Presence Across Multiple Processors - A method for providing single point-of-presence for a network element includes receiving a packet at a network processor, determining if the packet is to be directed to a particular one of a plurality of traffic processors if a source address of the packet is associated with a subscriber terminal, and determining if the packet is to be directed to the particular one of the plurality of traffic processors if a destination address of the packet is associated with the subscriber terminal. The method further includes distributing the packet to the particular one of the plurality of traffic processors. | 05-07-2009 |
20090116384 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONNECTION ADMISSION CONTROL IN BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for Connection Admission Control (CAC) in a Broadband Wireless Access (BWA) system are provided. In the method, a QoS class of a call requesting connection admission is detected and an application layer required bandwidth is determined using the QoS parameters of a service flow of the detected QoS class. A required bandwidth weight of the QoS class is determined in consideration of a packet header overhead. Per-slot available bandwidths of a reference QoS class and the QoS class are determined using the determined application layer required bandwidth, and a required bandwidth conversion ratio of a corresponding QoS class is determined using the determined per-slot available bandwidths. An equivalent MAC layer required bandwidth is determined using the determined application layer required bandwidth, the required bandwidth weight, and the required bandwidth conversion ratio. | 05-07-2009 |
20090116385 | BASE STATION CONTROL APPARATUS AND DOMAIN ACCESS REGULATING METHOD - Upon deciding to start domain access regulation, regulation controller ( | 05-07-2009 |
20090122699 | PRIORITIZING NETWORK TRAFFIC - Methods and systems for operation upon one or more data processors for prioritizing transmission among a plurality of data streams based upon a classification associated with the data packets associated with each of the plurality of data streams, respectively. Systems and methods can operate to allocate bandwidth to priority data streams first and recursively allocate remaining bandwidth to lesser priority data streams based upon the priority associated with those respective lesser priority data streams. | 05-14-2009 |
20090122700 | Spectrum and medium access allocation for fairness - Each node or link of an ad hoc network assists in the distributed allocation of a data channel to increase fairness, even in a multi-hop network, by tracking a measure of link weight for itself and sharing this information over a control channel with neighboring nodes. The metric can be provided over a dedicated control channel, added as a header to data communication on a data channel, or inferred by monitoring data traffic from the neighboring node. The link weight can be adjusted by a link quality factor based on provided or inferred metrics such as transmission rates, ratio of transmission errors, idle time, etc. For multiple flow queues at a subject node, one with a higher transmission rate can be selected for increased fairness. When a packet is received, medium access includes allocating bandwidth, including bonding multiple frequencies that are determined to be available to both nodes. | 05-14-2009 |
20090129263 | SYSTEM, METHOD, AND COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIUM FOR MULTI-STAGE TRANSMIT PROTECTION IN A FEMTOCELL SYSTEM - A system, method, and computer readable medium for transmit protection in a femtocell system are provided. A multi-stage transmit protection routine prohibits radio transmissions for unregistered femtocell systems and transmissions from femtocell systems in unauthorized areas. A femtocell system may request transmission authorization from a base station manager. The base station manager may provide an authorization failure if the femtocell system is not registered or if the source address of the femtocell system is not within a predefined distance of a registered location of the femtocell system. If the femtocell is provided a transmission authorization, the femtocell system may obtain a GPS location from a user equipment and provide the GPS location to the base station manager which evaluates the location. The base station manager may provide an authorization failure if the GPS location is not within a predefined distance of the registered location of the femtocell system. | 05-21-2009 |
20090129264 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PRIORITIZING AND PROVIDING CREDITS FOR DATA PACKET COMMUNICATION OVER A PACKET NETWORK - A system and method for prioritizing data packets being communicated over a packet network may include receiving a data packet at a network node. The data packet may include an origination network address, a destination network address, and a data field. A determination may be made as to whether at least one of the origination and destination network addresses is a priority network address. The data field of the data packet may be set to a priority value if at least one of the origination and destination network addresses is determined to be a priority network address. The data field of the data packet may be set to a non-priority value if both the origination and destination network addresses are determined not to be a priority network address. | 05-21-2009 |
20090129265 | METHODS AND MEDIA ACCESS CONTROLLER FOR BROADBAND WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS WITH VARIABLE DATA UNIT SIZE AND DELAYED DATA UNIT CONSTRUCTION - A media access controller (MAC) of a broadband wireless communication device may vary the size of data unit payloads based on a physical layer burst size. In automatic retransmission request (ARQ) enabled service flows, the MAC may delay construction of data units from the data unit payloads until after entering an ARQ retransmission request window. In some embodiments, the MAC comprises per-flow schedulers to schedule service data units (SDUs) for each of a plurality of service flows, and per-service flow retransmission request handlers to reconstruct and retransmit data units. | 05-21-2009 |
20090135719 | Method, Program, and System for Transferring Data Between a Number of Terminals that Communicate Via a Common Communication Channel in a Wireless Network, and a Wireless Network - According to this method, each terminal is adapted to cover a coverage area. The method includes a step of sending a request-to-send data signal from a first terminal to a second terminal located in its coverage areas to advise the second terminal that the first terminal is requesting to send it data, and a step of sending a clear-to-send data signal to the first terminal to advise the first terminal that the second terminal is available to receive the data. The method further includes a step of a third terminal that has received the clear-to-send data signal and has not received the request-to-send signal sending a request-to-receive data signal to advise that it is available to receive data. | 05-28-2009 |
20090141624 | Method and System for A Novel Flow Admission Control Framework - This invention presents a new FAC framework that keeps the stateless property of the Internet, allows statistical multiplexing gains, and is capable of handling admission control of both TCP and UDP flows. | 06-04-2009 |
20090141625 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR REDUCING LATENCY IN CALL SETUP AND TEARDOWN - Systems and methods for reducing latency in call setup and teardown are provided. A network device with integrated functionalities and a cache is provided that stores policy information to reduce the amount of signaling that is necessary to setup and teardown sessions. By handling various aspects of the setup and teardown within a network device, latency is reduced and the amount of bandwidth needed for setup signaling is also reduced. | 06-04-2009 |
20090141626 | EMPIRICAL SCHEDULING OF NETWORK PACKETS USING A PLURALITY OF TEST PACKETS - A method of transmitting packets over a network includes steps of transmitting a first plurality of test packets during a first plurality of time locations that are coarsely spaced apart in time; determining which of the first plurality of time locations corresponds to favorable network traffic conditions; transmitting a second plurality of test packets over the network during a second plurality of time locations that are finely spaced apart in time, wherein the second plurality of time locations are selected on the basis of favorable network traffic conditions; determining which of the second plurality of time locations corresponds to favorable network traffic conditions; and transmitting data packets over the network using one or more favorable time locations determined by the finely spaced test packets. The method can be used to “zero in” on congested network periods by detecting differences in packet latencies among test packets. | 06-04-2009 |
20090141627 | Method and Apparatus for Managing Flow Control in a Data Processing System - A method in a data processing system for managing transmission of pause frames. In response to detecting an overflow condition during a receipt of data from a network, enabling flow control in response to detecting the overflow condition. The flow control is enabled as long as the overflow condition is present. A determination is made as to whether the operating system unavailable after a period of time passes. If the operating system believed to have crashed and flow control is enabled, the flow control is disabled. | 06-04-2009 |
20090147676 | Communication system, communication terminal, relay node, communication method used therein, and program thereof - In a terminal ( | 06-11-2009 |
20090154348 | Method for configuring ACLS on network device based on flow information - Embodiments of the present invention provide a system and method for using network flows records exported from network routers to provide information about the traffic entering/exiting the device. Network routers or hubs can be configured to authorize or deny various types of network traffic between two network devices whose traffic transits via the router. The method presented describes the creation and application of access control lists on the router from information derived from the network flow information exported by the network router. | 06-18-2009 |
20090161538 | Client/server adaptation scheme for communications traffic - A communications system in which carrier Ethernet conveys a plurality of differing types of client signals encapsulated with a generic framing procedure adaptation layer. The client signals are adapted for encapsulation within the carrier Ethernet frames by mapping said client signal within an generic framing procedure adaptation layer signal and then by mapping said generic framing procedure adaptation layer signal into said carrier Ethernet signal, whereby said client signal is identified within said generic framing procedure signal. | 06-25-2009 |
20090161539 | SIGNAL TRANSMISSION METHOD AND BASE STATION IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION - A signal transmission method checks, when detecting an occurrence of a communication request, whether the communication request is a high speed communication (step S | 06-25-2009 |
20090161540 | QUALITY OF SERVICE MANAGEMENT FOR A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - A method for managing quality of service (QoS) in a wireless local area network begins by receiving a traffic flow. The traffic flow is mapped to a traffic class (TC), based on QoS requirements of the traffic flow. A transmission budget of an access class (AC) is calculated, each AC including at least one TC. A determination is made whether the traffic flow can be admitted, by calculating whether the transmission budget can support the traffic flow. If the traffic flow is admitted, the parameters of the TC are adjusted and collisions in the TC between existing traffic flows and the newly admitted traffic flow are managed. | 06-25-2009 |
20090168649 | Methods and System for Efficient Data Transfer Over Hybrid Fiber Coax Infrastructure - The invention is directed to a method for providing client-server data transfer over a Hybrid Fiber Coax network, comprising interfacing, at a client, a channel, wherein the channel is one of a video channel and a DOCSIS channel, intercepting a content request made from an end-user computing device, notifying a server of a relevant intercepted message via one of using an interactive channel and tagging the request, selecting content sent by the server over the channel, processing the content selected so as to return it to its IP traffic format, and forwarding the content in its IP traffic format to the end-user computing device. | 07-02-2009 |
20090196173 | Management of a Wireless Network - The disclosure describes a system for active channel management in a wireless network. The system may include spectrum monitoring in order to determine channel usage within a wireless network and/or to provide a projected transmission quality for each available channel. Another aspect of the system concerns allowing nodes in a wireless network to exchange spectrum usage data. The system may include renegotiation and handover of data transmission between channels and/or different wireless technologies. | 08-06-2009 |
20090201807 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MARKING LIVE TEST PACKETS - A system and method for preventing a packet of a test pattern from being communicated over a network. A congestion state of the network is determined. The packet is marked as being associated with a test pattern. The packet is determined to be associated with the test pattern in response to the marking. The communication of the packet is terminated in response to the determined congestion state. | 08-13-2009 |
20090201808 | Rate Controlling of Packets Destined for the Route Processor - Packets destined for the route processor of a packet switching device are rate controlled. Typically, line cards are configured to rate limit packets of offending packet flows destined for the route processor, such, but not limited to in response to a quantity of packets in the route processor. Filtering of packets of offending packet flows at the line cards reduces the work required of the route processor. | 08-13-2009 |
20090207729 | Policer device and bandwidth control - A frame input/output unit allows a frame to pass according to directions output by a flag judging unit while consuming resources. A resource managing unit manages amounts of resources supplied and consumed. A management information storage unit stores passing information indicating policers that have passed frames during each period and management information including flag information on skip flags and the like. A flag updating unit catalogs a resource surplus flag and a supply filled flag at the end of a previous period and a skip flag that indicates whether a self-policer skips consuming resources in the following period based on the passing information in the previous period and the current period. The flag judging unit refers to a latest skip flag and judges the presence or absence of frame passing in the following period. | 08-20-2009 |
20090213731 | USE OF NEUROPEPTIDE Y (NPY) AND AGONISTS AND ANTAGONISTS THEREOF FOR TISSUE REGENERATION - A media access controller (MAC) for wireless mesh networks comprises a quality-of-service (QoS) manager to monitor consumed bandwidth of a current application flow and to compare the consumed bandwidth with a contracted bandwidth for the current application flow. The MAC also comprises a contention manager to coordinate access to a wireless communication channel for communications with other nodes of the wireless mesh network. The QoS manager instructs the contention manager to employ signaling to request additional resources for the current application flow after the consumed bandwidth is significantly less than the contracted bandwidth. | 08-27-2009 |
20090213732 | Preserving packet order when migrating network flows between cores - In one embodiment, the present invention includes a method for receiving a first packet associated with a first network flow in a first descriptor queue associated with a first hardware thread, receiving a marker in the first descriptor queue to indicate migration of the first network flow from the first hardware thread to a second hardware thread, and processing a second packet of the first network flow following the first packet in order in the second hardware thread. | 08-27-2009 |
20090231998 | SELECTIVE FILTERING OF NETWORK TRAFFIC REQUESTS - Several approaches to selectively filtering network traffic are described. One approach involves a system for selectively filtering network traffic. The system includes a helper application, which is coupled to a networking program, and is used to identify a user-initiated request. A network filter driver is coupled to the networking program, for intercepting the user-initiated request. A filtering service is coupled to both the helper application and the network filter driver, and is used to determine if the user-initiated request is allowable. If the request is allowable, the filtering service is configured to generate a special identifier, which the helper application is configured to include in a subsequent request. The filtering service is configured to allow a subsequent request which includes the special identifier, and the network filter driver's configured to strip a special identifier from subsequent requests. | 09-17-2009 |
20090245104 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING BUFFERING OF AN ARRIVAL PACKET - An apparatus for controlling buffering of an arrival packet. The apparatus includes a packet buffer for temporarily storing each of one or more packets to be transmitted in association with an arrival time thereof, and a packet discard section for determining an arrival packet to be discarded or to be stored in the packet buffer, based on a discard condition defined by using a packet residence time that is calculated on the basis of one or more residence times of one or more packets staying in the packet buffer, wherein the arrival packet is defined as a packet that has newly arrived at the apparatus. | 10-01-2009 |
20090252034 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCTS FOR PROVIDING QUALITY OF SERVICE BROKERING IN A NETWORK - Exemplary embodiments relate to methods, systems, and computer program products for providing quality of service brokering in a network. Methods include receiving a data packet at a router in an Internet protocol (IP) network. The data packet includes a data packet QoS class and a data packet destination. A storage mechanism that includes possible routes to the data packet destination at the data packet QoS class is accessed. One of the possible routes is selected. The data packet is transmitted along the selected route to the data packet destination. | 10-08-2009 |
20090268611 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR BANDWIDTH CONTROL ON A NETWORK INTERFACE CARD - A method for bandwidth control on a network interface card (NIC), the method that includes initiating a current time period, receiving a plurality of incoming packets for a receive ring, populating, by a NIC, the receive ring with the plurality of incoming packets according to a size of the receive ring during the current time period, wherein the size of the receive ring is based on an allocated bandwidth for the receive ring, and sending, by the NIC, the plurality of incoming packets to a host when a duration of the current time period elapses, wherein the duration is based on the allocated bandwidth for the receive ring. | 10-29-2009 |
20090268612 | Method and apparatus for a network queuing engine and congestion management gateway - A method, apparatus, and queuing engine implement congestion management. The method may include receiving, via a first interface of the apparatus, data traffic for forwarding to a node of a network. The method may also include receiving, at a second interface of the apparatus, a notification that indicates that congestion is affecting communication with the node, and responsive to the notification, accumulating the data traffic into the queue for a given time period. The method may further include dequeuing the data traffic from the queue after the given time period; and sending the portion of the data traffic to the node via the second interface. | 10-29-2009 |
20090279427 | Control of Quality of Service in Overlapping Basic Service Sets in Wireless Local Area Networks - Access priority for wireless devices located in an area in which radiofrequency (RF) coverage areas of a first wireless access point and a second wireless access point overlap is controlled by coordinating operation of the first wireless access point and the second wireless access point. The wireless devices access a common RF channel via a collision sense multiple access/collision avoidance mechanism. The probability of accessing the RF channel may be varied by adjusting the length of interframe spacings and the length of contention windows. The length of the interframe spacings and the length of the contention windows associated with the first access point and associated with the second access point are configured such that the probability of wireless devices associated with the first wireless access point accessing the RF channel is greater than the probability of wireless devices associated with the second wireless access point accessing the RF channel. | 11-12-2009 |
20090279428 | Frame transmitting apparatus and method thereof - A frame transmitting apparatus transmits a frame to a frame receiving apparatus. The frame transmitting apparatus includes a accumulated-capacity-value storage unit that has stored therein an accumulated capacity value calculated; a cycle and capacity storage unit that has stored therein a cycle and a frame read capacity at every cycle; an adding unit that adds the value indicative of the capacity of the frame to the accumulated capacity value; a subtracting unit that subtracts the value indicative of the frame read capacity from the accumulated capacity value; and a transmission controlling unit that controls frame transmission by using the accumulated capacity value. | 11-12-2009 |
20090279429 | OPTIMISATION PROCESS OF THE CONTROL OF TRAFFIC IN A PACKET TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - The invention relates to a process for optimizing the control of the traffic in a packet telecommunications network comprising at least one transmitter terminal ( | 11-12-2009 |
20090285091 | Open Network Connections - One or more logical network connection points are provided within an electronic communications network. The logical network connections are provided via an interface between one or more connectivity plane devices and a network connected application, service, or control plane function in the electronic communication network. The network connected application, service, or control plane function registers itself as a logical network resident (NR) with a function in the connectivity plane that provides a logical network connection between the network resident and another logical network connection point. | 11-19-2009 |
20090285092 | Video stream admission - A video stream admission method including receiving one or more parameters of a video stream, indicative of a required bandwidth for the video stream, in a plurality of different quality levels and determining based on the received one or more parameters, whether a channel can meet a predetermined condition for each of the plurality of quality levels, according to an available bandwidth of the channel. | 11-19-2009 |
20090290489 | METHOD OF BALANCING WIRELESS LOAD AND ACCESS CONTROLLER - The present invention discloses a method of balancing wireless load and an Access Controller (AC). The method includes: receiving by an Access Controller (AC) an association request of joining an Access Port (AP) sent by a Station (STA); calculating wireless load of the AP that the STA requests to join; determining whether one or more preset conditions are met, if the one or more present conditions are met, accepting the association request sent by the STA; otherwise, rejecting the association request sent by the STA. In the present invention, when an AP's wireless load is too large, STAs can be distributed to other APs, thereby optimizing load balance in the Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN). | 11-26-2009 |
20090290490 | Sharing A Radio Frequency Interface Resource - Applications may seek access to a radio frequency interface resource on a processor-based system that exceeds the available capacity of that resource. When more than one application needs access to an RF interface resource at the same time and the available capacity of the RF interface resource does not permit all these requests to be granted, contention resolution may be provided. In one embodiment, the contention resolution may involve determining the priority of each application seeking RF interface resource access and granting access based on that priority. | 11-26-2009 |
20090296573 | Methods and Apparatus for Overload Control of Prioritized Message Flows in a State Machine Execution Environment - Methods and apparatus are provided for overload control of prioritized message flows in a state machine execution environment. A state machine employs a flow graph associated with a system. The flow graph provides a flow control mechanism that defines a plurality of states and one or more transitions between the states. Tokens circulate within the flow graph and execute functions during the transitions between the states. The state machine parses one of the tokens to extract one or more predefined information elements; assigns a priority to the token based on the extracted information elements and a state occupancy of the token, wherein the assigned priority controls an order in which the token is processed; assesses an overload status of the system and selectively discards one or more of the tokens based on the assigned priority and assessed overload status. One or more tokens can be selectively discarded based on the assessed overload status and a closeness measure indicating how close a given token is to placing the system in a quiescent state. | 12-03-2009 |
20090296574 | TRAFFIC LOAD DEPENDENT POWER ALLOCATION IN MULTI USER WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK WITH PROPORTIONAL FAIR SCHEDULING IN TIME AND FREQUENCY DOMAIN - A method of allocating resources in a wireless multi-user network is disclosed, comprising the following steps: —performing a proportional fair scheduling in time and frequency domain based on the bitrate for each user and the channel quality measurements for each chunk per user; and—performing a power allocation in the following way: o if the traffic load is above a threshold: allocating the uniform power to all subcarriers o if the traffic load is below the threshold, adapting a channel-dependent power allocation scheme. | 12-03-2009 |
20090296575 | MAIN APPARATUS AND CONTROL SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION REGULATION METHOD - According to one embodiment, a main apparatus includes a transmitter which transmits a control signal necessary for notifying the communication connection to a first telephone terminal belonging to the group and a second telephone terminal belonging to the group, when the first telephone terminal establishes communication connection by using the line, a monitoring module configured to monitor congestion of at least an own apparatus, and a controller which controls execution and stoppage of transmission processing of the control signal to the second telephone terminal carried out by the transmitter based on a result of congestion monitoring carried out by the monitoring module. | 12-03-2009 |
20090296576 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MEASUREMENT-BASED ADAPTIVE CACHING OF VIRTUAL CONNECTIONS - Reducing connection overhead in a communications network includes reusing at least one cached communication channel connecting a source and a destination. The at least one cached communication channel is cached for a variable duration. | 12-03-2009 |
20090303875 | CONGESTION CONTROL SYSTEM, CALL SESSION CONTROL DEVICE, BORDER GATEWAY DEVICE, AND CONGESTION CONTROL METHOD USED THEREFOR - A congestion control system according to an exemplary aspect of the present invention includes an SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) terminal of a subscriber; a call session control device that accommodates the subscriber using SIP, and includes a notification unit that inserts server information of the call session control device including at least an acceptable number of calls in an SIP response message; and a border gateway device that includes a control device of VoIP (Voice over Internet Protocol) services, and a congestion control unit that performs congestion control for the call session control device based on the server information of the SIP response message notified by the call session control. | 12-10-2009 |
20090310484 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR SESSION INITIATION PROTOCOL (SIP) OVERLOAD CONTROL - Methods, systems, and computer readable media for providing SIP overload control are disclosed. According to one method, a SIP server determines loading status of a resource of the SIP sever. The SIP server computes a rejection probability based on the loading status of the resource of the SIP server. The SIP server rejects received SIP messages based on the message types and the rejection probability. | 12-17-2009 |
20090316577 | PACKET FILTERING BASED ON DYNAMIC USAGE INFORMATION - A receiver of network data dynamically filters packets by packet type from a network device CPU based on usage information, such as time, day, location, and feature (e.g., “video” or “application”) selection. | 12-24-2009 |
20090316578 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING A WEIGHTED BANDWIDTH ALLOCATION FOR A NETWORK - A method and apparatus for providing bandwidth allocation for a network are disclosed. For example, the method receives data from a plurality of subscribers for transmission, and allocates a minimum reserved bandwidth to each of the plurality of subscribers. The method then allocates a portion of a shareable bandwidth to at least one of the plurality of subscribers in accordance with a weight factor. | 12-24-2009 |
20090323524 | INVOKING DIFFERENT WIRELESS LINK RATE SELECTION OPERATIONS FOR DIFFERENT TRAFFIC CLASSES - Functionality can be implemented within a device or chip to select different sets of wireless link rate determination operations that account for different degrees of presentation time sensitivity that correspond to different classes of traffic. The device or chip can infer or explicitly determine presentation time sensitivity based, at least in part, on traffic class. The selected wireless link rate operations select link rates for the different classes of traffic. A first set of the wireless link rate determination operations can choose a smoother and more stable wireless link rate for the wireless traffic class that conveys presentation time sensitive content. A second of the wireless link rate determination operations can choose a fastest possible wireless link rate, which may be more susceptible to jitter and delay, for a traffic class that is less sensitive. | 12-31-2009 |
20090323525 | Priority aware policer and method of priority aware policing - For each packet for a subscriber, a policer or method: compares the number of bytes available to the subscriber to the size of the packet; if the size is less than or equal to the number of bytes, passes the packet; if the size is larger than the number of bytes available and a priority of the packet is a first priority, processes the packet as non-conforming; if the size is larger than the number of bytes available and the priority is a second priority, and if allowing the packet to be passed will result in a deficit not exceeding a predetermined deficit value, passes the packet; and if the size is larger than the number of bytes available and the priority is the second priority, and if allowing the packet to be passed will result in a deficit exceeding the predetermined deficit value, processes the packet as non-conforming. | 12-31-2009 |
20100002580 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING AUTO-BANDWIDTH ADJUSTMENT - An approach is provided for auto-bandwidth adjustment of allocated bandwidth for a traffic tunnel over a network. A determination is made regarding a traffic load over the tunnel, where the tunnel meters traffic in accordance with the bandwidth allocation. A determination is made regarding whether the traffic load triggers an adjustment threshold, where the adjustment threshold is set to provide a desired headroom below the bandwidth allocation. And the bandwidth allocation is adjusted when the adjustment threshold is triggered to provide the desired headroom between the adjusted bandwidth allocation and the traffic load. | 01-07-2010 |
20100002581 | Method for Inter-Router Dual-Function Energy- and Area-Efficient Links for Network-on-Chips - The present invention provides methods for connecting routers and transmitting data along inter-router links within Nework-on-Chip (NoC) architectures. | 01-07-2010 |
20100014422 | Priority-Based Admission Control in a Network with Variable Channel Data Rates - A method for priority-based admission control in a network, comprises receiving an admission request for transmitting an information flow to a network through a communication channel and determining an admissible region within a range of a channel data rate of a communication channel for an information flow in response to a priority of the information flow, where the priority of the information flow is one of a plurality of priorities of information flow. The admissible region is one of a plurality of admissible regions within the channel data rate range that correspond to different ones of the plurality of priorities of information flow, respectively, and each of the plurality of admissible regions within the channel data rate range is useable for transmitting information flow with a respective one of the plurality of priorities. Further included in the method is determining an available channel data rate of the communication channel for receiving the information flow by the network, and granting the admission request for the information flow after determining that the available channel data rate of the communication channel is within the admissible region of the channel data rate range. | 01-21-2010 |
20100020683 | System and Method for Combining Requests for Data Bandwith by a Data Source for Transmission of Data Over a Communication Medium - A method and system for combining requests for data bandwidth by a data source for transmission of data over a communication medium is provided. A central node receives one or more bandwidths requests from one or more data sources via wireless communication. A scheduler then combines one or more bandwidths requests from the same data source to create a single data burst bandwidth. The central node then grants the data burst bandwidth to the appropriate data source via a communications medium. | 01-28-2010 |
20100020684 | Multi-Band OFDM Communications System - System and method for providing multiple access in a multi-band, orthogonal frequency division multiplexed (multi-band-OFDM) communications system. A preferred embodiment comprises determining a transmission bandwidth to support a performance requirement and configuring transmission bands in the multi-band-OFDM communications system based upon the transmission bandwidth, wherein the transmission bands may be made up of smaller transmission bands bonded together. Further comprising initializing communications with the configured transmission bands. The use of bonded transmission bands can provide increased data rates and/or increased range performance. | 01-28-2010 |
20100020685 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR DYNAMIC BANDWIDTH MANAGEMENT ON A PER SUBSCRIBER BASIS IN A COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A subscriber bandwidth management process and device that allows users/subscribers in a communications network to dynamically alter bandwidth limits independently in both the uplink and downlink data transmission paths. This is accomplished by providing for a single queue in the uplink transmission path and a single queue in the downlink transmission path. Thus, the user/subscriber can efficiently manage their network access according to the specific activity on the network. The network manager benefits from being able structure bandwidth allocation on a per subscriber basis so that overall data transmission is made more efficient. In addition, the bandwidth manager provides active management of the delivery of data (also known as and referred to herein as traffic shaping) to increase throughput from a gateway device onto the network. | 01-28-2010 |
20100034082 | SESSION QOS CONTROL APPARATUS - A session QoS control arrangement wherein for an occurrence of user session information indicating a change of user state and/or a change of session condition from a user communication terminal: said session information analysis means analyses the session state of the user terminal in real-time by referring to said session management database and said user preference database; and, said session QoS control means determines the QoS policy for the user session in real-time, based on the result of session analysis performed by said session information analysis means. | 02-11-2010 |
20100039936 | SYSTEMS AND METHOD FOR QUALITY OF SERVICE CONTROL OVER MULTIPLE ACCESSES - Systems and methods for quality of service control over multiple accesses, more particularly quality of service control over multiple accesses via enhanced quality of service rules. A policy rules and charging function, or similar network entity, can include an indicator in a set of quality of service rules that instructs an access gateway to either setup the quality of service resources/initiate bearer setup immediately, or store the quality of service rules until a request for the quality of service resources s received from the UE or another predetermined event occurs. | 02-18-2010 |
20100046367 | POWER AND RESOURCE EFFICIENT APPDU BASED APPROACH WITH SCHEDULED DATA TRANSMISSION TIMES FOR WLAN - Disclosed are methods and apparatuses for communications by which a physical layer packet is generated for transmission to a node, or by which a physical layer packet is received from a node, the physical layer packet having a plurality of MAC packets, wherein the physical layer packet includes a transmission schedule associated with the plurality of MAC packets in the physical layer packet. | 02-25-2010 |
20100054123 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR HIGN UTILIZATION AND EFFICIENT FLOW CONTROL OVER NETWORKS WITH LONG TRANSMISSION LATENCY - The present invention is to provide a method and device which can determine current available bandwidth for each Transport Control Protocol (TCP) connection and adjust window size dynamically according to the available bandwidth to achieve high network utilization and efficient flow control in the same time without the need to buffer any received TCP packets, which can work with and without support of large window option. The device classifies incoming traffic into several groups (public and private), monitors and allocates the available bandwidth for each group. To enable flow control, the device also records the initial window size value for each connection and compares it with the original window size value for a newly received TCP packet. If the original window size value received from TCP receivers changes, the device varies the modified window size accordingly to enable efficient flow control in the same device as well. | 03-04-2010 |
20100054124 | MESSAGE TRANSFER APPARATUS, OUTPUT METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT - A packet processor transfers a message received by a first (second) port to a second (first) port. When first specific information is included in the received message, a QoS terminal detector detects a communication terminal, which is a sender of the message received by the first port or a destination of the message received by the second port, as a QoS terminal requesting application of QoS. When the QoS terminal does not satisfy a preset connection condition associated with the QoS terminal connectable to the first port via a first network, an output unit outputs information indicating that the connection condition is not satisfied. | 03-04-2010 |
20100054125 | METHODS AND DEVICES FOR REGULATING TRAFFIC ON A NETWORK - Methods and devices are provided for regulating traffic on a network. According to some aspects of the invention, if a subscriber's upstream traffic exceeds a predetermined level over a first period of time, the subscriber's quality of service is adjusted without requiring the subscriber to re-register. According to some embodiments, a first token bucket is used to determine whether the subscriber's upstream traffic exceeds the predetermined level over the first period of time. In some such embodiments, the first token bucket is used to control the burst size of another token bucket, depending on the subscriber's upstream traffic during the first period of time. | 03-04-2010 |
20100061232 | LOAD BALANCING MECHANISM FOR DYNAMIC SERVING FUNCTIONAL ELEMENTS SELECTION - A method of using a base station comprising establishing a connection with a plurality of authenticators. In one embodiment, the method further including receiving, from each authenticator, load balancing parameters indicating the state of the respective authenticator. In various embodiments, the method may also include receiving, from a mobile station, a request to join a network including the base station. In some embodiments, the method may include selecting an authenticator, to authenticate the mobile station, based upon the load balancing parameters. In one embodiment, the method may include requesting mobile station authentication from the selected authenticator. | 03-11-2010 |
20100061233 | FLOW CONTROL IN A DISTRIBUTED ENVIRONMENT - A computer implemented method, apparatus, and computer program product for managing requests. Responsive to receiving a request from a client, a determination is made as to whether a connection within a pool of connections has a set of outstanding requests for the client to handle a previous request from the same client. Responsive to a determination that the connection has any outstanding request, a determination is made as to whether a set of requests queued for the connection is equal to or exceeds a threshold. Responsive to a determination that the set of outstanding requests is equal to or exceeds the threshold, subsequent requests from the client are unprocessed until the set of outstanding requests becomes less than the threshold. | 03-11-2010 |
20100067374 | Reducing Flooding in a Bridged Network - Disclosed are, inter alia, methods, apparatus, computer-storage media, mechanisms, and means associated with loss of reducing flooding in a bridged network, typically including a device directly connected to multiple upstream bridges. These bridges are configured such that the device receives broadcast/multicast traffic from a single interface of one of the bridges, while allowing unicast traffic over each of the communications links connecting the device to the bridges. In one configuration, the device implements virtual machine(s), each including a virtual network interface associated with a MAC address; and the directly connected bridges are configured, for each particular MAC address of these MAC addresses of the virtual interfaces, such that one and only one of the bridges will forward packets having the particular MAC address as its destination address over a communications link directly connected to the device. | 03-18-2010 |
20100067375 | LOAD SHARING IN MOBILE RADIO COMMUNCATIONS NETWORK - The present invention relates to a method of providing load sharing through network controlled cell reselection in a mobile radio communications network, including delivering an offset parameter to User Equipment within the network for biasing the said reselection, the method further including the step of broadcasting the offset parameter to the User Equipment within system information and so as to be cell-specific, further delivering load-sharing-priority-keys and subsequently processing the offset parameter with the load-sharing-priority-keys so as to become User Equipment specific. | 03-18-2010 |
20100067376 | Distributed Controlled Passive Optical Network System And Bandwidth Control Method Thereof - Disclosed is a distributed controlled passive optical network system and bandwidth control method thereof. The system comprises an optical line terminal (OLT), plural optical network units (ONUs) and a splitter with combiner. Each ONU has a first Tx/Rx for respectively transmitting and receiving data packets on an upstream data channel and a downstream data channel, and a second Tx/Rx for transmitting and receiving control signals/commands on a control channel. Upstream data of each ONU is carried by the upstream data channel and sent to the OLT through the splitter with combiner. Downstream data of the OLT is carried by the downstream data channel and sent to corresponding ONUs through the splitter with combiner. With the control signals/commands carried by the control channel, the required information of network status among the ONUs is provided | 03-18-2010 |
20100067377 | Live Botmaster Traceback - Embodiments locate a botmaster on a network. A honeynet host is configured to join a botnet and generate a watermarked packet flow by applying a watermark to an outgoing packet flow in response to commands from the botmaster. The watermark is applied to the outgoing packet flow by: choosing distinct packets from the outgoing packet flow; forming packet pair(s) from the distinct packets, that include a reference packet and an encoding packet; and encoding bits in the watermark to the packet pair(s) by increasing the length of the encoding packet when watermark bits have a predetermined value. The cooperating node(s) are configured to: inspect passing packet flows for the watermarked packet flow and generate tracking information related to detection of the watermarked packet flow. The path determination processor is configured to analyze the tracking information to locate a path taken by the watermarked packet flow. | 03-18-2010 |
20100074108 | Virtual partitioned policy space - A method is provided for virtually partitioning policy space of traffic control equipment of a computer network. An operation is performed for creating a plurality of policy lists each including at least one policy. Each policy list is configured for influencing flow of a respective portion of traffic in a prescribed manner through the traffic control equipment. An operation is performed for assigning a unique identifier to each policy list and an operation is performed for assigning each portion of the traffic the unique identifier of one of the policy lists. Thereafter, an operation is performed for establishing within the policy space an association between each portion of the traffic and one of the policy lists dependent upon matching the assigned identifiers thereof whereby the flow of each portion of the traffic through the traffic control equipment is influenced by the associated policy list. | 03-25-2010 |
20100074109 | NETWORK AND MOBILE DEVICE INITIATED QUALITY OF SERVICE - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate avoidance of duplicative resource allocation and/or erroneous service charges via unambiguously indicating an entity responsible for quality of service (QoS) initiation. In one example, an indication is provided to a mobile device to indicate a preference for network-initiated QoS or a preference for device-initiated QoS. QoS for a data flow can be established in accordance with the indication. For instance, the mobile device initiates QoS when the indication specifies a preference for device-initiated QoS while a network establishes QoS when the indication specifies a preference for network-initiated QoS. | 03-25-2010 |
20100074110 | Control Method, System and Function Entity for Reporting Bearer Event of Signaling IP Flow - A control method, system and function entity for reporting a bearer event of a signaling IP flow are provided. Flow identifier information such as a 5-tuple is generated for a signaling IP flow and a media IP flow so as to unify a mechanism for reporting a signaling path status and a mechanism for reporting a bearer event of a media IP flow, so that the mechanism for reporting a signaling path status is not limited by the parameter of Flow Usage, the PDP context with a signaling tag, thereby establishing corresponding PCC rules for signaling and the association between a signaling IP flow and a bearer. A method for reporting a signaling path status is further provided in the invention. In the method, for a default PDP context or a PDP context of a signaling IP flow, the predefined PCC rules are activated or signaling PCC rules generated in accordance with an Application Function address are installed, thereby an IP signaling path status is reported in accordance with rule names of the predefine PCC rules or the signaling PCC rules. | 03-25-2010 |
20100080121 | Communication Method And Radio Network Control Device In A Mobile Communication System - A mobile communication system in which a mobile station copies data and transmits that copied data to a plurality of base stations, each base station sends that copied data to a serving radio network control device (S-RNC) directly or via a drift radio network control device (D-RNC), and the S-RNC selectively combines and outputs the received copied data; wherein a congestion monitoring unit monitors the congestion state of a line between the D-RNC and S-RNC, and when that line is congested, a D-RNC selectively combines the copied data that is inputted from the plurality of base stations and sends the result to that line, and when the line is not congested, the D-RNC sends the copied data that is inputted from the plurality of base stations to the line without performing selective combination. | 04-01-2010 |
20100085873 | LANE SYNCHRONISATION - A method of monitoring a plurality of transmission lanes in a data transmission system includes the step of extracting individual lane parameters in the data transmission system independently of a transmitted training sequence. | 04-08-2010 |
20100085874 | BANDWIDTH ALLOCATION METHOD AND APPARATUS - System for bandwidth assignment to manage congestion over a network bottleneck, comprises a regulation point being set up downstream of the bottleneck in the network to manage congestion in data packets arriving from various sources via the bottleneck. For each of the sources, a priority level assigner assigns priority levels to respective data packets. A token bucket assigns tokens at a limiting rate to the prioritized data packets, the tokens allowing passage of packets to which they are assigned. The token bucket is a multi-priority token bucket, meaning it has at least two thresholds corresponding to the priority levels assigned to the packets. The token bucket only assigns a token to an arriving packet having a respective priority level if there are sufficient tokens currently in the bucket to reach the threshold corresponding to the packet's priority level. | 04-08-2010 |
20100091651 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR BROADCASTING QOS INFORMATION TO ASSIST ADMISSION CONTROL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A base station may broadcast quality of service (QoS) and loading information to mobile stations. When a mobile station determines that there is demand for a new traffic connection, the mobile station may select a base station from which to request the desired traffic connection based on the QoS information and the loading information received from one or more base stations. | 04-15-2010 |
20100097929 | COMMUNICATION TERMINAL APPARATUS, DISTRIBUTION APPARATUS, ERROR NOTIFICATION METHOD, AND ERROR NOTIFICATION PROGRAM - A communication terminal apparatus ( | 04-22-2010 |
20100103816 | TRANSMISSION APPARATUS, TRANSMISSION SYSTEM AND TRANSMISSION METHOD - A transmission apparatus that receives data from a first external apparatus via a first network, and transmits the received data to a second external apparatus via a second network, the transmission apparatus includes a receiving unit that receives data from the first external apparatus, a storage unit that stores the data received by the receiving unit, a transmission unit that reads out the data stored in the storage unit and transmits the data to the second external apparatus at a predetermined transmission speed, a transmission-pause-time calculation unit that calculates the time that is needed to reduce an amount of data stored in the storage unit from a first threshold value to a second threshold value as a transmission-pause-time, and a pause-request-frame transmission unit that adds the transmission-pause-time to the pause request frame and transmits the pause request frame to the first external apparatus. | 04-29-2010 |
20100103817 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND BASE STATION - Admission control wireless resources including abase station which obtains a down wireless resource available rate based on a down QoS requested bandwidth B | 04-29-2010 |
20100110887 | ADMISSION CONTROL FOR A HETEROGENEOUS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A heterogeneous communication system comprises a plurality of heterogeneous access networks and a core network connecting the heterogeneous access networks. An admission server of the core network receives resource indications indicative of an estimated resource usage for a given communication service and a given access point of an access network. The admission server furthermore determines and stores current resource availability indications for access points. When a communication session request comprising a communication service indication and an access point identification is received, the admission server determines an estimated resource requirement for the communication sessions based on the resource indications. The admission server then determines whether to allow the communication session dependent on the resource availability for the access point and the estimated resource requirement for the communication service. | 05-06-2010 |
20100110888 | METHOD OF PREVENTING DATA COLLOSIONS IN BEACON-ENABLED ZIGBEE SYSTEM HAVING TREE ROUTING SCHEME - Provided is a method of preventing a data collision that occurs when two or more child nodes simultaneously transmit data to a parent node in a ZigBee network having a tree routing scheme and operating in a beacon mode. In the ZigBee system having the tree routing scheme and operating in the beacon mode, data communication to the parent node is performed in a beacon frame of the parent node. Here, when several child nodes exist under a single parent node, the child nodes transmit data to the parent node at the moment of receiving the beacon of the parent node, so that the data collision may occur when the child nodes simultaneously transmit the data to the parent node in the beacon frame of the parent node. In the method of preventing a data collision, each of the two or more child nodes is set to wait for its guard time (delay time) when transmitting data to the parent node to induce a normal slotted carrier sense multiple access with collision avoidance (CSMA-CA) operation. Therefore, the data collision can be prevented. | 05-06-2010 |
20100110889 | Policing device - A policing device having a table storing monitored bandwidth, packet history information for each importance level, and the allocation weight of the monitored bandwidth for each importance level, a policing table control circuit for reading out these items of information into each storage of a policing unit when a packet is inputted, and a calculation unit for judging the bandwidth of the input packet as being conformant or non-conformant to the contract on the basis of these items of information, thereby to control the bandwidth at each importance level. | 05-06-2010 |
20100118697 | MULTI-RATE STATISTICAL MULTIPLEXING - A multi-rate statistical multiplexing system is configured to determine whether a subscriber-line is in a congested-state. The subscriber-line provides one or more channels requested by a subscriber. The system selects a version among different versions of each requested channel based on the level of congestion and an indicator of perceived quality of viewing experience of each requested channel. The system switches to the selected version of each channel and the perceived quality of viewing experience is maintained after switching. | 05-13-2010 |
20100118698 | RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD, RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICE, AND CONGESTION CONTROL METHOD - Disclosed is a technique to prevent a collision in a state that radio communication devices are congested. According to the technique, in the state that the radio communication devices are congested, one of the radio communication devices becomes a representative node and transmits a representative node advertisement message. When the representative node has received a data packet after transmission of the representative node advertisement message, it transmits a response confirmation message. When a radio communication device, which was not decided as the representative node, has become a normal node and received the representative node advertisement message, it transmits a data packet. Then, when receiving a confirmation message after transmission of the data packet, the radio communication device stops data packet transmission during the next active period. | 05-13-2010 |
20100128604 | VIDEO STREAMING - The bitrate for any practical video streaming system will vary considerably as a function of the difficulty of encoding the sequence in question. This variation is even more apparent when comparing different video clips of different genres for example where sports clips might require a higher average bitrate and fluctuate more due to the high activity of typical scenes, whereas a news report clip might require a much lower bitrate and be relatively static. As such, to deliver video streams at a constant quality to users sharing a contended network, a constant bandwidth method is not efficient to use across all the streams. The bandwidth allocated to each stream must be allowed to dynamically vary in time in accordance with the precise demands of the video being streamed at that time and also be within any network bandwidth constraints. The present invention defines such a method. | 05-27-2010 |
20100135155 | Apparatus and Method for Adaptive Throttling of Traffic Across Multiple Network Nodes - One embodiment of a method of throttling network traffic comprises obtaining traffic rate data from available peer network nodes; computing a maximum permissible rate for a network node based on the traffic rate data from the peer network nodes, wherein the maximum permissible rate represents a maximum number of transactions permitted to pass into that network node for processing during a current period; and employing the maximum permissible rate to govern a number of transactions admitted for processing by the network node in the current period. | 06-03-2010 |
20100135156 | CONGESTION CONTROL IN A WIRELESS DATA NETWORK - Techniques for congestion control are disclosed. In an embodiment, a base station allocates a shared resource using a combination of zero or more individual grants and zero or more common grants, and generates a multi-valued busy signal in response to loading conditions that exceed a pre-determined level. In another embodiment, a subset of transmitting mobile stations reduce their transmission rate in response to a multi-valued busy signal. The subset may include autonomous transmission, commonly granted transmission, individually granted transmission, or any combination thereof. In various embodiments, rate adjustment may be probabilistic or deterministic. In an embodiment, a rate table is deployed, and a mobile station decreases or increases the transmission rate from one rate in the table to a lower or higher rate in the table, respectively, in response to the busy signal. Various other aspects provide efficient congestion control, avoiding excessive interference and increasing capacity. | 06-03-2010 |
20100142372 | Method And Apparatus For Use In A Communications Network - A method is disclosed for use in a Universal Mobile Telecommunications System network comprising an IP Multimedia Subsystem. The method comprises receiving node status information relating to a first node of the network which indicates an occurrence of an event associated with the first node, determining the existence of a network association established between the first node and a second node of the network that would be adversely affected by the occurrence of the event, and causing the network association to be terminated, thereby allowing a new network association between the first and second nodes to be established in its place. | 06-10-2010 |
20100142373 | PERFORMING PACKET FLOW OPTIMIZATION WITH POLICY AND CHARGING CONTROL - Policy and charging control (PCC) is a framework within a Third or Fourth Generation (3G/4G) network that allows operators to authorize and enforce policy, Quality of Service (QoS), and charging control over communication sessions by mobile devices. PCC mechanism is used to determine the type QoS based on a request received from a User Equipment (UE) or network. PCC is one important element within System Architecture Evolution (SAE) architecture to allow the network to perform policy and charging control. A mechanism is provided so that PCC can allow packet flow optimization. Thereby, the network can detect Internet Protocol (IP) flows based on operator defined criteria and can perform policy and QoS control. | 06-10-2010 |
20100149971 | System and method for multi-services packet network traffic engineering - Systems and methods are described that provide network traffic engineering that obviate network over-provisioning by providing QoS to each traffic class. Embodiments dimension switching router LTE schedulers to ensure that each traffic class receives an appropriate QoS in terms of delay, jitter, Packet Loss Ratio and throughput. | 06-17-2010 |
20100149972 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING RETRY-AFTER-TIMER OVERLOAD CONTROL - A method and apparatus for handling an overload condition in a communication network are disclosed. For example, the method calculates a retry-after-timer parameter by at least one core signaling network element for at least one edge signaling network element. The method then sends the retry-after-timer parameter by the at least one core signaling network element to the at least one edge signaling network element, when a total queueing delay of the at least one core signaling network element exceeds a predefined high threshold in a measurement interval, wherein the retry-after-timer parameter is used by the at least one edge signaling network element in an overload control that throttles signaling traffic. | 06-17-2010 |
20100149973 | Method and Apparatus for use in a Communications Network - A method is provided of regulating a load placed on a first node ( | 06-17-2010 |
20100149974 | MOBILE NETWORK SYSTEM AND GUIDANCE MESSAGE PROVIDING METHOD - A mobile network system includes a guidance message control server, a call control server and a plurality of access gateways. The call control server includes a gateway management section that determines an access gateway as a subject of call restriction, a first instructing section that transmits a message transmission instruction to the guidance message control server and a second instructing section that transmits a call restriction instruction to the access gateway. The guidance message control server includes a receiving section that receives the message transmission instruction, an acquisition section that acquires a guidance message data and a transmission section that transmits the guidance message data to a specified multicast group. Each of the access gateways includes a processing section that performs multicast group participation processing for participating in the specified multicast group and a guidance transmission section that transmits the guidance message data to a mobile terminal. | 06-17-2010 |
20100157795 | TRANSMITTING APPARATUS AND TRANSMISSION RATE CONTROL METHOD - In a communication of explicit multicast system used in SICC, the frequency of variation of the transmission rate is reduced to achieve a multimedia data transmission exhibiting a high quality. An available bandwidth estimating part ( | 06-24-2010 |
20100157796 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR LOAD-ADAPTIVE BACKOFF FOR WIMAX RANGING - Certain embodiments of the present disclosure provide an adaptive technique to determine size of a ranging back-off window according to a load of ranging channel. By applying an adaptive increase of the back-off window size, a probability of collision between ranging codes within a same transmission opportunity can be alleviated, and the ranging channel load can be decreased more efficiently than in the case of a standard non-adaptive back-off procedure | 06-24-2010 |
20100172239 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR COORDINATION OF ADMISSION CONTROL IN TRANSPORT NETWORKS - The invention provides a coordination layer of coordinating entities provided intermediate the admission control interfaces of the transport network domains, and any QoS signaller which signals QoS requests on behalf of the application layer. The coordination layer acts to distribute an admission control request across the multiple transport network domains by the use of coordination request messages containing the admission control request being forwarded through the coordination layer of coordinating entities. At each coordinating entity the admission control request is passed on to the admission control interface of the transport network which the coordinating entity serves, and an admission control response obtained. This admission control response is then combined with admission control responses from the other domains which are propagated through the coordination layer via coordination messages. The result is that the coordination layer acts to combine the various admission control responses into a combined response, which can be provided back to the QoS signaller (or other requesting entity). Thus, coordination of admission control across multiple transport network domains is achieved, without a QoS signaller having to contact each individual domain. | 07-08-2010 |
20100172240 | TRAFFIC ENGINEERING APPARATUS, NETWORK SYSTEM, AND TRAFFIC CONTROL METHOD AND PROGRAM - The present invention provides a traffic engineering apparatus which performs traffic engineering, including: an optimal branch point determination unit which determines an optimal branch point in a network to realize a predetermined policy; and a traffic flow regulation unit which regulates a traffic flow rate into the local node during reception of traffic based on the optimal branch point determined by the optimal branch point determination unit. | 07-08-2010 |
20100177633 | Priority Flow Handling in Stateless Domains - A method of managing quality of service in an IP network is provided. The method comprises identifying, at an egress edge node of the network, that congestion is present in one or more routers within the network. Data flows for termination to remove the congestion are selected. At least one flow termination notification is sent from the egress edge node to an ingress edge node of the network, the at least one flow termination notification identifying the selected data flows. Low priority flows from the selected data flows are terminated at the ingress edge node immediately. High priority flows are terminated only if congestion is still present after a predetermined delay period. The delay may be applied in the ingress edge node or the egress edge node. The invention also provides a method for admitting low priority flows into the network only if the network has resources available for a number of high priority flows above a dynamically determined threshold. | 07-15-2010 |
20100177634 | Session Admission Control in a Communications Network - There is provided a en edge node and a method of controlling session admission in a communications network. The method comprises measuring a Quality of Service parameter between an edge node and a corresponding edge node and, on the basis of the measured Quality of Service parameter, calculating a target window size. The target window size relates to the maximum rate of data that can be sent from the edge node to the corresponding edge node whilst retaining a predetermined Quality of Service. A current window size is determined on the basis of existing established sessions between the two edge nodes. When a request for session admission is received, the current window size is compared with the target window size and, on the basis of the comparison, a determination is made whether to admit the request for session admission. | 07-15-2010 |
20100177635 | HIERARCHICAL RATE COLOR MARKER - One embodiment provides a system that facilitates bandwidth-profile enforcement. During operation, the system indicates a packet's compliance with a bandwidth profile based at least on available high-compliance tokens and medium-compliance tokens. The system further accounts for overflow tokens from a respective class of service (CoS) and distribute an overflow token to another CoS priority level based on the overflow token's CoS information. | 07-15-2010 |
20100177636 | Flow Admission Control in an IP Network - A flow admission control module for IP traffic types monitors network topology and usage. A new flow is not admitted if it is determined that the flow would push the utilization of available bandwidth reserved for the traffic type on a link in the associated path beyond a predetermined threshold. The admission control module may, as a result of dynamic changes to network topology capacity, re-compute the link utilization for effected active flows The admission control module may also account for protection regimes in flow admission calculations. | 07-15-2010 |
20100188973 | QUALITY OF SERVICE (QOS) CONTROL FOR TRANSPORT INDEPENDENT ARCHITECTURES - A system for facilitating access to resources residing within an operating environment comprising multiple apparatuses. After identifying a requirement for accessing a resource, a determination may be made as to whether the resource resides in the operating environment. If the resource resides on apparatuses (e.g., providers) in the operating environment, a determination of communication transports that are usable for accessing each provider may be made. When multiple transports are determined to be usable, at least one transport may be selected based on a required Quality of Service (QoS). | 07-29-2010 |
20100188974 | IMPLEMENTATION OF INTERNET PROTOCOL HEADER COMPRESSION WITH TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT QUALITY OF SERVICE - Various exemplary embodiments relate to a method and related network node including one or more of the following: receiving a packet belonging to a flow, the packet including a marking used to identify a quality of service (QoS) required for the packet; performing buffer management to determine whether a current occupancy level of a buffer in the network node is greater than a threshold level; when the current occupancy level of the buffer does not exceed the threshold level, performing header compression on the packet in the network node; after performing header compression, performing traffic scheduling to queue the packet in a queue selected from a plurality of queues based on the marking in the packet and to output the packet from the selected queue; and forwarding the packet towards a destination, whereby buffer management, header compression, and traffic scheduling are all performed in a single network node. | 07-29-2010 |
20100195491 | BOUNDED MINIMAL LATENCY FOR NETWORK RESOURCES WITHOUT SYNCHRONIZATION - Systems and methods for bounded minimal latency for network resources without synchronization are provided. In one embodiment, a method for managing data traffic between nodes in an asynchronous network comprises: receiving a data request message at a first port of network switch; storing information about the data request message in a memory at the network switch; forwarding the data request message to a producer node; receiving a data message at a second port of the network switch; determining whether the data message is responsive to the data request message; when the data message is responsive, forwarding the data message from the network switch; and when the data message is not responsive, blocking the data message from being forwarded from the network. | 08-05-2010 |
20100195492 | Controlling Traffic in a Packet Switched Communications Network - The present invention relates to a packet switched communications network especially to an Ethernet network in which User Network Interfaces (UNI) are standardized between client network ( | 08-05-2010 |
20100195493 | CONTROLLING A PACKET FLOW FROM A USER EQUIPMENT - A method, device management server, Packet Data Network Gateway (PDN GW) and User Equipment (UE) for establishing a PDN connection having defined packet flow limitations from a UE to a PDN GW. When a misbehaving or malicious UE is operating in the Evolved Packet System (EPS), the invention enables the UE to retain a PDN connection with an EPS bearer open until the software in the UE has been updated. The server sends to the UE, a management object that includes a logic parameter (packet filters) for controlling a packet flow from the UE to the network, or a defined Access Point Name (APN) that enables the UE to obtain the packet filters from a PDN GW. In turn, the UE sends to the network, a request for a new PDN connection while requesting deactivation of any previously existing PDN connections. The UE transmits on the new PDN connection, only packets allowed by the logic parameter. | 08-05-2010 |
20100195494 | QUEUE-BASED ACTIVE QUEUE MANAGEMENT PROCESS - An active queue management (AQM) process for network communications equipment. The AQM process is queue based and involves applying at a queue size threshold congestion notification to communications packets in a queue of a link via packet dropping; and adjusting said queue size threshold on the basis of the congestion level. The AQM process releases more buffer capacity to accommodate more incoming packets by increasing said queue size threshold when congestion increases; and decreases buffer capacity by reducing said queue size threshold when congestion decreases. Network communications equipment includes a switch component for switching communications packets between input ports and output ports, packet queues for at least the output ports, and an active queue manager for applying congestion notification to communications packets in the queues for the output ports via packet dropping. The congestion notification is applied at respective queue size thresholds for the queues, and the thresholds adjusted on the basis of the respective congestion levels of the queues of the output ports. | 08-05-2010 |
20100202286 | METHOD & APPARATUS FOR THE EFFICIENT USE OF AVAILABLE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK BANDWIDTH - A communications network gateway receives a stream of information formatted to be compatible with a first sub-network and it receives a stream of information formatted to be compatible with a second sub-network. The frames in the second stream are extracted and modified to be compatible with the transmission format of the first sub-network. The two streams of information are then aggregated for transmission over a logical network link in a manner that optimizes the bandwidth utilization of the overall communications network. | 08-12-2010 |
20100202287 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR NETWORK OPTIMIZATION BY MANAGING LOW PRIORITY DATA TRANSFERS - As more internet service providers have more customers with high-speed internet access accounts and these customers access more multi-media rich data (such as videos), the network infrastructure of internet service providers becomes saturated. Thus, internet service providers are facing pressure to upgrade their networks. However, high-speed digital networking equipment is expensive. Thus, internet service providers need to optimize the usage of their existing networks. To optimize the usage of existing networks, a system of delaying certain data requests is proposed. By delaying certain data requests, the various components in a network can shift data transfers from peak traffic times to lower traffic times. One useful application of delayed requests is the case in which a web client requests data ahead of schedule either through predictive methods or through subscriptions for desired data. | 08-12-2010 |
20100202288 | RANDOM ACCESS SCHEME FOR USER EQUIPMENT - A method of efficiently processing a random access response message, when a terminal (or user equipment) performs random access, is disclosed. After the terminal transmits a random access preamble to a base station, the terminal may receive a random access response message having a format of medium access control protocol data unit (MAC PDU) including only a backoff indicator subheader in a MAC header of the MAC PDU, from the base station in response to the random access preamble. As described above, the terminal, which has received the random access response message including only a backoff indicator subheader in the MAC header of the MAC PDU, may consider a random access response reception procedure not successful and may perform a subsequent procedure for a random access responses reception failure. | 08-12-2010 |
20100202289 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INTERFERENCE MANAGEMENT IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Systems and methodologies are described herein that facilitate interference control and resource management in a wireless communication system. As described herein, a base station, terminal, and/or other entity in a wireless communication system that observes interference from one or more other network entities can construct and communicate resource utilization messages (RUMs) in order to request the interfering network entities to conduct power backoff on designated resources. Parameters constructed as a function of quality of service (QoS) and/or priority metrics (such as head-of-line delays, queue lengths, burst sizes, delay targets, average rates, or the like) can be included within the RUM, such that an entity receiving the RUM can compute QoS changes associated with various power backoff levels in order to select a power backoff level that maximizes overall system QoS performance. | 08-12-2010 |
20100208585 | Method and node for providing a resource efficient connection in a communication network - A method, a network node and a program unit for controlling the establishment or modification of a connection in a communication network are disclosed. The connection is to be established or modified between nodes that are adapted to employ a coding scheme selected from a plurality of supported coding schemes having a different demand on a utilization of a network resource. In accordance with the invention an expected demand on a utilization of a network resource associated with employing the at least one of the supported coding schemes is determined, and a node controlling the connection selects the coding scheme to be employed such that the associated expected demand on the network resource utilization is minimized. | 08-19-2010 |
20100208586 | CONTROL NODE, A NETWORK OF CONTROL NODES AND A NETWORK CONFIGURATOR - A control node for a network of control nodes includes a transmitter module configured to manage the data to be sent in an output process image, to convert the output process image into a data packet and to output the data packet onto the network at a predetermined point in time. The control node further includes a receiver module configured to log on to the data packets of one or of a plurality of transmitter modules of further control nodes and to convert a received data packet into an input process image. The data transmission between the control nodes in the network takes place in the form of data packets. | 08-19-2010 |
20100214912 | MITIGATING NETWORK IMPAIRMENTS - An edge device for controlling provisioning of data streams to a network includes a primary channel for receiving a primary stream and a secondary channel for receiving a secondary stream. A scheduler selects between the primary stream and the secondary stream. Timers quantify an elapsed time between a triggering event and a previous switch by the scheduler from the secondary stream to the primary stream and quantify a wait time. When the primary stream does not meet the predetermined criteria and the secondary stream does meet the predetermined criteria, the scheduler switches to the secondary stream. The scheduler and switches back to the primary stream after an exponentially increasing wait time has elapsed and the primary stream meets the predetermined criteria. | 08-26-2010 |
20100214913 | LOAD BALANCING NETWORK TRAFFIC ON A LABEL SWITCHED PATH USING RESOURCE RESERVATION PROTOCOL WITH TRAFFIC ENGINEERING - Techniques are describe for establishing an overall label switched path (LSP) for load balancing network traffic being sent across a network using the a resource reservation protocol such as Resource Reservation Protocol with Traffic Engineering (RSVP-TE). The techniques include extensions to the RSVP-TE protocol that enable a router to send Path messages for establishing a tunnel that includes a plurality of sub-paths for the overall LSP. The tunnel may comprise a single RSVP-TE Label Switched Path (LSP) that is configured to load balance network traffic across different sub-paths of the RSVP-TE LSP over the network. | 08-26-2010 |
20100214914 | METHOD OF BANDWIDTH MANAGEMENT IN PACKET NETWORKS - A method of managing a connection between a first access point node and a second access point node, the connection travelling through a packet-based network comprising a plurality of intermediate aggregation nodes. | 08-26-2010 |
20100214915 | RESOURCE ALLOCATION / MANAGEMENT METHOD AND DEVICE BASED ON BLOCK REPEAT DIVISION MULTIPLE ACCESS - A resource allocation method based on block repeat division multiple access, involves the steps of: distributing the usable BRBG according to the service requirement of a user; distributing RC series for the said distributed BRBG. The present invention also provides a resource management method based on block repeat division multiple access, which involves the steps of: detecting the operation environment in a district for a period of time; adjusting the number of the BRB in the BRBG of the district, according to the operation environment of the district. The present invention also provides the resource allocation/management device based on block repeat division multiple access. | 08-26-2010 |
20100214916 | Flexible Reservation Request and Scheduling Mechanisms in a Managed Shared Network with Quality of Service - Systems and methods for scheduling network communications in a managed network can include receiving in a Network Coordinator a submission from each of a plurality of network nodes requesting, for their respective flows, reservation of communication slots in a communication window, the submission including scheduling information such as latency tolerance maximum aggregation amount; the Network Coordinator checking available bandwidth in the communication window; and the Network Coordinator allocating the available bandwidth to a first flow from a first requesting node based on the first flow's scheduling information and the bandwidth availability, and deferring allocation of bandwidth to a second flow from a second requesting node until a later window based on the second flow's scheduling information and the bandwidth availability, thereby reallocating peak demand among the plurality of requesting nodes across a plurality of communication windows. | 08-26-2010 |
20100214917 | Method for admission control, and apparatus and communication system thereof - The present invention relates to network communication field. A method for admission control, an apparatus and a communication system thereof are disclosed according to the present invention. The method includes measuring, by an egress node, traffic from an ingress node, and calculating a current congestion degree; comparing, by the egress node, the current calculated CLE with a last calculated CLE, and sending the current calculated CLE to an admission control decision entity by the egress node if the current calculated CLE crosses a predetermined threshold; receiving and storing the CLE by the admission control decision entity; and making a decision by the admission control decision entity based on the stored CLE, when a service traffic request arrives at the admission control decision entity, and determining whether to admit the service traffic request. According to the method for admission control provided by the present invention in which CLE is transferred proactively, the number of messages for transferring CLE is reduced when calling rate is high, and admission decision procedure is accelerated. | 08-26-2010 |
20100220587 | SYSTEM AND METHOD PROVIDING OVERLOAD CONTROL IN NEXT GENERATION NETWORKS - A system, method and node for overload control in a network. The method includes the steps of receiving an incoming offer by a node, filtering the offer by an in-throttle to determine if the offer is permitted to be processed by the node prior to processing by the node, processing a permitted offer, and sending the processed offer to a designated target. After processing the permitted offer by the node, the offer may be further filtered prior to sending the offer to the designated target. | 09-02-2010 |
20100220588 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS OF PROVIDING PROXY-BASED QUALITY OF SERVICE - Systems and methods for dynamically controlling bandwidth of connections are described. In some embodiments, a proxy for one or more connections may allocate, distribute, or generate indications of network congestion via one or more connections in order to induce the senders of the connections to reduce their rates of transmission. The proxy may allocate, distribute, or generate these indications in such a way as to provide quality of service to one or more connections, or to ensure that a number of connections transmit within an accepted bandwidth limit. In other embodiments, a sender of a transport layer connection may have a method for determining a response to congestion indications which accounts for a priority of the connection. In these embodiments, a sender may reduce or increase parameters related to transmission rate at different rates according to a priority of the connection. | 09-02-2010 |
20100220589 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM FOR PROCESSING BUFFERED DATA - A method, an apparatus, and a system for processing buffered data are disclosed. The method includes: packing data packets in a same queue; splitting the packed data packet into multiple data cells according to a predetermined cell size; and storing the split data cells in multiple memories. The preceding method, apparatus, and system improve the read and write efficiency of the memories and improve the balance of the read and write bandwidths among multiple memories, thus improving the system performance. | 09-02-2010 |
20100220590 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR DROPPING DATA USING A DROP PROFILE - A system selectively drops data from queues. The system includes a drop table that stores drop probabilities. The system selects one of the queues to examine and generates an index into the drop table to identify one of the drop probabilities for the examined queue. The system then determines whether to drop data from the examined queue based on the identified drop probability. | 09-02-2010 |
20100226248 | CHANGES TO ACCESS PROCEDURE FOR ASC 0 FOR UMTS - According to one aspect, a method that includes some of the teachings of the present subject technology reduces congestion in a communications network. The method includes, inter alia, letting a persistence value be a function of N, even when ASC=0, and also a function of a constant the emergency services access parameter W, such that the persistence value P | 09-09-2010 |
20100226249 | ACCESS CONTROL FOR PACKET-ORIENTED NETWORKS - The invention relates to a method for access control to a packet-oriented network. An admissibility check for a group of packets is carried out by means of a threshold value for the traffic volume between the network input node and the network output node for the flow. The transmission of the groups of data packets is not permitted when an authorization of the transmission would lead to traffic volume exceeding the threshold value. A relationship between the threshold values and the traffic volume in partials stretches or links may be formulated by means of the proportional traffic volume over the individual partial stretches. Using the capacities of the links the threshold values for pairs of input and output nodes can be fixed such that no overload occurs on the individual links. Within the above method a flexible reaction to the drop-out of links can be achieved by means of a resetting of the threshold values. Furthermore the inclusion of other conditions is possible, for example relating to the capacity of interfaces to other networks or special demands on transmission of prioritized traffic. | 09-09-2010 |
20100226250 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR PROVIDING QUALITY OF SERVICE PRECEDENCE IN TCP CONGESTION CONTROL - Systems and methods for dynamically controlling bandwidth of connections are described. In some embodiments, a proxy for one or more connections may allocate, distribute, or generate indications of network congestion via one or more connections in order to induce the senders of the connections to reduce their rates of transmission. The proxy may allocate, distribute, or generate these indications in such a way as to provide quality of service to one or more connections, or to ensure that a number of connections transmit within an accepted bandwidth limit. In other embodiments, a sender of a transport layer connection may have a method for determining a response to congestion indications which accounts for a priority of the connection. In these embodiments, a sender may reduce or increase parameters related to transmission rate at different rates according to a priority of the connection. | 09-09-2010 |
20100232292 | METHOD FOR VARIABLY CONTROLLING BIT RATE OF VIDEO DATA THROUGH END-TO-END CHANNEL STATUS SENSING IN A WIBRO NETWORK - A method for variably controlling a bit rate of video data through end-to-end channel status sensing in a Wireless Broadband (WiBro) network is provided. The method includes classifying wireless channel statuses of a transmission side and a reception side into normal and abnormal statuses during video data transmission; variably controlling and determining an encoding bit rate of a transmission side's encoder according to the classification result; and comparing the determined encoding bit rate with a Down Link Modulation & Coding Selection Level (DL MCS Level) which is a parameter of the reception side, so as to vary a final encoding bit rate of the transmission side. | 09-16-2010 |
20100246390 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR STREAMING SCALABLE MULTIMEDIA DATA STREAMS - A method and apparatus are described including receiving a coded packet of content associated with a layer, receiving feedback information regarding channel conditions and applying hybrid automatic repeat request to deliver the packet based on said feedback information. The method and apparatus wherein applying hybrid automatic repeat request layer-wise further includes determining if a resource is exhausted, scheduling delivery of layered coded content packets for a layer, if the resource has not been exhausted, determining if all layered coded content packets for the layer have been transmitted, proceeding to the first determining step, if all layered coded content packets for a layer have not been transmitted, determining if an acknowledgement message has been received from a user device, determining if the resource is exhausted, if no acknowledgement has not been received and scheduling delivery of layered coded forward error correction packets, if the resource has not been exhausted. | 09-30-2010 |
20100246391 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR REDUCING CONGESTION IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A system and method are described for reducing congestion in a wireless network. A wireless base station becomes congested when substantially all of the available base station airlink resources are being used during a period of time. It is useful, however, to distinguish between periods of congestion with few users and periods where a larger number of users are using the base station. When there are few users a congestion situation is not necessarily a problem, while it is more likely that users' quality of experience and quality of service suffers as the number of users increases. This system and method determines when a base station is congested and implements a congestion prime management scenario when the number of active users is above an activity threshold. | 09-30-2010 |
20100246392 | AUTOMATIC SWITCHOVER MECHANISM IN A NETWORK DEVICE - A system comprises a plurality of processing modules, one of which is designated to be the primary processing module and the others are designated to be secondary processing modules. During operation, state is maintained in the primary processing module and at least one of the secondary processing modules. A switchover controller causes outputs from the secondary modules to be discarded. When the switchover controller receives an indication that the primary processing module has failed, it designates one of the secondary processing modules to be the primary processing module. Because the newly designated primary processing module already has current state information at switchover, the module is able to operate with minimal delay. | 09-30-2010 |
20100246393 | ADMISSION CONTROL FOR SERVICES - An admission control system is disclosed in combination with a network and a computing system in communication with the network. The computing system is configured to determine a class of service requirement from a service request. The computing system is furnished with topology information about the network, a portion of the topology being based on a protocol (e.g., Multiple Spanning Tree protocol) whereby multiple paths are created for provisioning a connection for the service request. A mechanism is configured to determine if at least one path is available that satisfies the class of service requirement and to admit the service request into the network when the path is available for provisioning the connection. Bandwidth usage may be tracked and used in provisioning decisions. Requests may be made to the network to add bandwidth (e.g., through additional optical wavelengths) to accommodate service requests. | 09-30-2010 |
20100254260 | LOCATION DETERMINATION FOR PLACING A NEW CAPACITY POINT IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A location for placing a new capacity point in a wireless network is determined based on a wireless contention of the network and capacities for capacity points in the network. Each capacity point is a network device interfacing the network with a second network. The capacities are calculated as a function of the wireless contention. | 10-07-2010 |
20100254261 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING A DATA TRANSFER OVER A NETWORK - A method is provided in one example and includes querying for a total capacity for data transmissions for a local network segment, and identifying an available capacity for the local network segment by subtracting a sum of current aggregate consumption of the local network segment from the total capacity. The method also includes comparing the available capacity to a requested capacity that is generated by a network element for a specific communication session. If the requested capacity is equal to or greater than the available capacity, the request is withheld and not transmitted. In more specific embodiments, if the requested capacity is less than the available capacity, the request is transmitted. The query can be communicated to a gateway. In still other embodiments, the query includes a specific query as to a capacity allocated for video data and the network element is a set-top box. | 10-07-2010 |
20100260044 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR HYBRID RATE LIMITING BASED ON DATA BIT COUNT AND DATA PACKET COUNT - A networked computing system employing a hybrid rate-limiting scheme, including one or more service provider device(s) (SPD) and one or more subscriber computing device(s) (SCD), and a data communications network facilitating data communications amongst the networked SPD and SCD devices. A SPD may apply the hybrid rate-limiting scheme to data communications provided to a SCD, based on both data bit count and data packet count information. The rate-limiting scheme may include a dual token bucket algorithm that facilitates rate-limiting PDUs in a data transfer queue utilizing one token bucket for metering data bits and another token bucket for metering data packets. The hybrid rate-limiting scheme may also employ a triple token bucket algorithm that includes one token bucket for metering data bits related to payload only data, a separate token bucket for metering data bits related to total PDU data, and another token bucket for metering data packets. | 10-14-2010 |
20100260045 | VIDEO AND DATA NETWORK LOAD BALANCING WITH VIDEO PLACEHOLDER - A network access unit includes: a source data receiver module to receive multiple first source data representing video content and second source data representing broadband data content; a network control module to generate a master schedule indicating whether each first source data is to be transmitted with one or two layers; a pre-coder module to pre-code each first source data using a first pre-coding scheme to generate a first set of representation data, and if the first source data is to be transmitted with two layers, to pre-code the first source data using a second pre-coding scheme to generate a second set of representation data; and an ACM module to associate each first set of representation data with a first coding and modulation scheme, and associate, for each first source data to be transmitted with two layers, the second set of representation data with a second coding and modulation scheme. | 10-14-2010 |
20100265821 | Deferred Queuing in a Buffered Switch - A method and apparatus is disclosed for temporarily deferring transmission of frames to a destination in a data switch. When a request for transmission of a frame to the destination port is received, the congestion status of that destination is determined. If the destination is congested, the frame is stored in a deferred queue. When the status of a destination changes from congested to non-congested, the deferred queue is examined to see if any deferred frames can now be forwarded to their destination. While examining the deferred queue, incoming frames are placed on a backup queue. When the deferred queue is fully analyzed, the backup queue is emptied by either sending those frames to their destination or storing the frames in the deferred queue. While examining the deferred queue, the congested states of the destinations are not allowed to change from congested to non-congested. | 10-21-2010 |
20100271940 | System and Method for Performing Distributed Policing - Various systems and methods that synchronize local copies of a variable used in a distributed algorithm, such as that used in distributed policing, are disclosed. For example, one system includes several distributed algorithm participants that are coupled to communicate with each other. Each of the each of the distributed algorithm participants maintains a shared variable in order to implement the distributed algorithm. One of the distributed algorithm participants is a synchronizer. The synchronizer is configured to calculate a new value of the shared variable and to communicate the new value to each of the other distributed algorithm participants. The distributed algorithm can be a distributed policing algorithm, and the shared variable can be a global bucket. | 10-28-2010 |
20100271941 | METHOD OF CHANGING FREQUENCY ASSIGNMENT STATUS IN BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method of changing a frequency assignment (FA) status in an improved broadband wireless access system where terminals and base stations can communicate with each other by using a plurality of FAs. In the present invention, the base station changes the status of one of secondary FA into the status of the pFA in order to adjust a load of the primary FA, and communicates with the terminal through the pFA of which status is changed. For this purpose, the base station transmits a MAP information element (IE), which requests the change of the status of the pFA, to the terminal. The MAP IE includes an action code that requests the change of the status of the pFA, and a bit map representing an FA of which status is to be changed. When a response, which represents the completion of the change of the status of the pFA of the base station, is received from the terminal, the base station changes the status of the pFA and communicates with the pFA of the terminal through a new pFA. The status of a previous pFA between the base station and the terminal is changed into the status of the sFA, and the status of one previous sFA between the base station and the terminal is changed into the status of the pFA, so that communication is performed through new FAs. According to the present invention, since the base station can change the status of a specific terminal and FAs in use according to need, it is possible to adjust loads between the FAs. Further, the base station can change the statuses of the FAs in use while continuously maintaining the access of a specific terminal. | 10-28-2010 |
20100271942 | Providing a Quality of Service for Various Classes of Service for Transfer of Electronic Data Packets - A quality of service for various classes of services for the transfer of electronic data packets is provided by establishing classes of packets for a customer and for assigning bandwidths to the classes for the customer. Accordingly, the amount of bandwidth for one type of service may vary from the bandwidth for another type of service over the same data connection. A device, such as an edge router of a network, may police the data packets being transferred by a customer to maintain the bandwidth being utilized by a given class of packets of the customer to within the assigned bandwidth for that class of the customer. The data packets may further be policed by core routers of the network may also to maintain the bandwidth being utilized by a given class of packets to within the assigned bandwidth for that class as specified by the service provider. | 10-28-2010 |
20100271943 | RESOURCE ADMISSION CONTROL METHOD AND NETWORK APPARATUS - A resource admission control method provided includes: an NACF receives an authentication request sent by a mobile UE when the mobile UE is moving, and sends a service request to an RACF to trigger the RACF to enforce resource admission control on a transport network. Alternatively, the method includes: a network apparatus in a transport network receives a service access request sent by a mobile UE when the mobile UE is moving, and sends a service request to an RACF to trigger the RACF to enforce resource admission control on the transport network. | 10-28-2010 |
20100278042 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING CONGESTION IN CELLS WITHIN A CELLULAR COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Systems and methods for controlling congestion in a cellular communication system ( | 11-04-2010 |
20100284271 | PACKET SPRAYING FOR LOAD BALANCING ACROSS MULTIPLE PACKET PROCESSORS - A network device includes multiple packet processing engines implemented in parallel with one another. A spraying component distributes incoming packets to the packet processing engines using a spraying technique that load balances the packet processing engines. In particular, the spraying component distributes the incoming packets based on queue lengths associated with the packet processing engines and based on a random component. In one implementation, the random component is a random selection from all the candidate processing engines. In another implementation, the random component is a weighted random selection in which the weights are inversely proportional to the queue lengths. | 11-11-2010 |
20100284272 | METHOD AND APPARTUS FOR ADMISSION CONTROL IN A RADIO COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A method for admission control in a radio communications system that includes determining a quality of service (QoS) type of a service according to a QoS property of the service, determining a service satisfaction ratio of services that belong to the determined QoS type according to a result of the determining a QoS type, comparing the determined service satisfaction ratio with an admission threshold, and admitting the service if the determined service satisfaction ratio is greater than or equal to the admission threshold. An apparatus for admission control in the radio communications system is also provided. With the embodiments in the present disclosure, the resource utilization may be accurately calculated, and the admission control algorithm may be more easily developed and maintained. | 11-11-2010 |
20100284273 | METHOD FOR MAPPING QUALITY OF SERVICE REQUIREMENTS TO RADIO PROTOCOL PARAMETERS - An apparatus and method for transmitting packets having quality of service requirement wherein the quality of service requirements associated with the packets are received at an input, said quality of service parameters include at least one of delay, bandwidth, peak bandwidth and retransmission bandwidth. The received quality of service parameters are mapped to radio protocol parameters including at least one of a priority slot interval, a priority slot phase, a packet duration and modulation format for the radio channel. The packets are transmitted on a radio channel according to the mapped radio protocol parameters. | 11-11-2010 |
20100290342 | HIERARCHICAL POLICERS FOR ENFORCING DIFFERENTIATED TRAFFIC BEHAVIOR - A hierarchical traffic policer may include a first policer configured to pass first packets when a first condition is met. The first policer also may alter selection information within the passed first packets. A second policer may be configured to pass second packets when a second condition is met. The second policer may be further configured to pass all of the passed first packets from the first policer based on the altered selection information within the passed first packets. | 11-18-2010 |
20100296395 | PACKET TRANSMISSION SYSTEM, PACKET TRANSMISSION APPARATUS, AND PACKET TRANSMISSION METHOD - A first apparatus includes a sending unit which attaches a sequence number which is numbered for each priority of QoS set in a first packet, the sequence number is numbered for each priority of QoS set in the first packet, and sends the first packet with the sequence number. A second apparatus includes a storage unit which stores, for each priority, a history of sequence numbers attached to packets received, a determining unit which receives the first packet from the first apparatus, identifies the sequence number of the first packet, and determines whether the first packet has been previously received by comparing the identified sequence number with the history of sequence numbers according to the priority of QoS set in the first packet stored in the storage unit, and a unit which discards, when the determining unit determines the first packet has been previously received, the first packet. | 11-25-2010 |
20100302939 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND TRAFFIC NODE FOR MEASURING A LOAD CAPACITY IN A MANAGEMENT SYSTEM - A method for measuring a load capacity in a management system comprises: receiving an indication of a number of data connections through an input; and computing a current load capacity by multiplying the number of data connections with a time period during which the current load capacity is to be computed. A system for carrying out the method comprises an input for receiving the indication and a processor for computing the current load capacity by multiplying the number of data connections with the time period. | 12-02-2010 |
20100302940 | LOAD BALANCING ACROSS LAYER-2 DOMAINS - The present application relates to network configurations and specifically to scalable load balancing network configurations. One implementation includes an external client coupled to a scalable load balancing system. The scalable load balancing system includes a load balancing layer that is configured to encapsulate individual incoming packets of a packet flow from the external client. The load balancing layer is further configured to route the incoming packets to target devices on the system. The target devices can span multiple IP subnets. The incoming packets can pass through one or more load balancers of the load balancing layer before reaching individual target devices. Individual target devices can be configured to route at least some outgoing packets of the packet flow to the external client without passing through any of the one or more load balancers. | 12-02-2010 |
20100302941 | METHOD AND SYSTEM TO MANAGE NETWORK TRAFFIC CONGESTION - A method and system to manage network congestion are provided. In one example embodiment, the method comprises receiving an indication of a rate increase request at a reaction point computer system, determining information indicative of a frequency of rate decrease requests during a period of time, and initiating a rate increase signal utilizing the information indicative of the frequency of rate decrease requests during the period of time. | 12-02-2010 |
20100302942 | SHARED WEIGHTED FAIR QUEUING (WFQ) SHAPER - A network device includes a port, a buffer, a flow control module, and a service differentiation module. The port is configured to send and receive a packet, wherein the port is connected to a network entity. The buffer is configured to store the packet. The flow control module is configured to control the transmission of the packet within the network device. The service differentiation module is coupled with the buffer and the flow control module. The service differentiation module is configured to regulate storage of the packet in the buffer and to regulate the transmission of the packet from the network device to the network entity. The service differentiation module is also configured to determine excess bandwidth available within the network device and to allocate the excess bandwidth to transmit the packet to the network entity. | 12-02-2010 |
20100309783 | Latency based Random Early Discard for Network Packets - Methods, systems, and apparatus used to determine whether to discard a network packet based upon the latency exhibited by an associated a network packet queue. Network devices can include a queue management module operable to identify a latency metric in network packet queues and determine whether the latency metric renders the network packet queue eligible for discarding packets based upon, for example, a latency policy. | 12-09-2010 |
20100309784 | Selection of an Edge Node in a Fixed Access Communication Network - A method and apparatus for selecting an edge node from a plurality of edge nodes in a fixed access communications network. A selection node receives from a host entity a request for a network service. The selection node then obtains, from at least one further network node, data relating to a plurality of edge nodes. On thebasis of the retrieved data, the selection node selects an edge node from the plurality of edge nodes, wherein the selected edge node provides a path between the host entity and the requested network service. The selection node then sends a response to the host entity, the response including information identifying the selected edge node. | 12-09-2010 |
20100315947 | LOAD ESTIMATION USING SCHEDULED UPLINK POWER - A method for providing load reference data in a CDMA system comprises measuring of received total wideband power and of received scheduled enhanced uplink power. State variables are selected corresponding to cell power quantities and measurement functions are selected corresponding to the measured received total wideband power and the measured received scheduled enhanced uplink power. A probability distribution for a first power quantity—related to the selected state variables—is estimated. A conditional probability distribution of a noise floor measure is computed based on the estimated probability distribution for the first power quantity. Load reference data is provided based on the computed conditional probability distribution of the noise floor measure. In a preferred embodiment, the first power quantity is a measure of the difference between received total wideband power and received scheduled enhanced uplink power. The load reference data can be used in e.g. enhanced uplink scheduling or admission control. | 12-16-2010 |
20100322070 | APPARATUSES, SYSTEMS, AND METHODS FOR LOAD BALANCING MANAGEMENT - A mobile communication device for load balancing management is provided. In the mobile communication device, a wireless module receives data communication services via a first service node and receives a plurality of system information messages from the first service node and a plurality of second service nodes, wherein each of the system information messages has a forward-link quality threshold corresponding to a respective service node. Also, a controller determines a traffic type of the data communication services and a signal indicator of the first service node, and determines whether the signal indicator is less than the forward-link quality threshold corresponding to the first service node. In response to that the signal indicator is less than the forward-link quality threshold corresponding to the first service node, the controller switches the data communication services from the first service node to one of the second service nodes according to the traffic type. | 12-23-2010 |
20100322071 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR PLATFORM RATE LIMITING - The present disclosure presents systems and methods for controlling network traffic traversing an intermediary device based on a license or a permit granted for the intermediary device. The systems and methods control a rate of a traffic of a device in accordance with a rate limit identified by a rate limiting license. A rate limiting manager of an intermediary device that processes network traffic between a plurality of clients and a plurality of servers, may identify presence of a rate limiting license that further identifies a performance level. The rate limiting manager may establish a rate limit based on the performance level of the rate limiting license. A throttler of the intermediary may control a rate of receiving network packets in accordance with the rate limit. | 12-23-2010 |
20100322072 | Packet Transfer System, Network Management Apparatus, and Edge Node - A packet transport system to which the present invention is applied includes an edge node accommodating an access network at an edge, and a core node of carrying out a processing of assorting a frame gathered from a plurality of the edge nodes, the edge node provides a label to the frame flowing in from the access network, and the packet transport system transmits the frame in reference to the label. The edge node includes a priority information providing portion of changing a piece of priority information provided to the frame flowing in from the access network in accordance with a congested state of the core node, and a priority previously set to a path specified by the label. | 12-23-2010 |
20100329113 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INTERFERENCE MANAGEMENT IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Systems and methodologies are described herein that facilitate interference control and resource management in a wireless communication system. As described herein, a base station, terminal, and/or other entity in a wireless communication system that observes interference from one or more other network entities can construct and communicate resource utilization messages (RUMs) in order to request the interfering network entities to conduct power backoff on designated resources. Parameters constructed as a function of quality of service (QoS) and/or priority metrics (such as head-of-line delays, queue lengths, burst sizes, delay targets, average rates, or the like) can be included within the RUM, such that an entity receiving the RUM can compute QoS changes associated with various power backoff levels in order to select a power backoff level that maximizes overall system QoS performance. | 12-30-2010 |
20110002220 | TUNNELING-BASED MOBILITY SUPPORT EQUIPMENT AND METHOD - A tunneling-based mobility support method and apparatus is provided which supports a mobility of a mobile node in a heterogeneous network regardless of IP versions (IPv4/IPv6). The mobility support apparatus includes a load balancer, a plurality of mobility support servers, and a plurality of end routers each being TCP connected to each of the mobility support servers. When receiving a tunnel establishment request message from the mobile node, the load balancer selects one mobility supports server from a plurality of mobility support servers to control a mobility service for the mobile node. The selected mobility support server selects a plurality of tunnel end addresses of one end router from the plurality of end routers to establish an IP tunnel with the mobile node according to a predetermined criterion, forwards the tunnel establishment request message to the end router, and sends the mobile node a tunnel establishment response message including the tunnel end address of the selected end router. | 01-06-2011 |
20110007630 | Bandwidth provisioning tools for internet service providers - An accurate bandwidth provisioning tool for Internet Service Providers, for both Voice over IP and data traffic, which is able to predict the demand for network resources based on the network traffic characteristics and the number of subscribers after taking into account subscriber growth and other relevant factors. To predict the demand, the tool uses a Gaussian model for Voice traffic, and a Gamma model, or alternatively, a dimensioning formula, for data traffic. The tool also discloses a method of planning Cable television network capacity when converting analog channels to digital channels. | 01-13-2011 |
20110007631 | Network Communication - The invention relates to methods and processes of congestion control for a communication network which may be designed to be compatible with a wide variety of buffer sizing regimes, particularly small buffers, for routers in the network. Each router may include a processor configured to store an internal feedback variable indicative of an aggregate flow rate of all data flows at the router; detect a new data flow to the router; determine any required adjustment to the internal feedback variable and to the flow rates of existing data flows at the router to accommodate the new flow at a defined flow rate; adjust the internal feedback variable, responsive to the determining step; and communicate the defined flow rate to the source of the new flow and the adjusted flow rates to sources of existing data flows. | 01-13-2011 |
20110019541 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR IMPROVING POWER EFFICIENCY AND LATENCY OF MOBILE DEVICES USING AN OUT OF BAND WIRELESS RESOURCE - Methods and apparatus of using a licensed spectrum to transmit data when an unlicensed spectrum is congested are disclosed. The method includes transmitting a first signal from a first mobile device to a second mobile device using an unlicensed spectrum, determining, at the first mobile device, whether a first response signal has been received by the first mobile device using the unlicensed spectrum, and transmitting a second signal from the first mobile device to the second mobile device using a licensed spectrum when the first response signal has not been received by the first mobile device using the unlicensed spectrum. | 01-27-2011 |
20110019542 | QOE BASED ADMISSION CONTROL - In one example, a Cable Modem Termination System (CMTS) analyzes received service flow traffic to estimate Quality of Experience (QoE) at the endpoints. An admission control system on the CMTS uses the QoE estimate to determine whether to admit new service flows. | 01-27-2011 |
20110019543 | SOFT PACKET DROPPING DURING DIGITAL AUDIO PACKET-SWITCHED COMMUNICATIONS - A method of packetizing digital audio information for packet-switched communications includes separating a digital audio sample into at least one most significant bit and at least one least significant bit. The at least one most significant bit of the digital audio sample is placed into a variable-length most significant bit packet having a high transmission priority for transmission over a packet-switched network in which at least one node receives the packet and independently determines how to route the packet. The at least one least significant bit of the digital audio sample is placed into a variable-length least significant bit packet having a low transmission priority for transmission over the packet-switched network. Prioritization of packets as having a high transmission priority or low transmission priority is independent of speech characteristics of digital audio samples with elements contained therein. | 01-27-2011 |
20110019544 | SYSTEMS FOR SCHEDULING THE TRANSMISSION OF DATA IN A NETWORK DEVICE - In a network device, a line card includes a first scheduler configured to perform scheduling for data units of a first type and a second scheduler that is connected in series to the first scheduler and configured to perform scheduling for data units of a second type. The schedulers may be configured in a variety of ways to achieve certain data unit flow characteristics. | 01-27-2011 |
20110019545 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR AUTO DETECTION OF AAL5 TYPE FRAMES FOR VCC AND VPC SWITCHES - In Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) communications networks, certain congestion control features, such as Partial Packet Discard (PPD) and Early Packet Discard (EPD), operate on ATM cells that have been segmented from ATM Adaptation Layer #5 (AAL5) frames (packets). AAL5 frames are automatically detected by observing transitions of an indicator in the ATM cell header unique to AAL5 traffic. Automatic detection of AAL5 traffic allows enablement of packet-aware cell discarding techniques such as PPD and EPD on a Virtual Channel Connection (VCC) basis, whether in a switch for a VCC or for a Virtual Path Connection (VPC) to which the VCC belongs. | 01-27-2011 |
20110019546 | CONGESTION MANAGEMENT IN A NETWORK - Management of congestion level, in a computer-related context, is disclosed. Also disclosed is a system generating a plurality of computer network-related tables during system operation. A number of the tables are each separately indexed by a different index. The system includes at least one tangible computer-readable medium adapted to store, at each indexed location, a swap count providing an indication of the congestion level of the indexed location. The system also includes insert logic stored as instructions on the at least one medium for execution. When executed, the insert logic is operable to: i) insert, when a predetermined condition has been satisfied, a new entry by overwriting the current entry stored in the indexed location having the lowest swap count; and ii) update the swap counts in each of the indexed locations in a manner that maintains the total swap count at least substantially constant over time. | 01-27-2011 |
20110026398 | Dynamic Traffic Rearrangement to Enforce Policy Change in MPLS Networks - A system and method of rearranging Label Switched Paths (LSPs) and rerouting traffic in a DiffServ-enabled Multi-Protocol Label Switched (MPLS) network is disclosed. The system periodically monitors network performance, and rearranges LSPs and reroutes traffic through existing or new Label Switched Paths (LSPs) based on network performance and network bandwidth utilized by various DiffServ classes. | 02-03-2011 |
20110026399 | ADMISSION CONTROL AND ROUTING IN A PACKET NETWORK - Embodiments of the invention provide a network management sub-system which is preferably logically separate from the routing nodes (including gateway nodes) of a network. The network management sub-system receives load information relating to present packet flows on existing predetermined paths in the network, and when a request for admittance of a new packet flow is received, is able to make a decision as to whether the new flow should be both: i) admitted to the network; and ii) on to which path; in substantially the same process step. This is possible because the admission control and routing algorithms are integrated into a single process, the result of which provides both an admission control decision as well as a routing decision at the same time. By performing such an operation in a management sub-system which is separate from the routing nodes, there is no need for such functionality to be duplicated in nodes across the network, and instead the routing nodes are relieved of the burden of having to make such decision themselves. As a consequence, the network nodes can be kept simpler, and network control can be retained by the network operator in the management sub-system. | 02-03-2011 |
20110032820 | LOAD BALANCING IN CORE NETWORK COMPRISING A POOL OF CORE NETWORK ELEMENTS - A method of balancing load of an individual network element operating in a pool in a radio telecommunications network. In said network a user equipment is assigned to a network element from said pool of network elements based on relative weighting values associated with said network elements. Said relative weighting value indicates the capacity of a network element relative to other network elements in the pool. The method comprises: periodically determining load of said network element; reducing the relative weighting value if said network element is overloaded for a predefined number of periods, exceeding a limit of allowed consecutive overloads. | 02-10-2011 |
20110032821 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ROUTING DATA ON A PACKET NETWORK - A system and method routing content over a packet network. A call request is received at a call control manager to communicate data packets including real-time over a packet network. A determination is made of at least one network node through which a call path for a call is to be routed, the network performance information including real-time bandwidth usage and non-real time bandwidth usage. Network performance information associated with communications are accessed over the at least one network node. An automatic determination is made whether the at least one network node is impaired or congested. The real time bandwidth usage and the non-real time bandwidth usage is determined from the network performance information if the at least one network node is determined to be impaired or congested. The communications of the data packets are altered including the non-real-time content to modify the real-time bandwidth usage by decreasing the non-real time bandwidth usage based on the network performance information if the at least one network node is determined to be impaired or congested. Otherwise, the call is established through the at least one network node. | 02-10-2011 |
20110032822 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS FOR MEDICAL DATA - A communication method is disclosed, comprising: (i) wirelessly communicating in compliance with an IEEE 802.11 protocol (802.11 QoS) including quality of service extensions between a wireless access point ( | 02-10-2011 |
20110038259 | Priority Policing of Requests with Deferred Determination of Priority Level - Methods and apparatuses, including computer program products, are described for priority policing of requests with deferred determination of priority level. The method includes directing each packet in a data stream to a policer. The method also includes determining whether to allow, reject, or conditionally pass each packet through the policer based on parameters associated with the policer. The method also includes directing each packet conditionally passed by the policer to a classifier associated with the policer. The method also includes determining, by the classifier, a priority value of each packet received from the policer. The method also includes directing, by the classifier, each prioritized packet to the policer. The method also includes determining whether to allow or reject each prioritized packet through the policer based on the priority value. | 02-17-2011 |
20110038260 | CONGESTION AVOIDANCE FOR LINK CAPACITY ADJUSTMENT SCHEME (LCAS) - A device determines a high watermark threshold for a subrate service, compares a traffic demand to the high watermark threshold, and adds a temporary bandwidth to an original bandwidth available to the subrate service if the traffic demand is greater than or equal to the high watermark threshold. | 02-17-2011 |
20110038261 | TRAFFIC MANAGER AND A METHOD FOR A TRAFFIC MANAGER - The present invention relates to a traffic manager ( | 02-17-2011 |
20110075556 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR DYNAMIC LOAD BALANCING IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - The present disclosure relates to systems and methods for dynamic load balancing in a wireless network, such as a wireless local area network (WLAN) and the like. Specifically, the present invention periodically provides dynamic load balancing of mobile devices associated with a plurality of wireless access devices. This may include determining an optimum load and instructing wireless access devices that are overloaded to disassociate some mobile devices based upon predefined criteria. This disassociation is performed in a manner to minimize disruption by disassociating mobile devices with low usage, with close proximity to underutilized wireless access devices, and mobile devices not currently operating critical applications, such as voice. | 03-31-2011 |
20110075557 | PROVIDING OFFLOADS IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - This disclosure relates to a system and method for offloading selected data to an alternate communication network. The offloading provides another route for selected packet traffic that can relieve the burden on a mobile operator's network, such as the backhaul and core networks. As the proliferation of data rich content and increasingly more capable mobile devices has continued, the amount of data communicated over mobile operator's networks has exponentially increased. Upgrading the existing network that was designed for voice calls is not desirable or practical for many mobile operators. A offload gateway is provided that inspects packets and determines those packets to offload to an alternate network as well as providing mobility management to allow for seamless handoffs and gateway relocations. | 03-31-2011 |
20110090789 | QoS-aware Flow-based Dynamic Load Balancing for Link Aggregation - A method for dynamic load balancing of packet flows on link aggregation provides dynamic assignment of individual packet flow to egress port that is least congested. The degree of congestion is measured by the utilization of the transmit queues. The dynamic assignments are maintained in a flow table. They are timed out by tracking packet tags in the transmit queues of corresponding scheduling priorities. The load balancing method is aware of quality of service requirements of the traffic and also capable of preserving packet order. | 04-21-2011 |
20110090790 | Receiving Radio Access Technology Priority Settings Depending on the Operation Mode of a Terminal - The present invention relates to methods and arrangements of handling inter-working between different radio access technologies in a telecommunication system comprising communication network nodes ( | 04-21-2011 |
20110096662 | Inferring TCP Initial Congestion Window - A packet trace is received. Inter-arrival times between the multiple packets in the packet trace are determined. An inter-arrival time in the inter-arrival times that is greater than a threshold is identified. An order number of the inter-arrival time is identified. A determination is made as to whether a size of each of at least a portion of the multiple packets is equal to a maximum segment size. When a determination is made that the size of each of at least a portion of the multiple packets is equal to the maximum segment size a size of the ICW as a product of the order number and the maximum segment size is returned. | 04-28-2011 |
20110096663 | Method of Providing Bearer Specific Information for Wireless Networks - The Packet Control Function (PCF) has limited knowledge about the nature of the packet data arriving on a bearer path connected via the Packet Data Serving Node (PDSN), and cannot make an intelligent decision on its own as to how best to handle the packet data. Thus, the PDSN provides bearer-specific information by classifying the priority of received packet data; encapsulating the packet data within the payload of a Generic Routing Encapsulation (GRE) frame; and for high priority packet data i) setting a protocol type field in the header of the GRE frame indicating said packet includes an attribute field; and ii) adding an attribute field to the payload of the GRE packet which provides an indication of said high priority data. Furthermore, the PCF can send an A- | 04-28-2011 |
20110110228 | Method and Apparatus for Congestion Control for Inter-Working Communication Networks - A method for allowing distribution of congestion-related information between a cellular communication system supporting circuit-switched services and a cellular communication system supporting packet-switched services. A message destined for the packet-switched communication system is identified at the circuit-switched communication system, and congestion-related information, indicating the present congestion status of the circuit-switched communication network is included into the message. The message is then forwarded to a network node of the packet-switched communication system, where either a user equipment or the network node of the first cellular communication system can control Circuit-switched Fallback (CSFB) attempts towards the second communication system on the basis of the congestion-related information prior to having to initiate any access signaling associated with the CSFB attempts. | 05-12-2011 |
20110110229 | MULTI-RADIO COMMUNICATION BETWEEN WIRELESS DEVICES - In various embodiments, two wireless communication devices may communicate with each other using multiple protocols, by dividing the data to be communicated into multiple portions, and using each protocol to communicate different portions. The different protocols may be used simultaneously or concurrently. This multi-protocol technique may be used in several different ways to provide different types of advantages in wireless communications. | 05-12-2011 |
20110110230 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING CONGESTION OF WIRELESS MULTI-HOP NETWORK - A method and an apparatus for controlling congestion of a wireless multi-hop network are disclosed herein. Through this method and apparatus, data packets are transmitted from a fixed host to a mobile base station and from the mobile base station to a mobile host via a wireless path. A local retransmission by the mobile base station is performed according to the wireless path state information after packet(s) is not correctly received by the mobile host, and the retransmission is notified to the fixed host, thus avoiding futile retransmission of the lost packet by the fixed host. The state of the wireless path is marked as available or unavailable or congested or error according to the path information. If the state of the wireless path is not marked as unavailable, the local retransmission is performed at a high priority in response to a first Dup Ack packet received from the mobile host. | 05-12-2011 |
20110116368 | METHOD OF ACCESSING A COMMUNICATIONS CHANNEL - A method of accessing a communications channel, the method comprising: assigning a time transmission interval (TTI) and at least one temporary block flow (TBF) during an Access Grant Channel (AGCH) assignment; allocating an additional field in an Immediate Assignment message sent on the AGCH; using the additional field to simultaneously assign to a mobile station (MS) at least one temporary block flow on an uplink of the communications channel and at least one temporary block flow on a downlink of the communications channel. | 05-19-2011 |
20110116369 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR TASK SCHEDULING IM MULTI-MODE SOFTWARE DEFINED RADIO DEVICES - A software-defined radio system processes radio signals on multiple radios according to a task scheduling method. The scheduling method includes assigning a priority value to each received radio packet, the assigned priority value reflective of preset radio preferences and risk of radio packet loss, and determining a processing execution order for the received radio packets according to earliest associated processing deadline. If there is sufficient time to process each of the radio packets in the processing execution order ahead of their associated processing deadlines, the radio packet are so processed. Otherwise, the radio packet having the lowest priority is abandoned, the radio packets are re-ordered, and time sufficiency is re-checked. | 05-19-2011 |
20110128845 | ADMISSION METHOD, ADMISSION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An admission method, an admission apparatus, and a communication system are disclosed. The admission method includes: obtaining timeslot utilization efficiency R | 06-02-2011 |
20110128846 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING ACCESS OF COMMUNICATION MEDIUM ACCORDING TO MAC PROTOCOL OF IEEE 802.11 - The present invention relates to a method of controlling access to a wireless channel in a wireless communication system, and more particularly, to such a method of controlling wireless channel access, in which it is determined whether or not peripheral communication nodes are ones interrupting main communication between communication nodes being activated, and if it is determined that the peripheral communication nodes are ones which does not interrupt the main communication, they gain access to a wireless channel so as to perform parallel communication with respect to the main communication. The wireless channel access control method according to the present invention determines whether or not peripheral communication nodes actually interrupt main communication, and if it is determined that the peripheral communication nodes are ones which does not interrupt the main communication, they gain access to a wireless channel so as to perform parallel communication with respect to the main communication, thereby efficiently utilizing a limited wireless channel resource. | 06-02-2011 |
20110141886 | DUAL CONNECTION ADMISSION CONTROL (CAC) AT ORIGINATION AND DESTINATION POINTS IN LTE AND EPC NETWORKS - A device receives session information and subscription information, for a service request, from an originating evolved packet system (EPS) network, and forwards the session information and the subscription information to a destination policy control and charging rules function (PCRF) device associated with a destination EPS network. The device receives, from the destination PCRF device, a connection admission control (CAC) decision for the destination EPS network; determines, based on the CAC decision for the destination EPS network, a dual CAC decision for the originating EPS network and the destination EPS network; and forwards, to the destination PCRF device, the dual CAC decision. | 06-16-2011 |
20110141887 | SITE BASED MEDIA STORAGE IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A system and methodology that facilitates efficient utilization of bandwidth on a transmission link between a base station and a core mobility network, during content delivery is provided. Moreover, the system includes a data storage device, adjunct to, or integrated within, the base station for storing content locally. Typically, the data storage device is updated by downloading content from the core network at an optimal time. For example, content can be downloaded to the data storage device when the core network-to-base station link is idle, under utilized and/or has sufficient bandwidth for the download. On receiving a request for content from a user equipment (UE), the base station can directly deliver the content to the UE from the data storage device, over an air interface, when the requested content is locally available. | 06-16-2011 |
20110141888 | DATA TRANSPORT METHOD FOR PROTECTING PRIORITY DATA STREAMS IN A NETWORK - Device and method for transporting data streams in a network including several nodes in a given configuration at a given instant. The device includes a database storing the message(s) to be transmitted; a congestion control module connected to the database; a scheduler having as inputs the messages stored in the database, the route determined for a message by a routing table and a neighboring node table and information coming from a receiving module; a module comprising an opportunistic transport protocol receiving information from the scheduler and from a measurement module, the opportunistic transport protocol being designed to split a message to be transmitted into N packets P | 06-16-2011 |
20110149728 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR AVOIDING COLLISION OF UPLINK PREAMBLE USING CELL IDENTIFIER - A method and apparatus for avoiding a collision of an uplink preamble using a cell identifier. In a case of installing a new small-sized base station in a mobile communication system, the method and apparatus may set a code parameter, a time parameter, and a frequency parameter, differently from a neighboring small-sized base station using the cell identifier even when dedicatedly using a preamble in a contention-free scheme to avoid a collision of the preamble, so that a random access preamble may be managed without occurrence of the collision with the neighboring small-sized base stations. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149729 | SWITCHING ARRANGEMENT AND METHOD WITH SEPARATED OUTPUT BUFFERS - A switching device is able to route the arriving data packets according to data packet destination information to dedicated output ports. The switching arrangement has, for each set of input ports in the switching device, a set of output buffers with an output buffer for storing the payload of each data packet at an address in the output buffer which pertains to the same set of output buffers and belongs to the dedicated output ports. At least one of the output buffers has a set of output queues with an output queue for each output port for storing the address of each payload stored in the corresponding output buffer. An arbiter controls a readout order of the stored addresses. For the output buffers which pertain to the same set of output ports a multiplexer multiplexes according to the readout order the payloads from the output buffers to the output ports. | 06-23-2011 |
20110158089 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR DYNAMIC LOAD BALANCING IN A MULTI-CARRIER WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method enables a dynamic change from one carrier to another in a wireless telecommunication system. In one example, user equipment receives a preconfiguration message adapted to enable the user equipment to be preconfigured for an initial carrier and a subsequent carrier. Here, the user equipment initially communicates over an air interface utilizing the initial carrier frequency. Upon the satisfaction of certain conditions, such as one of the initial carriers being heavily loaded or nearing its capacity, a Node B provides an order to the user equipment to switch from its initial carrier to the secondary carrier, which was preconfigured. In this way, relatively rapid carrier switching provides for enhanced load balancing largely controlled by the Node B. | 06-30-2011 |
20110158090 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR CONDITION-TRIGGERED POLICIES - According to one aspect, the subject matter described herein includes a method for determining condition-triggered policies. The method occurs at a Diameter node. The method includes receiving a notification of a network condition. The method further includes determining, based on the network condition, policy information for a plurality of associated subscribers. | 06-30-2011 |
20110158091 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR PACKET SCHEDULING - A method for packet scheduling is provided by the present invention. The method includes: A. buffering a received packet into a corresponding virtual output queue (VOQ) according to a class of service (CoS) and a destination contained in a header of the packet; B. generating a grant for each VOQ respectively according to the number of the packets in each VOQ and network congestion degree, and distributing the grant to the VOQ; C. performing packet scheduling and dequeuing by each VOQ according to the grant; and D. performing a round-robin scheduling according to the priority of the dequeued packet, and then scheduling and outputting the packet. A device for implementing packet scheduling is also provided by the present invention. The method and device can realize distributed scheduling on VOQs, enable flexible scheduling, and save the hardware logic resources. | 06-30-2011 |
20110158092 | Policy Rule Management For QoS Provisioning - Described herein is a policy-based Internet Protocol (IP) network wherein the Quality of Service (QoS) provisioning across various network devices is managed by policy processing via a user interface including a graphic user interface. The user interface incorporates information made available by a server, such as lightweight directory access protocol (LDAP) server, having a repository, and thereby allows for a consistent set up voice-over IP devices, video devices and network data devices with minimal entries by the user. Further, the user interfaces allows for efficient policy creation and editing. | 06-30-2011 |
20110158093 | BANDWIDTH CONTROL METHOD AND BANDWIDTH CONTROL DEVICE IN NODE DEVICE - A node device and a bandwidth control method are provided that ensure fairness among bandwidths for use assigned to data flows even when output-side communication network accommodation functionality and bandwidth control functionality operate with different clocks. The node device includes a plurality of subscriber communication network accommodation sections SA | 06-30-2011 |
20110164496 | FLOW AND CONGESTION CONTROL IN SWITCH ARCHITECTURES FOR MULTI-HOP, MEMORY EFFICIENT FABRICS - A shared memory switch and switch fabric architecture are described which employ partitions of the shared memory to implement multiple, independent virtual congestion domains, thereby allowing congestion to be handled for different classes of traffic independently. | 07-07-2011 |
20110164497 | BAND CONTROL SYSTEM FOR A DIGITAL SUBSCRIBER NETWORK AND BAND CONTROL METHOD THEREFOR - A band control system for a digital subscriber line network in which a first apparatus and a second apparatus situated at a subscriber station and a center, respectively, are interconnected by a cable for interchanging at least a digital data signal with each other. The system may cause one of the first apparatus or the second apparatus to monitor receipt of signals from the other of the first apparatus or the second apparatus; send, based on a result of monitoring, a band variation command to the other apparatus for causing the other apparatus to vary a band by using a frequency band not used for signal transfer; cause the other apparatus to receive the band variation command; and vary the band in accordance with the band variation command. | 07-07-2011 |
20110170408 | CONGESTION LEVEL INDICATION WITH EXPLICIT CONGESTION NOTIFICATION IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A method, apparatus, and computer program product for indicating and responding to various congestion levels in a communication system, such as a wireless communication network. A congestion level in the network is determined, and a percentage of data packets to be transmitted to an endpoint, such as user equipment or another network endpoint serving the user, are marked to indicate the congestion level. The endpoint determines the congestion level at the network from the percentage of received data packets that are marked and may initiate an appropriate response behavior in response to the determined congestion level. | 07-14-2011 |
20110176414 | CONGESTION CONTROL FOR INTERWORKING BETWEEN NETWORKS - A congestion indication is introduced to indicate the congestion status of the circuit-switched network to a packet-switched network, such as an LTE network. The congestion indication is transmitted from an interworking function in the circuit-switched network to the LTE network. The congestion indication and/or other congestion information is transmitted with a circuit services signaling message that is otherwise being sent. Piggy-backing the congestion information with other circuit services signaling messages reduces the amount of signaling over the LTE network. | 07-21-2011 |
20110176415 | OPTIMIZED CONNECTION ADMISSION CONTROL FOR SYSTEMS USING ADAPTIVE MODULATION AND CODING TECHNIQUES - A method is proposed for controlling the admission of connections in a wireless communication system between a base station and a subscriber unit, in which the modulation and coding scheme of the uplink and downlink can be varied over time. The method comprises the steps of receiving a request for a connection and of admitting the connection and updating the available bandwidth, if the available bandwidth corresponding to the current AMC scheme is greater than the admission bandwidth of the connection. Moreover the method periodically evaluates if the current admission bandwidth can be changed for a plurality of active connections: if this is the case, and there is not enough bandwidth to allow the change, the method stops the admission of new connections, suspends at least one active connection of said plurality of active connections or changes the AMC scheme of such at least one active connection. On the other hand, if the current admission bandwidth can be changed and there is enough bandwidth to allow the change, the method updates the current admission bandwidth for the plurality of active connections and updates the available bandwidth. | 07-21-2011 |
20110176416 | Method for Discovering Multiple Routes in Sensor Networks - Multiple routes from a data source node to multiple data destination nodes in a large scale multi-hop mesh network are discovered. Nodes discover multiple routes to two destinations in an initial discovery phase that includes only two network-wide flooding of packets. The method can also work with one destination. The method can be extended to include more destinations with a proportional increase in the communication overhead. After the completion of the discovery phase, nodes can communicate or forward their own or received data by using any of the available routes. | 07-21-2011 |
20110176417 | ACCESS POINT, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND SERVER - Provided is an access point capable of handling a connection request exceeding the throughput while maintaining a communication state of a wireless communication terminal. The access point has a notification unit | 07-21-2011 |
20110182176 | METHOD AND APPARATUS TO PROVIDE MINIMUM RESOURCE SHARING WITHOUT BUFFERING REQUESTS - A throttle device is coupled with a central processing unit in a node for reducing traffic overload in a Next Generation Network (NGN). The device is coupled with a basic throttle with different levels of traffic priority and both are situated between a source node and a target node for processing traffic. When a traffic offer is received by the throttle, the throttle device by provisionally updating the basic throttle priority levels, determines whether to send the traffic offer on to the source node. If the provisional, traffic priority level is greater than a new traffic priority level the traffic is admitted and rejected if the updated priority level is less than the new traffic priority level. | 07-28-2011 |
20110182177 | Access control of Machine-to-Machine Communication via a Communications Network - A first communications device communicates with a second communications device by means of a communications network. The first communications device receives information from the communications network, wherein the information comprises a network load value and a mean delay time value. The first communications device ascertains whether the network load value satisfies a predetermined relationship with respect to a threshold load value and if the predetermined relationship is satisfied then it communicates a data packet over the network at a designated time that is ascertained by ascertaining one of a number of different wait time values, wherein the ascertained wait time value has a mathematical expectation equal to the mean delay time value. The first communication device then waits an amount of time corresponding to the ascertained wait time, without attempting to communicate the data packet over the communications network during the time in which the first communications device is waiting. | 07-28-2011 |
20110182178 | Randomization Management For Carrier Sensing Multiple Access with Collision Avoidance (CSMA-CA) - In at least some embodiments, a communication device includes a transceiver with Carrier Sensing Multiple Access with Collision Avoidance (CSMA-CA) logic. The CSMA-CA logic provides dynamic randomization management for a contention window size. | 07-28-2011 |
20110182179 | POLICING VIRTUAL CONNECTIONS - Traffic flow is monitored in a plurality of links. Based on the monitoring, a manner in which traffic is allocated to the links is determined, and at least one policer is assigned according to the manner in which traffic is allocated to the links. | 07-28-2011 |
20110182180 | Partition Configuration and Creation Mechanisms for Network Traffic Management Devices - Partition configuration and creation mechanisms for network traffic management devices. In some implementations, the present invention enhances the predictability of partition hierarchies that use weighting values and fixed rate guarantees. In some implementations, the present invention includes a configuration interface that constrains the manner in which partitions can be configured to achieve predictable and efficient results. In some implementations, the present invention includes a partition creation and deletion layer that operates to dynamically create partitions based on one or more partition patterns. | 07-28-2011 |
20110188372 | MINIMIZING PATHOLOGICAL FLOODING OF A NETWORK - In a method for minimizing pathological flooding of a network using a destination node, a packet is received from a source node at the destination node. The packet is transmitted from the source node to the destination node along a path. A determination is made by a node whether the packet indicates a possibility of pathological flooding. In response to a determination that the packet indicates a possibility of pathological flooding, a dummy packet is forwarded along the path to the source node. | 08-04-2011 |
20110188373 | INTERFACE CONTROL SYSTEM AND INTERFACE CONTROL METHOD - An interface control system of network equipment, includes: a logical interface which is an interface of a logical group; physical ports which belong to the logical group; and an interface control section configured to incorporate the logical interface and the physical ports as management objects into a management interface when validation of a predetermined function has been performed to each of the logical interface and the physical ports. | 08-04-2011 |
20110199897 | OVERLOAD CONTROL APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR USE IN RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An overload control apparatus and method for use in a radio communication system are provided. According to the overload control apparatus and method, it is possible to efficiently manage the capacity of a radio communication system by determining whether the radio communication system is overloaded based on the intensity of a service request signal transmitted by a terminal and controlling the service request signal according to the results of the determination. Therefore, it is possible to stably operate a radio communication system. | 08-18-2011 |
20110199898 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING NETWORK ACCESS OF UE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus for controlling network access of a User Equipment (UE) based on the network's load and time tolerance (delay tolerance) are provided. A network access method for a terminal in a wireless communication system includes sending an access request message containing a time-tolerant indicator at a predefined time, determining, when a reject message is received, a cause value and a hold time contained in the reject message, and re-sending the access request message after the hold time elapses. | 08-18-2011 |
20110205888 | Method and Apparatus for Controlling a Temperature of a Packet Communications Device - In accordance with an example embodiment of the present invention, a communications apparatus participates in a packet-based communication, obtains a temperature of the apparatus, and compares the temperature of the apparatus to a threshold temperature, and responsive to a result of the comparison, the apparatus starts dropping packets pertaining to the packet-based communication in the protocol layer. | 08-25-2011 |
20110205889 | Controlling packet transmission - Disclosed is a method of controlling transmission of data transmitted in packets from a transmitter to a receiver via a channel. The method comprises transmitting packets from the transmitter to the receiver; determining if the transmission delay and/or loss of subsequent packets transmitted to the receiver may be reduced beyond a threshold amount; controlling the transmission rate to be dependent on a first target delay if it is determined that the transmission delay and/or loss of subsequent packets transmitted to the receiver may not be reduced beyond a threshold amount; and controlling the transmission rate to be dependent on a second target delay if it is determined that the transmission delay and/or loss of subsequent packets transmitted to the receiver may be reduced beyond a threshold amount, wherein the second target delay is lower relative to the first target delay. | 08-25-2011 |
20110205890 | COMMUNICATION MANAGEMENT APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION MANAGEMENT METHOD, AND COMPUTER PRODUCT - An allocation unit allocates a path formed by combining a link between nodes to any one of a plurality of time slots. A slot rearrangement unit rearranges the plurality of time slots so that time slots to which a path is allocated by the allocation unit are consecutively arranged. A path rearrangement unit converts a path allocated to any one time slot rearranged by the slot rearrangement unit to a path formed by combining a link included in a path allocated to a time slot different from the time slot. A transmission unit transmits information of the path obtained by conversion performed by the path rearrangement unit. | 08-25-2011 |
20110205891 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR POLICING A QoS FLOW IN A MoCA 2.0 NETWORK - Systems and methods for policing a Quality of Service (QoS) flow in a MoCA network are provided. The network may include a sending node, a receiving node and a network controller. The network controller may allocate a QoS flow between the sending node and the receiving node. The sending node may request bandwidth for the QoS flow from the network controller. QoS requests have a higher priority than some other requests and may swamp the network. The sending node therefore polices its use of the network. First, the sending node computes a policing time period Tpp. Next the sending node computes a packet and bit allocation for the use of the network during a Tpp. Last the sending node sends reservation requests to the network controller when the allocation of packet or bits has not been exceeded. If any allocation has been exceeded the sending node reserves bandwidth via opportunistic reservation requests which have a lower priority than some other requests. | 08-25-2011 |
20110205892 | Systems and Methods for Flow Control and Quality of Service - Various embodiments of methods and systems for pausing and shaping data flow while supporting both parameterized and prioritized Quality of Service are disclosed. In some embodiments, a system for pausing and shaping data flow comprises an input buffer, a first pause controller coupled to the input buffer and an output buffer for flow control messages. Various embodiments also include a hop- | 08-25-2011 |
20110205893 | METHOD AND SYSTEM OF USING COUNTERS TO MONITOR A SYSTEM PORT BUFFER - Methods and systems for using counters to monitor port buffers are described. In one embodiment, the method includes receiving data packets into a system port buffer having different queues. Also, counters are associated with the queues. Further, the method includes scanning the counters, in which the counters count the number of dropped data packets associated with an individual queue of the different queues. Moreover, the method includes determining if the number of dropped data packets for an individual queue is greater than a predetermined number. If the number of dropped data packets is greater than the predetermined number, then a message is generated. | 08-25-2011 |
20110211447 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING HYBRID PER STATION AND PER FLOW UPLINK ALLOCATIONS - Method and apparatus for performing hybrid per station and per flow/connection uplink allocations are described. The apparatus may implement a hybrid per flow/connection and per station uplink (UL) resource allocation to improve UL control efficiency and UL resource utilization. The apparatus may be configured to transmit or receive a resource allocation in a signal that contains an indicator that indicates intended flow information. | 09-01-2011 |
20110211448 | PER-CLASS SCHEDULING WITH RATE LIMITING - Providing network access is disclosed. Use of a provider equipment port via which network access is provided to two or more downstream nodes, each having one or more classes of network traffic associated with it, is scheduled on a per class basis, across the downstream nodes. The respective network traffic sent to each of at least a subset of the two or more downstream nodes is limited, on a per downstream node basis, to a corresponding rate determined at least in part by a capacity of a communication path associated with the downstream node. | 09-01-2011 |
20110216648 | CONGESTION CONTROL FOR DELAY SENSITIVE APPLICATIONS - In various embodiments, methods and systems are disclosed for a hybrid rate plus window based congestion protocol that controls the rate of packet transmission into the network and provides low queuing delay, practically zero packet loss, fair allocation of network resources amongst multiple flows, and full link utilization. In one embodiment, a congestion window may be used to control the maximum number of outstanding bits, a transmission rate may be used to control the rate of packets entering the network (packet pacing), a queuing delay based rate update may be used to control queuing delay within tolerated bounds and minimize packet loss, and aggressive ramp-up/graceful back-off may be used to fully utilize the link capacity and additive-increase, multiplicative-decrease (AIMD) rate control may be used to provide fairness amongst multiple flows. | 09-08-2011 |
20110216649 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD, GATEWAY APPARATUS, AND RADIO STATION - A radio communication system includes a gateway apparatus and a plurality of radio stations performing radio communication. The gateway apparatus includes, a generation unit that generates allocation information on one or more individual channels each allocated individually to one of a plurality of radio stations; and a transmission unit that transmits the generated allocation information, and the plurality of radio stations each of which comprising, a receiving unit that receives the allocation information; and a data transmission unit that performs data transmission through the one or more individual channels when information indicating an own station is included in the received allocation information, and performs data transmission by random access through a channel other than the one or more individual channels in a radio frame when information indicating the own station is not included in the received allocation information. | 09-08-2011 |
20110216650 | Dynamic Adjustment of Receive Window Utilized by a Transmitting Device - A method of controlling size of a receive window includes, at a transmitting device, transmitting packets over a communication channel from the transmitting device to a receiver, receiving acknowledgment packets from the receiver corresponding to the transmitted packets, determining a backlog parameter for the receiver in accordance with a parameter value in the received acknowledgment packets, resetting the size of the receive window in accordance with a function of a current size of the receive window and the backlog parameter, and after the resetting, transmitting packets over the communication channel from the transmitting devices to the receiver in accordance with the reset size of the receive window. | 09-08-2011 |
20110222398 | PROTOCOL WITH IMPROVED SPATIAL REUSE - According to an embodiment, a method, apparatus, and computer readable medium can provide an efficient mechanism to improve data rates of nodes suffering high interference without sacrificing performance of nodes that do not need interference-free channels to communicate. A node can receive two or more RTS packets and identify the RTS packet corresponding to its own cell, as well as RTS packets belonging to interferers. Based on the interference level estimated from the RTS packets, the node can decide if the channel needs to be interference-free for the intended transmission or if the current level of interference is acceptable. According to the embodiment, there can be two or more different types of CTS packets. A node can decide which type of CTS packet to transmit based on the information, signal level, interference level, or a combination therein, of at least two RTS channels, and based on measurements performed on these RTS channels, or other channels. | 09-15-2011 |
20110222399 | QUALITY OF SERVICE MANAGEMENT METHOD, DEVICE AND SYSTEM (Amended) - A quality of service QoS management method, apparatus and system are disclosed. The method includes: receiving Qos information requested by a core network device, wherein the Qos information is assigned to a current originated session according to a Qos negotiation result during a user equipment UE session origination phase; according to the requested Qos information assigned to the current originated session, Qos information occupied by a current serving session of an access point AP accessed by the UE, and Qos associated information of the AP, determining and recording the Qos information occupied by the current originated session; and the AP establishing a wireless bearer with the UE according to the QoS information occupied by the current originated session. | 09-15-2011 |
20110222400 | VIDEO PACKET MULTIPLEXER WITH INTELLIGENT PACKET DISCARD - A IP video delivery system ( | 09-15-2011 |
20110222401 | Method and Apparatus for Selecting Frequency Layer for Connected Mode UE in an MBMS Mobile Communication System - A method and apparatus for selecting the PL of an interested MBMS service for a UE in an MBMS mobile communication system are provided. A connected mode UE receives FLC applicability information for an interested MBMS service and keeps a current frequency or reselects to the PL of the MBMS service according to the FLC applicability information. Even if the FLC applicability information restricts FLC from the connected mode UE, the connected mode UE can reselect to the PL of the MBMS service according to its priority level. | 09-15-2011 |
20110228672 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR PROVIDING NON-ACCESS STRATUM (NAS) NODE SELECTION FUNCTION (NNSF) WITH CORE NETWORK (CN) NODE BEARER CIRCUIT AVAILABILITY MONITORING AND AVAILABILITY-BASED LOAD SHARING - The subject matter described herein includes methods, systems, and computer readable media for providing a NAS node selection function with CN node bearer circuit availability monitoring and availability-based load sharing. According to one aspect, the subject matter described herein includes a method for providing a NAS node selection function. The method includes performing various steps at a NAS node selection function which may be integrated with or separate from a media gateway. The method includes monitoring bearer circuit availability for each of a plurality of CN nodes. The method further includes storing an indication of bearer circuit availability for each of the CN nodes. The method further includes receiving initial layer | 09-22-2011 |
20110235507 | Method for Resource and Admission Control - The present invention provides a method for resource and admission control. In the process of resource requesting: upon receiving a resource initialization request, which is used for requesting a QoS resource for a service, sent by an SCF, a PD-FE of a visited network performing an authorization check and a resource availability check for the resource initialization request, and sending the resource initialization request to a PD-FE of a home network; the PD-FE of the home network performing an authorization check and making an initial policy decision for the resource initialization request, and sending a resource initialization response containing the generated initial policy decision to the PD-FE of the visited network; and the PD-FE of the visited network making a final admission decision for the resource initialization request according to the initial decision policy and the result of the resource availability check. The method provided by the present invention specifies respective functional attributes of the PACF in the home network and of the PACF in the visited network and the interaction process between the two, and solves the problem of resource and admission control supporting roaming. | 09-29-2011 |
20110235508 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR LINK LOAD BALANCING ON A MULTI-CORE DEVICE - Systems and methods are described for link load balancing, by a multi-core intermediary device, a plurality of Internet links. The method may include load balancing, by a multi-core device intermediary to a plurality of devices and a plurality of Internet links, network traffic across the plurality of Internet links. The multi-core device providing persistence of network traffic to a selected Internet link based on a persistence type. A first core of the multi-core device receives, a packet to be transmitted via an Internet link to be selected from the plurality of Internet links. The first core sends to a second core of the multi-core device a request for persistence information responsive to identifying that the second core is an owner core of a session for persistence based on the persistence type. The first core receives the persistence information from the second core and determines to transmit the packet to the Internet link previously selected based on the persistence information received from the second core. | 09-29-2011 |
20110235509 | METHOD TO ACHIEVE BOUNDED BUFFER SIZES AND QUALITY OF SERVICE GUARANTEES IN THE INTERNET NETWORK - Methods to achieve bounded router buffer sizes and Quality of Service guarantees for traffic flows in a packet-switched network are described. The network can be an Internet Protocol (IP) network, a Differentiated Services network, an MPLS network, wireless mesh network or an optical network. The routers can use input queueing, possibly in combination with crosspoint queueing and/or output queueing. Routers may schedule QoS-enabled traffic flows to ensure a bounded normalized service lead/lag. Each QoS-enabled traffic flow will buffer O(K) packets per router, where K is an integer bound on the normalized service lead/lag. Three flow-scheduling methods are analysed. Non-work-conserving flow-scheduling methods can guarantee a bound on the normalized service lead/lag, while work-conserving flow-scheduling methods typically cannot guarantee the same small bound. The amount of buffering required in a router can be reduced significantly, the network links can operate near peak capacity, and strict QoS guarantees can be achieved. | 09-29-2011 |
20110235510 | DEVICES AND METHOD FOR GUARANTEEING QUALITY OF SERVICE PER SERVICE DATA FLOW THROUGH THE BEARER LAYER - In scenarios where the quality of service is negotiated through a signalling layer whereas the services are actually carried through a bearer layer, application functions at the signalling layer are not always aware of how quality of service is individually accomplished at the bearer layer on a service basis. The invention provides a method and devices whereby events are detected on a service data flow basis at a detection device in the bearer layer and notified towards an application device in the signalling layer via a control device between the signalling and the bearer layer. The list of events to be notified is obtainable at the control device from the application device and is included in Quality of Service related rules, along with service data flow filters. This Quality of Service related rules are provided to the detection device for inspecting individual service data flows in order to detect and notify the indicated events. | 09-29-2011 |
20110242973 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DYNAMICALLY POLICING NETWORK TRAFFIC BASED ON EGRESS QUEUE STATUS - A system and method for dynamically policing network traffic based on egress queue status and a network node incorporating the system or the method. In one embodiment, the system includes: (1) a policing engine configured to receive egress queue status information and (2) a pushback calculator associated with the policing engine and configured to produce a reduction calculation based on the egress queue status information, the policing engine further configured to produce a throttle signal to reduce a traffic policing rate of an ingress queue. | 10-06-2011 |
20110242974 | NETWORK TRANSPORT SYSTEM WITH HYBRID DYNAMIC BANDWIDTH ALLOCATION MECHANISM AND METHOD OF OPERATION THEREOF - A method of operation of a network transport system includes: determining a congestion mode based on a total bandwidth request meeting or exceeding a bandwidth threshold, where the congestion mode indicates a level of network traffic and the total bandwidth request is a sum of all bandwidth requests for accessing the network; calculating a fixed information rate schedule grant based on a fixed information rate list to create a bandwidth grant for a fixed information rate request; calculating a low latency schedule grant based on a low latency list to create the bandwidth grant for a low latency request; calculating a main schedule grant for allocating an available bandwidth based on the congestion mode, where the main schedule grant is calculated using a weighted maximum-minimum fairness method when the congestion mode indicates congestion; and generating a grant packet for defining a transmission schedule of a first network unit. | 10-06-2011 |
20110242975 | Single and Dual Internet Protocol Bearer Support - An apparatus operable in a communication system and having the capability to discard an internet protocol address is described. The apparatus is configured to receive an assignment of a first internet protocol address of a first type for a first application and a second internet protocol address of a second type for a second application for a data connection to a network. The apparatus is also configured to determine that the apparatus is currently not able to handle both the first internet protocol address and the second internet protocol address. The apparatus is further configured to determine an internet protocol address to discard, and discard the determined internet protocol address. | 10-06-2011 |
20110242976 | METHOD, COMMUNICATION NETWORK AND DATACENTER FOR TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Method, communication network and datacenter for data traffic management in a communication network. The invention provides a method for data traffic management in a communication network. The method first includes setting up a first communication path for a first data communication and transmitting data from a source of the first data communication to a destination of the first data communication. Then, features of a saturation tree representing a congestion of data transmission in the first data communication are monitored and a data rate of the first data communication along the first communication path is adapted based on the monitored features. The present invention further provides a datacenter and a communication network. | 10-06-2011 |
20110249553 | TCP CONGESTION CONTROL FOR HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS - A congestion control mechanism for TCP communication sessions is described. The congestion control mechanism adjusts the size of the congestion window based on a number, N, of parallel virtual connections. The number N of parallel virtual connections used to determine the congestion window is dynamically adjusted based on an estimation of the network condition. | 10-13-2011 |
20110249554 | DYNAMIC BANDWIDTH QUEUE ALLOCATION - In one of many possible embodiments, a system includes a plurality of queues configured to share an amount of bandwidth, the amount of bandwidth being allocated between the queues in accordance with a plurality of queue weighting factors associated with the queues. The system further includes an admission control subsystem configured to dynamically adjust the queue weighting factors when a predefined condition has been satisfied. In certain embodiments, the admission control subsystem is configured to adjust the queue weighting factors based on a ratio of bandwidth provisioned on the plurality of queues. In certain embodiments, each of the queues is associated with a different class of service. | 10-13-2011 |
20110255401 | PROCEDURE FOR BASIC SERVICE SET (BSS) LOAD MANAGEMENT IN WLAN SYSTEM - Provided are a basic service set (BSS) load management procedure and a quiet interval setup procedure in a wireless local area network (WLAN) system. The WLAN system uses a bonding channel, and an access point (AP) of the WLAN system provides BSS load information regarding a channel having a bandwidth less than or equal to a bandwidth of the bonding channel (e.g., each of channels of 20 MHz, 40 MHz, 60 MHz, and 80 MHz) to STAs of the WLAN system. The BSS load information may be specified by an extended BSS load element. The AP transmits the extended BSS load element to the STAs by including the BSS load information to a beacon frame or a probe response frame. | 10-20-2011 |
20110255402 | Multiplexed Data Stream Circuit Architecture - An apparatus comprising an ingress controller configured to receive a data frame comprising a high priority data and a low priority data, and an ingress buffer coupled to the ingress controller and configured to buffer the low priority data, wherein the high priority data is not buffered. Also disclosed is a network component, comprising an ingress controller configured to receive a data stream comprising high priority data and low priority data, and an ingress buffer coupled to the ingress controller and configured to receive, buffer, and send the low priority data, and further configured to receive a flow control indication, wherein the ingress buffer varies an amount of the low priority data sent from the ingress buffer in accordance with the flow control indication. | 10-20-2011 |
20110261686 | Priority Pause (PFC) in Virtualized/Non-Virtualized Information Handling System Environment - A priority based pause frame format for use with a system which enables traffic for a particular source (e.g., the source that is causing the congestion) to be paused on a particular priority queue instead of pausing the traffic for all sources. In certain embodiments, the system provides enhancements to a priority based pause frame format specified by the DCB standard. Also, in certain embodiments, the system maintains a per MAC pause/resume status at a per priority queue level on each network port in network device such as a switch or converged network adapter (CAN). In certain embodiments, the system further includes a mechanism for a congested port to generate source specific pause/resume frame. Also, in certain embodiments, the system further includes a mechanism to process queues and packets at a port receiving a pause/resume frame. Such a system advantageously enables hardware based processing of packets in each queue of a network which conforms to the DCB standard. | 10-27-2011 |
20110261687 | Priority Based Flow Control Within a Virtual Distributed Bridge Environment - Systems and methods to communicate data frames are provided. A particular apparatus may include a first adapter having a first queue configured to store a data frame associated with a first priority. The adapter is configured to generate a first priority pause frame. A distributed virtual bridge may be coupled to the first adapter. The distributed virtual bridge may include an integrated switch router and a first transport layer module configured to provide a frame-based interface to the integrated switch router. The transport layer module may include a first buffer associated with the first priority. A first bridge element of the distributed virtual bridge may be coupled to the first adapter queue and to the first transport layer module. The first bridge element is configured to receive the first priority pause frame from the adapter and to communicate an interrupt signal to the first transport layer module to interrupt delivery of the data frame to the first queue. | 10-27-2011 |
20110261688 | Priority Queue Level Optimization for a Network Flow - Optimizing priority queue levels for a flow in a network includes determining a path for the flow, determining an optimized priority queue level of the flow at each of a plurality of switches based on a Quality of Service (QoS) requirement of the flow and priority queue levels of one or more existing flows in the network. Information of the optimized priority queue level of the flow is sent to at each of the switches. | 10-27-2011 |
20110261689 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR REDIRECTING NETWORKED TRAFFIC - A method of redirecting network traffic is described, in which traffic originating from a first network element is modified by rewriting the Type of Service field of an Internet Protocol packet, and the modified traffic is redirected to a second network element. | 10-27-2011 |
20110261690 | Method and system for resource and admission control in an NGN home network - The present disclosure discloses a method and system for resource and admission control in an NGN home network. Through setting up an Rh interface between the Policy Decision Function Entity of the NGN service provider and the Home Gateway Enforcement Function Entity in the customer premise network, the Policy Decision Function Entity of the service provider makes the resource and admission control policy for the customer premises network and sends down the policy rules to the customer premises network through the interface. Thus the quality of service of the network that the users use could be ensured well. | 10-27-2011 |
20110261691 | Congestion Window Control Based On Queuing Delay and Packet Loss - A method of controlling size of a congestion window, includes, at a transmitting device, transmitting a plurality of data packets over a communication channel from the transmitting device to a receiver, determining a queuing delay and a loss rate of the transmission, comparing the queuing delay to a threshold queuing delay, comparing the loss rate to a threshold loss rate, and in response to a determination that the queuing delay is greater than the threshold queuing delay and the loss rate is greater than the threshold loss rate, resetting the size of the congestion window in accordance with a function of the current size of the congestion window, the queuing delay, and the loss rate, wherein at equilibrium the function generates a value inversely proportional to a weighted sum of an excess queuing delay and an excess loss rate. | 10-27-2011 |
20110267942 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR FLOW CONTROL ASSOCIATED WITH A SWITCH FABRIC - In some embodiments, an apparatus includes a switch fabric having at least a first switch stage and a second switch stage, an edge device operatively coupled to the switch fabric and a management module. The edge device is configured to send a first portion of a data stream to the switch fabric such that the first portion of the data stream is received at a queue of the second switch stage of the switch fabric via the first switch stage of the switch fabric. The management module is configured to send a flow control signal configured to trigger the edge device to suspend transmission of a second portion of the data stream when a congestion level of the queue of the second switch stage of the switch fabric satisfies a condition in response to the first portion of the data stream being received at the queue. | 11-03-2011 |
20110267943 | STATIC UU-UN BEARER MAPPING BASED ON QUALITY OF SERVICE - Certain aspects of the present disclosure provide techniques and apparatuses for implementing a static mapping between a Uu radio bearer and a Un radio bearer based on quality of service (QoS) class identifier (QCI). According to certain aspects, a donor base station perform a Un bearer management procedure to establish a Un radio bearer that does not utilize TFT such that the QCI-based static Uu-Un bearer mapping does not interfere with existing traffic mappings that utilize Service Data Flow (SDF) filters. In addition, the QCI-based static Uu-Un bearer mapping can satisfy QoS requirement(s) for bearer handling without requiring modification to wireless protocols or associated specification(s) of telecommunication networks with relay nodes. | 11-03-2011 |
20110267944 | Admission Control Systems and Methods - In one aspect, the invention provides an adaptive admission control method. In some embodiments, this method includes: (a) storing an admission control threshold value (ACTV) for a GBR capacity partition; (b) for at least a plurality of GBR bearers included in the GBR partition, determining a first performance value for the GBR bearer and determining whether the first performance value for the GBR bearer exceeds a first configured threshold; (c) determine a first percentage value identifying the percentage of GBR bearers included in the GBR capacity partition whose first performance value exceeds the first configured threshold; (d) comparing the first percentage value to a first performance threshold value; and (e) using the result of the comparison in determining whether the ACTV should be increased, decreased or remain the same. | 11-03-2011 |
20110273982 | DEDUPLICATED DATA PROCESSING CONGESTION CONTROL - Various embodiments for deduplicated data processing congestion control in a computing environment are provided. In one such embodiment, a single congestion metric is determined from a sampling of a plurality of combined deduplicated data processing congestion statistics in a number of active deduplicated data processes. The congestion limit is calculated from a comparison of the single congestion metric to a congestion target setpoint, the congestion target setpoint being a virtual dimension setpoint and the congestion limit being a manipulated variable. The number of active deduplicated data processes is compared to the congestion limit. If the number of active deduplicated data processes is less than the congestion limit, a new deduplicated data process is spawned. | 11-10-2011 |
20110280124 | Systems and Methods for Load Balancing of Management Traffic Over a Link Aggregation Group - According to one embodiment, a method includes configuring a plurality ports as member ports of a link aggregation group. The method also includes configuring the link aggregation group to communicate management traffic originating from a plurality of maintenance entities communicatively coupled to the link aggregation group communicate carrier traffic originating from other network elements communicatively coupled to the link aggregation group. The method further includes assigning individual maintenance entities of the plurality of maintenance entities to individual physical ports of the link aggregation group in order to balance maintenance traffic among the plurality of physical ports. | 11-17-2011 |
20110280125 | Adaptive Queue-Management - In one embodiment, a method includes storing in a QoS-enabled communication system a data structure that has a multi-level hierarchy including a physical level, a logical level, and a class level; receiving a first request for M number of services provided by the QoS-enabled communication system; in response to the first request, modifying an allocation of the logical-level nodes by mapping M class-level nodes to a first one of the logical-level nodes according to a first mapping mode of the data structure; receiving a second request for P services provided by the QoS-enabled communication system, with P being greater than M; and, in response to the second request, modifying an allocation of the logical-level nodes by mapping P class-level nodes to a second one of the logical-level nodes according to a second mapping mode of the data structure. | 11-17-2011 |
20110280126 | EXTRA CAPACITY IN PATH-PROTECTED COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - A method for managing traffic in a communication network which includes a protected path including a first path and a second path, including refraining from sending redundant data along the second path, and using freed up communication capacity obtained by refraining from sending redundant data along the second path for sending other data along the second path. The above-described method and further comprising measuring path integrity, in which the refraining from sending and the using freed up communication capacity depend, at least partly, on meeting a stability criterion applied to the measured path integrity. A network management unit configured to functionally connect to a communication node configured to provide path protection by sending redundant data along a first path and a second path, configured to cause the communication node to refrain from sending redundant data along the second path, and use freed up communication capacity, obtained by causing the communication node to refrain from sending redundant data along the second path, for sending other data along the second path. Related apparatus and methods are also described. | 11-17-2011 |
20110280127 | Load Balancing in Relay-Enhanced Access Networks - There are provided measures for load balancing in relay-enhanced access networks with a relay device and multiple access devices, said measures exemplarily including the setting of multiple links between a backbone device of a backbone network and said multiple access devices, and a management of resource allocation of said multiple links between said backbone device and said multiple access devices in accordance with resource information of said multiple access devices indicating resource availability and resource assignment of said multiple access devices for establishing multiple connections between said backbone device and said relay device via said multiple access devices. | 11-17-2011 |
20110286328 | SYSTEM MANAGEMENT METHOD AND SYSTEM MANAGEMENT APPARATUS - Provided is an IT system to minimize occurrence of a bottleneck on a network while effectively making use of the bandwidth of the network. A system management apparatus collects performance information from a network device, and calculates the average value, the peak hour, and the variance from the collected performance information. In response to a request for addition of a business system, the system management apparatus builds configuration patterns of a group of virtual servers configuring the business system and monitors traffic states of the paths on the network, identifies the part of the network where the traffic quality is most degraded, and determines the pattern that includes the path which has the smallest variance in the traffic based on traffic information on the part where the communication quality is degraded identified in each pattern as the requested system configuration of the business system. | 11-24-2011 |
20110292792 | Applying Policies to Schedule Network Bandwidth Among Virtual Machines - Computerized methods, systems, and computer-storage media for allowing virtual machines (VMs) residing on a common physical node to fairly share network bandwidth are provided. Restrictions on resource consumption are implemented to ameliorate stressing the network bandwidth or adversely affecting the quality of service (QoS) guaranteed to tenants of the physical node. The restrictions involves providing a scheduler that dynamically controls networking bandwidth allocated to each of the VMs as a function of QoS policies. These QoS policies are enforced by controlling a volume of traffic being sent from the VMs. Controlling traffic includes depositing tokens into token-bucket queues assigned to the VMs, respectively. The tokens are consumed as packets pass through the token-bucket queues. Upon consumption, packets are held until sufficient tokens are reloaded to the token-bucket queues. | 12-01-2011 |
20110292793 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - A communication apparatus includes: a higher-layer processing unit that starts up a retransmission process of a corresponding packet in accordance with reception of a Duplicate ACK packet; and a lower-layer processing unit that collects a plurality of the Duplicate ACKs received through a network as one ACK and sends the one ACK to a higher layer. | 12-01-2011 |
20110292794 | Mobile Node Entry at Radio Access Arrangement Restart - The invention relates to communication between mobile nodes and/or node arrangements in wireless communication networks. In particular, the invention relates to a method in a radio access arrangement for improving the balance between the capacity allocated to initial access for network entry and the capacity allocated to pay-loads in the radio access arrangement. The radio access arrangement is configured to operatively communicate with a plurality of mobile nodes via an air interface. First, an initial access capacity is set to a value (S | 12-01-2011 |
20110292795 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR FAIR SHARED DE-QUEUE AND DROP ARBITRATION IN A BUFFER - Systems and methods consistent with the present invention provide a mechanism that can efficiently manage multiple queues and maintain fairness among ports while not placing additional performance demands on the memory used to store the queue data structures. Within a port, high priority traffic is dropped only if it is consuming more than its fair share of bandwidth allocated to that port. Queue arbitration is of low performance cost and simple because it arbitrates only across queues per port, rather than across all the queues in parallel. Accordingly, fair arbitration with relatively little hardware cost. | 12-01-2011 |
20110292796 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR INTELLIGENT DISCARD IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Systems and methods for optimizing system performance of capacity and spectrum constrained, multiple-access communication systems by selectively discarding packets are provided. The systems and methods provided herein can drive changes in the communication system using control responses. One such control responses includes the optimal discard (also referred to herein as “intelligent discard”) of network packets under capacity constrained conditions. Some embodiments provide an interactive response by selectively discarding packets to enhance perceived and actual system throughput, other embodiments provide a reactive response by selectively discarding data packets based on their relative impact to service quality to mitigate oversubscription, others provide a proactive response by discarding packets based on predicted oversubscription, and others provide a combination thereof | 12-01-2011 |
20110299389 | Real Time Monitoring, Onset Detection And Control Of Congestive Phase-Transitions in Communication Networks - Systems and methods for managing network congestion through detecting the closeness to network congestion. The network includes a plurality of network nodes, where each node has at least one neighboring node and each node has a buffer for a queue of packets from other nodes. The system measures queue length at a node and the node's neighboring nodes, processes the measured queue lengths to obtain patterns of fluctuations for the measured queue length. The system determines if one or more of the measured nodes are in a transition-onset status toward a phase transition point based on the obtained patterns of fluctuation and generates congestion control signals based on the determination to route network traffic away. The phase transition point corresponds to a change from a non-congestive phase of the measured nodes to a congestive phase of the measured nodes. | 12-08-2011 |
20110299390 | RESOURCE AND ADMISSION CONTROL SUBSYSTEM AND METHOD THEREOF IN NGN - A Resource and Admission Control Subsystem (RACS) in an NGN includes: a Resource Control Function in access network (A-RCF), an Access Admission Control Function (A-ACF), a Resource Control Function in core network (C-RCF), an Interconnection Admission Control Function (I-ACF), and corresponding interfaces. As a logically independent subsystem, RACS can support transport QoS requirements of multiple service subsystems (including IP multimedia service subsystem and PSTN/ISDN service emulation subsystem) simultaneously, implement QoS control for interconnecting links between different administrative domains, balance network load, prevent congestion (especially at bottle necks of network resources), support necessary measurement and protection mechanisms on the transport layer, and solve the problem of competition for transport resources among NGN traffics in the network administrative domains. | 12-08-2011 |
20110305137 | ADMISSION CONTROL FOR SHARED LTE NETWORK - Embodiments of the present invention are directed to providing a method and system for call admission control for a Long Term Evolution (LTE) network shared between a plurality of user classes, such as, for example, a public safety user class and a consumer user class. An admission control module oversees the call admission process based on a specified policy profile. When there are insufficient resources in the network to support an incoming call, the admission control module will consult with a preemption module to determine whether, by preemption of lower priority calls, enough resources can be recovered to support the incoming call. | 12-15-2011 |
20110305138 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR CLASSIFYING TRAFFIC FLOWS IN A PACKET-BASED WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The invention relates to a method for classifying traffic flows in a packet-based wireless communication system, said packet-based wireless communication system comprising at least one radio access network and a packet-domain core network, said method including the step of analyzing at least one data packet of at least one traffic flow through deep packet inspection at the level of the core network in order to classify the traffic flow. In order to save resources by enabling selective deep packet inspection, it is proposed that the method further comprises the steps of determining whether or not a data packet relates to at least one context out of a set of predetermined critical contexts, wherein the context is a function relating data packets to selected users, selected areas, and/or selected services, and selecting the at least one data packet for deep packet inspection if the data packet relates to one of said predetermined critical contexts. | 12-15-2011 |
20110305139 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING AND MANAGING CONGESTION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A method and apparatus may be used for network management via MAC measurements. The measurements may include WTRU uplink traffic loading measurement, and an AP service loading measurement. The measurements may be applicable to at least to layers | 12-15-2011 |
20110310731 | CONTROLLING NETWORK RESOURCE USAGE OF MACHINE TYPE COMMUNICATION (MTC) DEVICES - A method for controlling network resource usage of a machine type communication (MTC) device is described. A request for network resources is received from an MTC application. A notification of a status of the MTC application is sent to a core network (CN). A set of commands is received from the CN. The commands as instructed by the CN are performed. | 12-22-2011 |
20110310732 | ADMISSION CONTROL FOR Q0S-DRIVEN WIRELESS LANS - A method and system for a quality of service (QoS) point coordinator (PC) for a basic service set (BSS) in a wireless local area network (WLAN) is disclosed. The PC includes a QoS management entity (QME) and an admission control entity (ACE). The QME receives at least one reservation request message that characterizes one of a QoS session and QoS application (session/application) that can be of a continuous/periodic flow type that is time sensitive, or can be of a discontinuous/bursty flow type that is time tolerant. The reservation request message contains at least one QoS parameter set and requests a resource of a communication channel in the BSS for the QoS session/application. The communication channel is organized into superframes, such that each superframe includes a contention-free period (CFP) and a contention-period (CP). The reservation request message requests a predetermined bandwidth of each CFP of the communication channel in the BSS. The ACE performs macro bandwidth management for QoS traffic transport of the session/application over a medium access control (MAC) sublayer for the communication channel by determining whether to grant the reservation request based on at least one QoS parameter set associated with the session/application. | 12-22-2011 |
20110310733 | ENHANCED MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE, AND TRANSPORTATION APPLICATION THEREOF - An enhanced mobile communication device communicates directly with other enhanced mobile communication devices in an ad-hoc mode over a wireless medium. The device transmits and receives packets of digital data. The packets of digital data are such that when transmitted, the probability that they will be received by the other mobile communication devices is increased. The probability is further increased by transmitting the packets a multiple and variable number of times according activity in the wireless medium. Attempts to transmit are made periodically and the period of transmission is adjusted according to activity in the wireless medium. In a transportation application, the packets comprise vehicle traffic congestion update information. The device maintains a traffic database and a map database. Traffic congestion update information is exchanged with other devices. Routes through the map from a source or current position of the device to a destination are computed according to an analysis of the traffic database. | 12-22-2011 |
20110317553 | APPARATUS AND METHOD OF DYNAMIC DOWNLINK PERMUTATION ASSIGNMENT FOR USE IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of assigning parameter values to transceivers in a wireless communication network. Each of the parameter values assigned determines at least in part how a plurality of subcarriers are organized into a plurality of sub-channels. In particular embodiments, the method assigns the parameter values to the transceivers based on correlations between the sub-channels determined by the parameter values, distances between the transceivers, and loads experienced by the transceivers. After the parameter values are assigned to the transceivers, each of the transceivers is configured to transmit on the sub-channels determined at least in part by the parameter value assigned to the transceiver. | 12-29-2011 |
20110317554 | Distributed and Scalable Network Address Translation - A method of enabling an electronic privately addressable source to be publicly addressable starts at a receiver where an electronic message is received. It is communicated from a sender with a private address outside a subnet of the receiver through a translator. The translator retrieves a lease to at least one of a public address or a port from a lease manager, translates the private address and the private port into a public address and a public port and communicates identifying data such as the public address and the public port to the receiver. If a response is communicated to the private sender, the response may be communicated to the private sender through the network. The public address and the public port on the message may be translated to the private address and the port of the private sender and the private address and the private port may be used to properly route the response to the private sender. | 12-29-2011 |
20110317555 | PARALLEL OPERATION OF RSTP (RAPID SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL) AND MRP (MEDIA REDUNDANCY PROTOCOL) AND SEGMENTATION/COUPLING - The invention relates to a method for running a network, in particular an Ethernet network with redundancy properties, wherein the network has a ring network topology, in which network devices are connected to each other with the data ports thereof via data lines and exchange control data and user data by means of protocols via the data lines, wherein the protocols prevent the transmission of network traffic via certain data ports of individual network devices with the exception of network traffic for controlling and/or monitoring the media redundancy, in order to avoid an endless circulation of network traffic in physical loops of the network, wherein it is provided according to the invention that at least two different protocols are executed parallel to each other in the network on the network devices, wherein the parallel operation of the at least two redundancy protocols is enabled by the fact that the control over the data ports to be blocked is assigned to an individual redundancy, or the parameters for the at least two redundancy protocols are chosen and/or the work processes of the redundancy protocols are arranged that one redundancy protocol does not block connections which the other redundancy protocol regards as active. | 12-29-2011 |
20120002540 | METHOD FOR QOS AUTHORIZATION - The invention is directed to providing a method and apparatus for authorizing Quality of Service (QoS) at a Policy and Charging Rules Function (PCRF) node in response to receiving a service request for a subscriber having a requested QoS, a QoS Negotiation Attribute Value Pair (AVP) and a QoS Upgrade AVP such that the QoS Negotiation AVP takes precedence over the QoS Upgrade AVP. | 01-05-2012 |
20120002541 | FLOW-BASED PROACTIVE CONNECTION ADMISSION CONTROL (CAC) IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - A device receives available capacity and used capacity associated with a network, receives a connection request from a user device in the network, and receives a maximum capacity threshold associated with the network. The device calculates a minimum capacity threshold and a medium capacity threshold, associated with the network, based on the maximum capacity threshold. The device also determines whether to admit or deny the connection request based on the available capacity, the used capacity, the minimum capacity threshold, the medium capacity threshold, and the maximum capacity threshold. The device further allocates, when the connection request is to be admitted and based on resource availability associated with the network, a particular bit rate, for a particular quality of service (QoS) class, to the connection request. | 01-05-2012 |
20120002542 | Traffic Engineering and Server Selection for Content Distribution - An apparatus comprising a traffic engineering (TE) and server selection (SS) component configured to couple to an SS component and operate at a first time scale based on SS policies from the SS component, wherein the SS is configured to operate at a second timescale based on TE policies from the TE and SS component, and wherein the second timescale has a finer time granularity than the first time scale by at least one order of magnitude. Also disclosed is a network component comprising a receiver configured to receive one or more SS policies from a content provider or customer node, a logic circuit configured to compute a plurality of joint TE and SS policies for a plurality of network nodes based on the received SS policies, and a transmitter configured to send the joint TE and SS components to the content provider or customer node. | 01-05-2012 |
20120008494 | Offering Incentives under a Flat Rate Charging System - The invention describes a method of providing incentives to users via supporting mechanisms and algorithms for facilitating the move of DT traffic to off-peak hours. It proposes an efficient utilization of the network resources during peak hour under a flat-rate pricing scheme with the cooperation and blessing of the users and without adding complexity to billing. | 01-12-2012 |
20120008495 | Methods And Systems For Controlling SIP Overload - Techniques for controlling Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) overload between a sending entity and a receiving entity includes receiving a message at a send buffer at the sending entity and forwarding the message to a receive buffer at the receiving entity if the send buffer is empty of other messages or rejecting the message if the send buffer is not empty of other messages. | 01-12-2012 |
20120014248 | ADMISSION CONTROL - The present invention relates to a network node and a method in a network node for admission control of broadcast transmission sessions. The method comprises receiving a broadcast transmission session start request for a first broadcast transmission session, obtaining at least a first traffic statistics parameter related to said first broadcast transmission session, obtaining the available bit rate for the broadcast transmission area, and obtaining a re-synchronisation parameter indicating the time between re-synchronisation of transmissions for said broadcast transmission session. The method also calculates a first expected bit error rate based on said at least first traffic statistics parameter, said available bit rate and said re-synchronisation parameter, and admits said first broadcast transmission session if said first expected bit error rate is less than a first bit error rate threshold. | 01-19-2012 |
20120020208 | ENHANCING MOBILE MULTIPLE-ACCESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - A method for estimating engine thrust values of an aircraft is disclosed, the method comprising calculating estimated thrust value of an engine based on an equation of longitudinal motion, aircraft data measured during flight and calibrated drag/lift models, and a method for determining the thrust of an aircraft engine, based on information available from tracking the aircraft air-speed, acceleration, and position, the method comprising calculating the thrust, using the following equation: Thrust=mg{dot over (H)}/V+m{dot over (V)}+Drag. | 01-26-2012 |
20120020209 | LOAD BALANCING - A method of communicating in a wireless network including receiving effective load values for sectors accessible to an access terminal of the wireless network. The effective load values represent effective loads on the sectors. The method also includes receiving pilot signal channel quality values of the sectors and selecting a serving sector, for the access terminal based on the effective load values and the pilot signal channel quality values. | 01-26-2012 |
20120026868 | Backplane Interface Adapter - A backplane interface adapter for a network switch. The backplane interface adapter includes at least one receiver that receives input cells carrying packets of data; at least one cell generator that generates encoded cells which include the packets of data from the input cells; and at least one transmitter that transmits the generated cells to a switching fabric. The cell includes a destination slot identifier that identifies a slot of the switching fabric towards which the respective input cell is being sent. The generated cells include in-band control information. | 02-02-2012 |
20120026869 | METHOD FOR MEAURING IP NETWORK PERFORMANCE AND CONTROLLING QOS, AND APPARATUS AND SYSTEM THEREOF - The present invention discloses a method for measuring IP network performance and controlling IP network QoS, and apparatus and system thereof. In embodiments of the present invention, the information about the measurement contents, the data stream to be measured, and the measurement modes is sent to the IP network performance measurement peer end, and the end-to-end IP network performance measurement of the measurement contents of the data stream to be measured is started according to the measurement modes. | 02-02-2012 |
20120026870 | PROXY AGENTS IN A NETWORK - Methods for network device management are described. Load balancing for one or more proxy agents | 02-02-2012 |
20120026871 | System and Method of Communicating a Media Stream - A particular method includes measuring port usage data related to each of a plurality of physical ports associated with a link aggregation group. A bandwidth requirement of a requested media stream is estimated and added to a traffic load at each of the plurality of physical ports to produce an estimated total traffic load of each of the plurality of physical ports. When the requested media stream includes non-video data, the requested media stream is sent to a destination device via a physical port that selected in accordance with a static bandwidth allocation. When the requested media stream includes video data, the requested media stream is sent to the destination device via a least loaded physical port that is dynamically identified based on the estimated traffic loads of each of the plurality of physical ports. | 02-02-2012 |
20120026872 | METHOD FOR MAINTAINING DATALINK NETWORK THROUGHPUT BY DELAYING LOWER PRIORITY MESSAGES - A method of maintaining datalink network throughput in a communications channel by delaying lower priority messages is provided. The method comprises receiving periodic channel occupancy data from a radio, and updating channel occupancy status from the channel occupancy data. A determination is then made whether the channel occupancy has reached a first predetermined occupancy threshold. If the first predetermined occupancy threshold has been reached, high priority messages are transmitted, and medium and low priority messages are stored. If the first predetermined occupancy threshold has not been reached, a determination is made whether the channel occupancy has reached a second predetermined occupancy threshold that is less than the first predetermined occupancy threshold. If the second predetermined occupancy threshold has been reached, high and medium priority messages are transmitted, and low priority messages are stored. If the second predetermined occupancy threshold has not been reached, messages of all priorities are transmitted. | 02-02-2012 |
20120026873 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ADAPTIVELY OBTAINING BANDWIDTH ALLOCATION REQUESTS - A method and apparatus for adaptively obtaining bandwidth requests in a broadband wireless communication system. The method and apparatus includes dynamically varying technique combinations enabling a plurality of users to efficiently request bandwidth from a shared base station. A user may “piggyback” a new bandwidth request upon, or set a “poll-me bit” within, presently allocated bandwidth. A base station may poll users, individually or in groups, by allocating unrequested bandwidth for new requests. Polling may respond to a “poll-me bit,” and/or it may be adaptively periodic at a rate based on communication status parameters, such as recent communication activity and connection QoS levels Group polling permits a possibility of collisions. Polling policies may be established for dynamically varying user groups, or may be determined for each user. Dynamic selection of appropriate polling techniques makes use of efficiency benefits associated with each technique. | 02-02-2012 |
20120033550 | PACKET RELAY DEVICE AND CONGESTION CONTROL METHOD - A packet relay device is equipped with a buffer memory including a plurality of queues for temporarily storing packets, and a storage unit for storing the first queue lengths indicating the respective queue length of each of the queues and a second queue length indicating a value according to a total of the plurality of first queue lengths. When the packet relay device receives packets, it discerns the queue to which the received packet belongs from among the plurality of queues, and temporarily stores the packet in relation to the discerned queue within the buffer memory. Then, the first queue length and the second queue length are updated, and a determination is made of whether or not to send a congestion notification to the packet sending source according to the first queue length corresponding to the discerned queue, and to the second queue length. | 02-09-2012 |
20120033551 | Handling Signaling Congestion And Related Communication Device - A method of handling signaling congestion for a machine type communication (MTC) device and/or a MTC server in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method comprises receiving system information from a network; and stopping a triggering operation in a communication window according to the system information, wherein the system information indicates occurrence of a signaling congestion situation in the network. | 02-09-2012 |
20120033552 | Utilizing Betweenness to Determine Forwarding State in a Routed Network - A set of critical nodes or links is identified on the network through which most of the shortest paths on the network occur. Each node compares their distance to end points on the network with a distance between the end points and each of the distinct critical nodes. Where the distance between the end points and the critical nodes is shorter than the distance between the end points and the node, the node is not on the shortest path and does not install forwarding state. Where the distance between the end points and the critical node is larger than or equal to the distance between the end points and the node, the node may be on the shortest path between the pair of end nodes and installs forwarding state. Installation of forwarding state may cause packet duplication, but determining forwarding state is dramatically simplified. | 02-09-2012 |
20120039168 | Call admission control method - A call admission control method can ensure the admission rate of the high priority business, and simultaneously greatly improve the admission rate of the low priority business. The occupied bandwidth of currently admitted business flows of a WiMAX network is denoted by Σb | 02-16-2012 |
20120039169 | Active Queue Management for Wireless Communication Network Uplink - According to the teachings presented herein, a base station implements active queue management (AQM) for uplink transmissions from user equipment (UE), such as a mobile terminal. The base station, e.g., an eNodeB in a Long Term Evolution (LTE) network, uses buffer status reports, for example, to estimate packet delays for packets in the UE's uplink transmit buffer. In one embodiment, a (base station) method of AQM for the uplink includes estimating at least one of a transmit buffer size and a transmit buffer queuing delay for a UE, and selectively dropping or congestion-marking packets received at the base station from the UE. The selective dropping or marking is based on the estimated transmit buffer size and/or the estimated transmit buffer queuing delay. | 02-16-2012 |
20120039170 | Dynamic Load Control for Downlink Signaling Channels - A number of channel coding elements per transmission time interval required to transmit control information to a communication terminal is evaluated based on communication connection condition information with respect to the communication terminal, wherein the control information is defined by information on the scheduling of communication resources allocation to the communication terminal. A modified capacity is determined, wherein a capacity is defined by a total of available channel coding elements per transmission time interval on a channel dedicated for transmitting the control information. In addition, a quantity of communication terminals is selected for being provided with control information on the channel dedicated for transmitting the control information by accepting a further communication terminal to the quantity if the total sum of channel coding elements per transmission time interval required to transmit control information to each communication terminal of the quantity including the further communication terminal does not exceed the modified capacity, and by otherwise rejecting the further communication terminal. | 02-16-2012 |
20120044805 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR TRAFFIC POLICING - Systems and methods for policing traffic in communications systems are described herein. According to systems and methods herein, tokens are generated for a packet data network based on a peak transmission rate associated with the packet data network. Packets are selected for transmission over the packet data network based on availability of tokens. | 02-23-2012 |
20120044806 | METHOD FOR NOTIFYING ABOUT/AVOIDING CONGESTION SITUATION OF DATA TRANSMISSION IN WIRELESS MESH NETWORK, AND MESH NODE FOR THE SAME - Provided is a multi-route routing scheme that supports Quality of Service (QoS) in the wireless mesh network. A method of notifying about and avoiding congestion situation in data transmission in a wireless mesh network and a mesh node may also be provided. Data may be differentially transmitted to multiple routes by obtaining a route congestion level existing in a current multi-hop route and thus, data providing a real-time service, such as a video streaming service, may avoid congested routes and may be promptly transmitted. Multiple queues in a mesh node may be divided into divided queues based on a congestion situation of a transmission route in a network and the divided queues may be transmitted through multiple routes and thus, an efficiency of the overall network may increase. | 02-23-2012 |
20120057454 | Admission and Eviction Policies for Mobile Devices with Non-Telephonic Functionality - Implementations and techniques for admission and/or eviction policies for wireless devices having non-telephonic functionality are generally disclosed. | 03-08-2012 |
20120057455 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INCREASING SPECTRUM USE EFFICIENCY IN A MESH NETWORK - Mesh Network Access Points (APs) points, including gateways and routers, are deployed over a geographic area. The APs monitor the communication channel for other carriers and transmit accordingly. The APs selectively co-transmit when other carriers are sensed, if the efficiency of the mesh network will improve. APs select a transmission rate based on observed carrier-to-interference ratios. APs use directional antennas to increase carrier-to-interference ratios and spectral efficiency. AP transmit schedules are adaptable and adjusted according to observed carrier-to-interference measurements. | 03-08-2012 |
20120063303 | Manageability Tools for Lossless Networks - Manageability tools are provided for allowing an administrator to have better control over switches in a lossless network of switches. These tools provide the ability to detect slow drain and congestion bottlenecks, detect stuck virtual channels and loss of credits, while hold times on edge ASICs to be different from hold times encore ASICs, and mitigate severe latency bottlenecks. | 03-15-2012 |
20120063304 | Manageability Tools for Lossless Networks - Manageability tools are provided for allowing an administrator to have better control over switches in a lossless network of switches. These tools provide the ability to detect slow drain and congestion bottlenecks, detect stuck virtual channels and loss of credits, while hold times on edge ASICs to be different from hold times encore ASICs, and mitigate severe latency bottlenecks. | 03-15-2012 |
20120063305 | PRIORITIZED RANDOM ACCESS METHOD - Prioritized random access methods are proposed. According to an embodiment, random access attempts are classified into the priority levels according to delay requirements, and adedicated random access opportunities are reserved for different priority levels. A congestion detecting mechanism is introduced for such dedicated ranging (random access) opportunities. When congestion is detected by the base station, parameters or configurations of random access can be dynamically or temporarily modified through random access response message. Furthermore, a prioritized contention resolution is introduced to guarantee a high priority access is processed earlier than a low priority access. According to another embodiment, another prioritized contention resolution is introduced to reduce the impact of random access of a low priority M2M device upon H2H traffic. | 03-15-2012 |
20120063306 | Use of Partitions to Reduce Flooding and Filtering Database Size Requirements in Large Layer Two Networks - A network component, comprising a memory unit comprising a filtering database (FDB), wherein the FDB comprises a medium access control (MAC) address and a Virtual Local Area Networks (VLAN) Identifier (VID) pair for each of a plurality of end-stations associated with an edge-district partition of a network, wherein the edge-district partition is associated with the network component, and wherein the FDB comprises a wildcard FDB entry corresponding to each VLAN associated with the network component, and a logic unit coupled to the ingress ports and the egress ports, wherein the logic unit is configured to reduce flooding in the edge-district partition of the network; wherein the logic unit is configured to forward a received frame, having a destination MAC address and a VID for which there is not an exact match in the FDB, towards a core-bridge without flooding based on the wildcard entry in the FDB. | 03-15-2012 |
20120063307 | ADAPTIVE TRIGGERING SET FOR RELAXED DETERMINISTIC BACK-OFF METHOD - A method and system are described including retrieving a sparseness indication, retrieving an indication of a number of failed transmissions, comparing the sparseness indication to an optimal sparseness, comparing the number of failed transmissions to a first threshold, adjusting a size of a set of triggering events responsive to both the first and the second comparison, comparing a data buffer push rate to a data buffer arrival rate, further adjusting the size of the triggering set responsive to the third comparison, determining system fairness, comparing the size of the triggering set to a second threshold and further adjusting the size of the triggering set responsive to one of the determination and a combination of the determination and the fourth comparison. | 03-15-2012 |
20120069736 | SYSTEM, METHOD AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM FOR COMMUNICATING WITH A ZIGBEE DEVICE FROM A PERIPHERAL NETWORK - In order to minimize traffic on a Zigbee network, a gateway of the Zigbee network represents end devices in communications with peripheral networks. The gateway receives messages, such as status request messages, from the peripheral network intended for an end device on the Zigbee network. The Zigbee network generates a response message by retrieving stored data for the end device instead of communicating the received message to the end device. | 03-22-2012 |
20120075989 | Controlling UE Emissions for Avoiding Self-Interference and for Demanding Coexistence Situations - It is provided an apparatus, including scheduling means configured to allocate one or more resource blocks to a channel in an uplink frequency band and/or a downlink frequency band according to a first telecommunication standard and the available frequency band for the uplink or downlink, respectively, wherein the scheduling means is additionally configured to take into account a limit of resource blocks to be allocated to the channel, and wherein the limit is at least one of an allowed resource block, a resource block to be avoided, a width of a range of allowed resource blocks, a non-usage information of the channel, an upper allowed resource block, and a lower allowed resource block, an upper limit of the number of resource blocks, a lower limit of the number of resource blocks, and any reasonable combinations of the limits mentioned. | 03-29-2012 |
20120075990 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ADMISSION CONTROL IN A RADIO COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A method for admission control in a radio communications system that includes determining a quality of service (QoS) type of a service according to a QoS property of the service, determining a service satisfaction ratio of services that belong to the determined QoS type according to a result of the determining a QoS type, comparing the determined service satisfaction ratio with an admission threshold, and admitting the service if the determined service satisfaction ratio is greater than or equal to the admission threshold. An apparatus for admission control in the radio communications system is also provided. With the embodiments in the present disclosure, the resource utilization may be accurately calculated, and the admission control algorithm may be more easily developed and maintained. | 03-29-2012 |
20120082028 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING LOAD, BASE STATION AND MANAGEMENT DEVICE - A method for controlling a load in a base station device, including: receiving load information from another base station; receiving, from the other base station, admission information that indicates that an admission of a process request for the other base station to perform a first process is permitted or rejected; storing history information in which the received load information is associated with the admission information; and determining, on the basis of load information newly received from the other base station and the stored history information, whether to request the other base station to perform a second process that causes a load that is equivalent to or lower than the first process. | 04-05-2012 |
20120082029 | Method of Handling APN Based Congestion Control and Related Communication Device - A method of initiating a service with an access point name (APN) of a wireless communication system for a mobile device in the wireless communication system is disclosed. The mobile device has a plurality of connections with the APN. The method comprises disconnecting at least one first connection of the plurality of connections from the APN, wherein the mobile device keeps at least one second connection of the plurality of connections connected; and initiating the service with the APN, after disconnecting the at least one first connection from the APN; wherein the APN is congested or overloaded. | 04-05-2012 |
20120082030 | PACKET RETRANSMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM, PACKET RETRANSMISSION CONTROL METHOD AND RETRANSMISSION CONTROL PROGRAM - A packet retransmission control system includes an application processing module on which an application for executing communication processing operates, a retransmission control determination module which determines whether to execute high-speed retransmission control by a lower layer based on a predetermined rule with respect to a packet whose sending is requested by the application processing module, a packet processing branching module which allocates a packet determined to be subjected to high-speed retransmission control and a packet determined not to be subjected to high-speed retransmission control, an MAC retransmission control module which executes retransmission control of a transmission packet by a retransmission time-out shorter in time than a protocol of a transport layer with respect to a packet determined to be subjected to high-speed retransmission control, and an external output module which externally outputs a packet sent from the MAC retransmission control module or the packet processing branching module. | 04-05-2012 |
20120082031 | DISTRIBUTED ADMISSION CONTROL - A first network client requests initiation of a data transfer with a second network client. An admission control facility (ACF) responds to the initiation request by performing admission analysis to determine whether to initiate the data transfer. The ACF sends one or more packets to the second network client. In response, the second network client sends acknowledgment packets back to the ACF. The ACF performs admission analysis based on the packets sent and the acknowledgment packets, and determines whether the data transfer should be initiated based on the analysis. The admission analysis may be based on a variety of factors, such as the average time to receive an acknowledgment for each packet, the variance of the time to receive an acknowledgment for each packet, a combination of these factors, or a combination of these and other factors. | 04-05-2012 |
20120087240 | METHOD AND ARCHITECTURE FOR A SCALABLE APPLICATION AND SECURITY SWITCH USING MULTI-LEVEL LOAD BALANCING - A switch architecture and method provides scaling through multi-level load balancing of flows across data and application processing planes. An input/output module receives a communication session flow (forward) from a client device and selects one of a plurality of data processors to process the flow. The selected data processor determines the level of processing for the forward flow and selects an application processor from a plurality of such application processors. The application processor generates a session structure identifying actions to be performed on the forward flow and transfers the session structure to the selected data processor to perform the actions on the forward flow. The application processor also predictively generates and offloads a session structure for the associated reverse flow. If the reverse session structure is offloaded to a different data processor, either the forward or reverse flow redirects packets, or is redirected, to the data processor hosting the other flow. | 04-12-2012 |
20120087241 | FLOW ADMISSION CONTROL IN AN IP NETWORK - A flow admission control module for IP traffic types monitors network topology and usage. A new flow is not admitted if it is determined that the flow would push the utilization of available bandwidth reserved for the traffic type on a link in the associated path beyond a predetermined threshold. The admission control module may, as a result of dynamic changes to network topology capacity, re-compute the link utilization for effected active flows The admission control module may also account for protection regimes in flow admission calculations. | 04-12-2012 |
20120092988 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM FOR JUDGING PATH CONGESTION - The present disclosure relates to the field of communications, and discloses a method for determining path pre-congestion. The method is applicable to an Ethernet path. Pre-congestion is determined and flagged through an ingress node or an intermediate node in the Ethernet path, and a pre-congestion status indication packet is sent by an egress node to the ingress node or a policy server, so that the ingress node or the policy server obtains pre-congestion information of the Ethernet path, and notify an application function entity AF of performing admission control. When the method in the present disclosure is used, problems of packet loss and excessively long time delay caused by the conventional congestion control technology may be avoided, thereby ensuring user experience of existing services. | 04-19-2012 |
20120092989 | Controlling CSI Reporting In A LTE Cellular Communication Network - The object of the present invention is to distribute the transmission of the CSI (Channel state information) reports among the different UEs, wherein the CSI reports are based on measurements on cell specific reference signals from the base station. This is achieved in a LTE cellular communication network by controlling the transmission of CSI reports from the UEs. | 04-19-2012 |
20120106325 | Adaptive Shaper for Reliable Multicast Delivery over Mixed Networks - Improved handling of multicast streams in digital networks. A switching device in a digital network such as a controller, bridge, or access point examines streams flowing through the device. The device identifies a multicast stream and assigns a stateful session to this stream. QoS marking may be applied to the stream. The device assigns a shaping policy to the stream, assigning it a default value in terms of bandwidth credits. This default value may be dependent on the stream type. The credits used by the stream are evaluated periodically. If the stream has exceeded the allocated bandwidth for the shaping policy, the number of credits are increased by a predetermined factor. If the stream has unused credits, the allocated number of credits are reduced by a predetermined factor. The increase and decrease factors may be tuned, for example, to provide a fast attack and a slow decay. The period used for stream evaluation may be adjusted. Increasing the period decreases the load on the device CPU; decreasing the period allows for better convergence at a cost of more load on the CPU. This approach allows the packets in the stream to be released at a constant rate and allows transmission of bursty traffic over networks on which congestion conditions can change rapidly such as wireless and vpn tunnels. In addition, the potential for downstream drops due to the lack of buffers in downstream switch/routers due to the burstiness is reduced. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106326 | SYNCHRONIZED BANDWIDTH RESERVATIONS FOR REAL-TIME COMMUNICATIONS - A method of initiating a communication session includes transmitting, using a call signaling protocol, a call invitation from a first node over a network for receipt by a second node. The call invitation comprises a list of one or more codecs available to the first node for use when transmitting data over a network. The call invitation additionally comprises a traffic specification associated with each of the one or more codecs. The traffic specification associated with each of the one or mode codecs comprises a plurality of bandwidth attributes that describe the flow of data when transmitting data using each of the one or more codecs. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106327 | Exchanging Data Associated With A Communication Session Within A Communications System - In an embodiment, a communications device exchanges, between first and second access terminals, higher priority data in association with a communication session of a first type and also lower priority data in association with a communication session of a second type. If the communications device determines a transition of the first access terminal to a lower data-rate environment, the communication device reduces a size of data packets exchanged between the first access terminal and an application server for the communication session of the second type. If the communications device determines an upcoming data packet is a low-data packet (e.g., a silence packet), the low-data packet is suppressed. If the communications device determines that the first access terminal has attempted transmission of a set of last or near-last data packets in the sequence, the communications device re-transmits the set of last or near-last data packets without waiting for ACKs. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106328 | ADAPTIVE FRAME RATE CONTROL FOR VIDEO IN A RESOURCE LIMITED SYSTEM - Methods of adaptive frame rate control are provided far compressed video where resources are limited by either network or CPU characteristics. The methods include the determination of the type of compressed video frames to be transmitted or decoded and utilizing the principles of video compression and networking in order to limit the perceived loss of quality of the rendered video to the end user. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106329 | System and Method for Machine-to-Machine Application Based Congestion Control - A method and apparatus for reporting events in a machine-to-machine environment are provided. Upon detection of an event, a determination is made whether to report the event with or without a delay. If the event is to be reported with a delay, then reporting is delayed for a period of time. If an event notification is received prior to the expiration of the delay period, then the reporting of the event may be canceled as event has already been reported by another element. If not, then another determination is made whether to report the event with or without another delay. This process continues until either the event has been reported or an event notification corresponding to the event has been received from another element. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106330 | Low Delay Lossless Packet Selector - A method and apparatus for selecting packets from a plurality of packets containing one or more copies of data, the method and apparatus selecting packets such that a single copy of the data can be selected. The method using identifying information contained within the packets to select only packets which contain unselected data, and using a searchable means to maintain a memory of unselected packets. Packets are selected as they become selectable and no unnecessary delay or data loss is suffered if some of the packets suffer loss. The method is suitable for selecting packets on a receiving device which receives duplicate copies of data packets from physically diverse paths, for example, as used by the FIX protocol. The method both hardening data against loss and delay and enabling improvements in average delay and jitter when used on a receiving device to select packets. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106331 | OPTIMIZING SIGNALLING LOAD IN A CELLULAR COMMUNICATION NETWORK - The invention relates to a cellular communication network serving mobile terminals or devices and how to reduce the signalling load in said network by introducing an auxiliary device which holds data packets in order to minimize connections according to a pre-determined rule. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106332 | Method of Handling Communications of Low Priority Device and MTC Device in a Wireless Communication System and Related Communication Device - A method of handling a mobile device in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The mobile device is a low priority device or a machine type communication (MTC) device. The method comprises the mobile device sending an indicator to a network of the wireless communication system during a combined attach procedure, wherein the combined attach procedure comprises a circuit-switched (CS) attach procedure and a packet-switched (PS) attach procedure; and the network forwarding the indicator to a switching center of the wireless communication system. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106333 | Network Aware Global Load Balancing System and Method - An apparatus comprising a network aware (NA) global load balancing (GLB) component configured to associate with a local data center (DC), couple to an end user via a network, select a server in the DC or in one or more remote DCs coupled to the network based on application resource information and network resource information, and select a route in the network based on the application resource information and the network resource information. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106334 | ASYNCHRONOUS LOGIC CIRCUIT, CONGESTION AVOIDING PATH CALCULATION MODULE, SEMICONDUCTOR CIRCUIT, AND PATH CALCULATION METHOD IN ASYNCHRONOUS LOGIC CIRCUIT - An asynchronous branching module ( | 05-03-2012 |
20120106335 | Method and device for acknowledging a periodic signaling request in a telecommunication network - A method that may be implemented in a CSCF entity to acknowledge a REGISTER type request sent by a terminal. It comprises: a step (E | 05-03-2012 |
20120113806 | Bandwidth Adaptation Techniques in Wireless Communications Networks - Techniques are disclosed that involve bandwidth adjustment in wireless communications networks. For instance, an operating bandwidth may be established for wireless communications with one or more remote devices. This operating bandwidth may include a primary channel and one or more secondary sub-channels. Further, one or more statistics may be maintained that correspond to one of the one or more sub-channels. These statistics may be based on based on events on the corresponding sub-channel(s), such collisions, interference events, medium busy events, etc. Based on such statistics, the operating bandwidth may be decreased. Moreover, embodiments may increase the operating bandwidth based on output queue depth statistics. Further, a notification may be transmitted that indicates a change in the operating bandwidth. This notification may be in the form of a bandwidth change indication (BCI) frame. | 05-10-2012 |
20120113807 | Affecting Node Association Through Load Partitioning - In one embodiment, a node may request to join a parent node in a directed acyclic graph (DAG) in a computer network, and may also notify the parent node of a load associated with the request and whether the node has any other parent node options. The requesting node may then receive a response from the parent node that is either an acceptance or a denial. While the node may join the parent node in response to an acceptance, if a denial is received, the node may divide the load into first and second portions, and may re-request to join the parent node with the load of the first portion. In this manner, by partitioning the load, a load balancing mode of operation across multiple is parents in a DAG is provided. | 05-10-2012 |
20120113808 | CASCADED LOAD BALANCING - A first network device and a second network device for forwarding data units are included in a network. The second network device is configured to receive data units from the first network device via an output interface from the first network device. Each of the network devices is further configured to form a first value derived from information pertaining to a received data unit, perform a function on the first value to provide a second value, wherein the function of the first network device is different from the function of the second network device when forwarding a same data unit, select an output interface based on the second value, and forward a received data unit via an interface. | 05-10-2012 |
20120120794 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING TRAFFIC - A method for controlling traffic in a mobile communication network is provided. A traffic control apparatus checks locations of a calling terminal and a receiving terminal, and determines whether to perform terminal-to-terminal direct communication based on the locations of the calling terminal and the receiving terminal. A base station of the calling terminal and a base station of the receiving terminal instruct the calling terminal and the receiving terminal to perform the terminal-to-terminal direct communication when the terminal-to-terminal direct communication is determined to be performed. | 05-17-2012 |
20120120795 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR INCREASING GRANULARITY OF PREFIX CONTROL IN A COMPUTER NETWORK - In one embodiment, a routing table of a router is populated with a plurality of prefixes. One or more performance characteristics of the plurality of prefixes are monitored. The router determines that a need exists to split a selected prefix of the plurality of prefixes. The router determines one or more boundaries upon which to split the selected prefix based on the monitored performance characteristics. The router then injects one or more more-specific prefixes into the routing table, each more-specific prefix referring to a smaller subset of nodes than the selected prefix, to split the selected prefix on the one or more boundaries to create a plurality of split prefixes. The split prefixes are controlled to optimize distribution of traffic. | 05-17-2012 |
20120120796 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING A PRIORITY-BASED, LOW-COLLISION DISTRIBUTED COORDINATION FUNCTION USING A SUPER-FRAME STRUCTURE - A method for providing a priority-based, low-collision distributed coordination function (DCF) in a wireless network is provided. The network includes an access point and a plurality of stations. The method includes receiving at a first station a super-frame from the access point. The super-frame is operable to define a service period for each of the stations. A priority for the first station is determined based on the super-frame. A back-off time is selected for the first station based on the priority. | 05-17-2012 |
20120120797 | Method and System for Managing Time-Sensitive Packetized Data Streams at a Receiver - According to one embodiment of the invention, a method for managing time-sensitive packetized data streams at a receiver includes receiving a time-sensitive packet of a data stream, analyzing an energy level of a payload signal of the packet, and determining whether to drop the packet based on the energy level of the payload signal. | 05-17-2012 |
20120120798 | POLICING USAGE OF DATA NETWORKS - Methods and systems for policing usage by one or more users ( | 05-17-2012 |
20120134264 | Techniques for Handling Network Traffic - In a mobile communication environment, the data traffic is mapped to a number of bearers ( | 05-31-2012 |
20120134265 | TRAFFIC CONTROL SYSTEM FOR STEP-BY-STEP PERFORMING TRAFFIC CONTROL POLICIES, AND TRAFFIC CONTROL METHOD FOR THE SAME - Provided is a technique of step-by-step performing a plurality of traffic control policies by differentiating policies to be performed for each subscriber and establishing policy layers requiring a relatively long time to process traffic at later stages, thereby preventing a traffic control system from processing unnecessary traffic, reducing the load of the traffic control system upon processing traffic, and improving the performance of the traffic control system. | 05-31-2012 |
20120134266 | LOAD BALANCING HASH COMPUTATION FOR NETWORK SWITCHES - Techniques to load balance traffic in a network device or switch include a network device or switch having a first interface to receive a data unit or packet, a second interface to transmit the packet, and a mapper to map between virtual ports and physical ports. The network device includes hash value generator configured to generate a hash value based on information included in the packet and based on at least one virtual port. The hash value may be optionally modified to load balance egress traffic of the network device. The network device selects a particular virtual port for egress of the packet, such as by determining an index into an egress table based on the (modified) hash value. The packet is transmitted from the network device using a physical port mapped to the particular virtual port. | 05-31-2012 |
20120134267 | CHROMATIC SCHEDULER FOR NETWORK TRAFFIC WITH DISPARATE SERVICE REQUIREMENTS - System(s) and method(s) are provided for managing network capacity in a wireless network that serves various traffic flows with disparate quality of service requirements. Management can be based on multi-stage scheduling in frequency-time domain. A first scheduling stage can generate an allocation of radio resources that minimizes inter-cell interference amongst a plurality of base stations. Based on the first-stage allocation of radio resources, a second scheduling stage can compute flow capacity for a set of radio resources specific to a base station, and acquire guaranteed-bit-rate (GBR) and non-guaranteed GBR traffic flows. GBR traffic flows can be matched to computed flow capacity to generate an allocation of frequency-time resources. In second scheduling stage, GBR traffic flows can be scheduled based at least in part on allocated resources and priority queuing. Based on allocation(s) in first and second scheduling stages, a third scheduling stage can schedule non-GBR traffic flows based at least in part on fair scheduling. | 05-31-2012 |
20120140620 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DETERMINING AND IMPLEMENTING POLICY CONTROLS IN A COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A computer-implemented method of determining policy control decisions in a telecommunications network. The method comprises the steps of receiving a predictive indicator from a forecasting system, wherein the predictive indicator includes predictive network resource utilization information, responsive to receiving a service request from a gateway, determining a policy decision based on the predictive indicator, and sending the policy decision to the gateway. | 06-07-2012 |
20120140621 | Incast Congestion Control in a Network - Implementations are described for controlling, avoiding, and/or minimizing incast congestion in a network. In various embodiments, the network may be a data center network, which may include one or more senders and a receiver that transmit data across the network using Transmission Control Protocol. The receiver may be associated with a receive window that may determine amount of data that may be received by the receiver at a single time. Moreover, a size of the receive window may be adjusted based at least in part on an available bandwidth of the receiver. As a result of an increase or decrease in the receive window, the one or more senders may not be constrained in transmitting data to the receiver and incast congestion at the receiver may be reduced and/or avoided. | 06-07-2012 |
20120140622 | Suppression of Discovery of Mobile Devices in a Wireless Network - Technologies are generally described for suppressing discovery of mobile devices in a wireless ubiquitous computing (ubicomp) network, reducing the number of network transmissions by devices in the network and reducing network congestion and prolonging battery life. A mobile device may add supplementary information to introductory beacons transmitted by the device that indicate no response is necessary from other devices participating in the network except for a coordinator of the network. The mobile device may transmit a malformed introductory beacon that will be ignored by other devices in the network except for the coordinator. The coordinator of the wireless network may detect the mobile device moving through the network and transmit a suppression signal to other devices in the network causing the devices to ignore the introductory beacons transmitted by the mobile device. | 06-07-2012 |
20120147743 | DYNAMIC CONNECTION ADMISSION CONTROL TO ENFORCE SERVICE LEVEL AGREEMENTS IN MULTICAST NETWORKS - A method for networked communications includes determining a group identifier associated with a received request for multicast data, determining an available upstream bandwidth and an available downstream bandwidth, adding an entry for the identified group into a multicast forwarding table, allocating bandwidth from the available upstream bandwidth and available downstream bandwidth, the allocated bandwidth corresponding to bandwidth required by the requested multicast data, and forwarding the received request to an upstream network destination. The method includes, if no response is received in response to the received request within a designated timeout period, removing the entry for the identified group in the multicast forwarding table, and restoring the allocated bandwidth to the available upstream bandwidth and available downstream bandwidth. | 06-14-2012 |
20120147744 | TIME AND DATA RATE POLICING - A non-transitory computer-readable medium includes instructions for receiving a message associated with a session with a user device; determining that a quantity of tokens, to be used to process the message, is less than another quantity of tokens stored in a memory; determining that a session time is less than a threshold based on the determination that the quantity of tokens is less than the other quantity of tokens; determining that a violation has occurred when a time interval is greater than an interval threshold based on the determination that the session time is less than the threshold, where the time interval is from a prior time when another message, associated with the session, was received to a time that the message was received, and where the determining includes incrementing a quantity of violations associated with the session; outputting the message when the quantity of violations is not greater than a violation threshold; and dropping the message when the quantity of violations is greater than the violation threshold. | 06-14-2012 |
20120155255 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING A DEGREE OF PARALLELISM OF STREAMS - A method, computer readable medium and apparatus for managing a degree of parallelism of streams are disclosed. For example, the method analyzes wireless traffic to determine a profile of the wireless traffic, determines an amount of available processing resources, and manages the degree of parallelism of streams based on the profile and the amount of available processing resources in a probe server. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155256 | MAPPED FIFO BUFFERING - A network interface device for connection between a network and a data processing system, the network interface device comprising: an I/O interface for connection to a data processing system; a set of physical data ports for connection to a network; a unified memory comprising a plurality of buffers; a plurality of ingress ports operable to receive data packets for buffering at the unified memory, a first subset of the plurality of ingress ports being configured to receive data packets on a transmit path from said I/O interface, and a second subset of the plurality of ingress ports being configured to receive data packets on a receive path from said set of physical data ports; a memory manager configured to store representations of a plurality of virtual queues held in the unified memory, each virtual queue being a linked logical sequence of buffers of the unified memory; and an ingress interface configured to service the ingress ports in a predetermined order and write data packets received at the ingress ports to buffers of the unified memory selected by the memory manager; wherein the memory manager is arranged to select buffers of the unified memory so as to cause the ingress interface to populate the plurality of virtual queues with data packets, and the ingress interface is arranged to contiguously write data packets into the linked logical sequence of buffers representing each virtual queue. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155257 | METHODS FOR CONGESTION CONTROL FOR MACHINE TYPE COMMUNICATION (MTC) DEVICES OR LOW PRIORITY DEVICES, AND APPARATUSES USING THE SAME - A mobile communication device configured for Machine Type Communication (MTC) or configured as a low priority device is provided. In the mobile communication device, a wireless module performs wireless transmissions and receptions to and from a service network, and a controller module transmits a connection request message to the service network via the wireless module in response to initiating a combined attachment procedure or a combined routing area update procedure for both Packet-Switched (PS) and Circuit-Switched (CS) domains, and receives a connection rejection message with an indication of an extended wait timer from the service network via the wireless module. Also, the controller module initiates a location registration procedure for the CS domain or enters a substate in which initiation of the location registration procedure for the CS domain is allowed, in response to the connection rejection message for the PS domain. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155258 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONGESTION CONTROL - A method for control of congestion of traffic, being categorized according to a number of layers (L), in a network node, comprises a step of monitoring the amount (n(t)) of incoming flows to this node such that, based upon this amount (n(t)) of incoming flows and on a current number of accepted layers (l(t)), a next number of accepted layers (l(t+ | 06-21-2012 |
20120155259 | ACCESS CATEGORY ENFORCEMENT IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORKS - The present invention provides a control function in an access point, switch, or like node on a wireless local area network. The control function operates to ensure frames transmitted by a user terminal are transmitted using an appropriate transmission priority scheme. The control function will assist and provide an appropriate priority level to the user terminal. Frames transmitted from the user terminal are passed through the control function, which will analyze priority level information provided in the frames to determine if the frames were transmitted using the appropriate transmission priority scheme. An enforcement action may be taken in response to identifying frames that were not transmitted using the appropriate transmission priority scheme. | 06-21-2012 |
20120163168 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM FOR DISTRIBUTED LOAD CONTROL AND DISTRIBUTED LOAD CONTROL METHOD FOR USE IN THE SAME - A base station determines whether the base station is in an overload state on the basis of an available resource of the base station and a load state of a mobility management entity (MME), and transmits the call setup request to MME if the base station is determined to be in a non-overload state. MME determines whether MME is in the overload state on the basis of an available resource of MME and a load state of a gateway according to the call setup request transmitted from the base station, and transmits the call setup request to the gateway if MME is determined to be in the non-overload state. The gateway determines whether the gateway is in the overload state according to the call setup request transmitted from MME, and performs a call setup procedure if the gateway is determined to be in the non-overload state. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163169 | OVERLOAD CONTROL APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR MACHINE TYPE COMMUNICATION SERVICE AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM PROVIDING MACHINE TYPE COMMUNICATION SERVICE - Provided are an overload control apparatus and method for a machine type communication (MTC) service. The overload control method includes, when an overload state has occurred, including an overload indicator (OI) in a MAC subheader in a random access response to be transmitted to a terminal and transmitting the random access response, before an MTC device wanting to perform a random access procedure transmits a random access preamble to the base station, searching for a random access response transmitted from the base station, when the transmitted random access response is searched for, peeking at the random access response and receiving it, and when it is determined that an OI is included in the random access response, waiting, at the MTC device, for a predetermined delay time and transmitting the random access preamble for performing the random access procedure to the base station. | 06-28-2012 |
20120170450 | HIERARCHICAL PACKET POLICER - Embodiments of the invention include a method performed in a packet processor core for policing a packet through a hierarchical policer coupled to one or more policing requestors. The hierarchical policer has a plurality of meter levels including an initial level and one or more subsequent levels. The hierarchical policer creates a meter result at the meter of each meter level using packet characteristics and a meter state for that meter level. The hierarchical policer generates meter level outputs that classify the packet for each meter level and for at least one of the subsequent levels the meter level output is based on the meter level output from a previous meter level. The hierarchical policer performs a meter combine operation that produces a final packet output attribute from the combination of the meter level outputs. The hierarchical policer returns the final packet output attribute to a policing requestor. | 07-05-2012 |
20120170451 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR COMMUNICATING DATA BETWEEN AN APPLICATION SERVER AND AN M2M DEVICE - Systems and methods for communication data between an application server and at least one machine-to-machine (M2M) device via an internet network and a network are provided. An example system includes a network element configured to schedule delivery of the data between the application server and at least one M2M device based on network information. The network element is located on a boundary between the network and the intern et network to which the application server communicates with the at least one M2M device. | 07-05-2012 |
20120170452 | HIERARCHICAL PACKET POLICER - Embodiments of the invention a method for policing a packet at line rate. A hierarchical policer receives a policer request comprising packet characteristics and identifying request configuration information. The hierarchical policer retrieves meter states specified by the request configuration information. The hierarchical policer processes packet characteristics through meters to generate a meter result. The hierarchical policer generates a hierarchical policer table lookup address using a plurality of meter types, a plurality of input color controls, one or more of the packet characteristics, the meter results, and a plurality of coupling algorithm identifiers. The hierarchical policer reads a hierarchical meter result from a hierarchical policer result table, containing at least a final output packet attribute that classifies the packet. The hierarchical policer updates one or more of the meter states based on the plurality of meter state results. The hierarchical policer returns the final packet output to a policing requestor. | 07-05-2012 |
20120170453 | APPARATUSES AND METHODS FOR ACCESS POINT NAME (APN) BASED CONGESTION CONTROL DURING A PACKET DATA PROTOCOL (PDP) CONTEXT ACTIVATION PROCEDURE - A mobile communication device wirelessly connected to a service network with a default Packet Data Protocol (PDP) context active for an Access Point Name (APN) is provided. In the mobile communication device, a wireless module performs wireless transmissions and receptions to and from a service network, and a controller module transmits a request message for activating a secondary PDP context associated with the APN to the service network via the wireless module. Also, the controller module receives a rejection message indicating no resource available or congestion for the APN and a value of a back-off timer from the service network via the wireless module, and retransmits the request message to the service network via the wireless module in response to the value of the back-off timer being zero. | 07-05-2012 |
20120170454 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A node on a core network, in accordance with a connection state of a terminal, releases a transmission path resource which is made unnecessary due to LIPA (Local IP access) or SIPTO (Selected IP traffic offload) connection configuration. | 07-05-2012 |
20120170455 | Client Balancing in Wireless Networks - Herein, a method directed to receiving, by a network device, client density data of a first access node in a plurality of access nodes in a network. Also, the network device receives client density data of a second access node in the plurality of access nodes. The network device determines whether the client density data of the first access node overlaps with the client density data of the second access node. In response to the received client density data of the first access node overlapping with the received client density data of the second access node, the network device identifies the first access node and the second access node as members of a virtual radio frequency (RF) neighborhood, wherein the virtual RF neighborhood comprises a subset of a RF neighborhood. Each member of the virtual RF neighborhood is capable of receiving beacons from other members of the virtual RF neighborhood. | 07-05-2012 |
20120170456 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR OPTIONALLY USING SECONDARY FREQUENCY ASSIGNMENT IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING MULTIPLE BANDS - Methods for operating a Base Station (BS) and a User Equipment (UE) in a wireless communication system using a primary frequency and one or more secondary frequencies, and apparatuses for the BS and UE for carry out the methods, are provided. The method for operating the BS includes determining whether to activate or deactivate at least one of the one or more secondary frequencies, and transmitting a message comprising a bitmap indicating the activation or deactivation of the at least one of the one or more secondary frequencies to the UE. The method for operating the US includes receiving a message comprising a bitmap indicating activation or deactivation of at least one of the one or more secondary frequencies from the BS, and activating or deactivating the at least one of the one or more secondary frequencies based on the received message. | 07-05-2012 |
20120176893 | CONGESTION NOTIFICATION IN PRIVATE VLANS - One embodiment of the present invention provides a switch. During operation, in a network with a private VLAN configuration, the switch allows a congestion notification message with an isolated virtual local area network identifier (VLAN ID) to be forwarded via an isolated VLAN port. | 07-12-2012 |
20120176894 | Method and Apparatus for Adapting Policy Control - Method and network nodes for adapting policy control function, wherein a load of a first network entity on which a policy execution function like a policy and charging enforcement function (PCEF) or a bearer binding and event reporting function (BBERF) is located is monitored (S | 07-12-2012 |
20120182867 | Adaptive Medium Access Control - Bandwidth allocation configuration and fully decentralized adaptive medium access control (AMAC) systems and methods with support for time critical applications, spectrum efficiency, scalability enhancements, and fair allocation of bandwidth among nodes sharing a common channel. The methods fully integrate TDMA and CSMA/CA channel access approaches and incorporate adaptive congestion and collisions avoidance scheme to reduce bandwidth wastage and diminish adverse cross layers interactions. AMAC improves support for multi-media traffic while allowing higher transmission incidents from large number of transmitting devices sharing a common channel, with fair distribution of the available bandwidth, to enable improved multi-level-security connectivity over a common multi-hop wireless network, provide end-to-end performance enhancement for constant bit rate traffic, variable bit rate traffic, and distribute bandwidth fairly amongst competing TCP traffic flows that traverse varying length paths in multi-hop ad-hoc wireless networks. | 07-19-2012 |
20120182868 | Multiple Bearer Support Upon Congestion Situations - The embodiments herein relates to a method for enabling multiple bearer support upon congestion situations in a communication network. The PCC architecture is enabled to determine whether separate bearers need to be established for service(s) that demand MBR>GBR when no ECN support is provided. This is provided in nodes and methods receiving, using a receiving unit ( | 07-19-2012 |
20120182869 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND MOBILE STATION - A mobile communication system according to the present invention includes: a step A in which a radio base station eNB notifies a mobile station UE of a predetermined range; a step B in which the mobile station UE receives an uplink scheduling grant (uplink scheduling) including CB-RNTI (predetermined identification information that is not identification information of a designated mobile station), within the notified predetermined range; and a step C in which the mobile station UE transmits an uplink data signal, by using a shared uplink resource designated by the uplink scheduling grant, to the radio base station eNB. | 07-19-2012 |
20120188870 | Discovery and Capability Exchange Management in a Virtualized Computing Platform - In various embodiments a traffic class manager is a resource within a virtualized computer systems trusted entity (e.g. a hypervisor, trusted partition, etc.) that maps requirements from a platform management and associated network capabilities onto an adapter (e.g. SR-IOV adapter, etc.) in order to appropriately allocate adapter and network resources to virtualized computer partitions. In various embodiments the traffic class manager defines network traffic classes that meet the objectives of a platform administrator based on the capabilities of the adapter and the network attached to the adapter ports. Once the traffic classes are defined, in various embodiments, the traffic class manager enforces the assignment of a traffic class to a virtual interface queue pair within a partition. | 07-26-2012 |
20120188871 | ETHERNET PORT SPEED CONTROL METHOD AND DEVICE - There is proposed a speed control method for controlling a link speed of an Ethernet port. The method comprises steps of detecting the amount of data to be sent via the Ethernet port, and controlling the link speed of the Ethernet port based on the detected amount of data. The step of controlling the link speed of the Ethernet port based on the detected amount of data further comprises steps of comparing the detected amount of data with a predefined threshold, and setting the link speed level of the Ethernet port based on the comparison. According to the solutions provided in the embodiments of the present invention, the present invention may set the Ethernet port to a lower speed when there is no large amount of data to be sent, and thus implements power saving without changes to the infrastructure of the Ethernet. | 07-26-2012 |
20120195192 | DYNAMIC MEMORY BANDWIDTH ALLOCATION - Methods and apparatus for dynamic bandwidth allocation are disclosed. An example method includes determining, by a network device, at least one of a congestion state of a packet memory buffer of the network device and a congestion state of an external packet memory that is operationally coupled with the network device. The example method further includes dynamically adjusting, by the network device, respective bandwidth allocations for read and write operations between the network device and the external packet memory, the dynamic adjusting being based on the determined congestion state of the packet memory buffer and/or the determined congestion state of the external packet memory. | 08-02-2012 |
20120195193 | METHOD FOR OPERATING A MOBILE TERMINAL AS ACCESS POINT AND CORRESPONDING MOBILE TERMINAL - A method for operating a mobile terminal as access point, wherein the access point composes a network together with one or more associated client stations, wherein the access point has an operational mode of alternating awake and sleep periods, and wherein the access point broadcasts beacon frames at regular intervals for signaling communication parameters to the associated client stations, is characterized in that the access point, based on the level of activity in the network, adjusts the communication parameters by slowing down or accelerating the access of the associated client stations to the network. Furthermore, a corresponding mobile terminal is disclosed. | 08-02-2012 |
20120195194 | COGNITIVE FLOW CONTROL BASED ON CHANNEL QUALITY CONDITIONS - A system and method which improve the performance of a wireless transmission system by intelligent use of the control of the flow of data between a radio network controller (RNC) and a Node B. The system monitors certain criteria and, if necessary, adaptively increases or decreases the data flow between the RNC and the Node B. This improves the performance of the transmission system by allowing retransmitted data, signaling procedures and other data to be successfully received at a faster rate, by minimizing the amount of data buffered in the Node B. Flow control is exerted to reduce buffering in the Node B upon degradation of channel qualities, and prior to a High Speed Downlink Shared Channel (HS-DSCH) handover. | 08-02-2012 |
20120201129 | STATELESS ADMISSION CONTROL - Methods and apparatuses for control admission to network resources are provided. Probationary service flows with a reduced priority are provisionally allowed to use network resources. As the network demonstrates its continued stability by the addition of the new probationary flows, each probationary flow can be re-assigned its original priority thereby promoting the probationary flow to a non-probationary status. | 08-09-2012 |
20120201130 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR POLICY-BASED INTELLIGENT PROVISIONING OF OPTICAL TRANSPORT BANDWIDTH - Policy-based, on-demand provisioning of optical transport bandwidth is disclosed. In one of many possible embodiments, a system is provided for policy-based, on-demand provisioning of optical transport bandwidth. The system includes a layer-specific operation support subsystem (OSS) configured to manage network elements that form a sub-network over an optical transport network. The optical transport network provides bandwidth-on-demand provisioning capabilities. The layer-specific OSS includes one or more predefined bandwidth provisioning policies. The layer-specific OSS is configured to selectively request on-demand provisioning of bandwidth on the sub-network based on the predefined bandwidth provisioning policies. | 08-09-2012 |
20120201131 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING THE ADMISSION OF A FLOW TO A NETWORK AND A NETWORK - A method for controlling the admission of a flow to a network, particularly a WiMAX (Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access) network, wherein an estimation of maximum capacity required within a link of the network and/or within the network will be performed for examining, whether the flow requesting to enter the network with at least one QoS (Quality of Service) reservation of resources can be admitted, by finding first sets of intersections between all pairs of QoS reservations, i.e. the QoS reservations already accepted within the link and/or within the network and the at least one QoS reservation requested by the flow. The method is characterized by structuring the found sets of intersections by building a matrix of intersections of QoS reservations and—based on the matrix—deriving the rest of the sets of intersections between the intersections found, based on information obtained regarding the QoS reservations involved in each intersection. | 08-09-2012 |
20120201132 | DYNAMIC TRAFFIC REARRANGEMENT AND RESTORATION FOR MPLS NETWORKS WITH DIFFERENTIATED SERVICES CAPABILITIES - At least one substitute path is provided in place of a plurality of existing paths of a network to reallocate traffic carried by the plurality of existing paths. The total bandwidth needed to carry the traffic of the plurality of existing paths is determined. A proposed route is generated from the available links in the network. A portion of the bandwidth of a proposed route may be allocated to the needed bandwidth when the bandwidth of a proposed route is greater than or equal to the needed bandwidth. When the bandwidth of the proposed route is less than the needed bandwidth, at least one further route is generated, and the needed bandwidth is divided among the proposed route and the at least one further route such that a minimum number of further routes are generated. | 08-09-2012 |
20120201133 | Network Tools for Analysis, Design, Testing, and Production of Services - Various embodiments are disclosed for a services policy communication system and method. In some embodiments, a network device publishes a test service profile to a group of communications devices, in which the test service profile provides for beta testing of the test service profile for a service on a network, and the test service profile includes service policy settings; and monitors use of the service by the group of communications devices based on the test service profile. | 08-09-2012 |
20120201134 | Methods and Arrangements in a Communication Network System - The present invention relates to methods and arrangements of controlling an uplink data rate between a user equipment and a communication network node, which are communicating with each other on uplink and downlink data channels over a radio interface. A scheduler is arranged to distribute available scheduling headroom, provided by an uplink load control unit, between user equipments which are to be scheduled. A scheduling grant signalling is sent from the communication network node to the user equipment, based on which the user equipment is able to select a transport format combination (E-TFC). | 08-09-2012 |
20120207018 | REDUCING POWER CONSUMPTION IN A FAT-TREE NETWORK - A method for communication includes estimating a characteristic of communication traffic to be carried by a fat-tree network. Responsively to the estimated characteristic, a subset of the spine switches in the highest level of the network is selected, according to a predetermined selection order, to be active in carrying the communication traffic. In each of the levels of the spine switches below the highest level, the spine switches to be active are selected based on the selected spine switches in a next-higher level. The network is operated so as to convey the traffic between the leaf switches via the active spine switches, while the spine switches that are not selected remain inactive. | 08-16-2012 |
20120207019 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MULTICAST ADMISSION CONTROL - Systems and methods for multicast admission control are provided. In one embodiment, a node comprises: a first interface configured to receive a multicast channel access request, from a subscriber interface, including an address for a channel; a memory including a subscriber profile and VLAN configuration data for the network; a processor that identifies a first VLAN corresponding to the address from the VLAN configuration data and determines whether the subscriber is authorized to receive the channel via the first VLAN based on access policy designated by the subscriber profile; wherein the processor further determines whether granting access to the channel violates admission control policy based on predefined bandwidth requirements and/or a stream count limit for the first VLAN; wherein when the subscriber interface is authorized to receive the channel and when granting access to the channel does not violate admission control policy, the processor routes the channel to the subscriber. | 08-16-2012 |
20120213067 | RF-AWARE PACKET FILTERING IN RADIO ACCESS NETWORKS - Methods and systems are provided for filtering packets in a wireless communication system in the to-subscriber direction. This filtering is at least in part based on RF circuit state information. For example, a packet filter is used that either permits or denies packets from reaching a mobile subscriber based on whether there is already an established RF circuit to provide packets to the mobile subscriber. Alternatively, or in addition, the packet filter may consider the history of circuit state transitions associated with a particular mobile subscriber, the percentage (or aggregate number) of available airlink resources that are currently in use, and/or the length of time associated with the dormancy of a mobile subscriber's RF connection. In various embodiments, the packet filter may cause one or more packets to be sent to a mobile subscriber using a special data channel that does not require the establishment of an RF circuit. | 08-23-2012 |
20120218887 | Shaping Multimedia Stream Bit-Rates to Adapt to Network Conditions - An apparatus and methods are provided for shaping a transmit bit-rate of a multimedia stream to adapt to the bandwidth of network path on which the multimedia stream is sent between a source and destination. A condition indicative of a bandwidth of the network path is monitored, and at an intermediate point on the network path between the source and destination, the transmit bit-rate of the multimedia stream is adjusted to adapt to the condition indicative of the bandwidth of the path. | 08-30-2012 |
20120218888 | GPRS DEFAULT BEARER TRACKING - The invention is directed to providing a method and apparatus for managing and tracking default bearers in an Internet Protocol Connectivity Access Network (IP-CAN) session of a General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) network while observing the requirements of the GPRS specifications. | 08-30-2012 |
20120218889 | HANDLING OF LOW PRIORITY DEVICES - Methods, apparatus and systems for managing or handling a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) are disclosed. One method includes combined registering the WTRU for a circuit switched (CS) service and a packet switched (PS) service; and the WTRU performing an independent location area update procedure to a mobile switching center (MSC)/visitor location register (VLR) responsive to: (1) the WTRU moving from a first routing area to a second routing area and (2) the WTRU running a back-off timer. | 08-30-2012 |
20120224477 | PRUNED FORWARDING SET FOR SCALABLE TUNNELING APPLICATIONS IN DISTRIBUTED USER PLANE - A method and system for reducing congestion and latency in a communication system by creating a pruned forwarding set for scalable tunneling applications. The communication system provides a communication link between a mobile communication device and a network, such as the Internet. The method entails using information included within a data packet to determine a corresponding tunnel peer address, which is then resolved onto a set of paths. Each path includes respective adjacency information. A determination of whether to prune each respective path is made by using the respective adjacency information. The pruned set of paths is used to identify available paths for the communication link. By pruning in this manner, the line card being used as the home slot for a given session may also be used as the egress slot, thereby reducing congestion and latency in the communication system. | 09-06-2012 |
20120224478 | HIGH SPEED DATA TRANSMISSION UTILIZING A HIGH FREQUENCY PHYSICAL LAYER FOR A WIRELESS PERSONAL AREA NETWORK DEVICE - Wireless devices may utilize a Bluetooth stack to setup a data transmission session with other devices. The data transmission session may include a Bluetooth physical layer or a medium access control/physical layer that permits wireless devices to perform discovery, pairing, and security setup operations. When a radio interface of a wireless device is insufficient to enable performing a required data communication, such as a high data rate communication, a data transmission session may be established with at least one medium access control/physical layer of a plurality of other medium access control/physical layers to accommodate the required data communication. | 09-06-2012 |
20120224479 | METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT FOR TRANSFERRING INFORMATION IN A PACKET RADIO SERVICE - A method and an arrangement for transferring information including delay sensitive data, such as speech and video data, in a packet radio service is provided. Data blocks are transmitted from a mobile station to a radio resource entity during a first active data transfer period using an uplink temporary block flow (TBF) connection. The uplink TBF connection is maintained during a passive period that follows the first active data transfer period, wherein during the passive period the mobile station does not send data blocks to the radio resource entity. | 09-06-2012 |
20120224480 | TECHNIQUE FOR THROUGHPUT CONTROL FOR PACKET SWITCHES - A method for selective admission of traffic packets to a telecommunication switch having a limited throughput T and a common input queue, wherein the traffic packets comprise packets pre-assigned to higher and lower classes; in case of congestion at the common input queue of the switch, the method performs selective admission of the packets to the switch according to classes pre-assigned to them and depending on dynamic, recently utilized throughput of the switch. | 09-06-2012 |
20120230186 | Network Congestion Analysis - A network monitoring and network congestion analysis can be performed based on a comparison of data packets at multiple different network nodes installed at different locations on a communication path. A downstream network node may be installed at a user location while an upstream network may be installed at an access router further up the network. A network congestion analyzer may receive data packet information including timestamps from both network nodes, and may compare the data packet information to group the data packets into application flows and match the corresponding packets from the different network nodes. Based on the data packet matching, the network congestion analyzer may calculate packet loss, packet delay, packet delay variation, and perform other network congestion analysis techniques for the application flows corresponding to a user's various devices and the applications executing on those devices. | 09-13-2012 |
20120230187 | LOAD BALANCING SCTP ASSOCIATIONS USING VTAG MEDIATION - Presented is a system and methods for routing Stream Control Transmission Protocol (SCTP) between a client and a back-end server by a front-end server operating transparently between the client and the back-end server. The front-end server uses a distribution key created by the front-end server to route the SCTP packets to the proper destination. The distribution key is comprised of a client SCTP port number, a back-end server SCTP port number and a back-end server Initiate-Tag. The front-end server arbitrates clashes between distribution keys of different back-end servers by replacing the back-end server generated SCTP Initiate-Tag with a front-end server generated SCTP Initiate-Tag. | 09-13-2012 |
20120230188 | CONGESTION CAUSATION IN A NETWORK INTERCONNECT - A method and system for detecting congestion in a network of nodes, abating the network congestion, and identifying the cause of the network congestion is provided. A congestion detection system may comprise a detection system, an abatement system, and a causation system. The detection system monitors the performance of network components such as the network interface controllers and tiles of routers to determine whether the network is congested such that a delay in delivering packets becomes unacceptable. Upon detecting that the network is congested, an abatement system abates the congestion by limiting the rate at which packets are injected into the network from the nodes. Upon detecting that the network is congested, a causation system may identify the job that is executing on a node that is the cause of the network congestion. | 09-13-2012 |
20120230189 | System and method of transferring Wi-Fi clients between SSIDs - A computer networking system for load balancing, which comprises: a network, computing devices, access points each with a service set identifier, and a network management device. The network management device can receive a request from a computing device to access the network via a signal associated with a first service set identifier. In response to the request, the network management device receives loading information, which includes information associated with the access points. From the loading information, the network management device determines a least loaded access point, that is, the access point0 associated with a smallest quantity of computing devices. The network management device will send a service set identifier associated with the least loaded access point to the computing device which sent the access request. This computing device may then connect to the network via the least loaded access point and via the service set identifier associated with the least loaded access point. | 09-13-2012 |
20120230190 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - Device for controlling a transmission rate of information includes a reception element receiving an input signal, and outputting received data; a transmission element accepting a transmission frame, transmitting a transmission signal at a first transmission rate set based on transmission control information, and outputting a transmission timing signal indicating completion timing of transmission of the transmission signal; an information extracting element extracting the transmission control information from the received data, and designating a second transmission rate when transmitting the next transmission frame to the transmission element; and a service quality control element changing, upon detecting a second transmission rate smaller than the first transmission rate, an upper limit transmission rate to the second transmission rate or less, changing, upon detecting a second transmission rate larger than the first transmission rate, the upper limit transmission rate to the second transmission rate or less after the completion timing, and generating the transmission frame from transmitted data based on the upper limit transmission rate. | 09-13-2012 |
20120236712 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR LOAD BALANCING - Systems and methods of balancing traffic load in a wireless communication network include calculating a load metric for each of a plurality of users, wherein each of the plurality of users, in operation, are in communication with a first base station using an overloaded carrier associated with the first base station. Such load metric for each user may include a plurality of metric factors related at least to an associated communication link. Based on the calculated load metric, a transfer-deserving user from the plurality of users may be determined. The transfer-deserving user may be associated with a highest value of an associated calculated load metric. For load balancing at the first base station, the associated communication link of the transfer-deserving user may be transferred from the overloaded carrier to a target carrier, wherein the target carrier may be associated with either the first base station or a second base station. | 09-20-2012 |
20120236713 | ADAPTIVE QUALITY OF SERVICE (QoS) BASED ON APPLICATION LATENCY REQUIREMENTS - A device is configured to receive packet timing data, from multiple network devices, for subscriber application traffic over an Internet Protocol (IP) wireless access network and to calculate, based on the packet timing data, timing latencies for a particular subscriber flow. The device is configured to retrieve Quality of Service (QoS) timing specifications for the particular subscriber flow and to determine when the calculated timing latencies for the particular subscriber flow fail to meet the QoS timing specifications for the particular subscriber flow. The device is configured to identify one or more of the network devices that are causing the particular subscriber flow to fail to meet the QoS timing specifications and to instruct the one or more of the network devices to modify QoS parameters for the particular subscriber flow to improve timing latency for the particular subscriber flow. | 09-20-2012 |
20120236714 | Method for Establishing and Terminating Service Flow via Relay Nodes using Tunnel Mechanism - A mechanism and protocol are provided in a digital communication system having a plurality of nodes in a shared media domain in order to establish a tunneled service flow between an originating node and a hidden endpoint node via at least one relay node by using a tunnel mechanism to enforce the service flow requirement for Quality Of Service required parameters wherein a domain master determines service flow via relay nodes between the originating node and the hidden endpoint node, calculates needed bandwidth resources and reserves the needed bandwidth resources in order to later allocate them to support the service flows required by Quality of Service parameters embodying the tunneled service flow. Procedures are also provided for termination of a tunneled service flow by an application entity or by the originating node or by the domain master. | 09-20-2012 |
20120236715 | Measurement Based Admission Control Using Explicit Congestion Notification In A Partitioned Network - A device and method for implementing a measurement based admission control (MBAC) protocol consists of various devices having software modules running thereon which are capable of calculating a congestion level based upon the detection of incoming packets having Explicit Congestion Notification (ECN) bits set by one or more routers in an encrypted core domain of a partitioned network. Upon detecting a certain congestion level at an egress edge of the network, a UDP packet is transmitted back to the ingress edge of the network wherein certain types or percentages of certain types of packets are blocked to relieve the congestion on the network. Once the congestion level on the network falls below a certain level, those packets may be transmitted. | 09-20-2012 |
20120243408 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING A COLLABORATIVE REPLY OVER AN AD-HOC MESH NETWORK - An approach is provided for providing a collaborative reply to a flooding message over an ad-hoc mesh network. A reply message to a flooding message is received by a wireless node within the ad-hoc network. The wireless node monitors for an acknowledgement of receipt of the reply message according to a routing table and initiates a scheduled transmission of the reply message based on the monitoring. | 09-27-2012 |
20120250502 | Method and System for Egress Policy Indications - According to one embodiment, a method may include assigning one egress profile identifier out of a plurality of egress profile identifiers to an Ethernet frame based at least on an egress connection identifier (eXid) tag of the Ethernet frame at a traffic manager, receiving the Ethernet frame at a switching element from the traffic manager, receiving metadata at the switching element from the traffic manager, the metadata comprising the assigned egress profile identifier, an internal class of service marker, and an internal congestion marker, and mapping the internal class of service marker and the internal congestion marker to a priority marker and an external congestion marker in the Ethernet frame based on the egress profile identifier. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250503 | Method for Controlling PTM Service Transmission - The present disclosure relates to the field of multicast/broadcast transmission of content data. A method embodiment for controlling transmission of a PTM service from a content source | 10-04-2012 |
20120250504 | Systems and Methods for Routing Broadband Communications - Systems and methods for routing broadband communications are provided. Downstream data to be communicated from a cable service provider head end system to a customer device may be received by a provider edge routing device. The downstream data may be mapped by the provider edge routing device to a physical address associated with the customer device, and the downstream data may be output by the provider edge routing device for communication to the customer device. A provider edge device separate from the provider edge routing device may receive the output downstream data. Based at least in part upon the physical address, the provider edge device may determine a port for outputting the downstream data, and the provider edge device may output the downstream data on the determined port. | 10-04-2012 |
20120257497 | METHOD FOR SELECTING ALLOCABLE WIRELESS RESOURCES, DEVICE FOR SELECTING ALLOCABLE WIRELESS RESOURCES, AND COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A communication device in wireless communication with another communication device or devices includes an index value calculation unit, a congestion degree measuring unit, a threshold value setting unit, and a determination unit. The index value calculation unit calculates an index value according to each of the other communication devices for determining whether or not to let a wireless resource utilized for communications with the other communication device be a candidate allocated to the other communication device based on the quality of a channel to the other communication device. The congestion degree measuring unit measures a congestion degree between itself and the other communication device. The threshold value setting unit calculates a threshold value for determining whether or not to let the wireless resource be the candidate allocated to the other communication device based on the measured congestion degree. The determination unit compares the index value with the threshold value to determine whether or not to let the wireless resource be the candidate allocated to the other communication device. | 10-11-2012 |
20120263036 | Mechanism for wireless access networks to throttle traffic during congestion - Exemplary methods and apparatuses are provided for throttling wireless traffic during congestion in radio access networks. Embodiments are provided that may assist service providers to reduce new requests for network resources during congestion and allow existing lower priority traffic to be pre-empted with a backoff time to allow a new request with higher priority traffic to be served. In response to a request for an additional connection to a radio access network from a terminal device that has one or more existing connections in the radio access network, an access network controller will compare a priority level of a requested connection to a priority level of other existing connections in the radio access network. The access network controller may reject or grant the request based on the comparison and send the terminal device a backoff time value and a congestion indicator. | 10-18-2012 |
20120263037 | Methods and Systems for Network Address Translation Management - A computer readable medium includes code to provide network address translation tables. One table includes entries for low priority network traffic and the other table includes entries for high priority network traffic. The code also enforces limits on processor cycles used for maintenance of the tables, receives a packet of a first network traffic type, determines the first packet is low priority traffic based upon the packet being of a first network traffic type, adds an entry to the low priority table, and removes the entry from the low priority table after a first timeout interval and a second entry from the second network address translation table after a second timeout interval. | 10-18-2012 |
20120269061 | Method and Apparatus for Selecting a Quality of Service Parameter - A method comprising using information about predicted load in a geographic location as a function of time to select a quality of service parameter at a particular time in said geographic location. | 10-25-2012 |
20120269062 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING DATA TRANSMISSION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method is provided for controlling data transmission considering congestion in a wired transmission section in a wireless communication system. To this end, a reception device reports, to a transmission device, status information about a congestion status and flag information indicating occurrence of a new congestion status or maintenance of an existing congestion statue. The transmission device reduces throughput of data being transmitted through the wired transmission section, if it is determined from the flag information reported by the reception device that a new congestion status has occurred or the existing congestion status has been being maintained for a predetermined time. The transmission device requests the reception device to report a congestion status, if the congestion status is not released until a lapse of a predetermined time after occurrence of a new congestion status. | 10-25-2012 |
20120275301 | Port and Priority Based Flow Control Mechanism for Lossless Ethernet - An apparatus comprising an aggregation/core switch configure to couple to an edge switch and receive information about a plurality of end system facing ports of the edge switch, wherein the information about the end system facing ports is used to associate the end system facing ports with a plurality of corresponding queues at the aggregation/core switch. Also disclosed is a network component comprising a receiver configured to receive information about a plurality of end system facing ports of an edge switch, a processor configured to establish and associate the end system facing ports with a plurality of corresponding queues, and a transmitter configured to return information about the associated end system facing ports. | 11-01-2012 |
20120275302 | FREE MARKET BASED PRICING FOR BANDWIDTH AND NETWORK USAGE - The disclosed embodiments include a system and method for establishing a price for communicating over a communications network. In one embodiment, the system includes a plurality of network nodes configured to communicate over the communications network and a primary network edge node configured to provide network access to a plurality of end user devices. The primary network edge node is configured to initiate a bandwidth occupancy query message to at least one of said network nodes along a traffic path to which an end user device is communicating, determine a highest bandwidth occupancy of said network nodes along the traffic path, and compute a current price for the end user device communicating over the traffic path based on the highest bandwidth occupancy. | 11-01-2012 |
20120275303 | METHOD, DEVICE, AND NETWORK SYSTEM OF ESTABLISHING A TUNNEL - A method, a device, and a network system of establishing a tunnel are provided in embodiments of the present disclosure. The method of establishing the tunnel includes: obtaining, by a WTP, an address of an AC and an address of a BRAS from a DHCP server; using, by the WTP, the address of the AC to establish a CAPWAP control tunnel with the AC; and using, by the WTP, the address of the BRAS to establish a CAPWAP data tunnel with the BRAS. By using the technical scheme provided in the embodiments of the present disclosure, the CAPWAP data tunnel may be established between the WTP and the BRAS. | 11-01-2012 |
20120281529 | Bandwidth Advertisement Model for Shared Mesh Protection - Methods and nodes are disclosed. In the methods, circuitry of a first node generates a link state advertising message including bandwidth information indicative of unreserved aggregate bandwidth for multiple priority connections where aggregate bandwidth is greater than available bandwidth. The link state advertising message is transmitted from the first node to a plurality of second nodes within a mesh network. Node bandwidth constraints may be established that contain some designated allocated bandwidth which is not shared with any other Class Types (CT); however, the bandwidth constraints may also allow segregation of other CTs so that within those CTs allocation of designated bandwidth is guaranteed for high priority traffic and low priority traffic is left with the remaining bandwidth in the CT's allocation. | 11-08-2012 |
20120281530 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR RADIO ACCESS NETWORK OVERLOAD CONTROL - Methods and apparatuses are provided for access control in a wireless communication system. In particular, certain parameters utilized by access terminals for a random access procedure may be partitioned, such that different classes of access terminals may be controlled independent of other classes. Here, an exclusive set of access classes may be utilized by low-priority machine type communication devices, such that the broadcasting of a bit mask corresponding to the access classes can bar some or all of the low-priority devices. Further, a new access service class may be utilized exclusively by the low-priority devices, wherein the signature space utilized for random access attempts can be partitioned between the new access service class and all other access service classes. | 11-08-2012 |
20120281531 | CONTROLLING NETWORK ACCESSES BY RADIO TERMINALS ASSOCIATED WITH ACCESS CLASSES - A terminal's access to a network over a radio interface using access resources is controlled to reduce network load. The terminal is associated with one of a set of access classes and receives information from the network about limited access resources and permitted access classes. Terminals not associated with a permitted access class are prohibited from using the limited access resources. The terminal determines a first set of time periods during which available access resources, permitted for use by the access class of the terminal, may be used by the terminal to access the radio network. The first time period set is different from other sets of time periods permitted for use by other access classes. The terminal communicates using the available access resources during the first set of time periods to reduce network load. | 11-08-2012 |
20120281532 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SELECTING A QUALITY OF SERVICE POLICY IN A UNIVERSAL PLUG AND PLAY HOME NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - A method and system are provided for selecting a Quality of Service QoS policy in a Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) home network environment. The method includes receiving a request for a QoS setup from a Control Point (CP); requesting each of at least one QoS Policy Holder (QPH) in the UPnP home network environment to provide a QoS policy for a traffic stream, based on the received request for the QoS setup; receiving at least one QoS policy from the at least one QPH according to the traffic stream; selecting a best matched QoS policy from the received at least one QoS policy, based on predefined parameters; and setting up a QoS in the UPnP home network environment by applying the selected best matched QoS policy. | 11-08-2012 |
20120281533 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR TIME OPTIMIZATION FOR SILENCING WIRELESS DEVICES IN COEXISTENCE NETWORKS - In at least some embodiments, a communication device includes a transceiver with at least two dissimilar wireless network technology subsystems. The communication device also includes a silencing frame controller to monitor access point rate drop behavior and to adjust a level of silencing frame operations for the communication device based on the monitored access point drop behavior. | 11-08-2012 |
20120281534 | VARIABLE AAA LOAD DISTRIBUTION FOR PDSN - A packet data serving node (PDSN) manages sessions between mobile devices and a packet-based network. The PDSN sends requests to and receives responses from an authentication, authorization, and accounting (AAA) server. The PDSN includes a packet session manager configured to create, maintain, and terminate the sessions between mobile devices and the packet-based network. The PDSN also includes a global AAA manager configured to determine latency in communication between the PDSN and the AAA server based on latencies of responses to at least two requests which the PDSN sends to the AAA server. The global AAA manager determines an adjustment in a load which may be imposed on the AAA sever based on the determined latency and causes the determined adjustment in the load which may be imposed on the AAA server to be implemented. | 11-08-2012 |
20120287782 | PROGRAMMABLE AND HIGH PERFORMANCE SWITCH FOR DATA CENTER NETWORKS - This application describes routing packets from a source server to a plurality of ports of a switch. The switch is programmed by the control server and is used to direct incoming data packets to one or more ports of the switch in a manner that reduces congestion of incoming data packets to a destination server. Further, the control server queries congestion information from the switch, and then sends congestion notification back to the source server to either increase or decrease the amount of data being sent to the destination server. | 11-15-2012 |
20120287783 | LOAD BALANCING METHOD FOR A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A load balancing method for a wireless communication system, which has a backbone network, more than one Access Point connected to the backbone network and more than one client. In the method, the client transmits a Probe Request message to the more than one Access Point; the Access Point monitors its load. If the Access Point is under an overload situation, it transmits a Probe Response message to the client by the minimum transmitting power. If the Access Point is under normal load situation, it transmits a Probe Response message to the client by normal transmitting power. The client preferentially chooses the Access Point under normal load situation to access based on the signal strength of the received Probe Respond message. The method thus provides the client with a priority of the Access Points, wherein the Access Point under an overload situation has a lower priority. | 11-15-2012 |
20120294143 | ENABLING CIRCUIT-SWITCHED SERVICES DURING MOBILITY MANAGEMENT CONGESTION CONTROL - A method is provided that includes causing transmission of a first mobility management (MM) message from a UE to a core network including packet-switched (PS) and circuit-switched (CS) domains. The method may include causing transmission of the first MM message to a PS-domain component, and receiving a rejection message from the PS-domain component in response thereto. The rejection message indicates congestion as a cause for rejection of the first MM message, and indicates whether circuit-switched services are permitted or forbidden during running of the back-off timer. In response to receipt of the rejection message, the method may include running a back-off timer. While the back-off timer is running in an instance in which the rejection message indicates that circuit-switched services are permitted, the method may include causing transmission of a second MM message from the UE to a CS-domain component. A corresponding apparatus and computer-readable storage medium are also provided. | 11-22-2012 |
20120294144 | ENABLING CIRCUIT-SWITCHED SERVICES DURING MOBILITY MANAGEMENT CONGESTION CONTROL - A method is provided that includes causing transmission of a first mobility management (MM) message from a UE to a core network including packet-switched (PS) and circuit-switched (CS) domains. The method may include causing transmission of the first MM message to a PS-domain component, and receiving a rejection message from the PS-domain component in response thereto. The rejection message indicates congestion as a cause for rejection of the first MM message. In response to receipt of the rejection message, the method may include running a back-off timer. While the back-off timer is running in an instance in which the rejection message indicates that circuit-switched services are permitted, the method may include causing transmission of a second MM message from the UE to a CS-domain component. A corresponding apparatus and computer-readable storage medium are also provided. | 11-22-2012 |
20120294145 | Random Access Improvement - In accordance with the exemplary embodiments of the invention there is at least a method and an apparatus to perform operations in accordance with the exemplary embodiments of the invention including identifying an access class of a plurality of access classes to access a wireless network, the identified access class having an access service class of 0; determining a persistence value of the identified access class, wherein the persistence value is determined based on a persistence formula; and using the determined persistence value of the identified access class to enable the access to the wireless network, wherein the determined persistence value of the identified access class is a value other than 1. | 11-22-2012 |
20120294146 | Method and system for controlling machine type communication equipment to access network - The disclosure discloses a method for controlling Machine Type Communication (MTC) equipment to access network, wherein an access grade is set for an MTC equipment or an MTC group, and corresponding access parameters are set for the MTC equipment or MTC group according to the access grade, wherein the method comprises the steps of: notifying or configuring the access parameters to the MTC equipment and initiating, by the MTC equipment, an access request according to the access parameters; or, an access priority is configured for the MTC equipment or MTC group, wherein the method comprises the steps of: acquiring by the network side the access priority of the MTC equipment or MTC group after the network side receives the access request from the MTC equipment, and performing an access control on the MTC equipment according to the current network load. The disclosure further discloses a system for implementing the method. The disclosure can ensure that the service load of the Core Network (CN) side is controlled within a certain range, thus avoiding impact on the services that have currently accessed the network. The disclosure is especially applicable to communication systems with Machine To Machine (M2M) mechanism. | 11-22-2012 |
20120294147 | Device Initiated DQoS System and Method - A Data Over Cable Service Interface Specification (DOCSIS) cable modem system is coupled to: i) via a local area internet protocol (IP) network, a voice over internet protocol (VoIP) device operating Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) for signaling a VoIP session; and ii) via a DOCSIS network, a cable modem termination system (CMTS) via a network. The cable modem system comprises instructions stored in a memory and executed by a processor. The instructions comprise: i) in response to receiving a frame via the local area IP network, determining if the frame is a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) invite message signaling a VoIP session with a remote endpoint; and ii) in response to determining that the frame is a SIP invite message, generating a DOCSIS message to the CMTS to request an addition of reserved bandwidth on the DOCSIS network for the VoIP session. | 11-22-2012 |
20120294148 | LOAD BALANCING DISTRIBUTION OF DATA TO MULTIPLE RECIPIENTS ON A PEER-TO-PEER NETWORK - Each peer node in a plurality has a different corresponding key value. Each of the nodes can broadcast one or more items to a plurality of recipient nodes. The recipient nodes are arranged into a list according to a key value order. The list is divided into two or more parts of approximately equal size, and each part of the list and the one or more items is forwarded to a recipient peer node corresponding to a first key value in that part of the list. It is emphasized that this abstract is provided to comply with the rules requiring an abstract that will allow a searcher or other reader to quickly ascertain the subject matter of the technical disclosure. This abstract is submitted with the understanding that it will not be used to interpret or limit the scope or meaning of the claims. | 11-22-2012 |
20120300622 | MAINTAINING SERVICE PRIORITY FOR MOBILE DEVICES DURING NETWORK HANDOFFS - Implementations and techniques for maintaining service priority for mobile devices during network handoffs are generally discussed. | 11-29-2012 |
20120300623 | LOAD BALANCE CONTROL UNIT, LOAD BALANCE CONTROL METHOD AND STORAGE MEDIUM - [Solution to Problem] A load balance control unit, which is included in a transmission apparatus for transmitting a plurality of units of data, each being a piece of transmission data delimited by a given data length, to an opposite apparatus via a plurality of transmission lines, includes sorting buffers which are provided for the respective transmission lines; a threshold setting element which sets upper limit retention threshold values for the respective sorting buffers; and a sorting determination element which determines, for each of the units of data, in which of the sorting buffers the each of the units of data is to be written, taking into consideration retention states and the upper limit retention threshold values of the respective sorting buffers, and a data amount of the each of the units of data. | 11-29-2012 |
20120307631 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING CONGESTION MANAGEMENT FOR A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method and apparatus for providing a congestion management of a wireless communication network are disclosed. For example, the method projects dynamically a trend for a network element of the wireless communication network, using a functionality metric associated with the network element of the wireless communication network, and determines if there is a potential congestion in accordance with the trend. The method then provides a notification of the potential congestion, if there is a potential congestion for the network element of the wireless communication network. | 12-06-2012 |
20120307632 | METHOD AND APPARATUS TO PREVENT RAN (RADIO ACCESS NETWORK) OVERLOAD FOR LEGACY NETWORKS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus are disclosed to prevent RAN (Radio Access Network) overload for legacy networks in a wireless communication system. In one embodiment, the method comprise initiating a RRC (Radio Resource Control) connection establishment procedure to access a cell. The method further comprises performing an access barring check. The method also comprises extending a barring time autonomously. | 12-06-2012 |
20120307633 | Dynamic Frequency Allocation In Wireless Backhaul Networks - Disclosed is a wireless backhaul network for a communications system. The network comprises a congregate node connected to the communications system; a plurality of access points, each access point having associated amounts of incident bidirectional traffic to be conveyed to and from the congregate node; and a plurality of bidirectional wireless links adapted to convey the traffic between the access points and the congregate node. The congregate node is configured to allocate spectrum to each directional component of each link within a predetermined available spectrum for the conveyance of the traffic, wherein the allocation is dependent on the amounts of traffic at the respective access points. | 12-06-2012 |
20120314568 | INTEROPERABLE QUALITY OF SERVICE PRE-NEGOTIATION - A system configured to receive a request to identify a quality of service (QoS) policy to be used to process traffic that is received from a user device associated with another network; obtain an interoperable QoS policy, where the interoperable QoS policy identifies a first QoS level, associated with the other network, that corresponds to a type of traffic received from the user device; obtain, from the interoperable QoS policy, a second QoS level that corresponds to the first QoS level; and send, to a device, an instruction to process the traffic based on the second QoS level. | 12-13-2012 |
20120314569 | Relay Node Interface Related Layer 2 Measurements and Relay Node Handling in Network Load Balancing - A method for performing radio usage measurements to support radio link operations and/or load balancing may be performed at an evolved Node B (eNB). The method may include determining a first radio usage parameter. The first radio usage parameter may be a measurement of radio usage between an eNB and at least one wireless transmit receive unit (WTRU). The method may further include determining a second radio usage parameter. The second radio usage parameter may be a measurement of radio usage between the eNB and at least one relay node (RN) served by the eNB. The method may further include utilizing at least one of the first radio usage parameter or the second radio usage parameter to evaluate at least one of evolved universal terrestrial radio access (E-UTRA) radio link operations, radio resource management (RRM), network operations and maintenance (OAM), and self-organizing networks (SON) functions or functionalities. | 12-13-2012 |
20120314570 | SYSTEM AND METHODS TO COMPENSATE FOR DOPPLER EFFECTS IN DISTRIBUTED-INPUT DISTRIBUTED-OUTPUT WIRELESS SYSTEMS - A system and methods are described which compensate for the adverse effect of Doppler on the performance of DIDO systems. One embodiment of such a system employs different selection algorithms to adaptively adjust the active BTSs to different UEs based by tracking the changing channel conditions. Another embodiment utilizes channel prediction to estimate the future CSI or DIDO precoding weights, thereby eliminating errors due to outdated CSI. | 12-13-2012 |
20120314571 | ENSURING QUALITY OF SERVICE FOR PRIVATE SHORT-RANGE WIRELESS NETWORKS - A system manages the integration of a private short-range wireless network into a service/mobility domain with ensured quality of service. A server provides to wireless terminal devices, connection information including at least one of available quality of service (QoS), an indication of the access points, or an indication of services provided by one or more access points registered with the server. The server maintains information specifying a minimum quality of service (QoS) for first wireless terminal devices authorized for private network access, and rules for granting access to second wireless terminal devices authorized for shared network access, for one or more access points registered with the server. | 12-13-2012 |
20120314572 | Communication Apparatus, Communication Method, and Recording Medium Storing Program - When a communication apparatus (server device) that includes wireless access means and can send content data by using the wireless access means starts sending content data, it calculates a communication band that remains available for the server device to perform communication, so that any content that has a rate equal to or greater than the remaining communication band may not be publicized open to and may not hence be sent to a client device. | 12-13-2012 |
20120320743 | Devices and Methods for Managing Quality of Service for Bearers Depending on Utilization - Methods and devices used for a dynamic QoS management taking into consideration a global throughput and individual bearer throughputs are provided. The global throughput and individual bearer throughputs may be predicted upon receiving each packet from a public domain network. Individually, for each bearer is determined if a current QoS service is adequate by comparing the global throughput with threshold values associated to the bearer and on evaluating whether the bearer is overloaded. If the current QoS level associated with the bearer is not adequate, the QoS level associated with the bearer is set to another QoS level. | 12-20-2012 |
20120320744 | COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A communication terminal is used in a wireless communication environment which involves a plurality of coexisting communication processes with upper limit values being set respectively therein for amounts of data to be transmitted. The communication terminal includes a compressor which compresses data to be transmitted, and a compression controller which controls the compressor to compress the data if the amount of the data to be transmitted is equal to or greater than the upper limit value set depending on one of the communication processes which is to be used to transmit the data. | 12-20-2012 |
20120320745 | Method for scheduling guaranteed bit rate service based on quality of service - The disclosure discloses a method for scheduling a Guaranteed Bit Rate (GBR) service based on Quality of Service (QoS) and an apparatus implementing the method, wherein the method comprises the steps of: determining a scheduling priority of an online user according to an average rate of a GBR service of the user in a current Transmission Time Interval (TTI); and scheduling the user in accordance with the determined priority and allocating Resource Block (RB) resources to the user. With the scheduling method of the disclosure, the RB resource can be fully utilized, and the user rate which does not reach the GBR is quickly improved to make as many users as possible to reach the GBR, so as to increase the number of satisfied users in system. For the case in which a Maximum Bit Rate (MBR) is greater than the GBR, on the basis that as many users as possible are made to reach the GBR, the rates of the users can be further improved to increase the number of users with high rates. | 12-20-2012 |
20120320746 | Method and Apparatus for Grant-Based Uplink Transmission Scheduling - In one aspect, the present invention advantageously provides far greater granularity in adjusting the maximum (schedulable) uplink bit rates of users than is directly available from a defined grant table that is used for making scheduled uplink grants to those users. As a non-limiting example, the EUL scheduler in a NodeB in a WCDMA network calculates the “effective” bit rate desired for one or more users over a given time interval, and determines the pattern of scheduling grants to make from the grant table over that interval, to produce the desired effective bit rate(s). This capability enables the EUL scheduler to make relatively fine fractional adjustments to the aggregate uplink data rate for a plurality of users, thus allowing much more precise reductions in the aggregate uplink data rate of those users. The EUL scheduler makes these more precise adjustments, for example, in response to indications of congestion on the backhaul connection between the NodeB and its supporting RNC. Grant variations also may be used in the HARQ processes of one or more users, for obtaining better bit rate control granularity. | 12-20-2012 |
20120320747 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING PACKET FLOW IN A PACKET-SWITCHED NETWORK - The disclosure provides an authentication network. In one embodiment the authentication network includes: (1) an authentication server for receiving authentication requests, (2) at least one network node for forwarding authentication requests from user devices to the authentication server, and (3) a flooding disabler in the at least one network node for selectively disabling the flooding of packets from the user device by the at least one network node. | 12-20-2012 |
20120327766 | LEVEL OF HIERARCHY IN MST FOR TRAFFIC LOCALIZATION AND LOAD BALANCING - In one embodiment, a multiple spanning tree (MST) region is defined in a network, where the MST region includes a plurality of network nodes interconnected by links. A MST cluster is defined within the MST region, where the MST cluster includes a plurality of network nodes selected from the plurality of network nodes of the MST region. A network node of the MST cluster generates one or more MST bridge protocol data units (BPDUs) that present the MST cluster as a single logical entity to network nodes of the MST region that are not included in the MST cluster, yet enables per-multiple spanning tree instance (per-MSTI) load balancing of traffic across inter-cluster links that connect network nodes included in the MST cluster and network nodes of the MST region that are not included in the MST cluster. | 12-27-2012 |
20120327767 | METHOD FOR IMPLEMENTING AN INTERNET PROTOCOL (IP) CHARGING AND RATING MIDDLEWARE PLATFORM AND GATEWAY SYSTEM - A method for Internet Protocol (IP) charging and rating gateway within a system having: a proxy server for connection to an Authentication, Authorization, and Accounting (AAA) server; an access gateway, an IP classification engine for connection between a data network and the access gateway; and a gateway controller connected to the proxy server and the IP classification engine, including the steps of: receiving IP packets at the IP classification engine, the IP packets originating from the data network and destined for a subscriber device via the access gateway; classifying the IP packets according to the protocol of each of the packets at the IP classification engine; and selectively instructing the IP classification engine to permit or deny the flow of IP packets between the data network and the access gateway at the gateway controller. Preferably, the proxy server is configured to emulate the access gateway and the AAA server. | 12-27-2012 |
20130003538 | PERFORMANCE ISOLATION FOR CLOUDS - Traffic in a cloud is controlled by the nodes participating in the cloud. Tenants of the cloud each have a ratio. On any given node, a current transmission rate of the node is allocated among the tenants of the node, or more specifically, their execution units (e.g., virtual machines) on the node. Thus each tenant receives a predefined portion of the transmission capacity of the node. The transmission capacity can vary as conditions on the network change. For example, if congestion occurs, the transmission capacity may be decreased. Nonetheless, each tenant receives, according to its ratio, a same relative portion of the overall transmission capacity. | 01-03-2013 |
20130003539 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONFIGURATION ADMISSION CONTROL OF SERVICE INSTANCES - A method for configuring admission control of service instances in a network element may include: (i) reading a pre-determined maximum service-idle utilization of a processor approximately equal to maximum utilization of the processor in the absence of services executing on the processor; (ii) reading, for each particular service instance of a desired configuration of service instances, a pre-determined maximum utilization of the processor associated with the particular service instance; (iii) calculating an aggregate maximum utilization for the desired configuration, based on the pre-determined maximum service-idle utilization and the pre-determined maximum utilizations for each of the particular service instances; (iv) determining whether the aggregate maximum utilization is greater than a threshold maximum utilization for the processor; (v) allowing or denying the desired configuration based on the determination. | 01-03-2013 |
20130003540 | POWER MANGEMENT TECHNIQUES FOR AN INPUT/OUTPUT (I/O) SUBSYSTEM - A method and system to improve the power management for an I/O subsystem. In one embodiment of the invention, the power management of an upstream port of the I/O subsystem is improved by increasing the upstream link utilization when the upstream port is an active power state and by increasing or prolonging the power saving period of the upstream port when the upstream port is in a low power state. | 01-03-2013 |
20130003541 | Mobile Communications Device and Method - Methods and mobile communications devices to communicate data packets via a mobile communications network, the mobile communications network including a radio network part which includes base stations providing different radio access interfaces from which different radio access bearer types can be formed for communicating the data packets from the mobile communications devices, and a core network part which includes infrastructure equipment for communicating the data packets from the radio network part, the mobile communications device including a radio bearer controller configured to determine a traffic profile of the data packets to be communicated via the mobile communications network from one of a predetermined set of possible traffic profiles, and to select one of the different radio access types to provide a radio access bearer of a type most suitable for communicating the data packets from the mobile communications device in accordance with the determined traffic profile of the data packets. | 01-03-2013 |
20130003542 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR ENHANCED UL RLC FLOW CONTROL FOR MRAB CALLS - Systems, devices, and methods for wireless enhanced uplink (UL) radio link control (RLC) flow control for multi-radio access bearer (MRAB) calls. In one aspect, a device configured to manage a wireless connection in a voice and data communication is provided. The device includes a receiver configured to receive radio link control (RLC) control information. The device further includes a controller configured to detect one or more radio frequency (RF) conditions. The controller is further configured to dynamically adjust, independent of the received RLC control information, RLC flow control in response to the RF conditions. | 01-03-2013 |
20130003543 | NEXT-GENERATION BANDWIDTH MANAGEMENT CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR MULTIPLE-SERVICE CALLS, SESSIONS, PACKET-LEVEL PROCESSES, AND QoS PARAMETERS - PART 1: STRUCTURAL AND FUNCTIONAL ARCHITECTURES - System and method for addressing immense, long-standing problem of bandwidth management, for example, in enterprise networks, VPNs, real-time and stored video services, mobile applications, wireless networks, and cloud computing applications. Described features include an automatic closed-loop control system infrastructure encompassing multiple time-scales and performing control actions optimized to the extent possible with respect to administrator-provided performance metrics. One aspect utilizes available or innovatively accessible means of session and QoS control (settings in configuration files, gateway APIs, QoS parameters, application bit-rate settings, etc.) within the context of practical multiple-vendor products in evolving multiple-service networks. Another aspect utilizes available or innovatively accessible means of session and QoS observations (values in reporting log files, gateway APIs, network monitoring, etc.) within the context of practical multiple-vendor products in evolving multiple-service networks. Traffic-measurement controlled adaptive reservations for distributed myopic single-service gatekeepers effectively shapes the permitted state-space boundary over a range of arbitrary curvatures. | 01-03-2013 |
20130003544 | METHOD FOR SCHEDULING OF PACKETS IN TDMA CHANNELS - A method for servicing a multiplicity of different queues in a node of a network, in which packets are sent over a time slotted communications channel, while keeping the quality of service (QoS) for each different queue. Incoming packets are classified first to different QoS. Then at least some of the incoming packets are fragmented into fragments. Further, the fragments are assigned to the respective queues. The incoming fragments of packets are populated in time slots, in an order determined by a queue order list (QOL). Each fragment of a packet populated with another fragment of a same packet in a same time slot, has no overhead except for one fragment of that same fragmented packet in the time slot, the overhead of which is retained. | 01-03-2013 |
20130010593 | METHOD FOR MANAGING LOAD, METHOD FOR SYSTEM ACCESS, BASE STATION AND TERMINAL IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A system access method of a terminal in a mobile communication system according to an exemplary embodiment of the present invention includes receiving a control channel or a control message including resource allocation information, an access restriction indicator, and information about a random access region from a base station, and determining whether or not to access the base station according to a set value of the access restriction indicator. | 01-10-2013 |
20130010594 | Adaptive Edge-Implemented Traffic Policy in a Data Processing Network - In one aspect, a disclosed method of processing a network packet received by an edge device from a client in a data processing network includes determining a priority category of the network packet when the priority category is indicative of a priority associated with the packet. The method further includes determining a value of a traffic state parameter. The traffic state parameter indicates a level of traffic activity in a backbone network to which the edge device is connected. A traffic policy is then determined that is applicable to the level of traffic activity and the priority category of the network packet. The network packet is then blocked from traversing or permitted to traverse the network packet edge device based on the determined traffic policy. Determining the priority category may include determining a transport protocol port number of the network packet. | 01-10-2013 |
20130016607 | Method of Handling Emergency Bearer Service in Wireless Communication System - A method of handling an emergency bearer service for a mobile station in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method comprises receiving an attach rejection message with a back-off timer when a network node is applying a non-access stratum (NAS) level congestion control, wherein the attach rejection message is used for rejecting a normal attach procedure; and initiating a packet switch (PS) emergency attach procedure when a PS emergency bearer service is initiated during a time of the back-off timer being running. | 01-17-2013 |
20130016608 | Method of Reducing Signaling in Congested Network and Related Communication Device - A method of reducing signaling in a congested core network for a mobile device is disclosed. The method comprises initiating a procedure when a back-off timer is running on the mobile device; receiving a message during the procedure; and treating a cell as Network Mode of Operation (NMO) II and initiating a location update procedure according to reception of the message, wherein the mobile device is combined attached for a packet switched (PS) service and a circuit switched (CS) service to a network operating in NMO I. | 01-17-2013 |
20130016609 | NETWORK EQUIPMENT AND FRAME TRANSMISSION CONTROL METHODAANM HAYAKAWA; HitoshiAACI YokohamaAACO JPAAGP HAYAKAWA; Hitoshi Yokohama JPAANM TSUSHIMA; YujiAACI HachiojiAACO JPAAGP TSUSHIMA; Yuji Hachioji JP - Network equipment has multiple ports each performing transmission/reception of a frame, and a control unit that when the frame received through the port is an command of temporal suspension, temporarily suspends transmission of the frame from the port until a predetermined time elapses and after the predetermined time elapsed, alters the transmission bandwidth of each traffic about a communication path corresponding to the frame according to a variation of an interval at which the command of temporal suspension is received. | 01-17-2013 |
20130016610 | METHOD FOR OPERATING A WIRELESS NETWORK AND A WIRELESS NETWORKAANM Kutscher; DirkAACI HeidelbergAACO DEAAGP Kutscher; Dirk Heidelberg DEAANM Mir; Faisal-GhiasAACI HeidelbergAACO DEAAGP Mir; Faisal-Ghias Heidelberg DEAANM Lundqvist; HenrikAACI MunchenAACO DEAAGP Lundqvist; Henrik Munchen DE - For allowing a best possible usage of network resources even under congestion conditions a method for operating a wireless network, especially an IP (Internet Protocol) network, is described, wherein a queue management function based on an average queue length in a network element is used. The method is characterized in that a result of a weighting function will be combined or multiplied with the average queue length for determining a combined congestion contribution for use within the queue management function, wherein the weighting function takes into account per-user information on a wireless channel condition. Further, a corresponding wireless network, preferably for carrying out the above mentioned method, is also described. | 01-17-2013 |
20130016611 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PRIORITIZING VOICE OVER INTERNET PROTOCOL SIGNALING MESSAGES - A method and apparatus for enabling prioritization of signaling messages in a communication network are disclosed. For example, the method receives at least one signaling message, and classifies each of the at least one signaling message. The method schedules each of the at least one signaling message for processing, and discards selectively one or more signaling messages that have been scheduled under an overload condition. | 01-17-2013 |
20130021904 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONGESTION CONTROL IN A CORE NETWORK - Embodiments provide a system and method for congestion control. The system includes a radio access network (RAN) including a network element, and a core network including a plurality of gateways. The network element is configured to receive a connection request from an accessing device, where the connection request requests connection to a first gateway of the plurality of gateways, and the network element is included in the RAN. The network element is configured to obtain a priority of the accessing device and a threshold priority of the first gateway and grant the connection request based on the priority of the accessing device and the threshold priority of the first gateway. | 01-24-2013 |
20130028079 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR RESOURCE BOOKING FOR ADMISSION CONTROL AND SCHEDULING - Systems and methods provide for performing admission control in a communications network. The method includes: receiving a request for an entity or service for admission to the communications network; calculating resources, wherein the step of calculating resources includes: estimating a first future resource use for current entities and services in the communications network; and estimating a second future resource use for the entity or service received in the request; determining admission to the communications network of the received request based at least in part on the step of calculating resources; and using a partitionable booking window, if admission is allowed for the received request, for booking the first and second future resource uses based at least in part on the step of calculating resources. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028080 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONFIGURATION AND MANAGEMENT OF QUEUE SETS - A network device includes port interfaces and a traffic buffer configured with queue sets for buffering packets transmitted or received on the port interfaces. The network device also includes a management module that stores one or more queue set profiles. The queue set profiles specify configuration parameters for buffering and managing traffic in the queue sets. To configure a queue set, one of the queue set profiles is associated with the corresponding port interface and the configuration parameters are applied to the queue set. This queue set is then configured in accordance with the queue set profile. Management of port interfaces is thus performed by applying a queue set profile to similar groups of queue sets. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028081 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR BALANCING LOAD AND REDUCING CALL BLOCKING IN A TD-SCDMA SYSTEM - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided in connection with providing a process for balancing loads and reducing call blocking in a TD-SCDMA network. In one example, a user equipment (UE) is equipped to obtain a received signal code power (RSCP) value and a load factor value for each of one or more cells. The UE may be further equipped to rank the one or more cells based on a cell selection value derived from both the RSCP value and the load factor value and select a serving cell from the ranked one or more cells. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028082 | PACKET TRANSMISSION DEVICE, MEMORY CONTROL CIRCUIT, AND PACKET TRANSMISSION METHOD - A packet transmission device includes a buffer stores packet data in any of queues, a queue manager outputs queue-status signals indicating whether or not transmittable packet data exists in the corresponding one of the queues, a bandwidth controller outputs token-status signals indicating whether or not an amount of the tokens accumulated at a certain period for the corresponding queue is larger than a token threshold provided for the corresponding queue, a queue selector preferentially selects any queue whose duration time of a transmittable state in which the corresponding queue status signal indicates that transmittable packet data exists in the corresponding queue and the corresponding token-status signal indicates that the amount of the accumulated tokens is larger than the token threshold provided for the corresponding queue is greater than a duration-time threshold provided for the corresponding queue, and a buffer reader controls reading of the packet data from the selected queue. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028083 | ROUTER, METHOD FOR CONTROLLING ROUTER, AND PROGRAM - An router includes: a plurality of data storage sections configured to store input data; and an arbiter configured to compare the availability of at least one of the plurality of data storage sections with respect to data that is stored in that data storage section and that shares at least a part of a transmission path to the availability of another data storage section in an adjacent router with respect to that data that also shares at least that part of the transmission path, thereby determining, based on a result of the comparison, whether or not to output that data. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028084 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, CONTROLLER AND METHOD - A controller in a mobile communication system includes a management unit ( | 01-31-2013 |
20130033982 | Bulk Data Transport in a Network - A network is configured to utilize available bandwidth to conduct bulk data transfers without substantially affecting the successful transmission of time-sensitive traffic in the network. In order to avoid this interference, the packets carrying data for bulk data transfers are associated with a low priority class such that the routers of the network will preferentially drop these packets over packets associated with the normal traffic of the network. As such, when the normal traffic peaks or there are link or equipment failures, the normal traffic is preferentially transmitted over the bulk-transfer traffic and thus the bulk-transfer traffic dynamically adapts to changes in the available bandwidth of the network. Further, to reduce the impact of dropped packets for the bulk-transfer traffic, the packets are encoded at or near the source component using a loss-resistant transport protocol so that the dropped packets can be reproduced at a downstream link. | 02-07-2013 |
20130033983 | Access Category Enforcement in Wireless Local Area Networks - The present invention provides a control function in an access point, switch, or like node on a wireless local area network. The control function operates to ensure frames transmitted by a user terminal are transmitted using an appropriate transmission priority scheme. The control function will assist and provide an appropriate priority level to the user terminal. Frames transmitted from the user terminal are passed through the control function, which will analyze priority level information provided in the frames to determine if the frames were transmitted using the appropriate transmission priority scheme. An enforcement action may be taken in response to identifying frames that were not transmitted using the appropriate transmission priority scheme. | 02-07-2013 |
20130039175 | BANDWIDTH CONTROL METHOD - A bandwidth control method is provided. A router is provided to establish a network connection to a remote apparatus. The remote apparatus is allocated with a downlink bandwidth for servicing the gateway. A plurality of downlink packets are received by the gateway. In response to reception of the downlink packets, the gateway transmits a plurality of uplink packets to the remote apparatus to allow the remote apparatus to transmit more downlink packets to the gateway after the remote apparatus acknowledges reception of the uplink packets. A transmission rate of the uplink packets is limited within an uplink threshold by the gateway so that a transmission rate of the downlink packets is smaller than the downlink bandwidth allocated to the remote apparatus. The uplink threshold is determined based on the downlink bandwidth. | 02-14-2013 |
20130039176 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR CONGESTION MANAGEMENT IN A DIAMETER SIGNALING NETWORK - According to one aspect, the subject matter described herein includes a method for congestion management in a Diameter signaling network. The method occurs a Diameter routing node. The method includes determining, using a metric associated with Diameter message processing, that a first Diameter message processing metric threshold has been exceeded. The method also includes in response to determining that the first Diameter message processing metric threshold has been exceeded, performing a first congestion mitigation action, where performing the first congestion mitigation action includes analyzing subsequent Diameter messages to determine one or more common attributes of the subsequent Diameter messages and in response to determining the one or more common attributes of the subsequent Diameter messages, performing a second congestion mitigation action for Diameter messages having the one or more common attributes. | 02-14-2013 |
20130039177 | REMOTE MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, SERVER DEVICE AND CONTROL METHOD OF REMOTE MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A server device includes: a virtual client unit that causes an application program to generate screen data, based on instruction information from a mobile terminal received via a packet forwarding device in a mobile network; an encoder unit that compression-encodes an entirety or a portion of the screen data and transmits to the packet forwarding device a packet including the encoded result; and a rate control unit that measures response times of a series of response signals received from the mobile terminal with respect to the transmitted packet, and controls, based on the measurement result, at least one of a bit rate and a frame rate of the compression-encoding performed by the encoder unit. | 02-14-2013 |
20130044595 | System and Method for Transmission Control Protocol Service Delivery in Wireless Communications Systems - A method for delivering packets in a wireless communications system includes determining a cause of loss for a previously transmitted packet based on a packet acknowledgement corresponding to the previously transmitted packet, the packet acknowledgement including at least one of a wireless loss indicator and a congestion warning indicator for the wireless communications system. The method also includes adjusting a transmission parameter in a packet transmission protocol according to the cause of loss, and retransmitting the previously transmitted packet. | 02-21-2013 |
20130044596 | Method and System for Controlling Access of Machine Type Communications Devices - A method for controlling access of machine type communications device is provided by the present invention. The method includes: configuring an access priority to a machine type communications device; a network side configuring a corresponding access control parameter for an access priority needing an access control according to the current network load information, and sending the access priority needing the access control and the access control parameter to the machine type communications device; and according to an access priority of the machine type communications device and the received the access priority needing the access control and the access control parameter, the machine type communications device judging whether an access request can be initiated. A system for controlling access of the machine type communications device is also provided by the present invention. | 02-21-2013 |
20130051225 | ALLEVIATING CONGESTION IN A CABLE MODEM - A method, system and computer program product for ingress level filtering of packets is provided. The system includes a Media Access Control (MAC) and a buffer pool that includes buffers configured to store packets. The MAC includes a memory configured to store an incoming packet and an inspection engine coupled to the memory. The inspection engine is configured to parse the incoming packet to determine a priority level of the incoming packet, determine whether there is a buffer available in the buffer pool to store the incoming packet, and allocate a buffer in the buffer pool to store the incoming packet based on the priority level of the incoming packet. | 02-28-2013 |
20130051226 | DEVICE, SYSTEM, AND METHOD OF MEDIA DELIVERY OPTIMIZATION - A method for alleviation of congestion in a mobile communications network includes detecting congested cells in the mobile communications network, identifying subscribers with active data sessions in the congested cells; and optimizing band-width usage for at least one of the identified subscribers. A bandwidth optimization system includes a network sampling interface to receive at least subscriber, cell and data session identifiers from a network data packet sampler, where the sampler identifies the identifiers from internal data traffic within a mobile communications network, and a network awareness engine (NAE) to at least cross reference the identifiers with external data traffic output by the mobile communications network to at least detect congested cells and associated subscriber data sessions emanating from the mobile communications network. | 02-28-2013 |
20130051229 | TRAFFIC ENGINEERING AND BANDWIDTH MANAGEMENT OF BUNDLED LINKS - Traffic engineering and bandwidth management of bundled links may, at times, require the selection of one of a plurality of component links in a bundled link to use in admitting a connection requiring admission. While performing the selection it may be determined that more than one of the component links has the resources required to admit the connection. An admission policy may then be selected from among a plurality of admission policies. Based on the selected admission policy, a particular component link may then be selected. Such bandwidth management, based on admission policies, may be seen to be well suited to balancing and component link recovery in traffic engineered, connection-oriented MPLS networks. | 02-28-2013 |
20130051230 | BROADBAND MULTI-DROP LOCAL NETWORK, INTERFACE AND METHOD FOR MULTIMEDIA ACCESS - A broadband multi-drop local network, interface and method for multimedia access. A local network architecture include a wired bus coupleable directly to an external data network terminal and configured for carrying broadband packetized data traffic over a frequency spectrum uninterrupted by other defined data channels or services; and one or a plurality of network transceivers operable individually for coupling an addressable network device processing a defined class of information to the bus wherein each network appliance is configured for and further operable for providing communication interfacing of the class of information of each addressable network appliance with the packetized IP data traffic on the wired bus. | 02-28-2013 |
20130051231 | Common Quality of Service Enforcement for a Group of Mobile Entities - The invention relates to a method for controlling the maximum bit rate for a bearer used for data transmission over a packet-switched network using a specified access point for a group of mobile entities. A PDN gateway enforces the maximum bit rate for the group, the APN group AMBR. This is possible as all mobile entities belonging to said group are connected to the same PDN gateway for a certain access point name APN. This is obtained by providing a PDN gateway information into an update location acknowledgement message sent from the HSS to the MME. | 02-28-2013 |
20130058212 | OPTIMIZATION OF THE TRANSMISSION CONTROL PROTOCOL PARTICULARLY FOR WIRELESS CONNECTIONS - TCP Proxy apparatus for a wireless network section to a TCP-enabled network includes a latency aware unit for monitoring round trip time over the wireless access network section to determine latency within the access section; and a filter for filtering out momentary changes in the latency. Momentary fluctuations in the wireless connection causes instantaneous packet loss, which merely requires minimal packet retransmission, temporarily affecting latency. The filter ensures that such fluctuations do not activate the TCP congestion avoidance mechanisms and unnecessarily slow down the overall transmission rate. | 03-07-2013 |
20130058213 | REMOTE MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, SERVER DEVICE, AND REMOTE MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM CONTROL METHOD - A server device includes: a storage unit that, upon receiving content storage instruction information from a mobile terminal via a packet forwarding device in a mobile network and a content stream or content file, stores the content stream or content file; a virtual client unit that, upon receiving content reproduction instruction information from the mobile terminal, reads, decodes and reproduces a content stream or content file stored in the storage unit to generate display screen data; and an encoder unit that transmits an encoding result obtained by compression-encoding part or all of the display screen data as a packet to the packet forwarding device. | 03-07-2013 |
20130064079 | Network-Wide Flow Monitoring in Split Architecture Networks - Flow monitoring tasks are assigned to a set of switches in a split architecture network to optimize network-wide flow monitoring. The assignment maximizes the number of monitored flows and reduces overhead of the flow monitoring. A controller receives an estimated traffic volume for each path in the network. The controller calculates, for all of the switches and all of the paths, sampling fractions that maximize the number of the flows sampled by the switches. In response to a request for setting up a new flow to traverse one of the paths in the network, the controller assigns the new flow to one of the switches that are located on the one of the paths, based on the sampling fraction for the assigned switch and the one of the paths, the bandwidth constraint and the memory constraint. | 03-14-2013 |
20130064080 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR INTELLIGENT NETWORK EDGE TRAFFIC AND SIGNALING MANAGEMENT - Systems and methods for intelligent network edge traffic and signaling management are disclosed. According to an aspect, a method for controlling network edge traffic may include receiving network traffic flow information from a network element. The method may also include determining a control command for a network edge element based on the network traffic flow information. Further, the method may include communicating the control command to a network for control of network traffic at an edge. | 03-14-2013 |
20130064081 | CONTROLLING A PACKET FLOW FROM A USER EQUIPMENT - A method and User Equipment (UE) for limiting excessive packet flow from the UE to a communication network. The UE receives from the network, an instruction to activate a logic parameter for controlling the packet flow from the UE to the network. In response to receiving the instruction, the UE requests configuration of a network connection for transmitting packets to the network according to the logic parameter. The UE then requests deactivation of all other network connections upon successful configuration of the network connection for transmitting packets to the network according to the logic parameter. | 03-14-2013 |
20130064082 | PERFORMING PACKET FLOW OPTIMIZATION WITH POLICY AND CHARGING CONTROL - Policy and charging control (PCC) is a framework within a Third or Fourth Generation (3G/4G) network that allows operators to authorize and enforce policy, Quality of Service (QoS), and charging control over communication sessions by mobile devices. PCC mechanism is used to determine the type QoS based on a request received from a User Equipment (UE) or network. PCC is one important element within System Architecture Evolution (SAE) architecture to allow the network to perform policy and charging control. A mechanism is provided so that PCC can allow packet flow optimization. Thereby, the network can detect Internet Protocol (IP) flows based on operator defined criteria and can perform policy and QoS control. | 03-14-2013 |
20130064083 | EFFICIENT MODIFICATION OF PACKET FILTERS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Techniques for modifying packet filters in a wireless communication network are described. In one scheme, packet filters may be performed with multiple operations, if needed. The operation(s) to be performed and the order of performing the operation(s) may be dependent on the number of existing packet filters to be replaced (N) and the number of new packet filters (M). If N=M, then N packet filters in a traffic filter template may be replaced with a single operation. If N>M, then M packet filters in the traffic filter template may be replaced first, and N−M packet filters may be deleted from the traffic filter template next. If N03-14-2013 | |
20130064084 | TECHNOLOGY AGNOSTIC QOS SUPPORT IN A MULTI-MODE ENVIRONMENT - A generic quality of service (QoS) model that is not dependent on network technology is used to support QoS for communication networks utilizing different network technologies. The generic QoS model may include a superset of all QoS parameters for all network technologies being supported, e.g., 3GPP and 3GPP2. An application at a device may specify QoS for a traffic flow based on the generic QoS parameters in the superset. The generic QoS parameters may be converted to QoS parameters that are specific to a serving network. The converted QoS parameters are exchanged with the serving network and are used while exchanging traffic with the serving network. | 03-14-2013 |
20130064085 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR PROCESSING NON-RESOURCE RESERVATION TYPE SERVICE - The disclosure provides a method, an apparatus and a system for processing a non-resource-reservation type service, wherein the method for processing the non-resource-reservation type service comprises: acquiring a service type of a received non-resource-reservation type service; according to the service type, querying a Network Attachment Control Function (NACF) entity about parameter information of the non-resource-reservation type service; generating a control strategy according to a present usage state of an interactive resource and the parameter information; according to the generated control strategy, controlling the received non-resource-reservation type service. The disclosure solves the problem that the non-resource-reservation type service cannot be admission-controlled in the Next Generation Network (NGN) of the prior art, and can efficiently use resources. | 03-14-2013 |
20130070588 | Packet Processing in a Parallel Processing Environment - Processing packets in a system that comprises a plurality of interconnected processing cores includes: receiving packets into one or more queues; associating at least some nodes in a hierarchy of nodes with at least one of the queues, and at least some of the nodes with a rate; mapping a set of one or more nodes to a processor core based on a level in the hierarchy of the nodes in the set and at least one rate associated with a node not in the set; and processing the packets in the mapped processor cores according to the hierarchy. | 03-21-2013 |
20130070589 | OPTIMIZED SYSTEM ACCESS PROCEDURES - A base station subsystem (BSS) and a method are described herein for improving an Access Grant Channel (AGCH) capacity when mobile stations establish an uplink Temporary Block Flow (TBF) triggered by a small data transmission (SDT) or an instant message transmission (IMT). Plus, a mobile station (MS) and a method are described herein for improving the AGCH capacity when the mobile station establishes an uplink TBF triggered by a SDT or an IMT. | 03-21-2013 |
20130070590 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING THRESHOLD TESTING WITHIN A NETWORK - A system and method for authorizing test traffic over a network. A request is received to perform a throughput test. A state of the network is determined. The throughput test is authorized in response to the determined state of the network being acceptable for performing the throughput test. The throughput test is terminated or paused in response to the determined state of the network being unacceptable for performing the throughput test. | 03-21-2013 |
20130070591 | OVERLOAD CALL CONTROL IN A VOIP NETWORK - The invention provides a system, method and apparatus for controlling a mass calling event in a VoIP network. The invention provides for monitoring port traffic information on a network edge device and detecting the occurrence of a mass calling event in conjunction with a call control module. Control instructions or information may then be provisioned to network edge devices to alleviate congestion. The invention enables network edge devices to gap or provide other controls to reduce call overloading. Controls for alleviating congestion include blocking the packets, providing an announcement to the call, re-routing the traffic associated with this specific mass calling event, and reducing the quality of the service. | 03-21-2013 |
20130077482 | SEAMLESS HANDOFF, OFFLOAD, AND LOAD BALANCING IN INTEGRATED WI-FI/SMALL CELL SYSTEMS - A method of handing off between a cellular network and a Wi-Fi network is disclosed. A cellular base station of the cellular network is caused to collect information related to the cellular network. A Wi-Fi access point of the Wi-Fi network is caused to collect information related to the Wi-Fi network, wherein the cellular base station and the Wi-Fi access point are co-located. The information related to the cellular network and the information related to the Wi-Fi network are used collectively for determining whether to handoff traffic of a user equipment from a cellular air interface of the cellular network to a Wi-Fi air interface of the Wi-Fi network, or vice versa. | 03-28-2013 |
20130077483 | MINIMIZING POWER CONSUMPTION IN A NETWORK DEVICE - A network interface device (NID) may determine whether the received data units of the computer system are to be compressed before transmitting the data units. The NID may determine the compression energy value consumed to compress the first K | 03-28-2013 |
20130077484 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR PROCESSING DATA TRANSMISSION OF MACHINE-TYPE COMMUNICATION DEVICE - Disclosed are a method and device for processing data transmission by a machine-type communication device. The method comprises: determining, by the network side, the mode for the machine-type communication device to transmit a small amount of user data using a control plane; instructing, by the network side, the machine-type communication device to transmit the small amount of user data using the control plane according to the determined mode; and transmitting, by the machine-type communication device, the small amount of user data using the control plane, according to instructions from the network side. In the present application, on the one hand, the mode of transmitting user data by a control plane can be used in transmitting a small amount of data, so as to improve the system efficiency; and on the other hand, the possibility of causing or increasing the congestion in signalling transmission and/or processing can be avoided when making full use of the mode of transmitting user data by the control plane in transmitting the small amount of data, thus improving the performance of a long-term evolution system in supporting the machine-type communication device. | 03-28-2013 |
20130077485 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING CONTENTION BASED RANDOM ACCESS - The disclosure provides a solution for random access in a wireless system, in which there is a plurality of available uplink carriers for the random access. The UE can monitor a random access response to get load related information for the plurality of available uplink carriers, determine one low-loaded uplink carrier according to the load related information, and perform random access in the low-loaded uplink carrier. The eNB can determine load related information for uplink carriers in a wireless system, and send a random access response that contains the load related information for multiple uplink carriers in the wireless system. | 03-28-2013 |
20130083653 | MECHANISM TO PREVENT LOAD IN 3GPP NETWORK DUE TO MTC DEVICE TRIGGERS - Embodiments of methods and apparatus to manage MTC device trigger load in a wireless network are described herein. Other embodiments may be described and claimed. | 04-04-2013 |
20130083654 | METHOD FOR LINK BUFFER SIZE AND QUEUE LENGTH ESTIMATION FOR BANDWIDTH-VARYING MOBILE DATA NETWORKS - A sum-of-delays algorithm in a digital mobile communication bandwidth-varying network is employed to estimate link buffer size and queue length in an undying network connection. In particular, mechanisms associated with the process compensate for link bandwidth variations. In a particular embodiment, passive estimation are employed to implement the process by simply measuring the in-band data packet timings to perform estimation, thus eliminating the need for transmission of extra measurement packets. This method enables the integration of the link buffer size estimation algorithm into existing transport protocols such as TCP to optimize flow and congestion controls. As part of the invention, a new congestion control method called TCP Queue-length-Adaptive (TCP-QA) is developed to employ the sum-of-delays algorithm in the TCP sender computer to control the data flow in a TCP connection. Compared to existing TCP variants, TCP-QA can achieve significantly better network bandwidth utilization in bandwidth-varying networks. | 04-04-2013 |
20130083655 | AUTO-COMPRESSION FOR MEDIA OVER IP - The present invention allows communicating devices to control the amount of compression used in packet sessions for transmitting streaming media to and from each other. When a communicating device detects a decrease in performance or quality of service indicative of a limited bandwidth condition, the amount of compression for the current or subsequent sessions is temporarily increased to allow the currently available bandwidth to support the session or subsequent sessions. After a set period of time, or when the limited bandwidth condition is removed, communications associated with the sessions can revert back to transporting uncompressed data or reducing the amount of compression for the sessions, thus using more of the available bandwidth. | 04-04-2013 |
20130083656 | Method and Arrangement for Detecting Congestion in a Communications Network - The invention relates to a method and arrangement for detecting congestion in a communications network ( | 04-04-2013 |
20130088955 | Method and System for Distributed, Prioritized Bandwidth Allocation in Networks - An apparatus, system and method are introduced for prioritizing allocation of communication bandwidth in a network. In one embodiment, the apparatus includes memory including computer program code configured to, with a processor, cause the apparatus to assign a value to a prioritization parameter at an endpoint communication device dependent on a priority of an information flow in a network, and update a communication bandwidth for the information flow dependent on the value of the prioritization parameter after a round-trip time for the information flow. | 04-11-2013 |
20130088956 | CONGESTION/OVERLOAD CONTROL METHOD AND APPARATUS - Embodiments of the present invention provide a congestion/overload control method and apparatus. The method includes: learning, by a gateway device, information about network access time of a User Equipment (UE) or UE group; and rejecting or discarding, by the gateway device, session management request messages of the UE or UEs in the UE group beyond the network access time of the UE or UE group; or discarding, by the gateway device, data of the UE or the UEs in the UE group beyond the network access time of the UE or UE group. Embodiments of the present invention can perform congestion/overload control differentially on the UE or UEs in the group, implement congestion/overload control on the gateway device, avoid congestion/overload caused by a large number of UEs on the gateway device, and improve the efficiency of congestion/overload control. | 04-11-2013 |
20130088957 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING BURSTING TRAFFIC - A network device for managing communications. The network device includes a first counter operable to track CIR tokens. The first counter is operable to increase the CIR tokens at a first rate. The network device also includes a second counter operable to track the EIR tokens. The second counter is operable to increase the EIR tokens at a second rate. The network device also includes logic in communication with the first counter and the second counter. The logic is operable to determine whether there are EIR tokens in response to a determination that there are not CIR tokens. The logic is further operable to command the second counter to decrement the EIR tokens in response to a determination that there are EIR tokens. The logic is further operable to communicate a data unit from the network device through a network in response to decrementing the EIR tokens. | 04-11-2013 |
20130094357 | FHRP OPTIMIZATIONS FOR N-WAY GATEWAY LOAD BALANCING IN FABRIC PATH SWITCHING NETWORKS - Techniques are disclosed for providing n-way gateway load-balancing in a fabric path switching Systems (FSS), such as a layer 2 multipath (L2MP) network in a large data center. An access switch in a L2MP network may learn an emulated switch IDs through FHRP “hello” messages sent by an “active” gateway router for each FHRP group. Further, the access switch may learn which links an emulated switch is reachable over by evaluating link state messages (e.g., IS-IS messages) sent by the gateway routers used to construct the emulated switch. Doing so allows the access switch to learn both the ID of an emulated switch and a set of links over which the emulated switch may be reached, thereby allowing the access switch to load balance traffic to the emulated switch. | 04-18-2013 |
20130094358 | ADAPTIVE QUEUE-MANAGEMENT - In one embodiment, a method includes storing in a QoS-enabled communication system a data structure that has a multi-level hierarchy including a physical level, a logical level, and a class level; receiving a first request for M number of services provided by the QoS-enabled communication system; in response to the first request, modifying an allocation of the logical-level nodes by mapping M class-level nodes to a first one of the logical-level nodes according to a first mapping mode of the data structure; receiving a second request for P services provided by the QoS-enabled communication system, with P being greater than M; and, in response to the second request, modifying an allocation of the logical-level nodes by mapping P class-level nodes to a second one of the logical-level nodes according to a second mapping mode of the data structure. | 04-18-2013 |
20130100802 | Method and Apparatus for Channel Traffic Congestion Avoidance in a Mobile Communication System - Embodiments of the invention provide apparatus, a method and a computer readable product for avoiding traffic congestion in a mobile communication system. In an exemplary embodiment there is provided an apparatus, including at least one controller and a memory storing a computer program which are arranged to receive and read a series of blocks on a first channel, to determine whether there is congestion on the basis of said series of blocks, and, in the event that the determination is that there is no congestion, to transmit a channel request on a second channel. | 04-25-2013 |
20130100803 | APPLICATION BASED BANDWIDTH CONTROL FOR COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - A network traffic managing node of a local area network, such as a router or gateway, can implement a packet stream detection and application based bandwidth control for the local area network. A plurality of packet streams are received and detected at a network traffic managing node of a local area network. One or more applications associated with the plurality of packet streams are determined. Stream characterization parameters associated with each of the one or more applications associated with the plurality of packet streams are also determined. Application based bandwidth control is performed on the plurality of packet streams based, at least in part, on the stream characterization parameters associated with each of the applications. | 04-25-2013 |
20130100804 | DATA OFFLOADING AT WIRELESS NODE - A method performed by a wireless node includes receiving a data flow associated with user devices; performing a packet inspection of the data flow; determining whether a network address of the wireless node matches another network address associated with the data flow; converting the other network address to a layer 2 identifier when the other network address matches the network address; establishing a bearer link within the wireless node based on the layer 2 identifier; and offloading the data flow from layers of a network, which are higher relative to the wireless node, to the bearer link, wherein the data flow does not traverse the layers. | 04-25-2013 |
20130100805 | PRIORITIZED TRANSFER OF DATA TELEGRAMS - Data telegrams are transmitted from a transmitter to a receiver. A priority level is associated with the data telegrams that specifies a priority to be considered for the transfer of the particular data telegram. In order to transfer data telegrams having different priority levels with relatively less effort and thus even more quickly, an intermediate storage area is associated with each priority level in the transmitter, the data telegrams are transferred over the physical communication medium by different logical data connections, whose number corresponds with the number of priority levels. Lower priority data telegrams in the intermediate storage area are transferred by way of the logical data connection associated with the priority level until at least one higher priority data telegram is present in the intermediate storage area. The higher priority data telegram in the intermediate storage area is transmitted through a logical data connection with the higher priority level. | 04-25-2013 |
20130107702 | PROVIDING MULTIPLE LEVELS OF SERVICE FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION | 05-02-2013 |
20130107703 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR FAST INITIAL NETWORK LINK SETUP | 05-02-2013 |
20130107704 | Dynamic Special Subframe Allocation | 05-02-2013 |
20130107705 | Special Subframe Allocation in Heterogeneous Network | 05-02-2013 |
20130107706 | QUALITY OF SERVICE FOR DEVICE ASSISTED SERVICES | 05-02-2013 |
20130114405 | METHOD FOR RECEIVING SERVICE AT USER EQUIPMENT IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR THE SAME - A method for receiving MBMS (Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service) service at a user equipment camping on a first frequency in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method comprises receiving the MBMS on a second frequency without camping on the second frequency from a network, if being able to receive the MBMS on the second frequency while camping on the first frequency. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114406 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING LOAD BALANCE - A method for controlling a load balance between a CDMA2000 1X EV-DO network and a CDMA2000 1X network is provided. A base station controller (BSC) in the CDMA2000 1X EV-DO network receives a connection request message sent by a terminal, determines that a load of the CDMA2000 1X EV-DO network is higher than a threshold, sends a load query message to a BSC in the CDMA2000 1X network, receives a load query response message indicating that the CDMA2000 1X network is not overloaded from the BSC in the CDMA2000 1X network, and sends a system switchover message to the BSC in the CDMA2000 1X network to instruct the BSC in the CDMA2000 1X network to switch the terminal from the CDMA2000 1X EV-DO network to the CDMA2000 1X network. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114407 | Method and Apparatus for Managing Radio Resources, Radio Network Controller, and Base Station - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a method and an system for managing radio resources, a radio network controller, and a base station. The method for managing radio resources mainly includes: acquiring respective resources occupied by at least two types of bearers in a cell; comparing the acquired respective resources occupied by the at least two types of bearers; and reducing a congestion threshold of the cell and/or reducing a service rate of the bearer with a low bearer level when it is determined that quality of service (QoS) of the services of different bearers is unfair. The method and the apparatus for managing radio resources, and the radio network controller in the embodiments of the present invention may improve QoS fairness of services of different bearers, thereby preferably implementing management of radio resources. | 05-09-2013 |
20130121145 | NETWORK SELECTION BASED ON ONE OR MORE FACTORS - A device may receive a network access request and perform at least one of signal strength measurements of a first wireless network and a second wireless network, a determination of a level of congestion of the first wireless network and a level of congestion of the second wireless network, or a determination of an access point name (APN) type associated with the network access request. The device may select one of the first wireless network or the second wireless network based on the performance of the at least one of the signal strength measurements, the determination of the level of congestion of the first wireless network and the level of congestion of the second wireless network, or the determination of the APN type associated with the network access request. The device may further connect to the selected one of the first wireless network or the second wireless network. | 05-16-2013 |
20130121146 | ITERATIVE MAX-MIN FAIRNESS ALGORITHMS - Systems and methods are provided for allocating resources of a network among a plurality of traffic demands to optimize fairness and network utilization. Methods based on flow-increase dynamics converge toward an upward max-min fair (UMMF) allocation, in which the value of each traffic demand cannot be increased, along any of its paths, even if larger traffic demands are removed from the network. An efficient iterative algorithm that converges to a UMMF solution is also provided. The described methods and systems can be implemented efficiently, distributively, and asynchronously. | 05-16-2013 |
20130121147 | Controlling Uplink Congestion in a Wireless Communication Network - A computing device, which is associated with a telecommunication access network, is configured to detect (i) congestion in uplink traffic from a plurality of user equipments (UEs) to a base station (BS), and (ii) a level of the congestion in the uplink traffic from the plurality of UEs to the BS. The computing device is further configured to modify a network or UE setting to generate a modified setting, and transmit the modified setting to a first UE of the plurality of UEs, to facilitate the first UE to transmit to the BS in accordance with the modified setting. In an embodiment, the computing device is the BS. | 05-16-2013 |
20130121148 | TCP EXTENSION AND VARIANTS FOR HANDLING HETEROGENEOUS APPLICATIONS - An extension to TCP is generally provided that allows TCP to handle heterogeneous applications, especially those with delay and smoothness-sensitive contents, and wireless transmission media having noisy, fading radio channels. The TCP extension decouples reliability control from rate control, sacrificing reliability for delay control (transmission rate and retransmission decision) that may be suitable for delay and smoothness-sensitive contents. Furthermore, the TCP extension may select TCP variants and modifications to the TCP variants based on one or more of application needs, channel conditions, or local observables such as loss and delay to better adapt to different types of applications and physical layers. | 05-16-2013 |
20130128731 | ADAPTIVE DATA RATE LIMITER IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A method and system for adaptive data rate-limiting includes a processor ( | 05-23-2013 |
20130128732 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR FAST LOAD BALANCING BANDWIDTH ALLOCATION BASED ON BINARY SEARCH - An apparatus and method for fast load balancing bandwidth allocation based on a binary search may be provided, wherein the apparatus may include a bandwidth allocation request receiving unit to receive a bandwidth allocation request signal from at least one modem, and a bandwidth allocation processing unit to allocate a bandwidth to an upstream channel of the at least one modem, using a load balancing algorithm, in response to the received bandwidth allocation request signal. | 05-23-2013 |
20130128733 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDLING SIGNALS USED FOR DELAY TOLERANT ACCESS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present description proposes a user equipment for processing data related to contention-based random access in a wireless communication system. The present description proposes to separately handle random access related parameters according to access type of a user equipment. Examples of the access type include normal access and delay tolerant access. In detail, a system information block indicating a first maximum number of preamble transmission applicable to a first type UE performing normal access and a second maximum number of preamble transmission applicable to a second type UE performing delay tolerant access is proposed. Further, back-off interval information used to indicate first type back-off interval information applicable to the first type UE and second type back-off interval information applicable to the second type UE is proposed. | 05-23-2013 |
20130128734 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR DROPPING DATA USING A DROP PROFILE - A system selectively drops data from queues. The system includes a drop table that stores drop probabilities. The system selects one of the queues to examine and generates an index into the drop table to identify one of the drop probabilities for the examined queue. The system then determines whether to drop data from the examined queue based on the identified drop probability. | 05-23-2013 |
20130128735 | UNIVERSAL RATE CONTROL MECHANISM WITH PARAMETER ADAPTATION FOR REAL-TIME COMMUNICATION APPLICATIONS - A “Universal Rate Control Mechanism with Parameter Adaptation” (URCMPA) improves real-time communication (RTC) sessions in terms of delay, loss, throughput, and PSNR. The URCMPA automatically learns network characteristics including bottleneck link capacity, inherent queuing delay, inherent packet loss rates, etc., during RTC sessions. The URCMPA uses this information to dynamically adapt rate control parameters in a utility maximization (UM) framework. The URCMPA operates reliable RTC sessions across a wide range and combination of networks near full throughput rates while maintaining low operating congestion levels (e.g., low queuing delay and low packet loss). Examples of networks applicable for use with the URCMPA include, but are not limited to, combinations of mobile broadband (e.g., 3G, 4G, etc.), WiMAX, Wi-Fi hotspots, etc., and physical networks based on cable, fiber, ADSL, etc. The URCMPA can also dynamically adapt operating congestion levels relative to competing TCP flows to maintain fair use of network resources. | 05-23-2013 |
20130128736 | CALL ADMISSION CONTROL METHOD AND SYSTEM - A call admission control technique allowing flexible and reliable call admissions at an ATM switch in the case of an ATM network including both QoS-specified and QoS-unspecified virtual connections is disclosed. In the case where a QoS (Quality of Service) specified connection request occurs, an estimated bandwidth is calculated which is to be assigned to an existing QoS-unspecified traffic on the link associated with the QoS-specified connection request. A call control processor of the ATM switch determines whether the QoS-specified connection request is accepted, depending on whether a requested bandwidth is smaller than an available bandwidth that is obtained by subtracting an assigned bandwidth and the estimated bandwidth from a full bandwidth of the link. | 05-23-2013 |
20130128737 | Methods and Devices for Assigning a Wireless Communication Device to a Wireless Coverage Area Based on Early Termination Gain - Methods and systems for assigning a wireless communication device (WCD) to a wireless coverage are a based on early termination gain (ETG) are presented. In particular, a RAN may receive a request, from a WCD, for an assignment to one of a plurality of wireless coverage areas. In response to receiving the request, the RAN may select a wireless coverage area of the plurality that has a highest ETG, and assign the WCD to the selected wireless coverage area. Prior to selecting this wireless coverage area, the RAN may optionally remove one or more wireless coverage areas with high utilization from consideration. | 05-23-2013 |
20130135996 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT AND RESOURCE ALLOCATION ON A SHARED ACCESS NETWORK - A method for traffic management and resource allocation on a shared access network including estimating a bandwidth capacity of a gateway, determining a demand rate of an IP gateway, allocating bandwidth to the IP gateway based on the demand rate, traffic priority, or traffic weighting, allocating bandwidth to the IP gateway in advance of demand when excess bandwidth is available, scheduling traffic at the IP gateway based on traffic priority, service plan of a VSAT, or physical layer properties of the VSAT, performing priority queue servicing of traffic at a gateway using a real time traffic priority queue, a non-real time traffic priority queue, two or more modulation and coding queue groups, and a code block queue. | 05-30-2013 |
20130135997 | PRIORITY ASSIGNING SCHEME - Technologies are generally described for a priority assigning scheme considering a type of data traffic. In some examples, a method may include analyzing a request for data traffic, determining a type of the data traffic, and assigning priority based on the type of the data traffic. | 05-30-2013 |
20130135998 | Techniques to Reduce Congestion in a Core Network and Other Elements Within a Wireless Network - A method includes receiving, by a RAN providing service to access terminal(s) and supporting a packet data session for each of the access terminal(s) wherein each packet data session is associated with a subscription priority, a message including a priority field and requesting release of all packet data sessions having a subscription priority meeting one or more priority criteria corresponding to the priority field, and releasing all packet data sessions with a subscription priority not meeting the one or more priority criteria. Another method includes terminating by a gateway entity a packet data session for access terminal(s), wherein each packet data session is associated with a subscription priority; and sending by the gateway entity a message comprising a priority field requesting release of all packet data sessions associated with a subscription priority meeting one or more priority criteria corresponding to the priority field. Apparatus and program products are also disclosed. | 05-30-2013 |
20130142038 | ADAPTIVE SCHEDULING OF DATA TRANSFER IN P2P APPLICATIONS OVER ASYMMETRIC NETWORKS - In a peer-to-peer asymmetric communication environment, an adaptive upload Data Rate Control element—called Adaptive-DRC—is used to detect increase in data return-trip time (RTT) caused by the congestion associated with the uploading of data in an uplink which in turn impacts on downloading data on an associated downlink, namely a downlink sharing resources with the uplink. Using Adaptive-DRC, the congestion is detected and thereupon adjustments to are made to allow continued communication. Adaptive-DRC comprises: (i) RTT estimation; (ii) detection of the onset of congestion, herein pre-congestion detection; and (iii) adaptation of the upload data rate limit. Two specific embodiments are contemplated, namely two versions of Adaptive-DRC wherein the difference lies in the upload data rate limit adaptation technique. | 06-06-2013 |
20130142039 | Configurable Access Control Lists Using TCAM - A communication apparatus includes a Content-Addressable Memory (CAM) and packet processing circuitry. The packet processing circuitry is configured to store in respective regions of the CAM multiple Access Control Lists (ACLs) that are defined for respective packet types, to classify an input packet to a respective packet type selected from the packet types, to identify a region holding an ACL defined for the selected packet type, and to process the input packet in accordance with the ACL stored in the identified region. | 06-06-2013 |
20130142040 | POOLING AVAILABLE NETWORK BANDWIDTH FROM MULTIPLE DEVICES - Methods, apparatus and articles of manufacture for pooling available network bandwidth from multiple devices are disclosed. An example method disclosed herein comprises registering, at a router, availability of a first device, the first device to provide access to first wide area network bandwidth provided by a first wide area network, after registering the availability of the first device, including the first wide area network bandwidth in a network bandwidth pool accessible via the router when a pooling configuration parameter associated with the first device is determined to be valid, the network bandwidth pool including second wide area network bandwidth accessible via a second device registered with the router, the second device being different from the first device, and allocating at least a portion of the network bandwidth pool to route Internet protocol traffic associated with a third device. | 06-06-2013 |
20130142041 | CLEARINGHOUSE SERVER FOR INTERNET TELEPHONY AND MULTIMEDIA COMMUNICATIONS - A clearinghouse server for routing multi-media communications, including telephony calls, between a source device and a destination device via a distributed computer network, such as the global Internet. The clearinghouse server can authorize the completion of a communication from a source device to a destination device and collect usage-related information for the completed communication. In response to an authorization request issued by an enrolled source device, the clearinghouse server can identify one or more available destination devices available to accept a communication from an authorized source device. The clearinghouse server can provide a list of the identified destination devices, typically organized in a rank order, by sending an authorization response to the source device. In turn, the source device can use this list to select a destination device and contact that selected device via the computer network to complete the communication. | 06-06-2013 |
20130142042 | POLICY DECISIONS FOR DATA COMMUNICATION IN CONSTRAINED RESOURCE NETWORKS - A method comprising receiving a signal indicating that a first access network is unable to provide a desired quality level for data communication with the terminal; determining, in response to receiving a signal indicating that the first access network is unable to provide the desired quality level of data communication with the terminal, at least one further access network for providing a data flow of the data communication with the terminal; generating a set of policies for the data communication, the set comprising a plurality of policies wherein each policy specifies one or more access networks for one or more data flows of the data communication, and at least one policy specifies the at least one further access network for providing one or more data flows to the terminal; and providing the generated set of policies to the terminal. | 06-06-2013 |
20130142043 | QUALITY OF SERVICE APPLICATION CONTROLLER AND USER EQUIPMENT APPLICATION PROFILER - Various topologies of a quality of service application controller and related techniques to optimize the communications performance an application executing on a device participating in a communications environment are disclosed. The communications environment may include a cellular network, an unlicensed spectrum network, or a combination of the two. The quality of service application controller observes one or more key performance indicators of the communications network, and retrieves a policy from a policy store specific to the application. The quality of service application controller then modifies the execution of the application and/or the configurable aspects of the communications environment to optimize the communications performance of the application. For example, the application's data throughput may be increased, the power draw of the application may be minimized, data requested by the application may be minimized, or the apparent response time of the application's response to a web service may be minimized. | 06-06-2013 |
20130142044 | COGNITIVE FLOW CONTROL BASED ON CHANNEL QUALITY CONDITIONS - A system and method which improve the performance of a wireless transmission system by intelligent use of the control of the flow of data between a radio network controller (RNC) and a Node B. The system monitors certain criteria and, if necessary, adaptively increases or decreases the data flow between the RNC and the Node B. This improves the performance of the transmission system by allowing retransmitted data, signaling procedures and other data to be successfully received at a faster rate, by minimizing the amount of data buffered in the Node B. Flow control is exerted to reduce buffering in the Node B upon degradation of channel qualities, and prior to a High Speed Downlink Shared Channel (HS-DSCH) handover. | 06-06-2013 |
20130142045 | TRANSMISSION DATA PROCESSING METHOD, INFORMATION PROCESSING METHOD, TRANSMISSION DEVICE, AND RECEPTION DEVICE - Disclosed is a technique for providing a transmission data processing method and the like capable of estimating a communicable band in a heterogeneous multi-radio network at a higher speed and minimizing the deterioration of the video quality even if an unavoidable fluctuation occurs in a band available for transmission. According to the technique, there is provided a transmission data processing method at a stage prior to data transmission by a transmission device | 06-06-2013 |
20130142046 | Policy control method and system for accessing fixed broadband access network - The disclosure provides a policy control method and a policy control system for accessing a fixed broadband access network. The policy control method includes: a FMC PF used for sensing the access of UE to a fixed broadband access network is set in a mobile network which a user requests to be accessed to; after the FMC PF receives a trigger message from an ePDG, the FMC PF requests a BPCF to establish a policy session, and the BPCF performs, policy control according to the information of the fixed broadband access network accessed by the UE. It can be seen from the method of the disclosure that when the UE is accessed to the 3GPP through the fixed broadband access network, the FMC PF senses a gateway control session establishment request message or a DHCP request message from the ePDG, so that a PCRF of the 3GPP access network accessed by the UE is triggered to send a policy session request to the BPCF. In this way, in the case that the fixed broadband access network fails to sense the access of the UE or that the fixed broadband access network does not support 3GPP-based access authentication in the conventional art where the UE is accessed to a 3GPP core network through the fixed broadband access network, QoS control is achieved for the access of the UE, and thus QoS guarantee is provided to the entire transmission path of data. | 06-06-2013 |
20130148497 | NETWORK CONGESTION CONTROL FOR MACHINE-TYPE COMMUNICATIONS - A machine-type communications (MTC) device may attempt a network attach operation corresponding to a wireless network, and receive quality of service information, from the wireless network, in response to the network attach operation failing. The MTC device may determine a back-off time based on the quality of service information received from the wireless network. The back-off time may include a duration of time before re-attempting the network attach operation. The MTC device may re-attempt the network attach operation in response to detecting an expiration of the back-off time. | 06-13-2013 |
20130148498 | INTELLIGENT TRAFFIC QUOTA MANAGEMENT IN SPLIT-ARCHITECTURE NETWORKS - A set of forwarding elements act as a gateway to a data network for a subscriber end station. A controller network element includes a control plane operable to communicate with the forwarding elements, which are operable to communicate with the subscriber end station. The controller network element includes a quota management module, which determines a quota amount to be assigned to the forwarding elements for a traffic flow. The quota management module assigns portions of the quota amount to the forwarding elements. The quota management module determines to change the distribution of an unconsumed quota amount amongst the forwarding elements for the traffic flow, determine the unconsumed quota amount, and determine and assign portions of the unconsumed quota amount to the forwarding elements. | 06-13-2013 |
20130148499 | Efficient Flow Control in a Radio Network Controller (RNC) - A mechanism is provided to resolve the Iub transport network congestion efficiently for HSDPA by dynamic adjustment of the transmit window of the RLC. The RLC protocol is extended with congestion control functionality. The Iub TN and Uu congestion detection method in the Node-B signals the congestion to the RNC, and this congestion indication is used by RLC to react on the congestion situation. In the RNC, the transmission window of the RLC is adjusted to control the flow rate. When congestion is detected, the RLC transmission window size is decreased. When there is no congestion, then the RLC transmission window size is increased automatically. Different types of congestion are distinguished and are handled in different ways. Alternatively, congestion control is achieved without any modification in the RLC layer from the existing standard. Here, RLC STATUS PDUs are used to change the RLC transmission window size. | 06-13-2013 |
20130155849 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR RESOURCE MANAGEMENT FOR OPERATOR SERVICES AND INTERNET - A method is provided in one example embodiment and includes providing a multi-radio connectivity service to a mobile subscriber, and managing the multi-radio connectivity service for the mobile subscriber. The managing can include: providing admission control; providing privileged subscriber access at a plurality of WiFi access points; providing signaling for quality of service (QoS) equivalence across a WiFi network and a mobile network; and distributing certain traffic based on a policy. | 06-20-2013 |
20130155850 | BUFFER OCCUPANCY BASED RANDOM SAMPLING FOR CONGESTION MANAGEMENT - A method for buffer occupancy based congestion management includes receiving, by a computing device, a data stream including a plurality of packets from a plurality of sources and storing the packets in a buffer that includes multiple storage units. The method also includes determining if the buffer is congested, responsive to determining that the buffer is congested randomly selecting an occupied unit of the buffer and determining the source of the packet stored in the occupied unit of the buffer and sending a congestion notification message to the source of the packet stored in the occupied unit of the buffer. | 06-20-2013 |
20130155851 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR RESOURCE MANAGEMENT FOR OPERATOR SERVICES AND INTERNET - A method is provided in one example embodiment and includes providing a multi-radio connectivity service to a mobile subscriber, and managing the multi-radio connectivity service for the mobile subscriber. The managing can include: providing admission control; providing privileged subscriber access at a plurality of WiFi access points; providing signaling for quality of service (QoS) equivalence across a WiFi network and a mobile network; and distributing certain traffic based on a policy. | 06-20-2013 |
20130155852 | Systems and Methods for Resource Booking for Admission Control and Scheduling Using DRX - Systems and methods provide for performing admission control in a communications network. The method includes: receiving a request for an entity or service for admission to the communications network; calculating resources, wherein the step of calculating resources includes: estimating a first future resource use for current entities and services in the communications network; and estimating a second future resource use for the entity or service received in the request; determining admission to the communications network of the received request based at least in part on the step of calculating resources; and using a partitionable booking window, if admission is allowed for the received request, for booking the first and second future resource uses based at least in part on the step of calculating resources. | 06-20-2013 |
20130155853 | HIERARCHICAL OCCUPANCY-BASED CONGESTION MANAGEMENT - A system for hierarchical occupancy based congestion management includes a buffer embodied in a computer readable storage medium including a plurality of buffer units for storing packets of a data flow received from sources. The system includes a buffer manager that stores information about the packets stored in the buffer, including a selection criterion associated with each of the plurality of sources and a congestion estimator that monitors a congestion level in the buffer. The system also includes a occupancy sampler that randomly selects at least two occupied buffer units from the plurality of buffer units and identifies the source of the packet stored in each of the occupied buffer units and a congestion notification message generator that generates a congestion notification message; wherein if the congestion level in the buffer exceeds a threshold value the congestion notification message is sent to the identified source with a higher selection criteria. | 06-20-2013 |
20130155854 | Multi-Tier Polling - A polling arrangement where polling frequency and/or rates may be adjusted according to activities of end stations or other elements being polled. The ability to adjust the polling activities may be used to facilitate reducing or otherwise controlling network resources allocated to the supporting the polling or other messaging depending operations. | 06-20-2013 |
20130155855 | Increasing Efficiency of Admission Control in a Network - An apparatus and a method is provided, by which a penetration of terminals supporting a congestion indication scheme in a network or a part of the network is determined, and a load threshold is dynamically adjusted according to the penetration of terminals supporting a congestion indication scheme, wherein the load threshold is used for controlling load in the network or the part of the network. | 06-20-2013 |
20130163417 | Application level admission overload control - Generally described, the present disclosure relates to communications. More specifically, this disclosure relates to application level admission overload control. In one illustrative embodiment, intelligence can be embedded into a communication system so that it can detect and prevent network attacks without the need of costly network and firewall appliances. The communication system can control the in-flow of network packets to help prevent system overload situations through a packet oriented admission policy, connected oriented admission policy or both. By doing so, it not only makes the communication system more robust, secure and cost effective, but also can prevent service interruptions. This can reduce support calls and prove cost-effective to the customer as well as a solution provider. The communication system can protect network applications from internal network traffic and/or attacks. | 06-27-2013 |
20130163418 | PACKET TRANSPORT SYSTEM AND TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT METHOD THEREOF - A method of managing traffic of packet transport system according to some embodiments of the inventive concept may include calculating an average queue size of input traffic with reference to a link capacity; and differently applying allowable length and probability of disuse with respect to the calculated average queue size according to marking information with respect to packets of the input traffic. The input traffic includes a CCM packet for OAM. | 06-27-2013 |
20130163419 | FLEXIBLE AND SCALABLE DATA LINK LAYER FLOW CONTROL FOR NETWORK FABRICS - A network fabric may divide a physical connection into a plurality of VLANs as defined by IEEE 802.1Q. Moreover, many network fabrics use Priority Flow Control to identify and segregate network traffic based on different traffic classes or priorities. Current routing protocols define only eight traffic classes. In contrast, a network fabric may contain thousands of unique VLANs. When network congestion occurs, network devices (e.g., switches, bridges, routers, servers, etc.) can negotiate to pause the network traffic associated with one of the different traffic classes. Pausing the data packets associated with a single traffic class may also stop the data packets associated with thousands of VLANs. The embodiments disclosed herein permit a network fabric to individually pause VLANs rather than entire traffic classes. | 06-27-2013 |
20130163420 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SCHEDULING COMMUNICATION TRAFFIC IN ATCA-BASED EQUIPMENT - A method for scheduling communication traffic in an Advanced Telecom Computing Architecture based equipment and a corresponding apparatus are provided. In the method, communication traffic information of traffic processing means in the equipment is collected; based on the collected communication traffic information, a traffic distribution rule for the traffic processing means in next time period is generated; and based on the generated traffic distribution rule, incoming communication traffic of the equipment is scheduled. The method of the invention considers the quality of service and contracted capacity of the whole equipment and the dynamic processing capability and running environment of the traffic processing means, and can balance the loads of the respective traffic processing means in the equipment with asymmetric multi-application configuration well by adaptively adjusting the distribution of the communication traffic, to guarantee the quality of service of the whole equipment. | 06-27-2013 |
20130170342 | DATA COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS AND METHODS - Data communication systems and methods are described. In one aspect, data is communicated to a data receiver via a data communication network. An error discriminator receives a confirmation response from the data receiver indicating receipt of the data. A round-trip transmission time is determined for the data and used to predict network congestion associated with the data communication network. A data communication rate is adjusted if the predicted network congestion exceeds a threshold value. | 07-04-2013 |
20130170343 | ADAPTIVE ACCESS CHANNEL OVERLOAD CONTROL - A device for use in a communication network having an access channel is provided. The device includes a memory that stores access class (“AC”) barring parameters in which the AC barring parameters establish rules to determine whether to transmit an access message on the access channel. The device includes a processor in communication with the memory. The processor determines whether the access channel is in an overload condition and determines one of a plurality of overload levels in response to the access channel being in an overload condition. A value of at least one AC barring parameter is defined based on the determined one of the plurality of overload levels. The device includes a transmitter in communication with the processor. The transmitter transmits an update message. The update message includes the defined value of the at least one AC barring parameter corresponding to the determined one of the plurality of overload levels. | 07-04-2013 |
20130170344 | APPARATUS, SYSTEM, AND METHOD FOR ASYMMETRICAL AND DYNAMIC ROUTING - An asymmetrical and dynamic routing system (ADRS) is provided to enable the dynamic adjustment of the bandwidth capacity of two or more network devices exchanging data. The two or more network devices monitor their current bandwidth demand between themselves and others in a network and a first network device can transmit bandwidth request to a second network device when the first network device reaches transmission bandwidth capacity. Each network device is further configured with additional transmit and receive ports and can be selectively enabled in response to a bandwidth request from other network devices. Each network device is further configured to generate control signals that are sent to optical mirrors to re-direct data signals to or from the one or more enabled additional transmit and receive ports. | 07-04-2013 |
20130170345 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR GENERATING AND DECODING SHORT CONTROL FRAMES IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Systems, methods, and devices for communicating short control frames are described herein. In some aspects, a method of wireless communication includes generating a control frame comprising a physical layer preamble having a signal field, the signal field including an indicator indicating the control frame is a control frame type of frame. The method further includes transmitting the control frame. | 07-04-2013 |
20130170346 | MANAGING HIERARCHICALLY ORGANIZED SUBSCRIBER PROFILES - Methods are provided for managing hierarchically organized subscriber profiles. According to one embodiment, a connection for a subscriber is created based on a service context of the subscriber. A connection request is received from a subscriber of a network service delivery environment. The subscriber is associated with a first-level profile identifier indicative of a service context for the subscriber. One or more other subscribers can be associated with the first-level profile identifier. Lower-level profile identifiers are determined using the first-level profile identifier. The lower-level profile identifiers indicate a set of services that is available to the subscriber during the connection. Creating a connection for the subscriber that enables forwarding of packets based on the lower-level profile identifiers. | 07-04-2013 |
20130170347 | Service Control Method for Machine Type Communications Device and Related Apparatus and System - A service control method for a machine type communications device and a related apparatus and system are disclosed. The service control method for the machine type communications device may include: receiving, by an access-network network element, a service request message from a core-network network element, where the service request message carries device type indication information of a user equipment (UE), and the device type indication information of the UE is used to indicate whether the UE is a machine type communications device; determining a device type of the UE according to the device type indication information of the UE; and if a current load of the access-network network element exceeds a set threshold, determining, according to the device type of the UE, whether to execute a service operation corresponding to the service request message. | 07-04-2013 |
20130176846 | Systems and Methods for Predictive Downloading in Congested Networks - An embodiment user equipment has a list of predictive data that a user may request, and programming to receive prefetched data based on the list of predictive data at a reduced cost, wherein the reduced cost is lower than a network cost of downloading the data, and to store the prefetched data within the UE for future consumption. An embodiment base station has a list of predictive data a UE may request, a high priority queue for data requested by the UE, and a low priority queue with predictive data corresponding to the list of predictive data. The base station further includes programing to send the requested data and to send the predictive data. | 07-11-2013 |
20130176847 | COMMUNICATION PROCESSING METHOD, APPARATUS AND GATEWAY DEVICE - The communication processing method is used in a network gateway device, wherein the network gateway device is coupled to a wireless terminal through a first wireless network and to a base station through a second wireless network different from the first wireless network. The method maintains a first TCP link between the network gateway device and the wireless terminal through the first wireless network; maintains a second TCP link between the network gateway device and a service providing server through the second wireless network; and performs a TCP transmission optimization on the first TCP link or the second TCP link to be optimized by a corresponding optimization method so as to improve a transmission performance between the wireless terminal and the service providing server. The optimization may be performed more specifically and a transmission performance between the wireless terminal and the service providing server may be improved. | 07-11-2013 |
20130182564 | Data Link Layer Tunneling Technique for High-Speed Data in a Noisy Wireless Environment - A data link layer tunneling technique improves the throughput of high speed data in noisy wireless environments. Recovering lost frames transmitted between a packet sending unit and a packet receiving unit in a data communications system generally comprises (a) identifying a failure to successfully receive a missed frame at the packet receiving unit; (b) establishing a logical tunnel channel at the packet receiving unit to acknowledge the next successfully received frame; (c) starting a first timer at the packet receiving unit; (c) upon receiving a tunnel establishment request from the packet receiving unit, the packet sending unit resending the missed frame on the logical tunnel channel and starting a second timer; and (d) the packet sending unit resending the missed frame a specified number of times until receiving an acknowledgement from the packet receiving unit. | 07-18-2013 |
20130182565 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR RESOURCE ALLOCATION SERVING COMMUNICATION REQUIREMENTS AND FAIRNESS - An allocation technique is operable to allocate communication resources in multi-hop networks under the joint consideration of communication requirements and fairness. Embodiments operate to provide allocation of time slot resources in TDMA based multi-hop wireless networks under the joint consideration of QoS and fairness. Embodiments operate with respect to information regarding maximal common slot set flow contention. An iterative process is applied with respect to the information regarding maximal common slot set flow contention to allocate communication resources providing a balance between meeting communication requirements and fairness. According to embodiments, an inter-graph process iteratively selects a maximal common slot set for which resource allocation with respect to various flows is to be performed and an intra-graph process assigns communication resources in the maximal common slot set providing a balancing between meeting communication requirements (e.g., QoS) and providing fairness. Other aspects, embodiments, and features are also claim and described. | 07-18-2013 |
20130182566 | DEVICE AND METHOD FOR LOAD BALANCING FOR DATA PACKET TRANSMISSIONS IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - For load balancing in a large-scale wireless mesh network, a device, a system and a method are provided for controlling data packet transmissions in the wireless mesh network, wherein answers to more than one received data packet are aggregated in one answer-batch. | 07-18-2013 |
20130188481 | NETWORK SYSTEM, OFFLOAD DEVICE, AND OFFLOAD TRAFFIC CONTROL METHOD - A network system includes: a plurality of base stations, each with which a mobile station communicates; a core network to include the plurality of base stations; and a plurality of offload devices, each being arranged between the base station and a node device included in the core network, each to serve as the node device of an anchor point at which traffic to be offloaded is transmitted/received to/from an offload network, and each to serve as the node device of a relay point at which the traffic to be offloaded is relayed between the anchor point and one of the plurality of base stations with which the mobile station is communicating. | 07-25-2013 |
20130194920 | VHT TDLS - TDLS support in VHT devices is enabled through the use of added VHT fields in the TDLS frames. A VHT TDLS direct link can be setup through a respective TDLS Setup Request/Response with added field announcing VHT Capabilities of the VHT device and the peer device. Added VHT Operation field in the TDLS Setup Confirm frame adds supports between VHT peer devices for non-VHT BSS and VHT BSS. Two VHT STAs can establish wider TDLS channel than BSS operating channel through TDLS establishment. VHT off channel support is enabled by adding Wide Bandwidth Channel Switch field in the TDLS Channel Switch Request frame and no changes to TDLS Channel Switch Response. A VHT Capabilities field is also added to TDLS Discovery Response frame to inform peer devices of device capabilities. | 08-01-2013 |
20130194921 | METHODS AND APPARATUSES FOR NETWORK CONFIGURATION OF USER EQUIPMENT COMMUNICATION MODES IN MULTIFLOW SYSTEMS - The present disclosure provides methods and apparatuses for improved UE communication mode determination by a network entity, such as a radio network controller, where multi-cell and multi-carrier communication is available to the UE in a wireless network. For example, in an aspect, methods and apparatuses are provided for determining whether a user equipment (UE) is in a soft handover region and a softer handover region, and where the UE is in such a region, predicting a future multi-cell performance of the UE assuming the UE will be served by a plurality of cells on a single carrier, predicting a future multi-carrier performance of the UE assuming the UE will be served by a plurality of carriers of a single cell, comparing the future multi-cell performance to the future multi-carrier performance, and transmitting a mode command to the UE based at least on the comparing. | 08-01-2013 |
20130194922 | DYNAMIC RESHUFFLING OF TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT SCHEDULER HIERARCHY - There is provided a network device comprising a physical queue management processor configured to manage attributes of physical queues of data packets. The network device further comprises a scheduling processor which is configured to manage scheduling nodes that establish a scheduling hierarchy among the physical queues in a network, utilizing a bi-directional mapping of the physical queues to logical queues. The network device further comprises a traffic management processor which is configured to modify the bi-directional mapping mentioned above. | 08-01-2013 |
20130201823 | HANDLING WAIT TIME IN A CONGESTED WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Embodiments of the present disclosure describe techniques and configurations for handling a wait time in a wireless communication network when the network is determined to be congested. An apparatus may include computer-readable media having instructions and one or more processors coupled with the computer-readable media and configured to execute the instructions to send a radio resource control request message to a wireless network controller, receive a response message including an extended wait time value, determine upon receipt of the response message whether a back-off timer associated with the apparatus is running, and determine whether to start the backoff timer with the received extended wait time value based at least in part on the determination of whether the back-off timer is running and the received wait time value is integrity protected. | 08-08-2013 |
20130201824 | HANDLING USER PLANE CONGESTION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Embodiments of the present disclosure describe devices, methods, computer-readable media and systems configurations for handling user plane congestion in a wireless communications network. A packet data network gateway (PGW) and/or a serving gateway (SGW) may proactively transmit a congestion notification to a mobility management entity (MME) including a level of congestion of the PGW and/or SGW. The MME may receive congestion notifications from a plurality of PGWs and/or SGWs. The MME may receive a request for a packet data network (PDN) connection from a user equipment (UE), and may take an action in response to the request based on the reported levels of congestion. The action may include selecting a PGW and/or SGW for the PDN connection, notifying the UE that the PDN connection cannot be established, and/or negotiating with the UE to terminate or modify one or more existing PDN connections in exchange for establishing the new PDN connection. | 08-08-2013 |
20130201825 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ADJUSTING TRANSPORT LAYER PROCESSING DURING FLOW CONTROL AND SUSPENSION STATES - A method for efficiently transmitting packets from a client device comprising: receiving a packet at a network transport layer of a client device; calculating a flow hash value for the packet, the flow hash value associating the packet with a particular network flow, the flow hash value usable to track the packet and other packets associated with the particular network flow; receiving feedback for the flow from a layer below the network transport layer of the client device, the flow being identified using the flow hash value, the feedback indicating queuing conditions associated with the flow; and adjusting built in backoff mechanisms normally provided by the network socket layer based on the current queuing conditions. | 08-08-2013 |
20130201826 | SWITCHING NODE WITH LOAD BALANCING OF BURSTS OF PACKETS - A packet switching node is coupled by links to other nodes of a network, and receives and assembles packets belonging to a specified packet flow, into bursts of packets with a burst control packet indicating a sequence of the burst in the flow. The node determines whether to distribute the flow across several links. If so, the bursts are then forwarded for switching to the output ports of the selected links. Distributing the flow over multiple links can enable more flexible and efficient filling of allocated bandwidth on links, as traffic increases. To reduce the risk of losing the order of packets the sequence of the bursts is indicated for use in reordering at intermediate nodes during transmission through the network. | 08-08-2013 |
20130201827 | METHOD AND EDGING DEVICE FOR CREATING FORWARDING TABLE, FORWARDING MESSAGE AND OBTAINING ADDRESS - The present invention provides a method and an edging device for creating the forwarding table, forwarding the message and obtaining the address, and the method for creating the forwarding table includes: the network provider edge (NPE) receives the label distribution protocol (LDP) message which carries the backbone media access control (MAC) address of the destination user facing-provider edge (UPE) and the load sharing negotiation parameter between the destination UPE and the NPE or the LDP message carries the created extend MAC address according to the backbone MAC address and the load sharing negotiation parameter; the NPE obtains multiple extend MAC addresses of the destination UPE according to the LDP message; the forwarding table is created for each extend MAC address respectively, and the forwarding table includes the extend MAC address and the corresponding multiple output ports. | 08-08-2013 |
20130208586 | Method of Handling Transmission Configuration of a Communication device and Related Communication Device - A method of handling transmission configuration of a communication device in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method is utilized in the communication device, and comprises determining traffic information of a plurality of packets which are transmitted between the communication device and a network of the wireless communication system according to the transmission configuration; and transmitting the traffic information to the network, for the network to configure the transmission configuration according to the traffic information. | 08-15-2013 |
20130208587 | DYNAMIC PARAMETER ADJUSTMENT FOR LTE COEXISTENCE - Coexistence gaps may permit one radio access technology (RAT) to coexists with another RAT by providing period in which one RAT may be silent and another may transmit. Methods may account for the RAT traffic and for the presence of other secondary users in a channel. Methods may be provided to dynamically change the parameters of a coexistence gap pattern, such as the duty cycle, to adapt to both the RAT traffic and the presence of other secondary users. Methods may include PHY methods, such as synchronization signal (PSS/SSS) based, MIB based, and PDCCH based, MAC CE based methods, and RRC Methods. Measurements may be provided to detect the presence of secondary users, and may include reporting of interference measured during ON and OFF durations, and detection of secondary users based on interference and RSRP/RSRQ measurements. | 08-15-2013 |
20130208588 | Method of Accessing CS Service in NMO I Congestion and Related Communication Device - A method of handling a registration procedure for accessing a circuit-switched (CS) service for a communication device of a wireless communication system is disclosed. The communication device operates in a network mode of operation I (NMO I), and the method comprises maintaining a packet-switched (PS) back-off timer triggered by a network of the wireless communication system, when the network is in congestion in a PS domain; and initiating the registration for the CS service with the network, before the PS back-off timer expires. | 08-15-2013 |
20130208589 | METHOD AND SINGLE RADIO STATION FOR MANAGING STATION THROUGHPUTS FROM A WIRELESS MULTIPLE ACCESS POINTS BACKHAUL - Method and single radio station for managing station throughputs from a wireless multiple access points backhaul. The method comprises using a single radio interface per station to connect stations to one or more access points (AP | 08-15-2013 |
20130208590 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SELECTING A MESSAGE TRANSPORT FOR A MULTI-MODE COMMUNICATION DEVICE - The present disclosure relates to a system and method for selecting a network for use by a communication device to process a data transmission. In the method, the following actions are conducted: tracking transmission characteristics of networks used by the device; maintaining a set of options for the device relating to the networks, including at least one option based on the transmission characteristics; utilizing a selected option identify a selected network to process the data transmission by the communication device; and processing the data transmission using the selected network. | 08-15-2013 |
20130208591 | Mobile-Access Information Based Adaptation of Network Address Lookup for Differentiated Handling of Data Traffic - For enabling differentiated handling of mobile network data traffic between a UE ( | 08-15-2013 |
20130215741 | RADIO TRANSMISSION APPARATUS AND MAC FRAME TRANSMISSION METHOD - In a current station connected to a user network or a radio counterpart station, a radio transmission device with an adaptive modulation function, which switches over a radio transmission capacity in response to fluctuations of quality of radio transmission lines, and a MAC frame transmission device for determining and controlling communication quality are coupled together to function as a Layer-2 switch (L2SW) or a router. The radio transmission device determines a modulation method based on reception power of a reception signal transmitted from the radio counterpart station, wherein the modulation method is multiplexed with a PAUSE frame, which is then output to the MAC frame transmission device. The MAC frame transmission device detects a current radio transmission capacity from the PAUSE frame multiplexing the modulation method, selects QoS setting suited to the radio transmission capacity from among a plurality of QoS settings which are set in advance, and performs a control operation based on the selected QoS setting with respect to a LAN signal from the user network, thus forwarding the LAN signal to the radio transmission device. The radio transmission device modulates the LAN signal, forwarded from the MAC frame transmission device, based on the modulation method, thus transmitting the LAN signal to the radio counterpart station. | 08-22-2013 |
20130215742 | EXTENDED ACCESS BARRING (EAB) SIGNALING FOR A CORE NETWORK (CN) AND NODE - Technology for core network signaling of an extended access barring (EAB) action between a node (e.g., an eNodeB) and a core network (CN) entity (e.g., a mobility management entity (MME)) is disclosed. One method can include a node receiving from a core network entity an EAB action in an overload start message. The node can transmit EAB configuration information from the node to a wireless device based on the received EAB action. | 08-22-2013 |
20130223209 | SERVICE ADMISSION PATH CONTROL (SAPC) - A service admission control method in a communication network comprising at least one group of at least one node per group, the method comprising the steps: Receive a service establishment attempt from one group; and admit the service in the network depending on the granularity of the network topology, the link topology and/or the partitioning of the link topology. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223210 | APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR BLOCK ACKNOWLEDGMENT COMPRESSION - Systems, methods, and devices for compressing block acknowledgment (ACK) frames/packets are described herein. In some aspects, a method of communicating in a wireless network includes generating a compressed block acknowledgment frame comprising one or more local addresses. The method further includes transmitting the compressed block acknowledgment frame. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223211 | APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR BLOCK ACKNOWLEDGMENT COMPRESSION - Systems, methods, and devices for compressing block acknowledgment (ACK) frames/packets are described herein. In some aspects, a method of communicating in a wireless network includes generating a compressed block acknowledgment frame including one or more of the following fields in a physical layer header: duration, receiver address, transmitter address, block acknowledgment control, block acknowledgment policy, compressed bitmap, compression control, starting sequence number. The method further includes transmitting the compressed block acknowledgment frame. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223212 | APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR BLOCK ACKNOWLEDGMENT COMPRESSION - Systems, methods, and devices for compressing block acknowledgment (ACK) frames/packets are described herein. In some aspects, a method of communicating in a wireless network includes generating a compressed block acknowledgment frame comprising a physical layer header, the physical layer header including at least one of the following: a block acknowledgment identifier, a starting sequence number of the compressed block acknowledgement frame, and a bitmap. The method further includes transmitting the compressed block acknowledgment frame. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223213 | APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR BLOCK ACKNOWLEDGMENT COMPRESSION - Systems, methods, and devices for compressing block acknowledgment (ACK) frames/packets are described herein. In some aspects, a method of communicating in a wireless network includes a compressed block acknowledgment frame including a bitmap, the bitmap indicating receipt of a plurality of fragments of a single data unit. The method further includes transmitting the compressed block acknowledgment frame. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223214 | SWITCH DEVICE, INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING SWITCHING DEVICE - A switch device includes a relay unit relaying communication data when information processing units included in an information processing apparatus perform communications with external devices; an address learning unit registering ports receiving the communication data in association with addresses indicating transmission sources of the communication data; and a band control unit controlling a bandwidth to be allocated to the communications by setting a first port and a second port of the ports to belong to a same group and by setting the first port and the second port to belong to different groups based on a number of addresses registered by the address learning unit in association with each of the ports. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223215 | METHOD AND A DEVICE FOR REGULATING TRANSMISSIONS IN A TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A transmission regulation method which may be performed by a station having at least one data frame for transmitting over a telecommunications network is disclosed. In one aspect, the method comprises, during at least one selection round from a set of selection rounds, obtaining a value representative either of an authorization to transmit or a prohibition to transmit the frame. Furthermore, when the value is representative of an authorization to transmit, transmitting an information signal over a first communications channel of the network, to inform the other stations that the station has obtained a value representative of an authorization to transmit; or when the value is representative of a prohibition to transmit, listening for an information signal, if any, transmitted over the first communications channel of the network. The method listens to or transmits over a second communications channel of the network that is different from the first communications channel. | 08-29-2013 |
20130229915 | WIRELESS MULTICAST/BROADCAST INTEGRATION WITH CONTENT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM - A system is provided that can include one or more devices to: identify an event that has a predefined start time and end time, determine that a particular amount of bandwidth is needed for the event, and generate a notification that identifies the particular amount of bandwidth and the predefined start time and end time for the event, where the particular amount of bandwidth is reserved on a channel for the predefined start time and end time, for the event, in response to the notification. | 09-05-2013 |
20130229916 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - When a proxy device is used between a transmission terminal and a reception terminal, receives final data from the transmission terminal, and fails immediately thereafter, a situation is avoided where transmission is completed in the transmission terminal, but reception is not completed in the reception terminal. There is provided a means for not returning ACK when a data packet is received in a state in which there is no data which waits for ACK and transmission of which is in progress, and there is no data which waits for arrangement and reception of which is in progress in the proxy device, for returning ACK for data received one step before when a data packet is received in a state in which there is data which waits for ACK and transmission of which is in progress, or there is data which waits for arrangement and reception of which is in progress. | 09-05-2013 |
20130229917 | REAL-TIME RATE CONTROL MECHANISM FOR MULTI-RATE DATA TRANSMISSIONS IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Wireless networks are becoming increasingly heterogeneous in terms of the processing capabilities of network users' receiving equipment. According to embodiments of the innovation, in a communications network comprising a plurality of receivers with different data reception rate capabilities, data frames targeted to respective receivers may be transmitted to the receivers in accordance with the respective data reception rate capabilities of the receivers. | 09-05-2013 |
20130229918 | Accelerated Content Delivery - The invention relates to a content delivery entity ( | 09-05-2013 |
20130235721 | Traffic Load and Transmission Retry Management - In a wireless network environment, techniques for traffic load management and transmission retry management assist a node to regulate network bandwidth consumed by one or more applications operating on the node, and assist the node to retransmit failed packets. Each of several software applications operating on the node may be prioritized. The prioritized applications will each receive a contention window appropriate to the priority of the application, which enforces an amount of bandwidth available to the application. In the event that a packet sent by the node fails to be acknowledged by a recipient, a retry algorithm may be utilized. The retry algorithm may use input including link quality and traffic density to adjust or maintain the contention window and/or retry count. | 09-12-2013 |
20130235722 | Method and system for power control based on data flow awareness in a packet network switch - Certain aspects of a method and system for a power control based on application awareness in a packet network switch are provided. Data communication flow may be monitored in ports in a packet network switch based on packet classification. Ports where data flow is not detected may have at least some functionality disabled to reduce power consumption. In this regard, a power saving mode may be utilized for disabling at least some functionality in a switch port, such as Ethernet ports, for example. A partially disabled port may be fully enabled when monitoring detects active data communication flow in that port. Port functionality may be enabled or disabled sequentially, for example. In some instances, a physical layer portion of the packet network switch may be utilized to adjust power in a port based on the data communication flow. | 09-12-2013 |
20130235723 | SOFT PACKET DROPPING DURING DIGITAL AUDIO PACKET-SWITCHED COMMUNICATIONS - A method of packetizing digital information for packet-switched communications includes placing, at a transmitting device with memory and a processor, a most significant bit of a digital voice sample into a variable-length most significant bit packet having a high transmission priority for transmission over a packet-switched network in which a node receives the packet and independently determines how to route the packet. At the transmitting device, a least significant bit of the digital voice sample is placed into a variable-length least significant bit packet having a low transmission priority for transmission over the packet-switched network. Prioritization of packets as having a high transmission priority or low transmission priority is independent of content characteristics of digital voice samples with elements contained therein. | 09-12-2013 |
20130242727 | EVOLVED PACKET CORE (EPC) NETWORK FAILURE PREVENTION - A first device, provided in an evolved packet core (EPC) network, receives load information associated with a second device provided in the EPC network. The load information includes a load threshold associated with the second device. The first device also receives traffic to be provided to the second device, and determines whether providing the traffic to the second device will cause the second device to exceed the load threshold. The first device provides the traffic to the second device when providing the traffic to the second device will not cause the second device to exceed the load threshold. The first device reduces a quantity associated with the traffic, to create throttled traffic, and provides the throttled traffic to the second device, when providing the traffic to the second device will cause the second device to exceed the load threshold. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242728 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MOBILE INTERNET OFFLOADING IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A system and method for mobile Internet offloading in a wireless communication network are disclosed. In one embodiment, a session is established through an Internet offload gateway (IOGW) with a mobile operator network to establish a communication with a mobile device. A packet coming from the mobile device is received by an intelligent policy manager (IPM) residing in the IOGW during the session. If the received packet is a signaling packet, offload rule flags are generated and operator defined offload policy rules are then enabled. If the received packet is a data packet, it is determined whether the operator defined offload policy rules match with session information associated the data packet. If the operator defined offload policy rules match, the data packet is offloaded to the Internet. If the operator defined offload policy rules do not match, the data packet is sent to a home gateway. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242729 | TRANSPORT BLOCK SIZE LIMITATION FOR ENHANCED CONTROL CHANNEL OPERATION IN LTE - In wireless communication carried out by a user equipment (UE), the UE receives one or more transport blocks and makes a determination on the transport blocks, such as determining whether block size and timing advance exceed thresholds, or determining a control channel type associated with the received transport blocks. The UE makes a determination whether to perform skip-decoding of the received transport blocks based, at least in part, on the determination made. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242730 | RANDOM ACCESS PROCEDURES IN WIRELESS SYSTEMS - A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) may detect cell congestion by selecting a preamble type as a function of priority level, transmitting the preamble to a serving cell, receiving a random access response (RAR) from the serving cell, determining a congestion state of the serving cell as a function of the received RAR, and/or responding to the congestion state of the serving cell. RACH functionality may be improved by allocating one or more sets of Physical RACH (PRACH) resources to a WTRU. The WTRU may configure the additional PRACH resources based on the allocation. A WTRU may determine a second set of PRACH resources based at least in part on a first set of PRACH resources. A WTRU may determine additional sets of PRACH preambles and may utilize modified PRACH preambles and/or modified PRACH preamble formats. The WTRU may signal additional PRACH resources. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242731 | DEADLOCK PREVENTION IN DIRECT NETWORKS OF ARBITRARY TOPOLOGY - Aspects of the invention pertain to routing packets in a computer system while avoiding deadlock. A turn rule is set according to unique identifiers associated with switches in the system. Numeric values of switches in possible turns are compared to determine whether a turn is permissible. The rule applies to all nodes in the system. The rule may be violated when using virtual channels. Here, a violation is permissible when using monotonically increasing virtual channel numbers or monotonically decreasing virtual channel numbers. Alternatively, the violations of the turn rule may be allowed if they force a packet to change to a later virtual channel in some fixed ordering of virtual channels. Deadlock can thus be avoided in many different types of architectures, including mesh, torus, butterfly and flattened butterfly configurations. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242732 | ADMISSION CONTROL FOR QOS-DRIVEN WIRELESS LANS - A method and system for a quality of service (QoS) point coordinator (PC) for a basic service set (BSS) in a wireless local area network (WLAN) is disclosed. For example, the PC includes a QoS management entity (QME) and an admission control entity (ACE). The QME receives at least one reservation request message that characterizes one of a QoS session and QoS application (session/application) that can be of a continuous/periodic flow type that is time sensitive, or can be of a discontinuos/bursty flow type that is time tolerant. The reservation request message contains at least one QoS parameter set and requests a resource of a communication channel in the BSS for the QoS session/application. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242733 | SERVICE CONTROL METHOD AND SYSTEM, EVOLVED NODEB, AND PACKET DATA NETWORK GATEWAY - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a service control method and system, an evolved NodeB, and a packet data network gateway, to perform resource scheduling on a packet. The method provided in an embodiment of the present invention includes: receiving, by an evolved NodeB, a packet; determining, by the evolved NodeB, a service control policy corresponding to the packet according to correspondence between a service application type and a service control policy and a service application type corresponding to the packet; and performing, by the evolved NodeB, resource scheduling on the packet according to the service control policy corresponding to the packet. Embodiments of the present invention further include a service control system, an evolved NodeB, and a packet data network gateway. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242734 | REVERSE LINK RELIABILITY THROUGH RE-ASSEMBLING MULTIPLE PARTIALLY DECODED CONNECTIONLESS FRAMES IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - Techniques, devices, and systems that include mechanisms for connectionless communications in wireless communication networks or systems include a base station controller, a plurality of base stations and a mobile station. The base station controller combines connectionless transmissions received by the base stations, including decoded and un-decoded frames, into a complete message. | 09-19-2013 |
20130250757 | Reducing Headroom - The various embodiments of the invention provide mechanisms to reduce headroom size while minimizing dropped packets. In general, this is done by using a shared headroom space between all ports, and providing a randomized delay in transmitting a flow-control message. | 09-26-2013 |
20130250758 | BASE STATION, WIRELESS END DEVICE, AND TRANSMISSION BARRING METHODS THEREOF - A base station, a wireless end device, and transmission barring methods are provided. The base station is configured to receive a special event notification message from a core network, generate a barring message after receiving the special event notification message, and transmit the barring message to the wireless end device. The base station is not overloaded when the barring message is generated and transmitted. After receiving the barring message, the wireless end device is suspended from transmitting data to the base station for a barring time interval. | 09-26-2013 |
20130250759 | Method for Processing Service and Apparatus - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a method for processing service and apparatus, relating to the field of communication technologies, and invented for effectively reducing signaling interactions and optimizing the performance of a communication system. The method for processing service includes: receiving a packet data protocol PDP deactivation request message or a signaling connection release indication SCRI message sent from a user equipment; and maintaining a bearer corresponding to the user equipment. The present invention may be used in global systems for mobile communications and long term evolution communication systems. | 09-26-2013 |
20130258845 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SCHEDULING PACKETS FOR TRANSMISSION IN A NETWORK PROCESSOR HAVING A PROGRAMMABLE PIPELINE - A network processor includes an arbitration device, a processing device, and a pipeline. The arbitration device receives a first packet and a second packet. The second packet includes a first control message. The pipeline includes access devices, where the access devices include first and second access devices. The pipeline, based on a clock signal, forwards the first and second packets between successive ones of the access devices. The arbitration device: sets a timer based on at least one of (i) an amount of time for data to travel between the first and second access devices, or (ii) a number of pipeline stages between the first and second access devices; adjusts a variable based on (i) the clock signal, and (ii) transmission of the first packet from the arbitration device to the pipeline; and based on the timer and the variable, schedules transmission of the second packet through the pipeline. | 10-03-2013 |
20130258846 | Method for Enabling Traffic Acceleration in a Mobile Telecommunication Network - A radio network node of a mobile telecommunication network. The radio network node configured to determine a TCP session based on TCP parameters adapted for a radio link on which end user traffic is to be transported. The radio network node also configured to originate the TCP session which is used to transport the end user traffic. | 10-03-2013 |
20130272119 | METHOD AND COMMUNICATION DEVICE FOR CONTROLLING ACCESS TO A WIRELESS ACCESS NETWORK - A method for controlling access to a wireless Access Network (AN) by a wireless communication device. The device stores a Device Access Priority (DAP) level based on characteristics of the device. When the device has data to send, the device receives an overhead message from the AN containing a Network Access Priority (NAP) parameter defining a minimum priority level for initiating network access. The device determines whether its DAP level is equal to or greater than the NAP parameter. If not, the device periodically repeats the receiving and determining steps until the stored DAP level is determined to be equal to or greater than the NAP parameter received from the AN. When the stored DAP level is equal to or greater than the NAP parameter, the device initiates network access. The device may perform and pass a Persistence Test before transmitting the data on an access channel (ACH). | 10-17-2013 |
20130272120 | Method and Device for Handling Mobility Management Context - Embodiments of the present application relate to the technical field of wireless communications, relating specifically to a method and a device for handling a mobility management context, for use in solving the problem in the prior art of an increase in signaling consumption or network load due to the absence of a defined duration of storage for the mobility management context on a network side. The method comprises: upon a network congestion and rejecting a request from a terminal, a network side device activating a first context timer for the terminal; if the request of the terminal is received and accepted before the first context timer times out, the network side device retaining a mobility management context corresponding to the terminal; if the request of the terminal is not received, or is received but not accepted before the first context timer times out, the network side device deleting the mobility management context corresponding to the terminal. As the duration of storage is defined for the mobility management context on the network side, the signaling consumption and the network load are thereby reduced. | 10-17-2013 |
20130272121 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR APPLICATION-AWARE ADMISSION CONTROL IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Systems and methods for optimizing system performance of capacity and spectrum constrained, multiple-access communication systems by using application-aware admission control are provided. The systems and methods provided herein can determine admission control response using information about applications and congestion information. The information about applications can be obtained from packet inspection. The admission control responses can include admitting a new service, denying the new service, modifying the new or an existing service, delaying the new service, and suspending an existing service. | 10-17-2013 |
20130272122 | INFORMATION DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM AND METHOD, TERMINAL APPARATUS, SERVER APPARATUS, DATA RECEPTION METHOD, AND DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD - An information distribution system and method capable of averaging a traffic load over time and effectively utilizing communication facilities, wherein a terminal station | 10-17-2013 |
20130272123 | Systems and Methods for Traffic Policing - Systems and methods for policing traffic in communications systems are described herein. According to systems and methods herein, tokens are generated for a packet data network based on a peak transmission rate associated with the packet data network. Packets are selected for transmission over the packet data network based on availability of tokens. | 10-17-2013 |
20130272124 | HANDLING WAIT TIME IN A CONGESTED WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Embodiments of the present disclosure describe techniques and configurations for handling a wait time in a wireless communication network when the network is determined to be congested. An apparatus may include computer-readable media having instructions and one or more processors coupled with the computer-readable media and configured to execute the instructions to send a radio resource control request message to a wireless network controller, receive a response message including an extended wait time value, determine upon receipt of the response message whether a back-off timer associated with the apparatus is running, and determine whether to start the backoff timer with the received extended wait time value based at least in part on the determination of whether the back-off timer is running and the received wait time value is integrity protected. | 10-17-2013 |
20130272125 | COMPONENT, SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING COMMUNICATION OF DATA OF AT LEAST ONE APPLICATION OF A COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - For improving application data traffic in a communications network, data traffic of at least one application of the communications network is divided into two types in view of the current situation of the network—a first type comprising data, which can be transmitted by delaying the transmission, and a second type comprising data, which should not be delayed but should be transmitted at the current time. When an analysis of the current (average) load of the network shows that transmitting both types of data could lead to a heavy data traffic, a temporal transmission suppression session can be performed with regard to at least one entity of the communications network. In the temporal transmission suppression session, transmitting of data of the first type is interrupted during transmitting data of the second type. After completion of transmitting data of the second type, transmitting data of the first type is resumed. | 10-17-2013 |
20130279328 | METHOD FOR OPTIMIZATION OF MOBILITY AWARENESS IN MOBILE NETWORKS - The invention relates to a method and a network entity to manage the establishment of data connections of a user terminal allocated in a mobile communications network. | 10-24-2013 |
20130279329 | METHOD OF CALL ADMISSION CONTROL FOR HOME FEMTOCELLS - The present invention provides a call admission control method for use in a wireless communication network that includes a femtocell that is coupled to the wireless communication network via a wireline communication network. The method includes receiving, at a call admission controller in the wireless communication network, a request to initiate a call between user equipment and the femtocell. The method also includes accessing, at the call admission controller, information indicating resources available in the wireline communication network to provide a wired connection between the femtocell and the wireless communication network. The method further includes determining, at the call admission controller, whether to admit the call based on the information indicating the resources available in the wireline communication network. | 10-24-2013 |
20130279330 | ACCESS CONTROL METHOD AND DEVICE - Disclosed is an access control method, for use in implementing improved access control. The method comprises: during a random access process, on the basis of a current load of a random access network (RAN) and a core network (CN) and of terminal or service information reported by a user equipment (UE), the RAN judging whether or not access to the RAN and to the CN is allowed; when access is denied by at least one network between the RAN and the CN, the RAN transmitting to the UE an instruction message having attached therein a backoff time corresponding to the access denying network. Also disclosed is a device for implementing the method. | 10-24-2013 |
20130279331 | METHOD FOR MULTIPATH SCHEDULING BASED ON A LOOKUP TABLE - A method for providing a multipath scheduler may include causing generation of a lookup table of action rules defining actions corresponding to respective different states in which each of the states is a weighted description of performance measures associated with a data interface, and enabling utilization of the lookup table at a predefined periodicity during communication in a multipath communication environment to identify a selected data interface among a plurality of available data interfaces based on current performance measures associated with the plurality of available data interfaces. A corresponding apparatus and computer program product are also provided. | 10-24-2013 |
20130286824 | DATA COMMUNICATION IN OPENFLOW NETWORKS - Systems and methods for data communication in OpenFlow networks are described. At least one system state condition corresponding to at least one flow matching condition is provided to a network device. The at least one system state condition is related to a state of at least one state attribute of the network device. The at least one system state condition is provided for forwarding a packet from the network device. | 10-31-2013 |
20130286825 | FEED-FORWARD ARBITRATION - Feed-forward arbitration is disclosed. An example method of feed-forward arbitration includes determining an aggregated measure of urgency of packets waiting in a queue. The method also includes sending the aggregated measure to switching node arbiters along the path that an urgent packet will take, to reduce backpressure along a path of an urgent packet by biasing arbiters in favor of the packet | 10-31-2013 |
20130286826 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF NETWORK TRAFFIC OFFLOADING - Method and apparatus of network traffic offloading is disclosed. Network traffic offloading method may include receiving a first network traffic offloading frame from a base station in a cellular network, the first network traffic offloading frame comprising a frame type instructing a scanning start by broadcasting an advertising frame, traffic information indicating traffic expected to be offloaded by the base station and a transmission configuration indicating a period and a duration to transmit the advertising frame, broadcasting the advertising frame based on the transmission configuration to scan at least one access point (AP), receiving at least one invitation frame from the at least one AP and transmitting a probe request frame to an AP selected among the at least one AP to associate with the selected AP. | 10-31-2013 |
20130286827 | CONTROLLING DATA COMMUNICATION ACCORDING TO A TYPE OF THE DATA - A wireless network provides a communication bearer with mobile communications devices using an indication of a type of data packets communicated via the communication bearer. The data packets may have a relative priority indicated by the type of the data packets communicated via the communication bearer with respect to data packets communicated via other communication bearers. | 10-31-2013 |
20130286828 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING CONGESTION IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a congestion control method for a Mobility Management Entity (MME) in a mobile communication system. The method includes: receiving a mobility management request signal from a user equipment (UE) having Packet Data Network (PDN) connections for at least one Access Point Name (APN); checking whether the APN is in a congested state; and rejecting, when a specific APN is in a congested state, the mobility management request. | 10-31-2013 |
20130286829 | BASE STATION AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A base station includes a congestion state determination unit that determines whether the base station is in a congestion state; a barring target setting unit that sequentially sets targets of barring among a plurality of the targets of the barring when a determination is made that it is the congestion state; a barring time interval setting unit that sets a time interval of the barring based on the congestion state when the determination is made that it is the congestion state; and a transmitter that transmits information representing the targets of the barring and information representing the time interval of the barring to the user equipment. | 10-31-2013 |
20130294230 | EFFICIENT DEVICE HANDOVER/MIGRATION IN MESH NETWORKS - A new device is deployed to an area in which a network is provided. The new device may join the network using a single handshake via a neighboring device that is a member of the network and register with a network management system managing the network. If the network is overloaded or has limited bandwidth remaining, the network may refuse to admit the new device, or if the new device is isolated, may force some devices that are members of the network to leave or migrate from the network to allow the isolated device to join the network. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294231 | METHOD OF HIGH-SPEED SWITCHING FOR NETWORK VIRTUALIZATION AND HIGH-SPEED VIRTUAL SWITCH ARCHITECTURE - A virtual switch for providing a network virtualization service and a high-speed switching method of an input packet are provided. A packet is efficiently transmitted at a high speed using information of the input packet between a physical interface and a logical interface or between logical interfaces. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294232 | WIRELESS DISCOVERY USING A REDUCED TRAFFIC LOAD PROCESS - Traffic load over a wireless medium due to wireless access point discovery is reduced. The wireless stations and wireless access points support wireless discovery using a reduced traffic load process. The reduced traffic load process includes providing aggregated short probe responses. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294233 | BASE STATION CONTROL METHOD FOR CONNECTION OF TERMINAL WITH HIGHER PRIORITY AND BASE STATION SUPPORTING THE SAME - A method of controlling a base station is disclosed that provides service to a first terminal and a second terminal having higher priority than the first terminal. The base station determines whether there is an influx of call connection attempts when the lower-priority terminal and the higher-priority terminal perform ranging. If it is determined that there is an influx of call connection attempts, the base station sets the initial ranging backoff window size included in an information element of S-SFH SP3 (Secondary-Superframe Header SubPacket3) to a first size. If it is determined that there is an influx of call connection attempts, the base station sets the initial ranging backoff window size for the second terminal in an AAI-SCD (Advanced Air Interface-System Configuration Descriptor) message to a second size. Accordingly, it is possible to achieve a high probability of success of initial ranging of a higher-priority terminal. | 11-07-2013 |
20130301407 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ADAPTIVE FAST START IN LINK AGGREGATION - In one embodiment, a period between periodic transmissions of protocol data units (PDUs) used to form or maintain a link aggregation group is initially set to a fixed value. When a stress condition is detected, the period between periodic transmissions of PDUs is increased from the initial value. When the stress condition is determined to have eased, the period between periodic transmissions of PDUs is reduced back toward the fixed value. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301408 | HYBRID DATAFLOW PROCESSOR - A network device that processes a stream of packets has an ingress front end. The ingress front end determines whether the packets are handled in a bounded latency path or in a best-effort path. The bounded latency path packets are granted a resource with a higher priority than the best-effort path packets. As the packets are processed through a number of processing stages, with processing engines, the bounded latency packets are processed within a period of time corresponding to a guaranteed rate. Resources are granted to the best-effort path packets only when the processing engines determine that the resource grant will not impact the latency bounds with respect to the first packets. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301409 | Flow Control For Multi-Hop Networks - Solutions are provided that allow a network device to apply flow control on the MAC layer while taking into account the priority of the frame of traffic. This may be accomplished by generating a frame indicating that traffic flow should be paused, while utilizing a new opcode value, or alternatively by utilizing a new type/length value (possibly combined with a new opcode value). A receiving device may then examine the fields of the frame to determine whether it should use priority-based pausing, and then examine other fields to determine which priority-levels to pause and for how long. This allows for improved efficiency in flow control at the MAC layer. Additionally, the tagged pause frames can be forwarded over multiple hops on Local Area Networks across a Metropolitan Area Network or Wide Area Network. | 11-14-2013 |
20130308444 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING PATHS BETWEEN SOURCE/DESTINATION PAIRS - Described herein are a method and device for determining paths in a network topology. The method and device provide a source/destination pair representing a source and a destination in the network topology, provide a channel list comprising a topological ordering of channel identifiers representing communication channels in the network topology, and provide at least one path connecting the source and the destination based on the channel list. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308445 | System and Method for Network Detection and Selection - An embodiment method for network detection and selection includes receiving, by a user equipment (UE), a network detection and selection policy including a load threshold element, the UE further receiving load information element from an access network (AN), and applying the network detection and selection policy to the AN. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308446 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION DEVICE, AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A congestion control target call is selected so as to be capable of reducing inequality or the like between services or users in consideration of characteristics such as the urgency of the service or the user. A communication system includes a server device, a terminal device which transmits and receives a packet to and from the server device, and a communication device which relays communication of a packet with the terminal device and a control method thereof. The communication device selects a call which is a congestion control target on the basis of a value indicating a priority selected as a congestion control target and/or a bandwidth or a packet communication traffic volume occupied by a service or user when congestion occurs in consideration of characteristics such as the urgency of the service or the user when the congestion of the communication system is detected or foreseen. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308447 | Systems and Methods to Provision Quality of Service Sensitive Devices in Wireless Local Area Networks - System and method embodiments are provided for provisioning a quality of cellular user experience (QoE) or quality of service (QoS) specified device in a wireless local area network (LAN). The embodiments enable a QoE or QoS specified by a service agreement for a device to be maintained during periods when the device is transmitting data to and receiving data from the wireless LAN (e.g., a WiFi hotspot). In an embodiment, a method includes determining that at least one QoS-sensitive device is communicating with a wireless LAN access point (AP), reserving a contention free period (CFP) in a superframe for the at least one QoS-sensitive device to communicate with the AP, and allocating a contention period (CP) in the superframe for non-QoS-sensitive devices to communicate with the AP, wherein the non-QoS-sensitive devices are prohibited from transmitting during the CFP. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308448 | PACKET CAPTURE DEEP PACKET INSPECTION SENSOR - Systems and processes for filtering network traffic. In one example, an event based flow record aging process may be used to identify flow records to be removed from memory to provide space for newer flow records. In this example, a new incoming network packet may trigger a determination of the flow record to be removed from memory based on the hardware time stamps of the flow records stored in memory. Determining aging flow records in this way may advantageously reduce the amount of computer resources required to manage flow record aging when compared to traditional techniques that require keeping a timer and periodically performing a cleanup process to check the freshness date of each flow record. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308449 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS TO SELECT PEERED BORDER ELEMENTS FOR AN IP MULTIMEDIA SESSION BASED ON QUALITY-OF-SERVICE - Systems and methods to select peered border elements for a communication session based on Quality-of-Service (QoS) are disclosed. In particular, an example method includes determining a composite QoS parameter of a communication session based on weighting QoS parameters of the session, the QoS parameters including a grade of service parameter of the session and a preferred mode of communication for a voice over Internet protocol (VoIP) device of a called party; querying a telephone number mapping server for a status of each of the peered border elements; assigning the session to be handled by a selected peered border element of the peered border elements based on the composite QoS parameter and the status of each of the peered border elements; and generating a QoS authorization token to reserve network resources associated with the selected peered border element. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308450 | Policy Control Method and System - A policy control method and system are disclosed. The method includes: a 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) network entity sending outer IP packet header information to a Broadband Forum (BBF) access network entity; and the BBF access network entity scheduling a data packet matching the outer IP packet header information according to a Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) of the data packet. With the above technical scheme, service data flows without going through admission control will not occupy resources of other service data flows going through the admission control. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308451 | MULTIPLE ACCESS COMMUNICATION - The application concerns interference mitigation in a CSMA/CA system (e.g. WLAN/WIFI); a distinction is made between two kinds of interference, namely “noise” and “congestion/collision”; a measure of congestion is determined as follows: if packets are queued waiting for transmission, a timer is started and the clear channel assessment (CCA) function is initiated. Periodically a check is made to determine whether a channel is available and when a channel becomes available the first queued packet is transmitted and the timer is stopped. The value recorded by the timer is used to indicate a measure of congestion. | 11-21-2013 |
20130315059 | INCOMING CALL CONTROL SYSTEM, INCOMING CALL CONTROL APPARATUS, INCOMING CALL CONTROL TARGET TERMINAL SPECIFYING APPARATUS, INCOMING CALL CONTROL METHOD - An incoming call control system according to the present invention includes: communication start request reception means that receives a communication start request transmitted from a radio communication terminal; determination means that determines whether the radio communication terminal related to the received communication start request is a terminal which is a target of paging suppression; holding means that holds information for identifying the radio communication terminal as paging suppression target terminal information when the determination means determines that the terminal is the target of paging suppression; packet reception means that receives a packet from a network side; and determination means that determines whether to suppress paging to a radio communication terminal related to the received packet based on the paging suppression target terminal information. | 11-28-2013 |
20130315060 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR CONFIGURING A VIRTUAL NETWORK SWITCH - In one embodiment, a method includes sending a configuration signal to a virtual network switch module within a control plane of a communications network. The configuration signal is configured to define a first network rule at the virtual network switch module. The method also includes configuring a packet forwarding module such that the packet forwarding module implements a second network rule, and receiving status information from the virtual network switch module and status information from the packet forwarding module. The status information is received via the control plane. | 11-28-2013 |
20130315061 | INFORMATION PROCESSING METHOD, INFORMATION PROCESSING DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided is an information processing method including a setting process of, when a service is provided to a first wireless terminal device having a first access right to access a base station related to a first communication service provider via a radio line, setting a second access right to access a base station related to a second communication service provider to the first wireless terminal device, and a service providing process of providing the service to the first wireless terminal device to which the second access right is set through the base station related to the second communication service provider. | 11-28-2013 |
20130315062 | METHOD FOR IMPROVING THE QUALITY OF DATA TRANSMISSION IN A PACKET-BASED COMMUNICATION NETWORK - The invention relates to a method for improving the quality of data transmission in a packet-based communication network comprising a plurality of network nodes (K). Each of the network nodes (K) has a number of ports (P) with which at least one queue (Q) is associated respectively, and by means of which ports a communication connection (KV) to another network node (K) can be produced. According to the method of the invention, at least the queues (Q) of those ports which are arranged, in the network nodes (K), along, respective communication paths that are formed in the communication network, are monitored for their queue length. In addition, a degree of overload of the affected port(s) (P) is determined from the queue length, and on the basis of the degree of overload of the communication path(s) (PF | 11-28-2013 |
20130315063 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR CONGESTION SITUATIONS - A Radio Network Controller, an RNC ( | 11-28-2013 |
20130322236 | CONGESTION MANAGMENT FOR FIBRE CHANNEL OVER ETHERNET OVER WIDE AREA NETWORKS - In general, techniques are described for mapping WAN conditions to appropriate back-pressure mechanisms at the WAN edges to improve the performance of delay and/or loss-sensitive applications. In one example, a system includes a wide area network having a provider edge (PE) router to establish a Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) pseudowire over the wide area network. A Lossless Ethernet network attaches, by an attachment circuit, to the FCoE pseudowire at the PE router. A Fibre Channel Fabric connects to the Lossless Ethernet network and to a storage device that provides data for transmission over the wide area network by the FCoE pseudowire. The PE router detects a defect in the FCoE pseudowire and, in response to detecting the defect in FCoE pseudowire, injects an FCoE flow control extension into the Lossless Ethernet network by the attachment circuit. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322237 | Network congestion notification preservation and modification during transmission of netwrok data between physical network and virtual network - A virtual network is implemented on a physical network. A virtual network data packet is tunneled through the physical network via encapsulation within a physical network data packet and via transmission of the physical network data packet through the physical network. A network congestion notification capability of the virtual network is preserved and modified during transmission of virtual network data through the physical network and vice-versa. Congestion notification metadata can be copied from a header of a virtual network data packet to a header of a physical network data packet when the virtual network data packet is encapsulated into the physical network data packet. Congestion notification metadata can be copied from a header of a physical network data packet to a header of a virtual network data packet when the virtual network data packet is decapsulated from the physical network data packet. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322238 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND APPARATUS OF WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK (WLAN) COMMUNICATION IN CONJUNCTION WITH CELLULAR COMMUNICATION - Some demonstrative embodiments include devices, systems and/or methods of Wireless-Local-Area-Network (WLAN) communication in conjunction with cellular communication. For example, an apparatus may include a wireless communication unit to receive WLAN load information indicating a load of at least one WLAN controlled by at least one access point (AP), and, based on the WLAN load information, to select between connecting to the AP and connecting to a cellular node. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322239 | Method and system for controlling access to shared network - The disclosure discloses a method and system for controlling access to a shared network. In both the method and the system, a core network node may send an overload indicator capable of distinguishing PLMNs to an access network node when the core network node is overloaded; and the access network node may learn a PLMN over which access control needs to be performed according to the overload indicator received. The method and the system of the disclosure distinguish the PLMNs in performing access control according to an actual situation of overload of the network node caused by a PLMN sharing the network, ensuring the fairness in performing access control over terminals of all PLMNs sharing the network. Therefore, the problem of unfairness in performing access control over terminals of different PLMNs in a network sharing scenario is solved. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322240 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR ESTABLISHING SELECTED IP TRAFFIC OFFLOAD CONNECTION UNDER H(E)NB - Provided is a method for establishing a selected IP traffic offload connection under an H(e)NB, including: obtaining a packet data network connection request of a certain access point; obtaining the address of a local gateway connected with the H(e)NB and information about the access points supported by the local gateway; judging whether or not the requested access point allows the establishment of a selected IP traffic offload connection; judging whether or not the local gateway is able to connect to the requested access point; determining a method for establishing a selected IP traffic offload connection according to the judgment result and establishing a selected IP traffic offload connection. According to the method for establishing a selected IP traffic offload connection under an H(e)NB scenario in the present invention, judgment can be done before a connection is established, so that the waste of signalling resources caused by reconnection after connection failure is avoided. Also provided is a device for establishing a selected IP traffic offload connection under an H(e)NB. | 12-05-2013 |
20130329550 | QUALITY OF SERVICE TREATEMENT FOR APPLICATIONS WITH MULTIPLE TRAFFIC CLASSES - A system may receive a connection request, from a user device, that includes information identifying a particular application; identify that the particular application is associated with a group of classes of traffic; establish a group of bearer channels that are associated with the group of classes of traffic, the group of bearer channels being associated with a group of different levels of quality of service (“QoS”); process, via a first bearer channel and according to a first level of QoS, first traffic associated with the user device and the particular application; and process, via a second bearer channel of the group of bearer channels, according to a second level of QoS, second traffic associated with the user device and the particular application, the second bearer channel being different from the first bearer channel, and the second level of QoS being different from the first level of QoS. | 12-12-2013 |
20130329551 | DATA BUNDLING AND FAST DORMANCY BASED UPON INTERACTIVITY - Data bundling and fast dormancy can be controlled based on user interaction with a user equipment (UE). Moreover, the subject system provides a balance between saving battery power of the UE and reducing signaling and processing load in a radio resource controller (RRC). Specifically, the system observes user inputs and data flow requests to identify “interactive” and “non-interactive” data flows. On receiving a data flow request, the system determines whether the data flow can be bundled together and transmitted over a single connection with disparate data flows, based on the classification of the data flow. Additionally, on completion of a data flow, the system determines whether a fast dormancy timer can be disabled/delayed to transmit a next data flow over the current connection, based on the classification of the data flow. | 12-12-2013 |
20130329552 | Method For Introducing Network Congestion Predictions in Policy Decision - There is provided a Congestion Prediction Engine “CPE” of a Policy and Charging Control “PCX”' architecture. The PCC architecture also has a congestion database, a Policy and Charging Enforcement Function “PCEF” device and a Policy and Charging Roles Function “PCRF” node. The CPE includes a processing unit of the CPE which defines a currently applicable congestion prediction. The CPE includes a network; interface unit of the CPE which defines from the congestion database actual congestion data for a latest time period. The processing unit of the CPE determines a subsequent congestion prediction for a subsequent time period by comparing the currently applicable congestion prediction with the actual congestion data and by applying machine learning techniques. The CPE includes a memory of the CPE in which the currently applicable congestion prediction is replaced with the subsequent congestion prediction. The network interface unit of the CPE sends to a network entity the currently applicable congestion prediction so the PCRF can make a policy decision with quality of service “QoS” based on the currently applicable congestion prediction, upon establishment or modification of an IP Connectivity Access Network “IP-CAN” session for a user. A Policy and Charging Rules Function “PCRF” node of a Policy and Charging Control “PCC” architecture for making policy decisions based on network congestion. There is provided a method of a Congestion Prediction Engine “CPE” of a Policy and Charging Control “PCC” architecture and a method of making policy decisions at a Policy and Charging Control “PCC” architecture based on network congestion. | 12-12-2013 |
20130336110 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SUPPORTING IDLE MODE LOAD BALANCING - An idle mode load balancing capability enables balancing of idle mode wireless devices across wireless carriers in order to ensure that the possibility of congestion on any given wireless carrier is reduced or even minimized when idle mode wireless devices become active. The idle mode load balancing may be performed for wireless carriers by determining relative numbers of idle mode wireless devices on the wireless carriers and performing idle mode load balancing for the wireless carriers based on the relative numbers of idle mode wireless devices on the wireless carriers. The relative number of idle mode wireless devices on a wireless carrier may be determined based on a change in load on the wireless carrier during the observation period, which may be determined based on an observed change in load on the wireless carrier and a load correction associated with session terminations on the wireless carrier. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336111 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION WITH MACHINE-TO-MACHINE DEVICES - Approaches for managing machine-to-machine (M2M) wireless devices are disclosed. M2M devices may be managed using broadcast messages wirelessly transmitted from a server. M2M wireless devices may be configured to utilize service classes in order to implement network access policy control. Features include per-message or per-group security; randomized delays for acknowledgements and/or network access, optionally per group or network access rule; sequence numbers and/or retransmissions for QoS; pre-defined pathname shortcuts; network access rules based on time, congestion and network events; estimates of congestion at various nodes; spreading and/or maximum wait times; default or universal service classes; application data streams mapped to service classes; and offline triggering. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336112 | METHOD AND BASE STATION OF ADJUSTING UPLINK LOAD VARIANCE DUE TO UPLINK BEAM DIRECTION CHANGE - The present invention provides a method of adjusting uplink load variance due to a change of a beam direction turning from towards a current beamforming control cell to towards a target beamforming control cell, comprising: estimating an uplink load increment of the target beamforming control cell due to the change of the beam direction, before the beam direction turning from towards the current beamforming control cell to towards the target beamforming control cell; comparing the estimated uplink load increment with an available uplink load headroom of the target beamforming control cell; and adjusting an uplink load grant of a user equipment if the uplink load increment is larger than the available uplink load headroom, so that an uplink load increment is not beyond the available uplink load headroom, so that the uplink load increment is not beyond the available uplink load headroom. | 12-19-2013 |
20130343184 | SEGMENTATION INTERLEAVING FOR DATA TRANSMISSION REQUESTS - Some embodiments discussed herein may interleave one data transmission request with one or more segments of another data transmission request. In one embodiment, updated context information from a previous segment is used to transmit a next segment. | 12-26-2013 |
20130343185 | WIRELESS DEVICE AND METHOD OF SHORT MAC FRAME INDICATION - Embodiments of a wireless communication device and method for short frame indication in an IEEE 802.11ah network are generally described herein. In some embodiments, a reserved bit in a service field is used to indicate whether a frame is using a short MAC header or a regular MAC header. | 12-26-2013 |
20130343186 | MANAGEABILITY TOOLS FOR LOSSLESS NETWORKS - Manageability tools are provided for allowing an administrator to have better control over switches in a lossless network of switches. These tools provide the ability to detect slow drain and congestion bottlenecks, detect stuck virtual channels and loss of credits, while hold times on edge ASICs to be different from hold times encore ASICs, and mitigate severe latency bottlenecks. | 12-26-2013 |
20130343187 | TCP CONGESTION CONTROL FOR HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS - A congestion control mechanism for TCP communication sessions is described. The congestion control mechanism adjusts the size of the congestion window based on a number, N, of parallel virtual connections. The number N of parallel virtual connections used to determine the congestion window is dynamically adjusted based on an estimation of the network condition. | 12-26-2013 |
20140003232 | FEEDBACK LOOP FOR SERVICE ENGINEERED PATHS | 01-02-2014 |
20140003233 | Gateway Allocation in a Mobile Communication System | 01-02-2014 |
20140003234 | BASE STATION AND COMMUNICATION METHOD FOR MACHINE TO MACHINE COMMUNICATIONS | 01-02-2014 |
20140010080 | METHOD FOR OPERATING A WIRELESS NETWORK, A WIRELESS NETWORK AND A DEVICE - Method for operating a wireless network, wherein at least one MIMO (Multiple Input Multiple Output) group of different stations will be constructed by a grouping algorithm based on a grouping metric for providing a MIMO group of different stations addressable simultaneously in space by a base station using MIMO techniques and meeting a definable level of performance quality, the grouping metric being based on an SINR (Signal-to-Interference and Noise Ratio) experienced by each station within the MIMO group. The method includes: computing an SNR (Signal-to-Noise Ratio) that a new station would experience without any interference when added to an existing MIMO group; computing an SINR estimate by correcting the SNR with the sum of spatial correlations between the new and each of the stations already present in the existing MIMO group; and using the SINR estimate for deciding whether the new station can be added to the existing MIMO group. | 01-09-2014 |
20140010081 | TIERED CONTENTION MULTIPLE ACCESS (TCMA): A METHOD FOR PRIORITY-BASED SHARED CHANNEL ACCESS - Quality of Service (QoS) support is provided by means of a Tiered Contention Multiple Access (TCMA) distributed medium access protocol that schedules transmission of different types of traffic based on their service quality specifications. In one embodiment, a wireless station is supplied with data from a source having a lower QoS priority QoS(A), such as file transfer data. Another wireless station is supplied with data from a source having a higher QoS priority QoS(B), such as voice and video data. Each wireless station can determine the urgency class of its pending packets according to a scheduling algorithm. For example file transfer data is assigned lower urgency class and voice and video data is assigned higher urgency class. There are several urgency classes which indicate the desired ordering. Pending packets in a given urgency class are transmitted before transmitting packets of a lower urgency class. | 01-09-2014 |
20140016459 | NETWORK SYSTEM, GATEWAY, AND PACKET DELIVERY METHOD - A gateway suppresses data volume considering processing load information of a destination to reduce communication traffic volume of a network without suppressing the information with high severity. In a network system comprising the data center, the management node and the gateway connected via a plurality of networks, a communication function section of the gateway includes a table control unit that receives the processing load information of the data center as a packet destination from the management node and retains the information in a transfer management table. A transfer stop control unit of the gateway judges whether or not transfer of the packet is suppressed using the processing load information retained in the transfer management table, and suppresses the transfer of the predetermined packet upon judgment to suppress the packet transfer. | 01-16-2014 |
20140016460 | Technique for Handling a Data Packet Stream - A method of handling a data packet stream at different communication protocol layer levels of a communication protocol layer stack of an UMTS communication device is provided. The method comprises: Receiving a data packet stream at the communication device; Determining whether, in case of a loss of a data packet of the data packet stream, it is possible to retransmit the lost data packet to the communication device; and immediately transmitting data packets of the data packet stream succeeding the lost data packet from a MAC protocol layer level to a RLC protocol layer level if it is determined that the lost data packet cannot be retransmitted to the communication device, and otherwise storing data packets of the data packet stream succeeding the lost data packet for a third period of time at the MAC protocol layer level, which third period of time is longer than the second time period. | 01-16-2014 |
20140016461 | PACKET RELAY DEVICE AND METHOD - When a delay between a packet relay device and a receiving terminal increases, congestion notifications are delayed, and communication quality declines. When a flow is assessed to be in a congestion state, a packet delay device overwrites, within a packet header of an acknowledgement packet for the flow which is received thereafter from a receiving terminal, a field which denotes a network congestion state with a value which denotes that a congestion state is in effect, and transmits same as an acknowledgement packet. It is thus possible to issue a congestion notification over a path from the packet relay device to the receiving terminal, eliminating a congestion notification path from the packet relay device to the receiving terminal and from the receiving terminal to the packet relay device, facilitating avoiding a decline in communication quality even if the delay between the packet relay device and the receiving terminal increases. | 01-16-2014 |
20140016462 | Communicating a Broadcast Message to Change Data Rates of Mobile Stations - A wireless communications network includes a base station to communicate with plural mobile stations over a wireless link. A broadcast message is sent to the plural mobile stations, with the broadcast message containing an indication for indicating to the plural mobile stations that the mobile stations are to change data rates for transmissions over a reverse wireless link. | 01-16-2014 |
20140022895 | Reducing Store And Forward Delay In Distributed Systems - Processing techniques in a network switch help reduce latency in the delivery of data packets to a recipient. The processing techniques include speculative flow status messaging, for example. The speculative flow status messaging may alert an egress tile or output port of an incoming packet before the incoming packet is fully received. The processing techniques may also include implementing a separate accelerated credit pool which provides controlled push capability for the ingress tile or input port to send packets to the egress tile or output port without waiting for a bandwidth credit from the egress tile or output port. | 01-23-2014 |
20140022896 | PORTABLE ELECTRONIC ACCESS DEVICE AND WIRELESS DATA NETWORK SYSTEM - A portable electronic access device, with a first access point module for a first user to communicate with a wireless data network, includes a second access point module and a control module. The control module via a first user command or remote signal can set the security domain of the second access point module and control the second access point module to start or close, so that at least one second user can log in the second access point module. Accordingly, an intranet is provided for inter-communications between users or a dynamic hotspot of the wireless data network is provided to relieve the congestion caused by the sudden increase of data users. | 01-23-2014 |
20140022897 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR DYNAMICALLY CONTROLLING CONGESTION IN A RADIO ACCESS NETWORK - Methods, systems, and computer readable media for dynamically controlling congestion in a radio access network are disclosed. According to one aspect, a system for dynamically controlling congestion in a radio access network includes a policy and charging rules function (PCRF) for receiving, from a node for communicating with user equipment via a radio access network, admission requests, and, in response to receiving the admission requests, installing, on the node, subscriber-specific policies to control congestion in the radio access network. | 01-23-2014 |
20140022898 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING DATA AND USER EQUIPMENT - The present invention provides a method for a user equipment for supporting a multitude of radio access technologies. The method includes receiving information on an inter-system routing policy from a server. The information includes a filter rule information. The filter rule information includes at least a domain information or a content type information, and a list which is organized according to the priority of access technologies or access networks which are supported by the user equipment. The method further includes transmitting a data traffic to be transmitted, by using at least one access technology or a network that is decided according to the filter rule information. | 01-23-2014 |
20140022899 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING THRESHOLD TESTING WITHIN A NETWORK - The disclosed embodiments include a method, apparatus, and computer program product for managing test traffic over a network. For example, one disclosed embodiment includes a system that includes at least one processor and at least one memory coupled to the at least one processor. In one embodiment, the at least one processor is configured to execute instructions stored in the at least one memory to perform operations comprising receiving a request to perform a throughput test from one or more testing clients; determining a state of the network utilizing indicators received from a plurality of portions of the network; authorizing the throughput test in response to the state of the network being acceptable for performing the throughput test; and pausing the throughput test in response to a change in the state of the network indicative of a network state that is unacceptable for performing the throughput test. | 01-23-2014 |
20140029421 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR DYNAMICALLY CONFIGURING CUSTOMER PREMISES EQUIPMENT (CPE) IN A CONVERGED NETWORK - Methods, systems, and computer readable media for dynamically configuring customer premises equipment (CPE) in a converged network are disclosed. According to one aspect, the subject matter described herein comprises a method performed at a mobility offload gateway that includes receiving cell site change notification message from a mobile network, determining, based on the change notification message, whether user equipment (UE) can be offloaded to a Wi-Fi network, and in response to determining that the UE can be offloaded, dynamically configuring consumer premises equipment (CPE) associated with the identified Wi-Fi network to support a predetermined quality of service (QoS) for the UE. | 01-30-2014 |
20140029422 | RATE CONTROL METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DATA PACKET TRANSMISSION - User equipment in a communication system including a base station includes: a receiver which receives, from the base station, a rate control command to up, down or keep a maximum transmission rate of the user equipment and receives, from the base station, absolute information by which the maximum transmission rate of the user equipment is determined, wherein an initial maximum transmission rate is set in the user equipment prior to receiving the rate control command or absolute information. | 01-30-2014 |
20140036663 | DROP SENSITIVE PREFIX (BGP PATH) ATTRIBUTE MODIFICATION - In a system including a first autonomous system (AS) configured to have a first gateway router forward data associated with a set of IP address prefixes, to a second AS via a link to a first eBGP peer device of the second AS, the problem of data packets dropped at an output of the first gateway router while the link is still “up” and an eBGP session between the first gateway router and the first eBGP peer is still up, is solved by (1) receiving information about dropped data packets at an output of the first gateway router, (2) determining whether a data traffic offload condition exists using the received information, (3) changing path attribute(s) of at least some of the IP address prefixes of the set if a data traffic offload condition exists, such that the first gateway router will be less likely to forward data associated with those IP address prefixes, and (4) generating a BGP update message including the changed path attribute(s) for communication to at least one iBGP peer device in the first AS. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036664 | PERIODIC CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION REPORTING FOR COORDINATED MULTIPOINT (CoMP) SYSTEMS - Technology for periodic channel state information (CSI) reporting in a coordinated multipoint (CoMP) scenario is disclosed. One method can include a user equipment (UE) generating a plurality of CSI reports for transmission in a subframe for a plurality of CSI processes. Each CSI report can correspond to a CSI process with a CSIProcessIndex. The UE can drop CSI reports corresponding to CSI processes except a CSI process with a lowest CSIProcessIndex. The UE can transmit at least one CSI report for the CSI process to an evolved Node B (eNB). | 02-06-2014 |
20140036665 | DYNAMIC LOAD BALANCING IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Methods and systems for providing a dynamic and real time load factor that can be shared with other network elements is disclosed. The load factor can be used in determining the relative load among a set of network elements and in distributing new sessions requests as well as existing session on the set of network elements. The load factor can also be used for determining to which network element a user equipment is handed off. The dynamic load factor can also be shared amongst network elements to determine how the load is balanced among the network elements, such as a mobility management entity (MME). | 02-06-2014 |
20140036666 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR CONTROLLING NETWORK SERVICE QUALITY - Methods and systems are provided for controlling network service quality. According to an aspect of the invention, a computer-implemented method is provided for controlling levels of quality of service (QoS) for transmitting data between a terminal and a destination. The method comprises enforcing a first level of a QoS to a connection between the terminal and the network, receiving a user-requested, second level of the QoS from the terminal, identifying a currently-available level of the QoS on the network, determining a third level of the QoS based at least in part on the currently-available level of the QoS on the network and the second level of the QoS, and enforcing the third level of the QoS. Methods and system are provided for enabling users at the terminals to specify online a level of network QoS, and the system dynamically changes the quality level and the plan to satisfy the request. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036667 | Rate Adaptation Using Network Signaling - Systems, methods, and instrumentalities are disclosed to perform rate adaptation in a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU). The WTRU may receive an encoded data stream, which may be encoded according to a Dynamic Adaptive HTTP Streaming (DASH) standard. The WTRU may request and/or receive the data stream from a content server. The WTRU may monitor and/or receive a cross-layer parameter, such as a physical layer parameter, a RRC layer parameter, and/or a MAC layer parameter (e.g., a CQI, a PRB allocation, a MRM, or the like). The WTRU may perform rate adaption based on the cross-layer parameter. For example, the WTRU may set the CE bit of an Explicit Congestion Notification (ECN) field based on the cross-layer parameter. The WTRU may determine to request the data stream encoded at a different rate based on the cross-layer parameter, the CE bit, and/or a prediction based on the cross-layer parameter. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036668 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONGESTION CONTROL DURING A COMBINED REGISTRATION - A method, apparatus and computer program product are provided to facilitate the combined registration in both the PS domain and the CS domain. In response to an initial request for a combined registration for a PS domain and a CS domain, a method may receive an indication that the registration for one of the domains is successful but that the registration for the other domain is unsuccessful. The method may prevent, in response to the indication that the registration for one domain is successful but that the registration for the other domain is unsuccessful, another request for the combined registration for the PS domain and the CS domain for a predetermined period of time following the initial request. A corresponding apparatus and computer program product are also provided. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036669 | MACHINE-TO-MACHINE COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING ENHANCED ACCESS BARRING IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Embodiments of a system and method for providing enhanced access barring in a Wireless Network are generally described herein. In an example, a method for controlling access in a mobile device network can include receiving access class barring (ACB) information at user equipment (UE) as part of a system information message including a first system information block, and receiving extended access barring (EAB) information at the UE as part of a system information message including a second system information block. The first system information block can be different from the second system information block. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036670 | METHOD, DEVICE, TERMINAL, AND SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING ACCESS OF MULTIPLE TERMINALS - The present invention discloses a method, device, terminal, and system for controlling access of multiple terminals, and belongs to the field of communications. The method includes: receiving an access request, where the access request carries a classification identifier ( | 02-06-2014 |
20140036671 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PRIORITIZATION OF RETRANSMISSION OF PROTOCOL DATA UNITS TO ASSIST RADIO LINK CONTROL RETRANSMISSION - Managing the transmission and retransmission of radio link control (RLC) data protocol data units (PDUs) is disclosed. An indication is received that an RLC data PDU was not successfully received by a receiving device. The RLC data PDU, that was not successfully received, is retransmitted, and prioritized over non-retransmitted RLC data PDUs. A number of times that the RLC data PDU was retransmitted is determined. | 02-06-2014 |
20140043966 | METHOD FOR DATA TRAFFIC OFFLOADING AND APPARATUS USING THE SAME - A method for data traffic offloading in a mobile communication system supporting a multi-radio access technology (RAT) and an apparatus using the method is provided. A mobile station receives information on a traffic load of a primary communication system from a base station. The mobile station determines whether to perform offloading to a secondary communication system on the basis of the traffic load of the primary communication system. | 02-13-2014 |
20140043967 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING LOAD IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method and apparatus for managing load in a communication network are provided. At a processor of a relay device, a number of messages is determined that are one or more of currently queued for relay via a communication interface of the relay device and previously relayed within a given time period, the communication interface and the processor of the relay device for relaying the messages, via the communication interface, between a plurality of devices and a network infrastructure. At the processor, a rate at which the plurality of devices establishes communications with the network infrastructure is controlled, wherein there is an inverse relationship between the rate and the number of messages. | 02-13-2014 |
20140043968 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING LOAD ON SERVICE DEVICES IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method, system and apparatus for managing load on service devices in a communication network are provided. At a processor of a relay device, it is determined that the service devices are available after being unavailable, the relay device comprising a communication interface and a processor for relaying messages, via the communication interface, between a communication device and the service devices. In response, the processor blocks incoming messages associated with a subset of the service devices, the incoming messages from the at least one communication device. | 02-13-2014 |
20140043969 | Signaling Traffic Reduction In Mobile Communication Systems - In an embodiment, a method for reducing signaling traffic between certain service elements in mobile communication systems includes receiving signaling initiated from one service element at a signaling routing agent where the signaling routing agent determines whether the received signaling needs to be sent to its destined service element. If the signaling is not sent, signaling traffic to the destined service element is reduced. | 02-13-2014 |
20140043970 | Bandwiddth Modification for Transparent Capacity Management in a Carrier Network - Some embodiments provide a capacity management agent that modifies bandwidth that is allocated between an end user and a carrier network by caching requested content that is streamed at a first rate and then providing the cached content to the end user through the carrier network at a second rate. The agent performs a process that includes receiving data intended for a service region of the carrier network from an external data network. The process identifies resource availability at the service region. Next, the process passes the data to the service region at the first rate when the resource availability at the service region is not less than a threshold amount and caches the data for passing to the service region at the second rate that consumes fewer carrier network resource than the first rate when the resource availability at the service region is less than the threshold amount. | 02-13-2014 |
20140043971 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVISIONING FLOWS IN A MOBILE NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - An example method is provided and includes receiving a request from a mobile node for an Internet protocol (IP) address and establishing a point-to-point (PPP) link for the mobile node. The method also includes provisioning a first tunnel associated with a first communication flow for the mobile node, and provisioning a sub-tunnel with the first tunnel for a second communication flow. The second communication flow is associated with a high priority type of data to be transported on the sub-tunnel. In more specific embodiments, a call admission control (CAC) mechanism is used to establish the sub-tunnel with the first tunnel for the second communication flow. Additionally, an inner label is installed in a header of a packet associated with the second communication flow in order to identify the sub-tunnel. | 02-13-2014 |
20140043972 | Service Instance Mapping Method, Apparatus and System - The present invention discloses a service instance mapping method, apparatus and system. The service instance mapping method includes: correlating a layer-2 service instance with a service access port of the service instance, and determining correspondence between the service access port and a service instance identifier; and mapping the service instance identifier to a service label of a packet. In embodiments of the present invention, because the service label is adopted to carry the service instance identifier, a higher service label supporting capability may be included, more service instances may be supported, and a multi-tenant requirement in a large-scale public cloud environment can be met; control protocol support is extended, and extension of a TRILL protocol can fulfill a higher service development capability. | 02-13-2014 |
20140043973 | Method and Apparatus For Quality of Service Monitoring of Services in a Communication Network - The present invention relates to a method of quality of service monitoring of at least one service in a communication network. The method comprises a first and a second modes. The first mode comprises detecting degradation in quality of service in a communication network by selecting ( | 02-13-2014 |
20140050081 | Reduced bandwidth transmission for multiple sensors utilized to monitor a system - In a system for monitoring multiple sensors, a technique is utilized to reduce the bandwidth necessary to transmit sensor data to a processing location by embedding a diagnostic and/or prognostic algorithm at the sensor location and providing that the algorithm outputs only values that are greater than predetermined exceedances for each of the sensors involved, and by monitoring only performance parameters that are critical to the monitored system. | 02-20-2014 |
20140050082 | DEVICES, SYSTEMS, AND METHODS FOR ADAPTIVE SWITCHING OF MULTICAST CONTENT DELIVERY TO OPTIMIZE BANDWIDTH USAGE - Systems, devices and methods for adaptive switching in multicast media streams are disclosed herein. In an embodiment, a method for adaptively transmitting content to one or more users based on currently available bandwidth via internet protocol (“IP”) multicast protocol, includes: receiving a first content stream having a plurality of data packets, the first content stream encoded at a first bit rate; receiving a second content stream having a plurality of data packets, the second content stream encoded at a second bit rate, wherein the first bit rate is different than the second bit rate and wherein the first and second content streams represent the same content; transmitting the first content stream to a user; determining that the user could receive the second content stream based on available bandwidth for transmitting data to the user; and transmitting the second content stream to the user. | 02-20-2014 |
20140050083 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR ESTABLISHING ELECTRONIC COMMUNICATIONS IN A HOSTED VOIP PBX USING TWO TIERED LOAD BALANCING - A system and method is provided for two-tiered load balancing on a hosted voice-over Internet protocol (VoIP) private branch exchange (PBX). The system includes a plurality of client devices, at least one device load balancer, and at least one call load balancer. The device load balancer identifies a device group to which each client device belongs; and a cluster of computing resources for processing calls for the device group. The cluster is assigned to the device group based on prescribed conditions. In response to a communications request, call load balancers in communication with the device load balancers dynamically determine if predefined conditions are currently being met within an identified cluster of computing resources. If the predefined conditions are currently being met, then the communications request for a primary client device associated with the request is established via one of a plurality of server nodes within the cluster of computing resources. | 02-20-2014 |
20140050084 | METHOD OF GROUP BASED MACHINE TYPE COMMUNICATION AND APPARATUSES USING THE SAME - A method of group based machine type communications (MTC) and apparatuses using the same are proposed to minimize unexpected network response by the way of group based MTC function translations and adjustments. According to the method and the apparatus performing the method, grouping and re-grouping in both in the network level and the application server level could be performed to minimize functional discrepancies among required functions for a MTC service, functions supported by a network, and functions available for MTC UEs. Functional discrepancies after the initial grouping may be solved by performing functional adjustment and translation. By using this group based method and apparatuses, not only control signal overheads are saved but the likelihood of network congestion or overload due to error signals could be lowered. | 02-20-2014 |
20140050085 | OBJECT-TO-OBJECT INTELLIGENT NETWORK (O2N) COMMUNICATION SYSTEM PROVIDING MULTIPLE TRANSMISSION CHANNELS, AND OPERATING METHOD OF SAID SYSTEM - Provided is an object-to-object intelligent network (O2N) communication system in which machine to machine (M2M) access networks are configured to include a plurality of networks for connecting an M2M device and an M2M server, the M2M device provides the M2M server with transmission channel information, the M2M server provides the M2M device with requirement information, and an urgency of a service, based on the transmission channel information, thereby enabling a transmission channel corresponding to service information to be selected, identifier information of a packet generated by the M2M server is extracted, a transmission channel is selected from among the M2M access networks based on the extracted identifier information, a priority table reflecting transmission information, the transmission channel information, and the requirement information of the M2M access networks are provided, and a network is selected by referring to the priority table. | 02-20-2014 |
20140050086 | CONTROL AND DATA PLANE SOLUTIONS FOR CARRIER-AGGREGATION BASED WLAN OFFLOAD - Systems and methods for controlling data traffic offload to a WLAN (e.g., a Wi-Fi network) from a WWAN (e.g., a 4G LTE network) are generally disclosed herein. One embodiment includes data traffic offload techniques managed by a Radio Resource Control (RRC) in a networked device including offloading data at the IP, PDCP, RLC, or MAC layers; another embodiment includes data traffic offload techniques managed by a MAC Scheduler with RRC control. Configurations for multimode user equipment (UE) and multimode base stations are also described herein, including configurations for implementing a Multiple Radio Access Technology (Multi-RAT) aggregation function to offload data from a WWAN to a WLAN and transmit the data via the WLAN using a Layer 2 transport. | 02-20-2014 |
20140050087 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MULTI-CHANNEL PACKET TRANSMISSION - A method of transmitting packets wherein said packets are comprised in a plurality of flows, the flows comprising flow characteristics controlling admission of incoming flows. A plurality of admitted incoming flows with the same class of service are inserted into a queue. A committed information rate value corresponding to said queue and a bandwidth available for transmission of said queue according to the identified committed information rate value are identified. An order for transmission for the queues is established based on the class of service of the queue and the identified bandwidth. A plurality of cells of the same size are generated from a plurality of frames and the cells are distributed between a plurality of individual transmission channels according to the ordered defined for transmission. A transmitter equipment and a receiver equipment are also disclosed. | 02-20-2014 |
20140050088 | RESPONDING TO AN INTERACTIVE MULTICAST MESSAGE WITHIN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Wireless communication systems and methods of scheduling access terminal responses to an interactive multicast message are provided. A radio access network (RAN) generates an access control message (ACM), the ACM indicating feedback instructions for a plurality of access terminals (ATs) belonging to a given multicast group. The feedback instructions of the ACM designate a temporary manner in which the plurality of access terminals are to respond to an interactive multicast message. The target ATs receive the interactive multicast message as well as the ACM. The target ATs, or multicast group members, respond to the interactive multicast message based on the feedback instructions for the plurality of access terminals indicated by the ACM. | 02-20-2014 |
20140056130 | PROVIDING INTEGRATED END-TO-END ARCHITECTURE THAT INCLUDES QUALITY OF SERVICE TRANSPORT FOR TUNNELED TRAFFIC - A method is provided in one example embodiment and includes receiving a request associated with a flow over a wireless link, where the request specifies resource requirements for the flow. The method also includes mapping an Internet protocol (IP) flow description to a plurality of tunnel IP addresses, and mapping a framed IP address to an access point (AP) tunnel endpoint address in order to establish a quality of service (QoS) for tunneled traffic. | 02-27-2014 |
20140056131 | METHODS AND APPARATUSES FOR ACCESSING INTERNET - Embodiments of the present invention relate to methods and apparatuses for accessing the Internet. The method includes: establishing a connection with a mobile access point (AP), and receiving service set identifier (SSID) information and encryption information of the mobile AP by using a physical connection channel storing the SSID information and the encryption information of the mobile AP into a first SSID name; sending disable information to the mobile AP, where the disable information is used for the mobile AP to disable its Wi-Fi search function; and enabling its first SSID name, so that a mobile terminal in communication with the mobile AP accesses the Internet by invoking the SSID information and the encryption information in the first SSID name. | 02-27-2014 |
20140056132 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SIGNALING SAVING ON RADIO ACCESS NETWORKS USING EARLY THROTTLING MECHANISM FOR COMMUNICATION DEVICES - An intelligent system and a method in a packet network to utilize the radio network resource and the core network resource in an optimized way so that more high priority, critical devices are granted access to the network while throttling the low priority, non-critical devices with the same given resource. The system collects all the necessary information from the signaling exchange between the radio access network and the core network and takes the device subscription characteristics and statically or dynamically defined throttling behavior rules into consideration to choose the optimal behavior to handle the requests from devices at any given time including deciding to reject the requests for certain types of devices under certain network conditions while granting the requests for other types of devices. This early throttling mechanism effectively increases the network resources, especially radio access network resources for high priority devices so that the quality of service does not change for those high priority devices even under network congestion condition. | 02-27-2014 |
20140056133 | METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT FOR TRANSFERRING INFORMATION IN A PACKET RADIO SERVICE - A method and an arrangement for transferring information including delay sensitive data, such as speech and video data, in a packet radio service is provided. Data blocks are transmitted from a mobile station to a radio resource entity during a first active data transfer period using an uplink temporary block flow (TBF) connection. The uplink TBF connection is maintained during a passive period that follows the first active data transfer period, wherein during the passive period the mobile station does not send data blocks to the radio resource entity. | 02-27-2014 |
20140056134 | Method and Apparatus to Reduce Signaling overhead in the Presence of Network Over-Load Condition - A method includes, in response to receiving an overload start indication from a network node, composing and sending first signaling to at least one user equipment to indicate that an overload condition exists for the network node and, in response to receiving an overload end indication from the network node, composing and sending second signaling to the at least one user equipment to indicate that the overload condition no longer exists. A further method includes receiving at a user equipment first signaling from a network access node that indicates that an overload condition exists for a network node and abstaining from making a network access attempt until receiving second signaling from the network access node that indicates that the overload condition no longer exists for the network node. Corresponding apparatus and computer programs are also disclosed. | 02-27-2014 |
20140056135 | MOBILE STATION - A mobile station UE according to the present invention includes a control unit | 02-27-2014 |
20140056136 | Preventing TCP from becoming too conservative too quickly - A technique that addresses the problem of a TCP connection's throughput being very vulnerable to early losses implements a pair of controls around ssthresh. A first control is a loss forgiveness mechanism that applies to the first n-loss events by the TCP connection. Generally, this mechanism prevents new TCP connections from ending slow-start and becoming conservative on window growth too early (which would otherwise occur due to the early losses). The second control is a self-decay mechanism that is applied beyond the first n-losses that are handled by the first control. This mechanism decouples of ssthresh drop from cwnd and is thus useful in arresting otherwise steep ssthresh drops. The self-decay mechanism also enables TCP to enter/continue to be slow-start even after fast-recovery from a loss event. | 02-27-2014 |
20140056137 | Content Caching In The Radio Access Network (RAN) - A system and method to intercept traffic at standard interface points as defined by Cellular/Wireless networks (GSM/GPRS, 3G/UMTS/HSDPA/HSUPA, CDMA, WIMAX, LTE), emulate the respective protocols on either side of the interception point, extract user/application payloads within the intercepted packets, perform optimizations, and re-encapsulate with the same protocol, and deliver the content transparently is disclosed. The optimizations include but are not limited to Content Caching, prediction & pre-fetching of frequently used content, performance of content-aware transport optimizations (TCP, UDP, RTP etc.) for reducing back-haul bandwidth, and improvement of user experience. An additional embodiment of the current invention includes injecting opportunistic content (location based, profile based or advertisement content) based on the information derived while monitoring control plane protocols. | 02-27-2014 |
20140056138 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR POLICING A FLOW IN A NETWORK - An example of a method of policing a flow in a home network such as a MoCA network may include calculating a policing period, calculating a first credit parameter, initializing a first usage variable at a beginning of the policing period, receiving a packet at an ingress node, calculating the first usage variable based on a first formula, determining whether the first usage variable is less than or equal to the first credit parameter, and making a reservation request when the first usage variable is less than or equal to the first credit parameter. The reservation request is different from an opportunistic reservation request. Examples of a system and a computer program product having instructions stored in a tangible computer-readable storage medium are also provided. | 02-27-2014 |
20140064067 | Method for Operating a Transceiver Circuit and Transceiver Circuit - A method for operating a transceiver circuit includes receiving an information indicating at least one of a transmission and a reception in a guard band region of a frequency band supported by a communications network and allocating at least a part of the guard band region of the supported frequency band of the communications network for at least one of a transmission and a reception of at least one physical channel. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064068 | INTERACTIONS BETWEEN RAN-BASED AND LEGACY WLAN MOBILITY - Interactions between radio access network (RAN)-based and legacy wireless local area network (WLAN) mobility is described in which a multi-mode mobile device receives a management indication from a wide area wireless network (WWAN) to manage connectivity with the WLAN, such as in discovery, association, or specific traffic offload for the WLAN. The mobile device obtains a status of its internal WLAN radio and determines whether to process the management indication based on the status. Data offloading is also described in which the mobile device receives an indication from the WWAN to offload data to the WLAN associated with the mobile device. In response, the mobile device suspends application of a current offload policy, which had been received from the core network, based on the indication and transmits its data according to the indication. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064069 | Method of Handling Non-Access Stratum Message and Related Communication Device - A method of handling non-access stratum (NAS) mobility management (MM) messages for a user equipment in a wireless communication system when the user equipment is configured for dual priority includes sending a first NAS MM request message containing a first priority level to a network in the wireless communication system, and storing a priority indicator indicating the first priority level in a non-volatile memory if the user equipment receives a NAS MM reject message with a mobility management back-off (MMBK) timer from the network. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064070 | OPTIMISTIC QUALITY OF SERVICE SET UP - The disclosure relates to optimistic QoS setup. A network element receives an IP packet that is not associated with a QoS request on a bearer for an application/service executing on a target client device, and initiates QoS activation for the target client device based on a combination of an application-specific identifier from the target client device and a user-specific identifier of the application/service. A server receives a session setup request that is not associated with a QoS request for an application/service executing on a target client device, the session setup request identifying one or more client devices to participate in a session, and initiates QoS activation for at least one of the client devices, before a session announcement is transmitted to the client devices, based on a combination of an application-specific identifier from the target client device and a user-specific identifier of the application/service. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064071 | DIRECTIONAL ADJUSTMENT TO QUALITY OF SERVICE BASED ON MONITORED TRAFFIC ACTIVITY ON A LINK - In an embodiment, an apparatus monitors traffic usage in uplink and downlink directions of a link that is configured to support a communication session for the client device. The apparatus can correspond to a core network component or to an access network component. The apparatus initiates, in association with the communication session, (i) an uplink-specific QoS adjustment to a first level of QoS assigned to the uplink direction of the link based on the monitored traffic usage in the uplink direction, and/or (ii) a downlink-specific QoS adjustment to a second level of QoS assigned to the downlink direction of the link based on the monitored traffic usage in the downlink direction. The link is maintained in both the downlink and uplink directions throughout the communication session irrespective of any QoS adjustments in the uplink and/or downlink directions of the link that occur during the communication session. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064072 | CONGESTION SIGNALLING IN A COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - Various embodiments relate to a policy controller ( | 03-06-2014 |
20140064073 | METHOD, APPARATUS, COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT AND SYSTEM FOR IDENTIFYING, MANAGING AND TRACKING CONGESTION - Various communication systems may benefit from congestion management. For example, code division multiple access wireless networks may benefit from identifying and tracking of congestion. A method may include identifying a cause of actual or potential congestion. The method may also include notifying a radio access network regarding the cause of actual or potential congestion. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064074 | SERVICE PROCESSING METHOD AND SYSTEM, AND POLICY CONTROL AND CHARGING RULES FUNCTION - A service processing method, a service processing system, and a PCRF entity are disclosed to overcome this defect in the prior art: The prior art is unable to handle services discriminatively according to the policy context information when different services require the same QoS level. The method includes: receiving bearer priority information from a PCRF entity, where the bearer priority information includes: bearer priority information of a service data stream, bearer priority information of an IP-CAN session, and/or bearer priority information of an IP-CAN bearer; and handling services according to the bearer priority information. In the embodiments of the present disclosure, the policy context information is converted into bearer priority information so that the PCEF handles services according to the bearer priority information. In this way, different services that require the same QoS level are handled discriminatively according to the policy context information. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064075 | SUBSCRIBER-CONTROLLED REGISTRATION TECHNIQUE IN A CDMA SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for dynamic uplink communication in a wireless communication system are disclosed herein. The method includes transmitting, by a base station, a pilot signal on a first channel to a mobile station (MS), the pilot signal indicating a signal strength, receiving, by the MS, a one-bit indicator from a plurality of base stations on a second channel, the one-bit indicator indicating a congestion status for each of the plurality of base stations, determining, by the MS, the congestion status for each of the plurality of base stations, and selecting, by the MS, a base station based on the one-bit indicator received on the second channel, wherein the one-bit indicator further indicates a neighboring base station that is lightly congested. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064076 | Aggregated Resource Reservation for Data Flows - A network node for reserving resources for data flows in a communication network. The node detects a request for resource reservation for a new data flow and computes an admission test count based on descriptors of the new data flow and reservation counts, which represent reservation functions of descriptors of previously admitted data flows and which specify resources of the admitted data flows. The new data flow is admitted if the admission test count is smaller than a maximum allowable count. The reservation counts are then updated based on the descriptors of the new data flow. A plurality of admission formulas may thus be used to maintain aggregated reservation counts for data flows, the number of counts being independent from the number of flows. | 03-06-2014 |
20140071818 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR EFFICIENT COMMUNICATION - Methods and apparatus for efficiently directing communications are disclosed. On example entails receiving, from a mobile terminal, a communication directed to a cellular communication network, the communication being received in an alternative channel that differs from a channel of the cellular communication network. The communication is then converted for a relayed communication to the cellular communication network on behalf of the mobile terminal, the relayed communication being made through the cellular communication network. | 03-13-2014 |
20140071819 | DEVICE AND METHOD FOR ADAPTIVE RATE MULTIMEDIA COMMUNICATIONS ON A WIRELESS NETWORK - Methods, apparatus, and computer readable media determine a transmission rate. In some aspects, a method includes determining, via an electronic device, an amount of data buffered in a network, determining a sustainable throughput of the network; and determining a transmission rate based at least in part on the sustainable throughput and the amount of data buffered. | 03-13-2014 |
20140071820 | TRAFFIC OFFLOAD IN A MULTI-ACCESS MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM SUPPORTING NETWORK-BASED IP MOBILITY - In an embodiment, there is provided a method for traffic offload in a multi-access mobile communication system supporting network-based IP mobility, said method comprising:
| 03-13-2014 |
20140071821 | FAST ACCESS AND CONTROL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - A wireless local area network comprises an access point and at least one wireless device. The access point indicates in a downlink transmission whether access to the network is based on active scan or polling. The indication is changeable responsive to whether a beacon transmission time is approaching, whether a new scan is to be forced or whether network traffic is about to reach an overload condition. | 03-13-2014 |
20140078896 | LOAD SHARING IN MULTI-ACCESS SYSTEMS - In a multi-access system, an access selection principle is achieved by selecting a signal strength threshold level ( | 03-20-2014 |
20140078897 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL DEVICE, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless communication system includes an RNC and a BTS which communicates with the RNC. A congestion-notification transmitting unit of the BTS notifies the RNC of occurrence of congestion in a sector in which a mobile station is located. The RNC includes a congestion-notification receiving unit, a retransmission-ratio monitoring unit, and a transmission-rate control unit. The congestion-notification receiving unit detects the congestion occurrence by the notification from the BTS. The retransmission-ratio monitoring unit monitors a ratio of retransmission of a packet to the mobile station. The transmission-rate control unit performs control of changing a transmission rate of a packet to the mobile station according to the retransmission ratio when the congestion occurrence has been detected by the congestion-notification receiving unit. | 03-20-2014 |
20140078898 | HANDING OFF BETWEEN NETWORKS WITH DIFFERENT RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGIES DURING A COMMUNICATION SESSION THAT IS ALLOCATED QUALITY OF SERVICE - In an embodiment, a UE performs an IRAT handoff from a source network with a first RAT to a target network with a second RAT, and obtains a channel from the target network. The UE reports a level of QoS on the channel to a server via the target network. The server issues instructions to the UE and/or the target network for modifying the level of QoS in response to the report based on if the level of QoS is insufficient to support a particular type of communication session. In another embodiment, in conjunction with an IRAT handoff, the source network sends a handoff preparation message to the target network to facilitate the target network to initiate setup of a set of channels with a non-IMS application-specific QoS configuration for the UE on the target network in conjunction with the handoff. | 03-20-2014 |
20140078899 | POLICY AND CHARGING CONTROL FOR MUTIPLE SUB-FLOWS - A policy control method, a related device and a policy and charging control system in a mobile communication system. The policy control method includes: obtaining description information of two or more sub-flows, wherein the two or more sub-flows belong to a same application; respectively generating policy and charging control PCC rules for the two or more sub-flows according to the description information of the two or more sub-flows; and transmitting at least one generated PCC rule to a PCEF entity or a bearing binding and event report function BBERF entity, so as to perform policy control for the sub-flows by the PCEF entity or the BBERF entity. With the method, device and system according to embodiments of the present invention, a network side entity of the 3GPP network learns that the same application includes multiple sub-flows, and learns the description information of each sub-flow. | 03-20-2014 |
20140078900 | System and Method for Reducing the Data Packet Loss Employing Adaptive Transmit Queue Length - The present invention provides a system and method for reduction of data packet loss for the multiple network interfaces. Particularly, the invention provides a cross layer system for reduction of data packet loss based on dynamic analysis of network conditions. Further, the invention provides a system and method of estimation of network condition and adapting the transmit queue of the multiple interfaces according to channel condition/available bandwidth of the associated network. | 03-20-2014 |
20140086049 | CAPACITY ALLOCATION IN COMMUNICATIONS - A capacity allocation method comprises receiving ( | 03-27-2014 |
20140092732 | ANTI-STARVATION AND BOUNCE-REDUCTION MECHANISM FOR A TWO-DIMENSIONAL BUFFERLESS INTERCONNECT - A slot reservation method is disclosed. The slot reservation method generates slot reservations in two dimensions to address starvation and to reduce bounce of messages transmitted through an interconnect. An interconnect implemented using the slot reservation method is capable of being scaled to larger network-on-chip implementations. | 04-03-2014 |
20140092733 | Methods of UE Indicating Traffic-Related Information to Network - A method of user equipment (UE) indication of traffic-related information to network is provided. The method comprises a UE determining a traffic indicator and transmitting the traffic indicator to a base station. In one embodiment, the traffic indicator indicates either that default power consumption is preferred or low power consumption is preferred. For example, when the UE is in background traffic or sparse traffic, low power consumption is preferred. In another embodiment, the traffic indicator indicates a time pattern of the traffic history. From the network perspective, upon receiving and evaluating information contained in the traffic indicator, the network triggers a QoS modification procedure by applying one or more QoS modification algorithms. | 04-03-2014 |
20140092734 | NETWORK-CONTROLLED ADAPTIVE TERMINAL BEHAVIOR MANAGING HIGH-NETWORK-LOAD SCENARIOS - A network device may detect a high traffic load for a wireless access network associated with the network device, and broadcast, to mobile terminals in the wireless access network associated with the network device, a signaling message indicating the high traffic load. The signaling message causes a mobile terminal to selectively limit wireless network access requests to the network device. | 04-03-2014 |
20140092735 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING CONGESTION IN VEHICULAR COMMUNICATION - An apparatus and method for controlling congestion in a vehicular communication, capable of preventing the network throughput from being lowered due to increase in the number of vehicles, the method including: determining whether a communication channel is in a congestion condition as a message to be transmitted exists; and if determined as the congestion condition, transmitting a message in a transmission section that is determined within a time frame based on a current position. | 04-03-2014 |
20140092736 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR RADIO SERVICE OPTIMIZATION USING ACTIVE PROBING OVER TRANSPORT NETWORKS - A method and system for determining quality and capacity of a transport monitoring connection between radio service nodes to facilitate local management of subscriber connections are disclosed. One method includes sending first test packets from a first radio service node to a second radio service node via the transport monitoring connection. Second test packets are received from the second radio service node. The second test packets have information added to the first test packets by the second radio service node. The second test packets are analyzed to determine a quality and a bandwidth of the transport monitoring connection. Control and user plane functions are informed when transport monitoring performance is one of degraded and improved based on the quality and bandwidth. The method includes making radio service provisioning decisions based on the quality and bandwidth of the transport monitoring connection. | 04-03-2014 |
20140098662 | TRANSPARENT PROVISIONING OF SERVICES OVER A NETWORK - An apparatus and method for enhancing the infrastructure of a network such as the Internet is disclosed. A packet interceptor/processor apparatus is coupled with the network so as to be able to intercept and process packets flowing over the network. Further, the apparatus provides external connectivity to other devices that wish to intercept packets as well. The apparatus applies one or more rules to the intercepted packets which execute one or more functions on a dynamically specified portion of the packet and take one or more actions with the packets. The apparatus is capable of analyzing any portion of the packet including the header and payload. Actions include releasing the packet unmodified, deleting the packet, modifying the packet, logging/storing information about the packet or forwarding the packet to an external device for subsequent processing. Further, the rules may be dynamically modified by the external devices. | 04-10-2014 |
20140098663 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR RADIO RESOURCE ALLOCATION - The present technology provides a computer-implemented method and system for performing frequency selective scheduling between a user equipment (UE) and a base station. The UE selects a sub-band within a predetermined system bandwidth based on observed radio conditions. The UE then communicates the selected sub-band to the base station. The base station then selects a LTE resource block having a frequency range falling within the sub-band. The selected resource block is then used for communication between the base station and the UE. The process may be repeated at a frequency related to the channel coherence. | 04-10-2014 |
20140098664 | TERMINAL APPARATUS FOR TRANSFERRING SIGNAL CONTAINING PREDETERMINED INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A first communication unit receives packet signals broadcast from a base station apparatus and also receives packet signals broadcast from other terminal apparatuses according to a first communication scheme. A second communication unit communicates with a mobile apparatus according to a second communication scheme that differs from the first communication scheme. A receiving unit receives a filtering condition from the mobile apparatus by way of the second communication unit. A filtering unit selects a packet signal, which matches the filtering condition, from among the packet signals received by the first communication unit. A transfer unit transfers information, contained in the selected packet signal selected, from the second communication unit to the mobile apparatus. | 04-10-2014 |
20140098665 | SIGNALING TO APPLICATION LACK OF REQUESTED BANDWIDTH - A system for signaling an application when a requested data rate and Quality of Service cannot be achieved using OFDM wireless data transmission, and the application proceeds by either renegotiating QoS and data rate, or waiting until they requested rate and QoS are met. | 04-10-2014 |
20140098666 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR OPTIMAL LOAD BALANCING IN A HYBRID WIRED/WIRELESS NETWORK - Aspects of the invention may provide a system and method for load balancing in a hybrid wired/wireless local area network. A method for load balancing in a hybrid wired/wireless local area network may include the step of receiving a polling message from an access device by at least one of a plurality of access points. In response to the polling message, a load on one or more of the access points may be determined and the determined load of one or more of the access points may be received by the access device. One or more of the access points located within an operating range of the access device may interpret the polling message. An access point having a least load may be selected by an access device to provide service. | 04-10-2014 |
20140098667 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RANGING TRANSMISSION BY MOBILE STATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed is a ranging transmission method comprising: a mobile station receiving a message including backoff window information from a base station; and the mobile station performing ranging transmission on the basis of the backoff window information, wherein the backoff window information comprises information indicating a size K | 04-10-2014 |
20140105004 | Hardware-Based Granular Traffic Storm Protection - Aspects of the present invention provide a device, method and system which utilize hardware-based granular evaluation of industrial control protocol packets to withstand traffic storms. In an embodiment, packet evaluation circuitry coupled to a port may be adapted to evaluate one or more protocol fields contained in each inbound packet before switching circuitry can send the inbound packet to the proper destination. The inbound packet may be sent by the switching circuitry if it is a particular message, or may be selectively inhibited from being sent by the switching circuitry if the inbound packet does not contain the particular message for being sent and if the total number of bytes of the inbound packet type exceeds a threshold for the outbound port during a given period of time. As such, critical industrial applications may continue to operate in the presence of a traffic storm. | 04-17-2014 |
20140105005 | PERFORMING VALUE AND CONTEXT AWARE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORKING - An aspect of this invention is a computer-executable method for distributing one or more features associated with information to be transported by a communications network that includes a plurality of end nodes interconnected via a plurality of network nodes. The method includes receiving one or more features associated with information to be transported by the communications network, wherein the one or more features are specified at an end node of the plurality of end nodes for receipt by a network node of the plurality of network nodes; responsive to the one or more received features, configuring at least a portion of the communications network to perform actions on information based upon the features; receiving the information using the plurality of network nodes; and based at least on the received features and the configuring, performing one or more actions with the information. Illustratively, the one or more actions comprise sending the information to one or more edge entity nodes in accordance with the configuring and the received features. | 04-17-2014 |
20140105006 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SESSION ADMISSION CONTROL IN BROADBAND WIRELESS NETWORK - A method and system for providing session admission control for a new session in a broadband wireless network is provided. The method may include obtaining a guaranteed bit rate and a first quality of service class indicator for the new session. The method may further include calculating an available capacity using the guaranteed bit rate and determining whether the available capacity is a negative or a positive value. The new session may be admitted or rejected based on whether the available capacity is a negative or positive value. | 04-17-2014 |
20140105007 | Method and Device for Mobile Data Offload - Embodiments provide a mobile data offload method for associating a mobile client device with a wireless access point. The method may include transmitting a first authentication request from the mobile client device to the wireless access point via a first network being a Cellular Wide Area radio communication network; transmitting a second authentication request from the mobile client device to the wireless access point via a second network being a Short Range radio communication network or a Metropolitan Area System radio communication network; transmitting an authentication response from the wireless access point to the mobile client device via the second network upon receiving at least one of the first authentication request and the second authentication request at the wireless access point, and associating the mobile client device with the wireless access point upon receiving the authentication response at the mobile client device. | 04-17-2014 |
20140105008 | Affiliation of Mobile Stations and Protected Access Points - A solution for accessing a network is provided. Particularly, an embodiment of the invention provides for operating a wireless network access point providing an access to a network over a wireless connection, the access point being protected for limiting the access to the network to entitled users. A request to access the network is received from a mobile station. An entitlement of the mobile station to access the network through the access point is verified. An affiliation of the mobile station to an affiliation group of the access point is verified when the mobile station is not entitled, the affiliation group comprising a plurality of access points and a plurality of mobile stations. The access to the network is granted when the mobile station is affiliated, and the access to the network is denied when the mobile station is not affiliated. | 04-17-2014 |
20140105009 | Method And System For Wireless Communication with Machine-To-Machine Devices - Approaches for managing machine-to-machine (M2M) wireless devices are disclosed. M2M wireless devices may be configured to utilize service classes in order to implement network access policy control. Packets generated by an application running on the wireless device are inspected, for example using Deep Packet Inspection (DPI). Service class may be assigned based on patent contents such as payload, transport-layer criteria, or communication protocol in use. Service class assignment proceeds according to a rule set which may be remotely configurable. Packets may be buffered and their transmission may be deferred pending service class assignment. Spoofing of the intended recipient and/or the application may be performed while the packets are buffered and/or inspected. | 04-17-2014 |
20140105010 | Communications Method, Wireless User Equipment, and Access Network Device - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a communications method. A message carries priority information and/or data transmission connection behavior information. The data transmission connection behavior information includes a service type and/or a data packet interval. A priority control is performed according to the priority information. Alternatively, or in addition, connection management is performed according to the data transmission connection behavior information. | 04-17-2014 |
20140105011 | METHODS, APPARATUS, A SYSTEM, AND A RELATED COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR ACTIVATION AND DEACTIVATION OF BEARERS - Methods, apparatuses, system and computer program product for activation and/or deactivation of bearers for a group of devices are disclosed. The method comprises receiving an attach request for a device belonging to a group of devices, obtaining an identity of the group of devices, allocating a first bearer identity for the group of devices, and sending the identity of the group and the first bearer identity to a first network element, wherein the first network element is involved in transmission of user data of the group of devices. | 04-17-2014 |
20140105012 | Dynamic Assignment of Traffic Classes to a Priority Queue in a Packet Forwarding Device - Responsive to detecting that bandwidth consumption of a packet flow has exceeded a threshold, packet forwarding treatment is changed in accordance with at least one class of packet flow from a first packet forwarding treatment to a second packet forwarding treatment. | 04-17-2014 |
20140105013 | USER EQUIPMENT, BASE STATION, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, AND RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A user equipment includes radio communication unit that performs radio communication with a base station over a communication channel formed by aggregating a plurality of component carriers. The user equipment has a measurement unit that measures a channel quality of the communication channel, and a controller that creates a measurement report using a result of the measurement and sends the measurement report to the base station. Each data signal transmitted over the communication channel is classified into any of two or more classes depending on a QoS requirement thereof. The radio communication unit receives control information related to a mapping between each of the plurality of component carriers and the class of each data signal from the base station, and the controller controls at least one of the measurement and the sending of the measurement report, according to a procedure which varies depending on the control information. A base station performs associated functions, according to a communication method involving allocation of data to component carriers based at least in part on channel quality criteria for different data classifications. | 04-17-2014 |
20140105014 | Method and System for Extended Reach Copper Transceiver - Aspects of a method and system for an extended range copper transceiver are provided. Reducing the communication rate provided by multi-rate physical (PHY) layer operations in an Ethernet transceiver may extend the range of the Ethernet transceiver over twisted-pair copper cabling from a standard connection length. The Ethernet transceiver may support up to 1 Gbps or up to 10 Gbps transmission rate over copper cabling. The multi-rate PHY layer architecture in the Ethernet transceiver may support signal-processing operations, such as echo cancellation and/or equalization, which may be applied to the reduced communication rate to enable range extension. The reduced communication rate may be achieved by reducing the symbol rate provided by the multi-rate PHY layer operations. Reducing the communication rate may also enable utilizing greater insertion loss cabling for a standard connection length. | 04-17-2014 |
20140112127 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR UPLINK CHANNEL CAPACITY ESTIMATION AND TRANSMISSION CONTROL - Aspects of the present disclosure relate generally to wireless communication systems, and more particularly, to estimation of an uplink channel capacity. In an aspect, provided is a method of wireless communication, which may include determining whether a current transmit time interval (TTI) is relevant for computing the uplink channel capacity estimate, determining the transmission type of the current TTI where the current TTI is relevant, determining whether data is transmitted during the current TTI, computing a data capacity value based on at least one upload channel parameter, summing the data capacity values of TTIs from a window length start TTI to the current TTI to generate a data capacity sum, computing the uplink channel capacity estimate as a ratio of the data capacity sum to a total time period of all relevant TTIs during a window length interval, and accordingly adjusting a transmission rate of output traffic. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112128 | OVERSUBSCRIPTION BUFFER MANAGEMENT - Various methods and systems are provided for oversubscription buffer management. In one embodiment, among others, a method for oversubscription control determines a utilization level of an oversubscription buffer that is common to a plurality of ingress ports and initiates adjustment of an ingress packet rate of the oversubscription buffer in response to the utilization level. In another embodiment, a method determines an occupancy level of a virtual oversubscription buffer associated with an oversubscription buffer and initiates adjustment of an ingress packet rate in response to the occupancy level. In another embodiment, a rack switch includes an oversubscription buffer configured to receive packets from a plurality of ingress ports and provide the received packets for processing by the rack switch and a packet flow control configured to monitor an occupancy level of the oversubscription buffer and to initiate adjustment of an ingress packet rate in response to the occupancy level. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112129 | TRAFFIC CONTROLLING METHOD AND DEVICE BASED ON REMOTE APPLICATION - The present disclosure provides a traffic controlling method based on remote applications, comprising the following steps: evaluating a current network bandwidth; detecting a bitmap updating frequency of each area in a current screen, identifying a multimedia area, and judging whether the multimedia area is valid or not to obtain a judging result; and controlling data traffic according to the current network bandwidth and the judging result. By evaluating the current network bandwidth, detecting the updating frequency of each area in the current screen and identifying whether the multimedia area is valid, and dynamically controlling the data traffic according to the current network bandwidth and according to whether the multimedia area is valid, the present disclosure is capable of ensuring the unblocked transmission of the critical business and preventing the display quality of the multimedia area from being affected to improve the system performance and the user experience. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112130 | METHOD FOR SETTING PACKET FORWARDING RULE AND CONTROL APPARATUS USING THE METHOD - In a network including a plurality of switches, different priority levels are assigned to different services based on a frequently requested service list provided from an end system including an end host and a server, and a forwarding rule containing path information for forwarding data packets is selectively set according to the priority levels. A first forwarding rule set for a service of the first priority level is loaded to corresponding ones of the plurality of switches. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112131 | SWITCH, COMPUTER SYSTEM USING SAME, AND PACKET FORWARDING CONTROL METHOD - Provided are a PCIe switch provided with a bandwidth control function, and a computer system using the same. The PCIe switch has: input ports to which are connected initiators that generate packets; output ports to which are connected targets that are the transmission destinations of the packets; and an output port adjustment section intervening between the input ports and the output ports, for adjusting the output of packets from the input ports to the output ports. The input ports further have a bandwidth control section that establishes bandwidth limit values beforehand for each of a plurality of divided groups; classifies packets transmitted from the initiators into any of the plurality of groups according to a predetermined rule; and outputs the classified packets to the output adjustment section, on the basis of the bandwidth limit values. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112132 | Methods and Apparatus for Providing Distributed Load Balancing of Subscriber Sessions in a Multi-slot Gateway - A method and apparatus for providing load balancing of subscriber session in a multi-slot gateway employing utilization counts are disclosed. A process of load balancing is configured to increase the session count when a subscription or subscriber session is created in a line card coupled with an active slot. The utilization count associated with the active slot is incremented when the value of session count reaches a predefined session value such as 100,000. After updating an active slot table associated with the active slot in accordance with slot numbers and utilization counts, the content of active slot table is copied to another active slot table associated with a second active slot. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112133 | METHOD FOR PROVIDING SERVICES, SERVICE BROKER, AND POLICY AND CHARGING RULES FUNCTION APPARATUS - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a method for providing a service, a service broker, and a policy and charging rules function apparatus. The method includes: receiving a service request; determining, according to the service request, at least one AF associated with the service; determining QoS requirement information of each AF; sending a QoS authorization request to a PCRF, where the QoS authorization request carries the QoS requirement information of each AF; receiving an authorization success answer sent by the PCRF so as to provide the service through the at least one AF, where the authorization success answer carries authorization to the QoS requirement information of each AF. According to the method and the apparatus in the embodiments of the present invention, QoS requests are controlled by using an SB in centralized mode so that the development and operation costs can be reduced. | 04-24-2014 |
20140119178 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR SAMOG BEARER MANAGEMENT - Systems, methods, and devices for accessing a service of a wireless carrier network through a wireless local area network (WLAN) are described. A method includes selecting one or more traffic management parameters associated with the WLAN based at least in part on one or more quality of service (QoS) parameters associated with the service of the wireless carrier network being accessed. The method further includes transmitting packets over the WLAN using the selected one or more traffic management parameters associated with the WLAN when a user equipment accesses the service of the wireless carrier network through the WLAN. The user equipment enforces the selected one or more traffic management parameters for communications to the wireless carrier network. An access point enforces the selected one or more traffic management parameters for communications to the user equipment. | 05-01-2014 |
20140119179 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR VOIP TRAFFIC FLOW IDENTIFICATION - A data exchange device that identifies VoIP traffic flow. When a type of data flow is received by the data exchange device, the data exchange device determines whether the type of data flow is bidirectional traffic flow. If the type of data flow is bidirectional traffic flow, the data exchange calculates a first data size of downstream data of the type of data flow and a second data size of upstream data of the type of data flow. Then, the data exchange device identifies whether the type of data flow is the VoIP traffic flow according to the first data size and the second data size. If the type of data flow is the VoIP traffic flow, the type of data flow is processed according to a high priority. | 05-01-2014 |
20140119180 | FLOW STATE AWARE MANAGEMENT OF QoS WITH A DISTRIBUTED CLASSIFIER - Packet network node and method of operating packet network node. Conventional packet network nodes react to congestion in packet network by dropping packets in a manner which is perceived by users to be indiscriminate. In the described system, indiscriminate packet discards are prevented by causing packets to be discarded on lower priority flows and flow aggregates. Further action is taken to reduce the likelihood of packet discards through: (1) classification of flows that are not observable at the point in the network where flow-based packet discards are deployed, but are consuming bandwidth and signaling classification information to flow-based packet discard function or a flow-based monitoring function or network management function; (2) classification of flows making use of extended monitoring functions that are not co-located with a flow-based packet discard function, where extended monitoring functions may perform monitoring of a flow or a group of flows over a period of time. | 05-01-2014 |
20140126357 | ECN-ENABLED MULTICAST PROTOCOL FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS UNDER BLOCKAGE - A system and method are provided for implementing performance improvements in a multicast protocol for networks that support incipient congestion indications via packet marking in instances of packet loss in the network during time-correlated blockages by providing indications in the physical (PHY) layer. A receiver rate calculation is adjusted so that a loss due to blockage is ignored completely and only packets marked using an Explicit Congestion Notification (ECN) packet marking protocol are treated as losses. Receiver rates are modified based on ECN principles to ignore losses. A NORM receiver rate equation may remain substantially unchanged while a sender is enabled to keep sending at a higher data rate, even in instances of blockage in support of higher system throughputs without defining a completely new receiver rate equation. Time-correlated blockages are not treated as losses. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126358 | Mobile Backhaul Dynamic QoS Bandwidth Harmonization - An embodiment includes determining estimate(s) of bandwidth for class(es) of quality of service to be implemented in base station(s) for service(s) provided to user equipment by the base station(s), determining expiration time(s) for corresponding ones of the estimate(s) of bandwidth, and communicating indications of the same toward mobile backhaul node(s). At a backhaul node, the indications are received and, based on the received indications, downstream bandwidth is modified for user equipment of different quality of service classes, wherein the downstream bandwidth passes through the mobile backhaul node toward the base station(s). Apparatus, software, and computer program produces are also disclosed. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126359 | Selecting Transmission Parameters for Downlink Transmissions Based on Retransmission Rates - A supporting node maintains a retransmission database that stores information about the historical retransmission rates of user terminals served by the network. The supporting network node provides the information about the retransmission rates of the user terminals to the base stations that are serving the user terminals. When a user terminal is being scheduled to receive a downlink transmission, the scheduler at the base station may use historical retransmission rates of the user terminal to select transmission parameters, e.g. modulation and coding scheme (MCS) and/or transport block (TBS), for the downlink transmission. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126360 | System and Method for WiFi Offload - Embodiments are provided for enabling WiFi offload by integrating the WiFi and cellular networks operations at a radio access network level. The embodiments include a WiFi network component configured to determine whether to send over a cellular air interface a packet designated for WiFi according to a predefined rule. If the rule is met, the WiFi network component sends the packet to a cellular network component over the cellular air interface. The cellular network component is configured to process the received packet for cellular transmission, and transmit the packet using the cellular air interface to a receiver device. The predefined rule comprises at least one of sending the packet using the cellular air interface if the packet belongs to a predefined packet type, if the packet has a size below a predefined threshold size, and if the nature of the destination address for the packet is a broadcast address. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126361 | CONGESTION CONTROL METHODS FOR DUAL PRIORITY DEVICES AND APPARATUSES USING THE SAME - A mobile communication device configured for dual priority is provided with a wireless module and a controller module. The wireless module performs wireless transmission and reception to and from a service network. The controller module starts an SM congestion control back-off timer for an APN in response to an SM procedure being rejected by the service network, which was initiated for the APN with a first low priority indicator indicating that the mobile communication device was configured for NAS signaling low priority. The controller module does not stop the SM congestion control back-off timer for the APN in response to a second SM procedure being initiated by the service network for the APN and being related to an existed PDP context previously requested by the mobile communication device with a second low priority indicator indicating that the mobile communication device was not configured for NAS signaling low priority. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126362 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND BASE STATION DEVICE - In a wireless base station device, a PDCP buffer unit temporarily stores data sent from a core network device for the purpose of sending the data to a mobile station device. A data measurement unit measures the volume of data stored in a PDCP buffer unit. On the basis of a measurement value of the data volume measured by the data measurement unit, the congestion state determination unit determines whether or not the PDCP buffer unit is in a congestion state. In the core network device, a sending data storage unit stores data to be sent to the wireless base station device. On the basis of a result of the determination by the congestion state determination unit, a transmission/reception unit sends the data stored in the sending data storage unit to the wireless base station device. In this way, loss of data communicated between the communication devices is reduced. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126363 | METHOD FOR ENSURING UPLINK QUALITY OF SERVICE, BASE STATION AND USER EQUIPMENT - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method for ensuring uplink quality of service, a base station and a user equipment. The method for ensuring the uplink quality of service includes: receiving a downlink service data flow, where the downlink service data flow carries an uplink transmission control identifier; and controlling, based on the uplink transmission control identifier, a transmission of a service type's uplink data for which an uplink transmission control needs to be performed in an uplink radio bearer, so as to reduce a transmission rate of the service type's uplink data. Through the technical solution provided by embodiments of the present invention, data is recognized in a dedicated radio bearer and controlled when a centralized scheduling is adopted for uplink resources, thereby ensuring the uplink quality of service. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126364 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR PRIORITIZING AND SCHEDULING PACKETS IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Systems and methods provide a parameterized scheduling system that incorporates end-user application awareness and can be used with scheduling groups that contain data streams from heterogeneous applications. Individual data queues within a scheduling group can be created based on application class, specific application, individual data streams or some combination thereof. Application information and Application Factors (AF) are used to modify scheduler parameters such as weights and credits to differentiate between data streams assigned to a scheduling group. Dynamic AF settings may adjust relative importance of user applications to maximize user Quality of Experience (QoE) in response to recurring network patterns, one-time events, application characteristics, protocol characteristics, device characteristics, service level agreements, or combinations thereof. Scheduling parameters may be dynamic and incorporate the notions of “duration neglect” and “recency effect” in an end-user's perception of video quality in order to optimally manage video traffic during periods of congestion. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126365 | DYNAMIC, ASYMMETRIC RINGS - Dynamic, asymmetric rings and related communication equipment and methods are disclosed. Various features may be implemented to provide any or all of several degrees of freedom for managing resources in a communication network. Communication rates may be optimized on a node-to-node basis or overall on a network level. Different rates may be configured and possibly dynamically adjusted between different nodes, and/or for different directions of traffic transfer. Bandwidth can be dynamically allocated along a string of the communication nodes in a ring or linear topology in some embodiments. Direction of traffic transfer represents an additional possible degree of freedom in a ring topology, in that traffic can be transferred in either direction in a ring, such as the direction of least delay. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126366 | QUALITY OF SERVICE MECHANISM - A system comprises a subscriber station and a network, the network comprising an access service network and connectivity service network. In an improved communication method an access service network a quality of service profile for a subscriber is received by an anchor gateway of the subscriber. On the basis of the quality of service profile, a first set of transmission control parameters for the subscriber is determined. The anchor gateway applies the first set of transmission control parameters to user data packets addressed to the subscriber. | 05-08-2014 |
20140133294 | Methods and Systems for Broadcasting Load Information to Enable a User Equipment (UE) to Select Different Network Access - Methods and apparatus for offloading traffic from a first RAT network (e.g., WWAN) to a second RAT network (e.g., WLAN) are described. In some cases, the first RAT network may broadcast an indication of a level of preference for offloading traffic for one or more application types to the first or second RAT network. A UE may determine which RAT network to use for transmitting data based on this indication and current system conditions (e.g., relative loading of the first and second RAT networks). | 05-15-2014 |
20140133295 | Method for transmitting data packets between two communication modules and communication module for transmitting data packets, as well as communication module for receiving data packets - A method for transmitting data packets between two communication modules via a transmission medium interconnecting the two modules. To transmit a high-priority data packet in real time via the transmission medium, without causing erroneous transmissions of other packets, it is provided that, for an ongoing transmission of a first data packet, a transmitting communication module embeds a second data packet, which is to be sent urgently, directly into the ongoing first packet, buffers a remainder (not transmitted yet) of the first packet and transmits the remainder of the first packet after transmitting the second packet, and a receiving communication module buffers a beginning of a received first packet, receives the second packet and forwards it for further processing, and receives the remainder of the first packet after receiving the second packet, connects it with the buffered beginning of the first packet, and forwards the complete first packet for further processing. | 05-15-2014 |
20140133296 | MANAGING COMMUNICATIONS WITHIN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A wireless communications network for communicating with wireless communications devices, the wireless communications network comprising a processor arranged to: measure congestion for each wireless communication link between a plurality of the wireless communications devices and the wireless communications network; and prioritize scheduling of communications with the plurality of wireless communications devices dependent upon the measured congestion. | 05-15-2014 |
20140133297 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR WIRELESS NETWORK OFFLOADING - A method comprising obtaining, by a server, wireless-network performance data from a plurality of end user devices; generating, by the server, a prioritized network list from the wireless-network performance data; and provisioning, by the server, the prioritized network list to an end user device comprising a radio interface for receiving the prioritized network list from the server, the radio interface being identified to receive the prioritized network list based on a characteristic associated with the end user device; a radio configured to identify available wireless networks, the available wireless networks being different than a current wireless network to which the end user device is currently connected; a prioritized network selection engine for using the prioritized network list to select one of the available wireless networks; and a network connection engine configured to initiate disconnection from the current wireless network and connection to the selected wireless network. | 05-15-2014 |
20140133298 | Data Offload Method and User Equipment - Embodiments of the present invention provide a data offload method and a user equipment. The data offload method includes receiving offload configuration signaling sent by a base station. The offload configuration signaling indicates to perform wireless network offload configuration. Offload configuration is performed according to the offload configuration signaling and data is offloaded according to the offload configuration. | 05-15-2014 |
20140133299 | METHOD, AND ASSOCIATED APPARATUS, FOR COMMUNICATING DATA AT REDUCED TRANSMISSION LATENCY IN RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM HAVING SLOTTED INTERFACE - Method and associated apparatus for communicating data at reduced transmission latency in a radio communication system having a slotted interface are described. An example network device includes an assignor to receive an indication of an amount of data to be communicated by a first communication station, and assign communication resources to convey all of the indicated data amount, the assigned communication resources comprising a plurality of time slots within one time frame and one radio carrier and a data scheduler to receive an indication of assigned communication resources, and to schedule communication of the data block in conformity with the assigned communication resources and in response to a communication station minimum tuning latency period, wherein the schedule of the communication of the data block provides for completion of the communication of the data block and acknowledgement of successful delivery of the data block within the one time frame. | 05-15-2014 |
20140133300 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING CONGESTION IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - A method is provided in one example embodiment and includes identifying an Internet protocol (IP) address for a serving gateway; establishing a link between the serving gateway and a congestion notification element; monitoring packets in order to identify whether a differentiated services code point (DSCP) bit has been set in the packets; determining that a threshold associated with congestion in a network has been exceeded; and communicating a signal to the serving gateway associated with the congestion. The serving gateway can be configured to correlate the congestion with identifiers associated with end users operating in the network, where the serving gateway communicates a signal to a network element to reduce the congestion. | 05-15-2014 |
20140133301 | SYSTEM, METHOD AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM FOR COMMUNICATING WITH A ZIGBEE DEVICE FROM A PERIPHERAL NETWORK - In order to minimize traffic on a Zigbee network, a gateway of the Zigbee network represents end devices in communications with peripheral networks. The gateway receives messages, such as status request messages, from the peripheral network intended for an end device on the Zigbee network. The Zigbee network generates a response message by retrieving stored data for the end device instead of communicating the received message to the end device. | 05-15-2014 |
20140140207 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR REDUCING LOADS OF MOBILITY MANAGEMENT ENTITY (MME) IN CORE NETWORKS - The present invention provides a system and method for reducing loads of a mobility management entity in core networks. An object sending a connection-request message asking for network access to a base station through a wireless network; the base station receiving the connection-request message and sending it to core networks through a network; a mobility management entity (MME) in the core network receive the connection-request message. If the core network is busy and refuses to interconnect with the object, MME calculating according to a management rule a back-off time; MME transmitting a response message including the back-off time to the object through the base station, and the object sending out a connection-request message again after the back-off time has elapsed according to the response message. | 05-22-2014 |
20140140208 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR BEACON TIMING ADJUSTMENT IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Systems, methods, and devices for communicating in a wireless network are provided. In some aspects, an access point for wireless communication a receiver configured to receive information identifying a beacon timing of a second access point. The access point further includes a processor configured to adjust a beacon timing of the access point based on the received information identifying the beacon timing of the second access point and a transmitter configured to transmit a beacon according to the adjusted beacon timing of the access point. | 05-22-2014 |
20140140209 | BUFFER SIZING FOR MULTI-HOP NETWORKS - A wireless network node can include a wireless network antenna, a processor in communication with the wireless network antenna, and a non-transitory computer readable medium containing computer-executable code. The processor can be configured to calculate an initial buffer size. The processor can be configured to adjust the initial buffer size to a current buffer size based on a current network load. | 05-22-2014 |
20140146665 | REDUCING SIGNALING LOAD ON A MOBILE NETWORK - One or more packets associated with a wakeup event for a mobile user device is/are delayed, thereby extending the duration of the wakeup event. Because the duration of the wakeup event is extended, the start of the next wakeup event for the mobile user device is delayed by a time interval, and therefore the signaling load on the mobile network is reduced during this time interval compared to the signaling load that would have been on the mobile network if the start of the next wakeup event had not been delayed. If the delayed packet(s) is/are data packet(s), then the disclosure presents a solution which involves data to solve a problem relating to signaling. | 05-29-2014 |
20140146666 | DEADLOCK RECOVERY FOR DISTRIBUTED DEVICES - A system for deadlock recovery of distributed devices may include a processor and memory. The processor may transmit packets to a device, receive a pause message indicating that the packet transmission should be paused, and initiate a timer and pause the packet transmission in response to receiving the pause message. The processor may enter a deadlock recovery state if the timer reaches a timeout before a resume message is received that indicates that the packet transmission can resume. The processor may, while in the deadlock recovery state, drop packets that have a packet age that is greater than a threshold, and may exit the deadlock recovery state upon dropping a packet that has a packet age less than the threshold, or upon receiving the resume message. The processor may re-initiate the timer if the resume message has not been received, otherwise the processor may resume the packet transmission. | 05-29-2014 |
20140146667 | MOBILE TERMINAL AND SERVICE PROCESSING METHOD THEREOF, AND BASEBAND PROCESSING CHIP - Disclosed are a mobile terminal and a service processing method thereof, and a baseband processing chip are disclosed in the embodiments of this invention, wherein the service processing method of the mobile terminal comprises: in response to the situation that a first user card in an on-network state is required to process a high real time service, identifying whether PS domain data being received/transmitted in a PS domain service currently processed on a second user card is the critical data for maintaining the QoS level of the PS domain service, wherein the high real time service has higher requirement to real-time than the PS domain service, and the first user card and the second user card belong to the multiple user-cards inserted in the same mobile terminal; in response to the PS domain data being received/transmitted is non-critical data, suspending the processing of the PS domain service and processing the high real time service. Embodiments of this invention allow a multi-card multi-standby mobile terminal based on a single RF single baseband scheme to process a high real time service on other user cards during processing a PS domain service on a user card. | 05-29-2014 |
20140146668 | APPARATUS OF CONTROLLING DATA TRAFFIC IN PACKET BASED MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD THEREOF - An apparatus of controlling a data traffic in a packet based mobile communication system and a method thereof according to the present invention are disclosed. The apparatus of controlling a data traffic in a packet based mobile communication system according to another aspect of the present invention includes an extracting unit configured to, if a message which requests to create a dedicated bearer, extract at least one characteristic parameter included in the received message, a determining unit configured to determine whether the dedicated bearer is set through the load distribution gateway based on the at least one extracted characteristic parameter, an already set regulation or condition; and a creating unit configured to create a message which requests to set the dedicated bearer as a result of the determination. | 05-29-2014 |
20140146669 | CONTENT DELIVERY SYSTEM AND CONTENT DELIVERY METHOD - A plurality of cache servers, connected to a packet forwarding apparatus, forwarding a packet transmitted and received between a storage apparatus that holds a content under management in store and a user terminal, temporarily holds at least part of the content under management in store. A controller decides an on-screen resolution at the terminal, based on information contained in a content request message from the terminal, and selects a cache server that holds a content of the on-screen resolution in store. The controller instructs the selected cache server to deliver the content. The cache server instructed calculates a bit rate based on a signal received from the terminal. The cache server reads content from the terminal, which is to have the on-screen resolution and a bit rate not higher than the calculated bit rate. The content is stored in a packet and transmitted, then delivered without reducing the user's QoE. | 05-29-2014 |
20140146670 | AUTO-COMPRESSION FOR MEDIA OVER IP - The present invention allows communicating devices to control the amount of compression used in packet sessions for transmitting streaming media to and from each other. When a communicating device detects a decrease in performance or quality of service indicative of a limited bandwidth condition, the amount of compression for the current or subsequent sessions is temporarily increased to allow the currently available bandwidth to support the session or subsequent sessions. After a set period of time, or when the limited bandwidth condition is removed, communications associated with the sessions can revert back to transporting uncompressed data or reducing the amount of compression for the sessions, thus using more of the available bandwidth. | 05-29-2014 |
20140146671 | IMPLICIT REJECT RESPONSE - A wireless communication network having received priority access requests on an access channel issues an implicit reject response on a grant channel, such as a flag or other value embedded in an explicit access grant or explicit access reject response. The implicit reject response applies to some or all outstanding low-priority access requests. At the expiration of a terminal's grant channel monitoring window, if it has detected an applicable implicit reject response but not an explicit response, the terminal will refrain from transmitting another access request for a predetermined or configurable duration. The implicit reject response may comprise a flag, or a value that implicitly rejects only a fraction of the outstanding low-priority access requests. The implicit reject response may comprise a duration that the terminal must wait prior to transmitting another access request, and may direct the terminal to directly monitor the grant channel without transmitting a subsequent access request. | 05-29-2014 |
20140153387 | Tuning Congestion Notification for Data Center Networks - A system, method or computer readable medium to provide efficient congestion notification is described herein. In various embodiments, a packet is received at an intermediate node of one or more data center networks. A current queue length at the intermediate node is determined. A threshold value for the current queue length is tuned by dynamically computing an upper bound and a lower bound based at least in part on the network. The packet is marked to indicate possible congestion in the one or more data center networks when the current queue length exceeds the threshold value. In some embodiments, the packet is marked when it is being de-queued. In a further embodiment, Flexible Initial Packet Size (FIPS) may be utilized to improve the efficiency of the tuning. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153388 | RATE LIMIT MANAGERS TO ASSIGN NETWORK TRAFFIC FLOWS - A rate limit manager is to assign network traffic flows to hardware rate limiters. The network traffic flows are associated with rate limit values. The rate limit manager determines threshold values to assign flow(s) to hardware rate limiters, and the rate limit manager is to assign flow(s) to a last remaining unassigned hardware rate limiter independent of the threshold value. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153389 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR AGGREGATING INPUT DATA STREAMS - A method and apparatus aggregate a plurality of input data streams from first processors into one data stream for a second processor, the circuit and the first and second processors being provided on an electronic circuit substrate. The aggregation circuit includes (a) a plurality of ingress data ports, each ingress data port adapted to receive an input data stream from a corresponding first processor, each input data stream formed of ingress data packets, each ingress data packet including priority factors coded therein, (b) an aggregation module coupled to the ingress data ports, adapted to analyze and combine the plurality of input data steams into one aggregated data stream in response to the priority factors, (c) a memory coupled to the aggregation module, adapted to store analyzed data packets, and (d) an output data port coupled to the aggregation module, adapted to output the aggregated data stream to the second processor. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153390 | ENHANCED LOCAL ACCESS IN MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS - A hybrid user equipment and advanced user equipment data offloading architecture is provided. In this hybrid architecture, the advanced user equipment includes a backhaul link to a telecommunication network and/or the Internet. The user equipment can send and receive data through the advanced user equipment using the backhaul link. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153391 | Method for Policy Control and Method for Bearer Control as Well as Corresponding Servers, Systems and Computer Programs - The present invention relates to a method for policy control carried out by a node including a policy and charging rules function and a method for bearer control carried out by a node including a bearer binding function as well as to a server configured for implementing a policy and charging rules function and a server configured for implementing a bearer binding function, to a system including these servers and functions, and to computer programs comprising instructions configured, when executed on a server, to cause the server to carry out policy control or bearer control. The method for policy control carried out by a node comprises the steps of creating a policy provision including an inactivity period indicator indicating a period allowing a service data flow to be inactive; and providing the policy provision including the inactivity period indicator to be installed in a bearer control element to determine at least one of a bearer establishment, modification and deactivation according to the policy provision including the inactivity period indicator. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153392 | APPLICATION QUALITY MANAGEMENT IN A COOPERATIVE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An application manager node in a communication network, including a transceiver module configured to monitor data communication in the communication network, and a processor coupled to the transceiver and configured to receive, from at least one terminal node, application information related to at least one application data stream associated with at least one application operating in the at least one terminal node, update, based on the application information, a relationship map that includes a relationship between each of the at least one application data stream and an access node, determine an overall quality metric value associated with the access node based at least in part on the application information received from one or more of the at least one terminal node, and select, based on the overall quality metric value, at least one mitigation option for one or more of the at least one application data stream. | 06-05-2014 |
20140160923 | Method and System for Managing Quality of Service Policies - A method includes receiving an indication relating to an invocation of an application by a mobile device; determining, in response to the indication, a quality of service based on a provisioning parameter; and instructing a network element of a communications network to manage traffic relating to the application based on the quality of service and a loading condition in the communications network. | 06-12-2014 |
20140169162 | METHOD AND SYSTEM TO MANAGE REAL-TIME AND NON-REAL-TIME DATA TRANSMISSION OVER A SHARED LINK WITH AN IMD - A medical telemetry system and method are provided for communication between an implantable medical device (IMD) and an external device (ExD). The method and system collects real-time (RT) data and non-real-time (NRT) data. The method and system segment the RT data into RT packets and the NRT data into NRT packets and load the RT and NRT packets into a shared transmit buffer in the IMD in accordance with RT and NRT bandwidth allocations and/or packet size. The method and system transmit the RT and NRT packets from the IMD to the ExD in an order loaded in the transmit buffer and adjust at least one of the RT and NRT bandwidth allocations and/or packet size based on a quality of service (QoS) characteristic. | 06-19-2014 |
20140169163 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR COMMUNICATION CHANNEL CAPACITY CHANGE DETECTION - Systems and methods for communication channel capacity detection are provided. One method includes monitoring a bandwidth over time of a channel communicatively coupling a plurality of medical devices at a first location with a second location remote from the first location and determining when a channel bandwidth of the channel exceeds a defined threshold value using the monitored bandwidth. The method also includes transmitting control signals from the second location to the plurality of devices at the first location to adjust a transmission rate of medical data from the plurality of medical devices to the second location and limiting a rate of transmission of the control signals to the plurality of medical devices based on a probability that the transmission of the control signals causes the channel bandwidth to exceed the defined threshold value. | 06-19-2014 |
20140169164 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND RECORDING MEDIUM - A communication device includes a memory configured to store a program, and a processor, based on the program, configured to control a number of communication segments that are allowed to be continuously transmitted after a first communication segment to be transmitted in accordance with a number of acknowledgments that have been received, and set a communication segment length of the first communication segment based on a length of time before completion of reception of an acknowledgment for a transmitted second communication segment. | 06-19-2014 |
20140169165 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR CONTROLLING DSP CHANNELS - Described is a method for channel management on one or more digital signal processors. The method distinguishes itself by the fact that channel management occurs at any time based on a current load utilization of each digital signal processor, taking into account an actual load requirement of each channel and a maximum total performance capacity of each digital signal processor. The invention also relates to a device for carrying out the method. | 06-19-2014 |
20140177436 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MULTIMEDIA BROADCAST MULTICAST SERVICE - A method and apparatus for assigning Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service (E-MBMS) bearers in at least two Multimedia Broadcast Single Frequency Network (MBSFN) areas in a 3GPP compliant wireless communication system is provided. An infrastructure device receives identifiers of a primary preferred MBSFN area and a secondary preferred MBSFN area from a User Equipment (UE). The infrastructure device assigns a first E-MBMS bearer in a first MBSFN and a second E-MBMS bearer in a second MBSFN, to support a call to the UE, the first and second E-MBMS bearers providing the same media transmission to the UE as part of a group call. The infrastructure device may receive an attribute parameter comprising a request for Make Before Break service or a request for a boost to coverage, from the UE. | 06-26-2014 |
20140177437 | METHOD AND APPARATUS MULTIMEDIA BROADCAST/MULTICAST SERVICE COVERAGE BOOST - A method of assigning Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service (E-MBMS) bearers in a Multimedia Broadcast Single Frequency Network (MBSFN) area in a 3GPP compliant wireless communication system is provided. An infrastructure device is operably coupled to a radio access network comprising one or more MBSFN areas, wherein each MBSFN area supports a plurality of E-MBMS bearers for transporting media streams to user equipments (UE). The infrastructure device receives, from a UE, an identifier of a preferred MBSFN area and a request for a boost to the quality of the transmissions. The infrastructure device assigns first and second E-MBMS bearers in an MBSFN area to support a call to the UE, the first and second E-MBMS bearers providing the same information to the UE in their media content streams. The UE may employ application layer time-diversity reception of the media content. | 06-26-2014 |
20140177438 | Cell processing method and device for switch fabric chip - A cell processing method and device for a Switch Fabric (SF) chip are disclosed, which belong to the field of communications. The SF chip includes a unicast route table, which is multiplexed in two working modes and is looked up according to a unicast cell, and a multicast route table, which is multiplexed in the two working modes and is looked up according to a multicast cell. The cell processing method for an SF chip includes: the SF chip receives a cell and an input link number corresponding to the cell from an upstream apparatus and extracts a destination Identifier (ID) of the cell; the SF chip looks up a route table according to a working mode of the SF chip, the destination ID and the input link number to determine a first bitmap corresponding to the cell; and the SF chip performs load balancing on the first bitmap to obtain a second bitmap and outputs the cell to a downstream apparatus according to the second bitmap. With the technical solutions of the disclosure, the SF chip in a cascade switching system can adapt to different working modes. | 06-26-2014 |
20140185437 | METHODS AND ARRANGEMENTS FOR TRAFFIC INDICATION MAPPING IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Embodiments may implement a hierarchical data structure for traffic indication mapping. Many embodiments facilitate establishing a number of pages and a number of blocks per page in a bitmap structure. For instance, several embodiments may determine a number of pages (Np) and a number of blocks per page (Nb) in the bitmap structure and communicate these to a station to facilitate communication of TIM elements to the station by an access point. In several embodiments, an access point may determine the number of pages and number of blocks per page and may transmit these numbers to stations as the stations associate with the access point such as in association response frames. In further embodiments, the access point may dynamically change the number of pages and/or the number of blocks per page by transmitting a TIM element to the stations in a beacon frame. | 07-03-2014 |
20140185438 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING REAL TIME TRAFFIC WITH REDUCED HEADER IN WIRELESS NETWORK - In a mobile telecommunications network including a mobile User Equipment (UE) ( | 07-03-2014 |
20140185439 | WIRELESS TERMINAL, CONTROL SERVER, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING SAME - In the case where a plurality of wireless systems differing in service area from each other are present, there is provided a wireless terminal having a function for collecting a history of application information, and a history of position information, a function for transmitting these histories to a priority table control server, a function whereby the priority table control server prepares a priority table on the basis of information obtained, and a function whereby the information is transmitted to the wireless terminal. The wireless terminal selects a connection destination on the basis of the information. | 07-03-2014 |
20140185440 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONFIGURING CHANNEL RESOURCE, BASE STATION, AND USER EQUIPMENT - A method and an apparatus for configuring a channel resource, a base station, and a user equipment are disclosed. The method includes: determining load information of a cell; according to the load information, that the cell reaches a congested state, configuring channel resource configuration information for a new user equipment accessing the cell, where the configuration information includes: a first DPCH Pilot bit transmit power offset and/or a first number of pilot bits, the first DPCH Pilot bit transmit power offset is smaller than a power offset configured for a user equipment in a non-congested state, and the first number of Pilot bits is smaller than a number of Pilot bits that is configured for a user equipment in a non-congested state, and sending the configuration information to the new user equipment. The method can improve downlink throughput of the cell and reducing a call drop rate. | 07-03-2014 |
20140185441 | Transmission Timing Interval Adjusting Method and Communication System - A transmission timing interval (TTI) adjusting method is provided. An embodiment method includes obtaining use condition of a system resource and traffic flow of a user, determining whether the system resource is limited based on the use condition of the system resource, comparing a current traffic flow of the user with a preset traffic flow threshold when the system resource is determined to be limited and a current TTI of the user is smaller than a second TTI, and adjusting the current TTI of the user to the second TTI when the current traffic flow of the user is smaller than the preset traffic flow threshold. Through the embodiment method, a dynamic balance may be achieved between the Quality of Service (QoS) of the user and the cell capacity. | 07-03-2014 |
20140192639 | MAXIMIZING BANDWIDTH UTILIZATION IN NETWORKS WITH HIGH LATENCIES AND PACKET DROPS USING TRANSMISSION CONTROL PROTOCOL - Disclosed is a method of maximizing the utilization of currently available network path bandwidth by TCP transmissions. Embodiments of the present invention allow to automatically detect and utilize a larger portion of the currently available bandwidth (or even the entire bandwidth) for every specific connection and network path that utilizes the invention. Furthermore, some embodiments of the present invention provide that the software implementing the technology may be running only at the data sender side and may communicate with a standard receiver. According to embodiments of the present invention, the software implementing the invention may be placed between a TCP/IP protocol driver and a Network Interface driver. Such intermediate software may hide the real network state from TCP/IP driver and shift the TCP connection SWND edge by means of Preemptive Spoof Data Acknowledgment and Packet Loss Concealment. | 07-10-2014 |
20140192640 | TRAFFIC OFFLOAD VIA LOCAL NETWORK - For traffic offload via a local network, a MME may obtain from a HSS, subscription data including SIPTO related permissions defined on APN basis that indicate SIPTO prohibited, indicate SIPTO allowed excluding SIPTO via Local Network (SIPTO@LN), and/or indicate SIPTO allowed including SIPTO@LN. Then, the MME may obtain information about one or more local Gateways (GWs) capable of offloading selected traffic, such information indicating which of the one or more local GWs provides access to which Packet Data Networks (PDNs), with each PDN being identified by its associated APN. Finally, the MME may process PDN connections and/or PDN disconnections in order to support offloading of the selected traffic. The counterpart UE includes the appropriate means of hardware and/or software that is configured to support and perform SIPTO@LN. | 07-10-2014 |
20140192641 | MEDIUM ACCESS CONTROL LAYER THAT ENCAPSULATES DATA FROM A PLURALITY OF RECEIVED DATA UNITS INTO A PLURALITY OF INDEPENDENTLY TRANSMITTABLE BLOCKS - A method of operating in a network in which a plurality of stations communicate over a shared medium, comprising providing a physical layer (e.g., PHY) for handling physical communication over the shared medium; providing a high level layer (e.g., PAL) that receives data from the station and supplies high level data units (e.g., MSDUs) for transmission over the medium; providing a MAC layer that receives the high level data units from the high level layer and supplies low level data units (e.g., MPDUs) to the physical layer; at the MAC layer, encapsulating content from a plurality of the high level data units; dividing the encapsulated content into a plurality of pieces (e.g., segments) with each piece capable of being independently retransmitted; and supplying low level data units containing one or more of the plurality of pieces. | 07-10-2014 |
20140192642 | MOBILE DEVICE WITH CELLULAR-WLAN OFFLAOD USING PASSIVE LOAD SENSING OF WLAN - Apparatus and methods are provided for switching between a wireless local area network (LAN) and a cellular network for a user equipment's (UE) data communication by passively sensing the load on the wireless LAN. A method is disclosed that includes detecting an access point associated with a wireless LAN and receiving packets that are transmitted by other devices that are using the wireless LAN. The method can further include examining the received packets to estimate a data load of the wireless LAN and selecting between the wireless LAN and a cellular network based on the estimated data load. | 07-10-2014 |
20140192643 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR NETWORK DISCOVERY AND SELECTION USING CONTEXTUAL INFORMATION - A communication device and method for offloading communications from a first communication network to a second communication network. The offloading decision can be based on one or more parameters defined in a communication framework. The communication framework can be, for example, Access Network Discovery and Selection Function (ANDSF) framework. The offloading of communication can be from a Long-term Evolution (LTE) network to a Wi-Fi network, or vice-versa. The communication framework can include, for example, positional, movement, signal quality, connection duration, a data rate, and/or quality of service (QoS) parameters. | 07-10-2014 |
20140192644 | TECHNIQUES FOR PRIVILEGED NETWORK ROUTING - Techniques for privileged network routing are provided. As traffic is received at a gateway of a network backbone provider environment it is interrogated for predefined criteria. If the traffic satisfies the predefined criteria, then the information is routed within the network backbone provider environment to use a set of reserved and restricted resources to provide premium service for the traffic being routed through the network backbone provider environment. | 07-10-2014 |
20140198638 | LOW-LATENCY LOSSLESS SWITCH FABRIC FOR USE IN A DATA CENTER - In one embodiment, a system includes a switch configured for communicating with a low-latency switch and a buffered switch, the switch having a processor adapted for executing logic, logic adapted for receiving a packet at an ingress port of a switch, logic adapted for receiving congestion information, logic adapted for determining that at least one congestion condition is net based on at least the congestion information, logic adapted for applying a packet forwarding policy to the packet when the at least one congestion condition is met, logic adapted for forwarding the packet to a buffered switch when the packet satisfies the packet forwarding policy, and logic adapted for forwarding the packet to a low-latency switch when the at least one congestion condition is not met. | 07-17-2014 |
20140198639 | Channel Traffic Congestion Avoidance in a Mobile Communication System - A mobile station detects whether there is congestion in a cell by monitoring a first channel fix downlink messages and decoding the messages to see if the decoded messages indicate congestion, where the first channel is a common control channel (CCCH). For the case in which the mobile station determines from the decoded messages that there is no congestion, the mobile station initiates a random access procedure by transmitting a request message uplink on a random access channel (RACH). Else for the case in which the mobile station determines from the decoded messages that there is congestion, the mobile station waits for a waiting time before initiating a random access procedure. | 07-17-2014 |
20140198640 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ENHANCEMENTS FOR DE-PRIORITIZATION BY RRC CONNECTION REJECT IN LTE - A method and apparatus for enhancements for de-prioritization by RRC connection reject, where the enhancements relate, in one aspect, to faster cell reselection to prevent possible service outages. In a further aspect the enhancements relate to release, suspension or resumption of de-prioritization upon PLMN selection. In a further aspect, the enhancements relate to conflict handling with a CSG cell priority. In a further aspect, the enhancements relate to connected mode UE handling. In a further aspect, the enhancements relate to cancellation of a de-prioritization request. | 07-17-2014 |
20140198641 | Methods and Devices for Content Delivery Control - To control content delivery to plural clients ( | 07-17-2014 |
20140198642 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MODIFYING CARRIER SENSE MULTIPLE ACCESS (CSMA) FOR DENSE NETWORKS - In one aspect, a method of communicating via a wireless medium by a wireless communications apparatus within a network is provided. The method includes detecting an operating characteristic associated with a load of the network. The method further includes determining an process for adjusting a size of a contention window in response to a successful transmission of a frame based on the detected operating characteristic, the contention window being provided for determining a deferral period for deferring access to the wireless medium. The method further transmitting information indicating the process to one or more wireless devices operating within the network. | 07-17-2014 |
20140198643 | WIRESPEED TCP SESSION OPTIMIZATION FOR NETWORKS HAVING RADIO SEGMENTS - TCP sessions passing through a network, such as a wireless network, may be optimized based on conditions corresponding to the radio interface of the wireless network. In one implementation, a method may include monitoring, by a base station, performance parameters relating to a radio access network (RAN); determining, based on the performance parameters, one or more protocol data units (PDUs) to retransmit; determining one or more Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) sessions and packet sequence numbers corresponding to the one or more PDUs; and transmitting, to a network device, an indication to retransmit packets corresponding to the one or more TCP sessions and packet sequence numbers. | 07-17-2014 |
20140198644 | TRAFFIC-LOAD BASED FLOW ADMISSION CONTROL - For controlling data traffic in a mobile network a first detector ( | 07-17-2014 |
20140198645 | METHOD FOR PROVIDING MULTICAST BROADCAST SERVICES CONTINUITY IN A WIRELESS NETWORK, CORRESPONDING NETWORK NODE AND USER EQUIPMENT - The present invention relates to a method for providing Multicast Broadcast Services continuity towards a user equipment part of a wireless network, said Multicast Broadcast Services being supported by at least one Multicast Broadcast Services bearer, said wireless network further providing Unicast Services to said user equipment, said Unicast Services being supported by at least one Unicast Service bearer, said Multicast Broadcast Services bearers being multiplexed with Unicast Services bearers on at least one carrier. According to the present invention, the method comprises the steps of prioritising said Multicast Broadcast Services over said Unicast services. | 07-17-2014 |
20140204736 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR REPORTING THAT A MAXIMUM NUMBER OF DATA CONTEXTS IS REACHED - If a wireless device does not know how many data contexts can be supported, then the wireless device might attempt to establish more data contexts than are supported. Such attempt would normally be rejected. However, the signalling involved in the attempt to establish another data context and the rejection of that attempt is considered wasteful. Embodiments of the present disclosure allow such waste to be reduced or avoided by signalling to the wireless device when the maximum number of data contexts is reached or when it is about to be reached. Such signalling can occur before any attempt to establish more data contexts than are supported. Thus, wasteful signaling involved with attempting to establish more data contexts can be avoided. | 07-24-2014 |
20140204737 | REDUCING ROUND-TRIP TIMES FOR TCP COMMUNICATIONS - The disclosed embodiments provide a system that processes network packets. Upon receiving a first Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) header for a first TCP segment from a network link, the system immediately provides a portion of the first TCP header to a transport layer prior to receiving all payload data for the first TCP segment. Next, the system uses the transport layer to transmit a first acknowledgment of the first TCP segment to the network link, wherein the first acknowledgment reduces a round-trip time (RTT) associated with the first TCP segment. | 07-24-2014 |
20140204738 | DEADLOCK-FREE ROUTING USING EDGE-DISJOINT SUB-NETWORKS - An aspect includes deadlock-free routing on arbitrary network topologies using edge-disjoint sub-networks. A network topology of a network is identified. The network includes a plurality of links between a plurality of switches. Each of the links is identified as an edge. A plurality of edge-disjoint sub-networks is constructed from the network topology of the network by routing configuration logic. The plurality of edge-disjoint sub-networks is formed by edges between the switches such that the edges are disjoint relative to each of the edge-disjoint sub-networks. The switches are configured to route traffic on the network with each route staying entirely within one of the plurality of edge-disjoint sub-networks within the network. | 07-24-2014 |
20140204739 | METHOD TO SCHEDULE MULTIPLE TRAFFIC FLOWS THROUGH PACKET-SWITCHED ROUTERS WITH NEAR-MINIMAL QUEUE SIZES - A method to schedule multiple traffic flows through a multiplexer server to provide fairness while minimizing the sizes of the associated queues, is proposed. The multiplexer server minimizes a quantity called the maximum Normalized Service Lag for each traffic flow. In each time-slot, the normalized service lag of every traffic flow may be updated by adding the normalized lag increment value, whether or not there is a packet in the queue associated with the flow. In each time-slot, a multiplexer server selects a traffic flow to service with an available packet and with the maximum normalized service lag. When the traffic rate requested by each traffic flow is stable, the multiplexer server schedule may repeat periodically. Efficient methods to compute periodic schedules are proposed. The methods can be applied to packet-switched Internet routers to achieve reduced queue sizes and delay. | 07-24-2014 |
20140204740 | BUS SYSTEM AND ROUTER - In an NoC bus system, data is transmitted between first and second nodes through a router. The data includes performance-ensuring data which guarantees throughput and/or a permitted time delay. The first node generates packets, each including the data to be transmitted and classification information that indicates the class of that data to be determined according to its required performance, and controls transmission of the packets. The router includes a buffer section configured to store the received packets separately after having classified the packets according to their required performance by reference to the classification information, and a relay controller configured to control transmission of the packets stored in the buffer section at a transmission rate which is equal to or higher than the sum of transmission rates to be guaranteed for every first node associated with the classification information by reference to each piece of the classification information. | 07-24-2014 |
20140204741 | BASE STATION AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - A base station | 07-24-2014 |
20140211616 | Network Assisted Data Flow Mobility - Data flow mobility to a user equipment may be provided. An access routing rule may be received at the user equipment. The access routing rule may include a plurality of packet filters and at least one target access corresponding to each of the plurality of packet filters. A first data packet to be routed may be received at the user equipment. A first packet filter associated with the first data packet may be determined. A first target access corresponding to the first packet filter may be determined from the access routing rule. The first data packet may be routed through the first target access. | 07-31-2014 |
20140211617 | Method of Minimizing Power Consumption During Operation of a Battery Operated Mobile Wireless Information Device - A method of minimizing power consumption during operation of a battery operated mobile wireless information device having a plurality of device applications running thereon, the plurality of device applications regularly needing to communicate via the internet using wireless communication channels, the method automatically modifying a wireless transfer related behavior of the mobile wireless communication device, such that the communication channel is primarily loaded with the wireless transfer related task being more time critical during periods of low RSSI values whereas the communication channel in periods of high RSSI values may be loaded with the wireless transfer related task being less time critical. Also the disclosure relates to a battery operated mobile wireless information device capable of carrying out the method according to the disclosure. | 07-31-2014 |
20140211618 | ACCESS POINT AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - An access point of wireless communications is provided. The access point includes a wireless communication unit for wirelessly communicating with a plurality of wireless communication terminals, a communicating state managing unit for managing information on a communicating state between the wireless communication unit and each of the wireless communication terminal, and a disconnecting unit for cutting a connection between the wireless communication unit and the wireless communication terminal of which the communicating state managed by the communicating state managing unit gets worse than a predetermined condition. | 07-31-2014 |
20140211619 | PROBABILISTIC RETENTION OF THE QUALITY OF SERVICE (QOS) BEARER FOR VOICE OVER INTERNET PROTOCOL (VOIP) SERVICE AS VOICE OVER LONG TERM EVOLUTION (VOLTE) - The disclosure is directed to delaying a release of a quality of service (QoS) bearer. An aspect receives a session setup request from a user for a media session requiring a QoS bearer, triggers a setup of the QoS bearer for the media session, receives a session termination request from the user for the media session, and in response to receiving the session termination request, determines whether or not to delay releasing the QoS bearer based on a history of QoS bearer utilization of the user and a determination of whether or not a number of currently established QoS bearers is less than a threshold. | 07-31-2014 |
20140211620 | Method and Apparatus for Layer 2 Compression Signaling - A method for a user equipment (UE) to set up a layer 2 (L2) compression-decompression operation, comprises signaling a set of L2 compression-decompression capabilities to a serving radio network controller (RNC) or a serving base station on a uplink control channel the set of L2 compression-decompression capabilities included in a capability information element (IE) of a RRC message; receiving a set of L2 compression-decompression control parameters in a signaling message on a downlink control channel from the serving RNC or the serving base station; and configuring a local set of L2 compression-decompression control parameters based on the received set of L2 compression-decompression control parameters. | 07-31-2014 |
20140219083 | DYNAMIC QUALITY OF SERVICE (QOS) FOR SERVICES OVER CELLULAR - The disclosure is related to dynamically applying quality of service (QoS) to a call. An aspect determines a packet transmission state of a subscriber on the call, determines whether or not the QoS is allocated to the subscriber, and allocates the QoS to the subscriber based on the QoS not being allocated to the subscriber and the packet transmission state indicating that the subscriber is sending packets. | 08-07-2014 |
20140219084 | ULTRA LOW POWER-DATA DRIVEN NETWORKING PROCESSING DEVICE FOR AVOIDING OVERLOAD - The present invention is provided with: a data-driven processor comprising at least a firing control which determines whether or not firing conditions have been met by determining whether or not all packets necessary for instruction execution have been received when a packet that convey a part of partitioned data to be processed has been input, and a data processing unit for performing processing corresponding to the packets transmitted from the firing control if the firing conditions have been met; a power supply circuit for supplying power to the data-driven processor; and overload avoidance means for refusing input of the packets to the data-driven processor, if a determination has been made that a data processing load in the data-driven processor may reach an overloaded state in which the data processing may stall, on the basis of current consumption in the data-driven processor. Accordingly, power consumption in a networking system is reduced. | 08-07-2014 |
20140219085 | MULTIPLEXING CHANNELS BY A MEDIUM ACCESS CONTROLLER - A code division multiple access (CDMA) communication device comprises a medium access controller (MAC) configured to receive data from a plurality of channels. Each channel is associated with a priority and an identifier. The MAC is further configured to multiplex the data of the plurality of channels for transmission over a CDMA channel based on the priority. | 08-07-2014 |
20140233375 | PRIORITIZED QUEUEING IN A MESH NETWORK BASED ON AGE OF PAYLOAD DATA - In one embodiment, a method comprises identifying an age of payload data in a data packet by a wireless network node configured for transmitting the data packet to a multi-hop destination via a wireless mesh network; determining by the wireless network node a schedule for the data packet reaching the multi-hop destination; and the wireless network node prioritizing queuing of the data packet for Collision Sense with Multiple Access and Collision Avoidance (CSMA-CA) based wireless transmission in the wireless mesh network based on the corresponding age, relative to the schedule and respective ages of other data packets awaiting transmission by the wireless network node to the destination, where a higher-aged data packet relative to the schedule is granted have a higher priority than a lower-aged data packet relative to the schedule. | 08-21-2014 |
20140233376 | SELECTIVE COMPRESSION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Techniques for compressing data in a wireless network are provided. Data may be in the form of data packets that have one or more headers and a payload. One or more compression initiation criteria are used to determine whether to compress all data or certain data. Different data may be associated with different classes of service. Compression initiation criteria for data that belongs to one class of service may be different than compression initiation criteria for data that belongs to another class of service. Compression initiation criteria for data may be different than one or more compression halting criteria that are used to determine whether to cease compressing data. One type of compression involves use of synchronized history buffers. A wireless receiver may communicate with a wireless transmitter that an error is detected and that the history buffers of the wireless transmitter should be flushed or cleared. | 08-21-2014 |
20140233377 | METHOD TO ACHIEVE BOUNDED BUFFER SIZES AND QUALITY OF SERVICE GUARANTEES IN THE INTERNET NETWORK - Methods to achieve bounded router buffer sizes and Quality of Service guarantees for traffic flows in a packet-switched network are described. The network can be an Internet Protocol (IP) network, a Differentiated Services network, an MPLS network, wireless mesh network or an optical network. The routers can use input queueing, possibly in combination with crosspoint queueing and/or output queueing. Routers may schedule QoS-enabled traffic flows to ensure a bounded normalized service lead/lag. Each QoS-enabled traffic flow will buffer O(K) packets per router, where K is an integer bound on the normalized service lead/lag. Three flow-scheduling methods are analysed. Non-work-conserving flow-scheduling methods can guarantee a bound on the normalized service lead/lag, while work-conserving flow-scheduling methods typically cannot guarantee the same small bound. The amount of buffering required in a router can be reduced significantly, the network links can operate near peak capacity, and strict QoS guarantees can be achieved. | 08-21-2014 |
20140233378 | Method and Apparatus to Lower Capacity Requirements on Backhaul Interface Between Base Stations - Method and apparatus for processing in a non serving base station received data from at least one user equipment in order to reduce said data; and causing that the processed data are sent to a base station. | 08-21-2014 |
20140233379 | USER SCREENING METHOD AND BASE STATION FOR USER SCREENING - The present invention relates to a user screening method and a base station for user screening. The method includes: judging whether the number of users detected within a current TTI exceeds an upper limit of the number of users capable of being processed within the current TTI; and if the upper limit is exceeded, discarding users corresponding to preamble sequences generated by a same root sequence. Whether a current load condition is a high load is known by judging whether the number of users detected within the current TTI exceeds the upper limit of the number of users capable of being processed within the current TTI, and the users detected under a high load condition are detected and discarded, so that a random access false alarm flow caused by interference signals is effectively controlled. | 08-21-2014 |
20140233380 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING QUALITY OF SERVICE OF UPLINK IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of managing quality of service (QoS) of an uplink of a terminal includes the steps of: when the terminal supports reflective QoS, transmitting an instruction regarding the reflective QoS to a network node; and receiving from the network node an instruction on whether the reflective QoS is to be applied in response to the instruction regarding the reflective QoS. | 08-21-2014 |
20140241151 | Method and Apparatus for Diagnosing Interface Oversubscription and Microbursts - A methodology is described for providing a dedicated interface-level oversubscription diagnostics queue that would store header data and timestamps for ingress frames which would otherwise be dropped due to the input FIFO queue being full. When the microburst is over, the data may be transmitted to the main CPU to analyze the cause of oversubscription as well as affected traffic. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241152 | COLLECTION OF SUBSCRIBER INFORMATION FOR DATA BREAKOUT IN A MOBILE DATA NETWORK - A method and system supports subscriber based IP data breakout at the edge of a mobile data network without monitoring the use of security keys or breaking into ciphered message exchanges. The system employs a first service mechanism operating at the edge of the mobile data network a second service mechanism operating at the core on the S11 interface. The second service mechanism at the core collects subscriber related data, subscriber identifiers and tunnel identifiers and sends this data to the first service mechanism. The second service mechanism at the core collects subscriber related data, subscriber identifiers and tunnel identifiers and sends this data to the first service mechanism. The first service mechanism uses the tunnel identifiers received from the second service mechanism to identify sessions and tunnels carrying subscriber dependent data packets (S1-U packets) in order to perform subscriber-based IP data breakout, offloading and optimization. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241153 | APPARATUS, SYSTEMS, AND METHODS FOR PROVIDING OFFLOADING TO AN ALTERNATE NETWORK - This disclosure relates to a system and method for offloading selected data to an alternate communication network. The offloading provides another route for selected packet traffic that can relieve the burden on a mobile operator's network, such as the backhaul and core networks. As the proliferation of data rich content and increasingly more capable mobile devices has continued, the amount of data communicated over mobile operator's networks has exponentially increased. Upgrading the existing network that was designed for voice calls is not desirable or practical for many mobile operators. This disclosure provides systems and methods for offloading data to the Internet or another IP network to relieve congestion on the mobile operator's network. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241154 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR PRIORITIZATION OF DATA FOR INTELLIGENT DISCARD IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Capacity and spectrum constrained, multiple-access communication systems optimize performance by selectively discarding packets. Changes in the communication systems may be driven using control responses. Control responses include intelligent discard of network packets under capacity constrained conditions. Packets are prioritized and discard decisions are made based on the prioritization. Various embodiments provide an interactive response by selectively discarding packets to enhance perceived and actual system throughput, provide a reactive response by selectively discarding data packets based on their relative impact to service quality to mitigate oversubscription, provide a proactive response by discarding packets based on predicted oversubscription, or provide a combination thereof. Packets may be prioritized for discard using correlations between discards and bandwidth reduction and quality degradation. The quality degradation for video packets may be measured objectively. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241155 | METHOD OF OPERATING NETWORK LOAD REDUCTION POLICY, SYSTEM AND RECORDING MEDIUM THEREOF - The present invention relates to a method of operating a policy for reducing wireless network load, a system and a recording medium thereof. The system operating a policy for reducing wireless network load, according to the present invention, includes: an analysis server for receiving network usage information of analysis target applications included in a wireless terminal device through a detecting application that detects network usage information of one or more analysis target applications, the detecting application included in an user's wireless terminal device or an analytical wireless terminal device, storing the received network usage information in connection with information of the analysis target application in a storage medium, and obtaining network usage pattern information of the analysis target application by analyzing the network usage information of each analysis target application; and a policy server for generating network usage control policy information of the analysis target application by using the network usage pattern information of the analysis target application, and processing so that policy information for reducing network load is transmitted to an application for reducing network load included in the user's wireless terminal device, the policy information including the generated network usage control policy information and information of policy applicable target application. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241156 | METHOD OF ANALYZING POLICY FOR NETWORK LOAD REDUCTION, SYSTEM AND RECORDING MEDIUM THEREOF - The present invention relates to a method of operating a policy for reducing wireless network load, a system and a recording medium thereof. The system operating a policy for reducing wireless network load, according to the present invention, includes: an analysis server for receiving network usage information of analysis target applications included in a wireless terminal device through a detecting application that detects network usage information of one or more analysis target applications, the detecting application included in an user's wireless terminal device or an analytical wireless terminal device, storing the received network usage information in connection with information of the analysis target application in a storage medium, and obtaining network usage pattern information of the analysis target application by analyzing the network usage information of each analysis target application; and a policy server for generating network usage control policy information of the analysis target application by using the network usage pattern information of the analysis target application, and processing so that policy information for reducing network load is transmitted to an application for reducing network load included in the user's wireless terminal device, the policy information including the generated network usage control policy information and information of policy applicable target application. And, the analysis server compares amount of network usage after applying the network usage control policy information for the user's wireless terminal device with that before the applying, and then obtains a result of the comparing. | 08-28-2014 |
20140247713 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR PREVENTING SOURCE SUPPRESSION OF ROUTED INFORMATION IN A LOAD-BALANCED NETWORK - Systems, devices, and methods for routing information from one network to a load balancing network are provided. The provided system includes a server, and at least one switch in communication with the server over a physical port. The switch includes a network interface component configured to receive information from the server on the physical port, a memory configured to store the address of the server and a virtual port in an address table, the virtual port pointing to the physical port, and one or more processors coupled to the network interface component and the memory. The one or more processors are configured to identify the physical port on which the information arrives and assign the identified physical port to the virtual port and route information from a different network to the server over the physical port pointed to by the virtual port stored in the address table. | 09-04-2014 |
20140247714 | TERMINAL, CONTROL DEVICE, COMMUNICATION METHOD, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION MODULE, PROGRAM, AND INFORMATION PROCESSING DEVICE - A terminal communicating with a network including a forwarding device(s) for forwarding a packet and a control device for controlling the forwarding device(s) in accordance with a request from the forwarding device, includes: a communication unit that receives a processing rule indicating that a packet for communicating with a first destination is changed so as to communicate with a second destination, from the control device; a storage unit that stores the received processing rule, and a processing unit that in a case of communicating with the network, changes a destination of a packet in accordance with a processing rule that corresponds to the packet by referring to the processing rule stored in the storage unit. | 09-04-2014 |
20140247715 | WIRELESS RECEIVING SYSTEM AND SIGNAL PROCESSING METHOD THEREOF - A wireless system including a decoding module, an estimating module and a searching module is provided. The decoding module receives and decodes a packet to generate a decoding result. The estimating module retrieves package length information from the decoding result, and estimates a transmission end time of the packet according to the packet length information. The searching module determines a search start time according to the transmission end time, and starts packet searching at the search start time. | 09-04-2014 |
20140247716 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR GUARANTEEING QOS OF COMMUNICATION SERVICE IN NAT SCENARIO - A method includes: when a user equipment initiates a communication request, controlling an A-BGF network element to generate proxy SDP information according to calling party SDP information, and replacing the calling party SDP information with the proxy SDP information to establish a connection between the user equipment and a called party; after a connection between both communication parties is successful, instructing a PCRF network element to perform QoS resource reservation; and receiving a NAT-translated-to IP address and a port of the user equipment from the A-BGF network element, and instructing the PCRF network element to update source address information for the QoS resource reservation to the NAT-translated-to IP address and the port of the user equipment. The present invention achieves QoS guarantee of a communication service in a NAT scenario without imposing any special interface requirement on the user equipment. | 09-04-2014 |
20140247717 | METHOD AND A SYSTEM FOR MANAGING CELL SELECTION IN A WIRELESS NETWORK SYSTEM - A method of managing cell reselection for a User Equipment (UE) in an idle mode connected to a wireless network system is provided. The method includes determining system information of available cells on a given frequency, determining the system information from a plurality of cells and frequencies to determine which of the plurality of cells support a Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service (MBMS), determining a MBMS Control CHannel (MCCH) of the plurality of cells that support the MBMS, generating a list of cells by prioritizing the plurality of cells that support the MBMS over other frequencies or cells in a ranking order, and reselecting a cell or a frequency supporting the MBMS before starting a MBMS session from among the generated list to be a cell where the MBMS session is provided. | 09-04-2014 |
20140247718 | Reducing TCP Timeouts due to Incast Collapse at a Network Switch - A network switch for reducing TCP timeouts due to incast collapse is disclosed. The network switch has a plurality of buffers for storing network packets for at least one sender server. An incast buffer management component in the network switch allocates a buffer in the plurality of hullers to store an incast notification packet, the incast notification packet indicating one or mote network packets that have been dropped by the network switch. The network switch also includes an incast notification component for forwarding the incast notification packet to a destination server with an incast notification packet specific header. | 09-04-2014 |
20140254359 | MOBILE NETWORK CONGESTION RECOGNITION FOR OPTIMIZATION OF MOBILE TRAFFIC - Systems and methods for mobile network congestion recognition for optimization of mobile traffic are disclosed. A mobile device having a local proxy equipped with congestion recognition capabilities can sample time consumed to establish data connection between the mobile device and the mobile network, collect data including at least one of signal strength data, cell identifier, and location area code associated with the data connection between the mobile device and the mobile network, and anticipate network congestion, based at least on the time consumed and the collected data. On detecting mobile network congestion, the local proxy can apply a blocking policy to block all or low priority traffic from signaling the congested mobile network to ease the congestion. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254360 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROCESSING MEDIA TRAFFIC IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for processing media traffic by a Media Processing Function (MPF) entity in a mobile communication system is provided. The method includes installing a media policy when an Internet Protocol Connectivity Access Network (IP-CAN) between a gateway with a Traffic Detection Function (TDF) and a media policy server is established, or an application is detected in the gateway entity with the TDF, and updating the media policy based on a network status after installing the media policy. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254361 | ALLOCATION - A method, apparatus and computer program facilitate the assignment of stations to slots of a restricted access window (RAW) to support communications between the stations and an access point. In a method for use in an access point, a broadcast message is caused to be provided to the station(s). The broadcast message includes an indication of a type of stations to access the RAW and one or more of a duration of the slot(s) in the RAW allocated to a first type of station, a duration of the RAW allocated to the first type of station, a duration of the slot(s) in the RAW allocated to a second type of station or a duration of the RAW allocated to the second type of station. The method also provides for access for one or more stations of the type that was indicated within the slots of the RAW. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254362 | BALANCING LOAD ACROSS RADIO FREQUENCY CHANNELS - The present disclosure discloses a network device and method for advertising channel load. The disclosed network device aggregates a number of clients that are associated with the network device on a specific wireless communication channel, and advertises the aggregated number to a client on the specific wireless communication channel. Further, the network device can receive aggregated load information on the specific wireless communication channel from another management network device, and further aggregates the load information across multiple wireless networks operating on the same wireless communication channel and coupled to different management network devices. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254363 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD, MOBILITY MANAGEMENT NODE, PACKET SWITCH, AND MOBILE STATION - Even if a failure has occurred in core network equipment in a state in which bearers are established between a large number of UEs and a packet data network, congestion in the network is avoided. A mobile communication method according to the present invention includes steps of transmitting, by an MME, to transmit a “PDN Disconnection Request/Detach Request” including barring time to a UE when the MME disconnects a bearer between the UE and the packet data network due to a predetermined reason such as a failure in a S-GW/P-GW or the MME in a state in which the bearer is established, and barring, by the UE, a mobile originating call directed to the packet data network for the barring time. | 09-11-2014 |
20140269270 | SCHEDULED TRANSMISSION OF DATA - A method and system may allow for the scheduling of transmissions. A device may send a transmission request over a network where the request may be an upload request or a download request. Traffic may be monitored on the network and the traffic may determine when the transmission is to be scheduled. Depending on the traffic and the type of transmission, the transmission may be scheduled for a future time or may be added to a queue of pending transmissions. Once commenced, the transmission may be paused and resumed based on continually monitored traffic on the network. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269271 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR NETWORK CONGESTION MANAGEMENT - Methods and systems are disclosed for network congestion management. The methods and systems receive a first packet complying with a first network protocol comprising a first congestion indicator representative of a presence or absence of network congestion and further comprising a first set of data associated with a second network protocol, and provide an indication of the presence or absence of network congestion generated based, at least in part, on the first congestion indicator. The methods and systems also receive a first packet complying with a first network protocol comprising a first set of data associated with a second network protocol, and output a second packet complying with the first network protocol comprising a first congestion indicator representative of a presence of network congestion. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269272 | WIRELESS NETWORK COMMUNICATION NODES WITH OPT OUT CAPABILITY - Techniques are disclosed herein for providing wireless network communication nodes with opt-out capabilities. Such capabilities may, for example, allow particular customers to opt out of a typical full-scale communication mode such that their associated equipment operates at least temporarily in a limited communication mode. The limited communication mode may limit customer exposure to emissions resulting from RF communications near their homes or other areas, which may be attractive to customers such as those with health or other emission-related concerns. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269273 | METRICS AND FORWARDING ACTIONS ON LOGICAL SWITCH PARTITIONS IN A DISTRIBUTED NETWORK SWITCH - Techniques are provided for providing access control lists in a distributed network switch. The distributed network switch made of switch units is divided into logical switch partitions, or logical networks. Physical ports of the switch units are partitioned into logical ports, where each logical port is associated with a logical switch partition. A control point of the distributed network switch manages and assigns a service tag (S-Tag) used to identify which logical port ingress and egress frames are associated with. To generate metrics and other forwarding actions for a given logical switch partition, the control point sets up access control list (ACLs) targeting the logical port associated with the S-Tags associated with the given logical switch partition. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269274 | CREDIT-BASED FLOW CONTROL IN LOSSLESS ETHERNET NETWORKS - In one embodiment, a system includes a hardware processor and logic integrated with and/or executable by the processor or media access control (MAC) functionality of a network port, the logic being adapted to initialize a link between a receiving endpoint and a sending endpoint, the receiving and sending endpoints being connected in a network fabric, wherein at least one virtual link is created within the link, receive an amount of available flow credits from the receiving endpoint, wherein the amount of available flow credits are used to determine a capacity to process packets at the receiving endpoint, and transmit one or more packets to the receiving endpoint until all packets are sent or the amount of available flow credits is insufficient to process additional packets, wherein exchange of flow credits is performed on a per virtual link basis. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269275 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR MANAGEMENT OF SERVICE REQUESTS IN AN OVERLOAD ENVIRONMENT - A system that incorporates the subject disclosure may include, for example, responsive to a determination that a number of failed service requests directed to a first access technology exceeds a threshold for a maximum number of failed service requests, performing cell selection associated with a second radio access technology during an overload mitigation time duration; and responsive to a determination of an expiration of the overload mitigation time duration, transmitting additional service requests associated with the first radio access technology. Other embodiments are disclosed. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269276 | TRIGGER BASED RECORDING OF FLOWS WITH PLAY BACK - The various embodiments provide selective real-time monitoring of one or more flows of packets over a network, real-time buffering of packets for the one or more monitored flows, real-time recording of packets for one or more monitored flows and its corresponding buffered packets based on initiation of at least one trigger, and real-time analysis of the one or more recorded flows of packets regarding at least the occurrence of the at least one trigger. One or more flows of packets may be selected for monitoring by an administrator or an automated process based on different factors. In at least one of the various embodiments, the one or more monitored flows of packets are tagged and threaded so that they are separately accessible in a ring buffer. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269277 | DYNAMIC MAXIMUM TRANSMISSION UNIT SIZE ADAPTION - An aspect includes dynamically adapting a maximum transmission unit (MTU) size in a computer network. A packet is received at a first link of a switch of the computer network. An MTU size of the received packet is determined based on an application programming interface (API) crossing value associated with the first link of the switch. An associated destination MTU size of a second link of the switch is determined as a target destination of the received packet. The associated destination MTU size of the second link is adjusted based on a difference between the MTU size of the received packet and the associated destination MTU size of the second link. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269278 | INFORMATIONAL BROADCAST MESSAGES AND ITS USES IN WIRELESS MULTIHOP NETWORKS - In a wireless multihop network having node devices within communication range neighboring node devices in a corresponding local neighborhood, the node devices generate visibility messages to be transmitted via connection-less broadcast. The visibility messages include at least an identifier of the corresponding node device. Visibility messages received by each of the node devices from the one or more neighboring node devices are processed to determine a measure of density of the local neighborhood. This measure of density also accounts for the heterogeneous transmit power capabilities of node devices and is used for updating of one or more operational parameter of the node device relating to utilization of the radio communications medium by that node device. A degree of utilization of the medium through the control of transmission data rate and power is adjusted based on an inverse relation to the measure of density determined from the received visibility messages. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269279 | TRIGGERING CONGESTION CONTROL FOR RADIO AWARE APPLICATIONS - Currently, the radio on the device is the only one aware of network congestion while applications are not. At the same time, only the application is aware of the criticality of information it needs to send across the network. In order to address mobile network congestion more effectively, device radio needs to become application aware or application becomes radio aware. This way, the device radio knows the priority of the application traffic and does not blindly block critical information while allowing non critical information to be transferred or the application knows that the network is congested and uses it efficiently. The current congestion management mechanisms have their triggers and corrective actions limited to the device radio level without any regard to application. To address this problem, the disclosed technology includes a solution for congestion management where the trigger is on radio level while corrective measures are at IP/application layer. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269280 | Channel Width Configuration Based on Network Conditions - A method includes determining an optimized channel width between client devices and access points based on network conditions in a wireless network. In particular, the channel widths may be optimized to reduce airtime usage on access points and eliminate a high density condition while the client devices are steered to access points that provide the greatest channel capacity gains based on signal-to-noise-ratios for each spatial stream in a beamformed transmission. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269281 | Apparatus and Method for Providing Sort Offload - An apparatus includes a core processor and a hardware based sort coprocessor. In one embodiment, the core processor is able to generate an input array. The hardware based sort coprocessor is configured to sort the input array in accordance with a metric and flag of each element to be sorted in the input array and generate a sorted array. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269282 | DYNAMIC RECONFIGURATION OF NETWORK DEVICES FOR OUTAGE PREDICTION - According to one aspect of the present disclosure, a method and technique for dynamic reconfiguration of network devices for outage prediction is disclosed. The method includes: aggregating a plurality of network devices to form an input/output (I/O) link bundle; identifying a quality of service level of data throughput needed by at least one workload utilizing the I/O link bundle; monitoring a parameter of each of the network devices of the I/O link bundle; determining whether the monitored parameter indicates a predicted data throughout quality of service level decrease by a network device being utilized by the workload below the quality of service level for the workload; and responsive to determining that the monitored parameter indicates a predicted quality of service level decrease by the respective network device, dynamically reconfiguring the link bundle to maintain the quality of service level for the workload utilizing the I/O link bundle. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269283 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MACHINE-TO-MACHINE COMMUNICATION REGISTRATION - Methods and apparatus are disclosed for Machine to Machine (M2M) communication registration. The methods provide single and periodic registration and may be device or network based. The devices in the system may be divided into groups. A single device member may perform the basic access steps for the group. Other devices may receive related access information on a control channel and use the information to access the system. The devices may send data, get updates, and then go to sleep. Internet addresses may be released or maintained. During a control cycle, the devices may wake up and listen to the control channel for any paging messages. Individual devices or the entire group may access the system. During a reporting cycle, all the devices may wake up and access the system to connect to the M2M system to upload data. | 09-18-2014 |
20140286159 | WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK (WLAN) TRAFFIC OFFLOADING - Technology for communicating access point (AP) information for traffic offloading is disclosed. A request may be received, at a wireless local area network (WLAN) domain manager (DM) from an evolved node B (eNB), for access point (AP) information about one or more WLAN access points (APs) for traffic offloading. The access point (AP) information may be obtained for the one or more WLAN APs, at the WLAN DM, based on at least in part operations and management (OAM) reports from the one or more WLAN APs containing the AP information. The AP information may be communicated, from the WLAN DM to the eNB via a network manager (NM), about the one or more WLAN APs to enable traffic offloading from the eNB to at least one of the ALAN APs. | 09-25-2014 |
20140286160 | METHODS FOR ADJUSTING NETWORK TRANSMISSION SERVICE LEVEL AND DATA TERMINALS - This disclosure relates to methods for adjusting network transmission service levels, data terminals, and network servers. The method for adjusting a network transmission service level, used in a data terminal, comprises: obtaining data to be transmitted; inserting the data into specified queues or assigning priorities to the data according to one or more data characteristics selected from importance, instantaneity, data resources, and data types; transmitting a transmission service request to a network server, wherein the transmission service request includes information about the network transmission service level requested and corresponding network configuration parameters; and using the network transmission service provided by the network server according to the transmission service request to transmit the data in queues or the data whose priorities correspond to the network transmission service level provided. The data terminal could ask the network transmission service provider to provide different network transmission service to improve the instantaneity and stability of data transmission. | 09-25-2014 |
20140286161 | UPLINK CONGESTION CONTROL - The present disclosure relates to an uplink congestion control scheme. In one embodiment, an uplink congestion control method is provided, comprising steps of: determining whether or not a congestion status of a serving cell is changed based on a rise over thermal, RoT, measurement; sending to a set of user equipment, UEs, a signaling to indicate the change of the congestion status; and performing an uplink congestion control based on the RoT measurement and with enhanced transmission format combination, E-TFC, reselection by at least one UE from the set of UEs based at least on the signaling. | 09-25-2014 |
20140286162 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR SUPPORTING MTC TRIGGER OF SERVING NODE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - One embodiment of the present invention discloses a method for allowing a serving node to support a trigger request of a machine type communication-interworking function (MTC-IWF) in a wireless communication system, and the method for supporting the trigger request comprises the steps of: receiving, from a terminal, capability information which contains information on trigger transmission; and determining whether to transmit the information on the trigger transmission to a home subscriber server (HSS)/home location register (HLR), based on the information related to the terminal, which contains the capability information, and information related to the serving node, wherein the information on the trigger transmission contains information indicating whether the terminal supports a trigger request through the MTC-IWF and the serving node. | 09-25-2014 |
20140293777 | LOAD-DEPENDENT TRANSMISSION IN COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - In one embodiment, a first network device detects load information transmitted by a second network device and selects one of a plurality of modes of communication responsive to the detected load information. The modes of communication include at least a first mode of communication that is selected responsive to a relatively low load condition and a second mode of communication that is selected responsive to a relatively high load condition. In each of the modes particular information is to be transmitted from the first network device to the second network device including at least one identifier and associated data, and in different ones of the modes different portions of the particular information are transmitted from the first network device to the second network device using different channel arrangements. The first and second network devices may comprise, for example, respective sensor and access point nodes of a wireless network. | 10-02-2014 |
20140293778 | METHOD FOR NETWORK RESOURCES ALLOCATION IN TISPAN BASED SERVICE ARCHITECTURES - A method for improving the network resources allocation in a TISPAN network, when a network user requests at least one communication service between an access node of the TISPAN network and a destination node, the TISPAN network using MPLS packet based transport technologies and GMPLS circuit switched based transport technologies. The proposed invention defines a communication procedure between TISPAN service layer architectures and multilayer GMPLS network architectures WSON). It aims to minimize total network resources consumption of increasing traffic demands with different requirements in terms of bandwidth and QoS. | 10-02-2014 |
20140293779 | ROUTE SELECTING APPARATUS, ROUTE SELECTING METHOD, AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A first route selecting apparatus that is included among a plurality of route selecting apparatuses includes an acquiring unit that acquires for handover of communication currently relayed by the first route selecting apparatus, a selection state of a relay route of a second route selecting apparatus that is included among the route selecting apparatuses that each selects from among a first route and a second route, a relay route between a mobile terminal and a communication destination, and that when a traffic amount of the first route becomes at least a predetermined amount, selects the second route for communication established for a communication request issued thereafter; and a selecting unit that according to the acquired selection state, selects the second route for the currently relayed communication even when the traffic amount of the first route is less than the predetermined amount. | 10-02-2014 |
20140293780 | MECHANISM TO LIMIT SIGNALING STORMS OVER A NETWORK - Methods performed by a user equipment (UE) for wireless communication, the method comprising receiving an authentication load indicator from an access point (AP), and determining whether to attempt authentication with a network entity based at least in part on the authentication load indicator. | 10-02-2014 |
20140293781 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SELECTING A MESSAGE TRANSPORT FOR A MULTI-MODE COMMUNICATION DEVICE - The present disclosure relates to a system and method for selecting a network for use by a communication device to process a data transmission. The method comprises: determining whether an amount of data sent by the communication device over a first network in communication with the communication device has reached a data limit; and if the amount of data has reached the data limit, selecting a second network for use by the communication device. | 10-02-2014 |
20140293782 | CONFIGURING SUBSCRIBER SYSTEMS IN WIRELESS MESH NETWORKS - A wireless network may be managed by identifying one or more wireless subscriber systems included in a lobe pool of a wireless network, identifying at least one candidate subscriber system outside of the lobe pool with which to enable communications, and reconfiguring the antenna such that the lobe pool includes the identified candidate subscriber system. | 10-02-2014 |
20140293783 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING DATA FROM TERMINAL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND DEVICE FOR SAME - Disclosed in the present application is a method for transmitting signals from a cooperative terminal in a wireless communication system, which supports client cooperative communication. Specifically, the method comprises the steps of: receiving, from a source terminal, at least one packet comprising a predetermined unit; configuring the data burst corresponding to the source terminal by using the packet; and transmitting the data burst to a base station, wherein the at least one packet comprises either a service data unit (SDU) or a protocol data unit (PDU). | 10-02-2014 |
20140301187 | CREDIT-BASED LINK LEVEL FLOW CONTROL AND CREDIT EXCHANGE USING DCBX - In one embodiment, a system includes a network having one or more devices interconnected therebetween, the network including a first device having a first port and logic integrated with and/or executable by a first processor, the logic being adapted to exchange credit exchange (CE) capabilities between the first port and a second port of a second device in the network, receive a credit grant packet from the second port, the credit grant packet indicating credits granted to the first port, and send one or more packets of data from the first port to the second port, the one or more packets corresponding with the granted credits. Other systems and methods for providing credit-based flow control are described according to more embodiments. | 10-09-2014 |
20140301188 | DELIVERY OF PROTOCOL DATA UNITS - Delivery of protocol data units or other suitable data or information units in various communication systems can be enhanced by appropriate methods and devices. For example, in-sequence delivery of protocol data units received in parallel from several lower-layer acknowledged-mode protocol entities may benefit from timers and/or forwarding status reports. A method can include observing a gap in a sequence of protocol data units received from a plurality of lower-layer protocol entities providing data transfer. The method can also include starting a timer upon the gap observation. The method can further include preventing the gap from blocking delivery of service data units to a higher layer, when the timer expires. The method can additionally include detecting a forwarding-status report. The method can also include immediately proceeding with data delivery to higher layer, containing the gaps because of the lack of forwarding at handover. | 10-09-2014 |
20140301189 | INFORMATION PROVIDING APPARATUS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - An information providing apparatus has a first communication part to perform communication with a communication apparatus, a main-information storage to store main information to be transmitted to the communication apparatus via the first communication part, a sub-information acquisition part to acquire sub-information reproducible separately from the main information and related to the main information, and a communication controller to control so that the main information and the corresponding sub-information is transmitted from the first communication part to the communication apparatus, when a transmission request for the main information is acquired from the communication apparatus. | 10-09-2014 |
20140301190 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR COLLISION MANAGEMENT IN A NEIGHBORHOOD AWARE NETWORK - Methods, devices, and computer program products for collision management of wireless devices in a peer-to-peer network are described herein. In one aspect, a method of communicating via a wireless medium by a wireless communications apparatus within a network is provided. The method includes determining first and second contention windows. The first contention window begins earlier than the second contention window. The method further includes beginning a first carrier sense multiple access (CSMA) countdown at the start of the first contention window. The method further includes beginning a second CSMA countdown when the first CSMA countdown does not end before the start of the second contention window. The method further includes transmitting the prepared frame at a time of the first CSMA countdown ending or the second CSMA countdown ending, whichever is earlier. | 10-09-2014 |
20140301191 | USER PLANE TRAFFIC HANDLING USING NETWORK ADDRESS TRANSLATION AND REQUEST REDIRECTION - For handling user plane traffic in a communication network, a NAT node ( | 10-09-2014 |
20140301192 | Software Defined Networking (SDN) Controller Orchestration and Network Virtualization for Data Center Interconnection - A data center interconnection (DCI) network may comprise a data center controller (DCC) managing a plurality of data centers (DCs) interconnected by a provider network managed by a network provider controller (NPC). The provider network may be an OpenFlow based software defined networking (SDN) transport network. The DCC may initiate a virtual network service (VNS) negotiation with the NPC to connect the DCs and may specify a network abstraction granularity level. The NPC may respond by computing paths through the provider network accordingly and providing the DCC with one or more virtual networks (VNs). The DCC may compute virtual paths through the VNs and send virtual network element (VNE) connection setup commands to the DCC. The DCC may convert the VNE connection setup commands into network element (NE) commands to setup connections in NEs of the provider network. The DCC and the NPC may perform fault monitoring, detection, and recovery. | 10-09-2014 |
20140301193 | Uplink Load Control Method and Apparatus Used in a Wireless Communication System - The present invention discloses schemes to perform load control taking uplink BLER statistics into account. An uplink load control method and apparatus are provided in a wireless communication system. The uplink load control method comprises estimating uplink load budget in a cell of the wireless communication system; determining whether the cell is over-loaded based on Block Error Rate (BLER) statistics of non-Guarded Bit Rate (non-GBR) users in the cell and/or Fast Congestion Control (FCC) action statistics in the cell; decreasing the uplink load budget if it is determined that the cell is over-loaded; and increasing the uplink load budget if it is determined that the cell is not over-loaded. Preferably, increasing or decreasing of the uplink load budget is based on the BLER stastics BLER | 10-09-2014 |
20140301194 | UE CONTROL OF DOWNLINK DATA - The present invention relates to control of downlink data in a packet based telecommunications network and in particular to UE control of downlink data. This is provided in devices and methods for handling such control, for instance a user equipment ( | 10-09-2014 |
20140307545 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REDUCING WIRELESS TRAFFIC BY CONTROLLING MANAGEMENT FRAME IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK (WLAN) - Provided is a method and apparatus for reducing wireless traffic by controlling a management frame of an access point (AP) in a wireless local area network (WLAN), the AP including a beacon frame generator to generate a beacon frame, a probe response generator to generate a probe response frame, and a management frame control unit to control at least one of a period of the beacon frame and a number of retransmissions of the probe response frame, based on at least one of a power consumption of the AP, a system load imposed on a system including the AP, and an emergency level related to whether an emergency occurs. | 10-16-2014 |
20140307546 | METHOD FOR SELECTING BEARER MODE, PACKET GATEWAY, AND POLICY AND CHARGING RULE FUNCTION ENTITY - The present invention provides a method for selecting a bearer mode, a packet gateway, and a policy and charging rule function entity, relating to the field of communications technologies, and solving the problem that a base station selects a suitable air interface transmission mode for a bearer of a mobile terminal. Indication information of an air interface transmission mode supported by a mobile terminal is received. According to the indication information and a received enhanced policy and charging control rule that is sent by a policy and charging rule function entity, an air interface transmission mode allowed to be used by a bearer bound with a service flow of the mobile terminal is determined. A session establishment reply message is sent to a serving gateway to which the mobile terminal belongs, where the session establishment reply message comprises the air interface transmission mode allowed to be used by the bearer. | 10-16-2014 |
20140307547 | FLOW BASED PACKET MANIPULATION CONGESTION CONTROL - This disclosure relates to a Radio Network Controller, RNC, a base station, and to methods therein. By extracting information from one or more flows of Protocol Data Units, PDUs, which information is accessible on a certain protocol layer only, congestion control is enabled and performed on another protocol layer based on said information. | 10-16-2014 |
20140313887 | COMMUNICATION NODE HAVING TRAFFIC OPTIMIZATION CAPABILITY AND METHOD FOR OPTIMIZING TRAFFIC IN COMMUNICATION NODE - The present invention provides an apparatus for optimizing traffic of packets produced in a user terminal and a remote node with a WAN link between the user terminal and the remote node. The apparatus includes a flow information table configured to have identification information about the respective packets that are managed in the apparatus, a packet processing module configured to analyze the packets to determine whether the respective packets are identified in the flow information table, and an optimization module configured to optimize the packets in compliance with the optimization option specified in the respective identified packets. | 10-23-2014 |
20140313888 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR LIMITING ACCESS TO AN IP-BASED WIRELESS TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK BASED ON ACCESS POINT IP ADDRESS AND/OR MAC ADDRESS - A system and method manages call connections between mobile subscribers and an EP-based wireless telecommunications network through a wireless access point. Communications between the mobile subscribers and the IP-based wireless telecommunications network are initiated by a registration request. During the registration request various identifiers (IMSI, MAC address, IP Address, etc.) are communicated to the system. The system is arranged to log the identifiers and associate those identifiers with the entry point (e.g., the wireless access point) into the IP based wireless network. Call connections from the mobile subscribers are monitored for various throughput and call quality based metrics. Call handoffs between the IP-based wireless communications network and the cellular telephony network are managed by the system based on the monitored call quality and throughput metrics on a per-access point basis using the registered identifiers. | 10-23-2014 |
20140313889 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING USER EQUIPMENT ACCESS IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for a Mobility Management Entity (MME) to control a connection of a User Equipment (UE) in a mobile communication system is provided. The method includes a first standby method including an MME in a wireless communication system that includes predicting an overload durating time when an overload duration time that is predicted, transmitting to an enhanced Node B (eNodeB) information on the reconnection method of the UE that is decided, wherein the plurality of reconnection methods represent methods for the UE attempting reconnection with the MME after a second standby time that is longer than the first standby time, and an MME reselection method for the UE attempting the reconnection with an MME which is different from the MME. | 10-23-2014 |
20140313890 | PROFILING WI-FI CHANNEL CONGESTION AND INTERFERENCE TO OPTIMIZE CHANNEL SELECTION - A method and apparatus are described including receiving, in a wireless receiver, channel interference and congestion window measurements, storing the received channel interference and congestion window measurements, determining a time period of interest, performing data aging responsive to the time period of interest, calculating channel interference and congestion score for an existing channel using data remaining after data aging was performed, calculating channel interference and congestion score for an alternative channel using data remaining after data aging was performed and selecting one of the existing channel and the alternative channel. | 10-23-2014 |
20140321271 | SIGNAL REDUCTION BASED ON RADIO LOAD - According to one embodiment, a packet data network gateway (PDN-GW) receives a UE congestion status message originating from an eNodeB indicating a UE is congested. In one embodiment, the PDN-GW receives a request message from a policy charging and rules function (PCRF) to create a new policy and charging control (PCC) rule for the UE. The PDN-GW discards the request message to prevent a request to create/modify a bearer for the UE from being sent by the PDN-GW, and prevent a response message denying the request message to create/modify the bearer for the UE from being sent by the eNodeB, reducing the number of bearer creation or modification messages being exchanged in the EPS. | 10-30-2014 |
20140321272 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONGESTION CONTROL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - Embodiments of wireless communication devices and method for congestion control in a wireless network are generally described herein. Some of these embodiments describe a method, performed by an evolved NodeB (eNodeB), that includes operations of determining that a congestion condition exists on the network. An example method can also include transmitting a suspension notification to a user equipment (UE), the UE being in an RRC_CONNECTED state with the eNodeB, to notify the UE that a radio bearer (RB) operating in the network will be suspended. Other methods and apparatuses are also described. | 10-30-2014 |
20140321273 | System and Method for Routing Data on a Packet Network - The disclosed embodiments include system and method for routing communications over a communications network. In one embodiment, a determination is made as to whether to establish a communication along a communication path based on network performance information. The disclosed embodiments provide several alternatives for establishing the communication and improving communications along the communication path in response to a determination that at least one network node along the communication path is impaired or congested. | 10-30-2014 |
20140328168 | APPARATUS, SYSTEM AND METHOD OF ADJUSTING TRANSMISSION INTERVALS FOR DISCOVERY FRAMES - Some demonstrative embodiments include apparatuses, systems and/or methods of adjusting transmission intervals for discovery frames. For example, an apparatus may include a wireless communication unit to communicate over a wireless communication medium according to a discovery scheme including a plurality of contention-based discovery windows, the wireless communication unit is to select a discovery window according to a transmission interval, to schedule transmission of a discovery frame for the discovery window, and to adjust the transmission interval based on whether or not the wireless communication medium is observed to be busy during a predefined time period of the discovery window. | 11-06-2014 |
20140328169 | NETWORK SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS USING OPERATIONAL FORWARDING DATA - A hybrid approach to populating forwarding tables in a virtual network obtains forwarding data both by simulating routing protocol behavior in the virtual network to build forwarding tables, and by importing operational forwarding data from corresponding physical nodes in a physical network. The use of operational forwarding data improves the fidelity of the simulation by closely conforming forwarding behavior in the simulation to that which occurs in the physical network. | 11-06-2014 |
20140328170 | Enhanced Performance Service-Based Profiling for Transport Networks - A method is presented of transporting data packets over a telecommunications transport network. The data packets are carried by a plurality of bearers. For each of the bearers, independently of the other bearers, bandwidth profiling is applied to the data packets of the bearer to designate as ‘green’ data packets that are conformant with a predetermined maximum Information Rate for the bearer. One or more data packets is buffered for up to a predetermined maximum ‘green’ buffer time, during which if transporting the data packet would not cause the maximum information rate of the bearer to be exceeded, the data packet is designated as a ‘green’ data packet. The data packets are forwarded for transporting over the transport network. If there is insufficient bandwidth available in the transport network to transport all data packets, data packets that are not designated as ‘green’ data packets are discarded, so as not to be transported through the transport network. | 11-06-2014 |
20140328171 | METHOD FOR OPERATING A COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK AND NETWORK ARRANGEMENT - A method for operating a communications network, in particular an Ethernet network is provided. Network devices that are coupled to the network have a switch device and a control device that is coupled to the switch device, and the switch device has at least one receiving port and a sending port for sending and receiving data via the communications network. Fuse devices for monitoring a particular data transfer rate are assigned to the receiving ports. The fuse devices block data reception at a particular receiving port when a previously determined maximum data transfer rate is exceeded. A possible annular structure using bidirectional communication paths and the limitation of the data transfer rate at the receiving ports improve fail-safety and error analysis in the event of transfer and hardware errors, in particular babbling idiot errors. The invention further relates to a network arrangement having a plurality of corresponding network devices which function according to said method. | 11-06-2014 |
20140334295 | Symmetric Service Chain Binding - A plurality of network nodes are deployed in a network, each network node configured to apply a service function to traffic that passes through the respective network nodes. A controller generates information for a service chain that involves application to traffic of one or more service functions at corresponding ones of the plurality of network nodes along a forward path through the one or more network nodes. The controller identifies one or more of the service functions within the service chain that is stateful. When one or more of the service functions of the service chain is stateful, the controller generates information for a reverse path through the one or more service nodes for the one or more stateful service functions. The controller binds a forward chain identifier for the forward path with a reverse chain identifier for the reverse path for the service chain. | 11-13-2014 |
20140334296 | Aggressive Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) Retransmission - Selectively ignoring congestion conditions may allow for more efficient transmission control protocol (TCP) communication in instance where reducing the transmission rate for a flow will not meaningfully mitigate congestion in the network or is otherwise undesirable. By way of example, congestion conditions may be ignored when a specific type of traffic flow is being communicated (e.g., short flows, high priority flows, etc.), when a traffic flow is being communicated at a low transmission rate, when a traffic flow is destined for certain type of network (e.g., a wireless network, etc.), or during any other situation in which reducing the transmission rate is undesirable. In some networks, a transmission rate is maintained until a certain number of duplicate ACKs are received (e.g., three duplicate ACKs, etc.) in order to ensure that congestion is indeed present before reducing quality of service (QoS). | 11-13-2014 |
20140334297 | PARALLEL REGISTRATION TO OFFLOAD PLMN WITH SINGLE SIM - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided. The apparatus establishes a first cellular communication link with a first cellular network based on a subscriber identifier, establishes a second cellular communication link with a second cellular network based on the subscriber identifier, and maintains the first cellular communication link concurrently with the second cellular communication link. | 11-13-2014 |
20140334298 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING TRAFFIC - An apparatus and a method for controlling traffic are disclosed. The apparatus for controlling traffic in accordance with the present invention includes: a communication unit configured to receive packets corresponding to a terminal; a service checking unit configured to check for a service corresponding to the packets by analyzing the packets; a terminal checking unit configured to analyze the packets and check a type of the terminal; a policy information storage unit configured to store policy information according to at least one of the service and the type of the terminal; and a traffic control unit configured to adjust a transmission rate of the packets corresponding to the service according to the policy information. | 11-13-2014 |
20140334299 | OVERLOAD CONTROL AND SUPERVISION FOR WIRELESS DEVICES - Methods, systems, and/or devices are described for are provided for transmission overload control and/or supervision of wireless devices. Tools and techniques may be provided for resolving issues associated with numerous wireless devices connected to a base station. For example, a transmission cycle for an uplink channel may be identified where the transmission cycle is discontinuous. Scheduling request and or Random Access Channel messages may be transmitted from a wireless device based on the discontinuous transmission cycle. Tools and techniques are also provided that may involve supervision of numerous wireless devices. Supervision may, for example, involve keep-alive messages transmitted in accordance with a timer. The supervision may be based on determination of, and transmissions related to, a list or lists of connected wireless devices. In some cases, the wireless devices may be delay tolerant. The wireless devices may include UEs that may have long sleep cycles and/or machine-type communications (MTC) devices. | 11-13-2014 |
20140334300 | TRANSMISSION MESSAGE GENERATING DEVICE AND VEHICLE-MOUNTED COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Each ECU transmits a frame to a frame generator. Then, the frame generator decomposes data contained in the received frame and then stores the data into a buffer memory, for each message type. The frame generator generates a message containing data to be transmitted to each ECU, and then transmits the message. In accordance with the state of a signal indicating the electric power supply status, the frame generator controls the permission or non-permission of transmission processing such that frame transmission is not performed to the ECU to which electric power supply from an electric power supply control device. When any communication part has received an abnormal frame, the frame generator does not include data contained in frames received afterward by the communication part, into a frame generated for other communication parts. | 11-13-2014 |
20140341016 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ENABLING EFFICIENT RESOURCE ALLOCATION - Embodiments of the present disclosure include a method and intermediate label switch router (LSR) for enabling efficient resource allocation for point to multi-point signaling. In one embodiment, upstream traffic specification information associated with a plurality of spoke nodes is received. The upstream traffic specification information is sent to a hub. Upstream flow specification information is received from the hub. The upstream flow specification information is used to allocate resources among the plurality of spoke nodes proportionally or in accordance with a resource sharing mode. | 11-20-2014 |
20140341017 | DIFFERENTIATION OF TRAFFIC FLOWS FOR UPLINK TRANSMISSION - In accordance with an example embodiment of the present invention, an apparatus comprising: at least one processor; and at least one memory including computer program code, wherein the at least one memory and the computer program code are configured to, with the at least one processor, cause the apparatus to perform at least the following: receive at least one traffic flow; receive at least one quality of service indication associated with the at least one traffic flow; create binding of the received at least one quality of service indication and information associated with the received at least one traffic flow; and assign a quality of service indication to a data packet for transmission based at least in part on the created binding. | 11-20-2014 |
20140341018 | TECHNIQUES FOR SELECTING SUBFRAME TYPE OR FOR INTERLEAVING SIGNALS FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS OVER UNLICENSED SPECTRUM - Methods and apparatuses are described in which an unlicensed spectrum is used for Long Term Evolution (LTE) communications. A first method includes comparing past transmission activity on an unlicensed spectrum to an activity threshold, transmitting a first subframe type in the unlicensed spectrum during a next active transmission when the past transmission activity is greater than the activity threshold, and transmitting a second subframe type in the unlicensed spectrum during a next active transmission when the past transmission activity is lesser than the activity threshold, the second subframe type comprising a more robust subframe type than the first subframe type. A second method includes generating one or both of PUCCH signals and PUSCH signals based on interleaved signals that increase nominal bandwidth occupancy in an unlicensed spectrum, and transmitting the generated signals in the unlicensed spectrum. A third method includes receiving the PUCCH signals and the PUSCH signals. | 11-20-2014 |
20140341019 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, CONTROL APPARATUS, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A communication system includes: a forwarding node(s) in which a first packet handling operation(s) for processing incoming packets is set and which processes packets in accordance with the packet handling operation(s); a first control apparatus setting the first packet handling operation(s) in the forwarding node(s); a flow control node(s) arranged upstream of the forwarding node(s); and a second control apparatus setting a second packet handling operation(s) in the flow control node(s). The flow control node(s) intercepts forwarding of packets that do not satisfy a predetermined condition(s) to the forwarding node(s) in accordance with the second packet handling operation(s). | 11-20-2014 |
20140341020 | SYSTEM FOR TESTING ETHERNET PATHS AND LINKS WITHOUT IMPACTING NON-TEST TRAFFIC - A system for testing Ethernet paths or links without adversely impacting non-test traffic. The system includes a test traffic generator that includes a scheduler that determines when a new test packet is generated. The test traffic generator includes a packet creator that builds a test packet and a transmitter for transmitting the test packet via the Ethernet path or link. The packet creator sends the test packet to the transmitter. The traffic generator includes a transmit credit block coupled to the transmitter or to the scheduler. The transmit credit block stores an amount of credits representing a number of bytes that are available to transmit and decrements the amount each time a non-test packet is communicated via the Ethernet path or link. | 11-20-2014 |
20140341021 | SERVICE RATE CONTROL METHOD, SYSTEM AND DEVICE - The present invention provides a service rate control method, system and device. The method includes: receiving, by a PGW, a PCC rule sent by a PCRF, wherein the PCC rule includes a service data flow identifier, a QCI and an ARP; and determining whether the PCC rule satisfies a new bearer establishment condition, if the PCC rule satisfies the new bearer establishment condition, establishing a first bearer according to the QCI and the ARP, and binding a service data flow corresponding to the service data flow identifier to the first bearer. The present invention solves the problem that rates of some service data flows will exceed their own GBRs continuously due to service characteristics, thereby leading a QoS of other service data flow sharing a same bearer as the service data flow cannot be satisfied, thus ensuring the degree of user experience. | 11-20-2014 |
20140341022 | NETWORK CODING METHOD, RELAY APPARATUS, AND SELECTION APPARATUS - Embodiments of the present invention relate to the field of communications, and provide a network coding method, a relay apparatus and a selection apparatus, which can avoid a case that a network coding system matrix is not full rank, and improve correctness of decoding. The network coding method includes: obtaining network coding information, where the network coding information includes information of a candidate network coding vector set and a candidate transmission rate set, and transmission rates in the candidate transmission rate set are in one-to-one correspondence with network coding vectors in the candidate network coding vector set; selecting a full rank network matrix according to the network coding information; and coding received source node information according to the full rank network matrix. The network coding method, relay apparatus and selection apparatus provided in the embodiments of the present invention are used for network coding. | 11-20-2014 |
20140347983 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR THROTTLING UNATTENDED APPLICATIONS AT USER DEVICES - Aspects of the present disclosure provide methods, apparatus and computer program products for throttling unattended applications at user devices (e.g., in an effort to limit transmission resource consumption by a user equipment (UE)). According to an aspect, the UE may receive an indication to restrict (throttle down) flow for traffic that appears to be unattended by a user. The UE may determine if a particular application is subject to flow restriction; and restrict flow of uplink traffic generated by the application, if the application is subject to flow restriction. Numerous other aspects are provided. | 11-27-2014 |
20140347984 | DATA TRANSFER IN MOBILE NETWORKS - The present invention relates to a bandwidth managing unit ( | 11-27-2014 |
20140347985 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SETTING UP LINK AT HIGH-SPEED IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed are a method and an apparatus for setting up a session at a high speed in a WLAN system or a LAN LTE system. A method for a station (STA) setting up a link at a high speed in a wireless communication system, according to one embodiment of the present invention, comprises the steps of: transmitting a request frame comprising information related to bandwidth requested by the STA to an access point (AP); and receiving from the AP a response frame, which is decided on the basis of the information related to the bandwidth that is requested, comprising information indicating whether to accommodate the request. | 11-27-2014 |
20140347986 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION CONTROL PROGRAM - A radio communication apparatus is disclosed that increases the speed of arrival-guaranteed data communication with another radio communication apparatus. The radio communication apparatus includes a MAC layer section and a protocol adaptation layer (PAL) section located higher than the MAC layer. The protocol adaptation layer section indicates, to the other radio communication apparatus, a virtual value greater than an actual size of a receiving buffer memory shared with the MAC layer, before starting reception of data. The protocol adaptation layer section writes the data received from the other radio communication apparatus and stored, to a data storage section from the receiving buffer memory. The protocol adaptation layer section generates a PAL acknowledgment and transmits the acknowledgment to the other radio communication apparatus when a total size of the written data reaches the virtual value. | 11-27-2014 |
20140347987 | Wireless Communication Device and Method for Adjusting Maximum Access Quantity - A wireless communication device and a method for adjusting a maximum number of accesses thereby are provided. The wireless communication device comprises a network speed providing module and a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) access number control module, wherein the network speed providing module is configured to provide a speed at a network side to a WLAN side; and the WLAN access number control module is configured to adjust a maximum number of accesses of a WLAN according to the speed at the network side provided by the network speed providing module. Through the disclosure, communication quality is ensured for an Internet user by adjusting a maximum number of user accesses of Wireless Fidelity (Wi-Fi); and when the network gets worse, the access of an excess user is not allowed or some users are removed according to a user rule. | 11-27-2014 |
20140347988 | NETWORK GATEWAY AND A METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING PACKETS OF A DATA STREAM - A network gateway comprises a buffer and a transmission module that is configured to transmit packets of a data stream from a source device to a user device via a network medium. The packets of the data stream are received from the source device by an uplink connection between the source device and the gateway, the packets are temporarily stored in the buffer and the packets are transmitted from the buffer to the user device by a downlink connection between the user device and the gateway, such that the downlink connection depends on the uplink connection. Furthermore, the network gateway comprises a protection module that is configured to provide a protection of the uplink connection, wherein access to the network medium is reserved for the packets of the data stream of the uplink connection. Finally the network gateway comprises a control module that is configured to monitor the buffer and to send an instruction to the protection module to reduce the protection of the uplink connection if a buffer overflow is detected. | 11-27-2014 |
20140347989 | Video Service Buffer Management in a Mobile Rate Control Enabled Network - A system for a mobile wireless device to receive and display a video stream while preventing overflow or starvation of a receive buffer of the mobile wireless device by requesting changes to video streaming or encoding rates of a video streaming device and by controlling a video playback frame rate is provided. A current receive buffer level of the mobile wireless device is used to make comparisons with several thresholds, the results of which are used to trigger actions. | 11-27-2014 |
20140355427 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING DYNAMIC QOS TO MAXIMIZE BANDWIDTH UTILIZATION - A network device is configured to implement a QoS function to optimize bandwidth utilization includes a memory configured to store a high priority throughput value and a low priority bandwidth value, a network device input to communicate a data stream including a plurality of data packets to and from at least one computer system on the internal network, and a network device output to communicate the data stream including the plurality of data packets to and from at least one computer system on the external network. The network device further includes a computer processor configured to execute steps stored in non-volatile memory, the steps including identifying high priority data packets in the data stream to detect the high priority throughput value, setting the low priority bandwidth value, and periodically adjusting the low priority bandwidth value. This QoS function can work without the knowledge of actual bandwidth for any link in the networks | 12-04-2014 |
20140355428 | Methods and System for Dynamic Spectrum Arbitrage Policy Driven Quality of Service - A dynamic spectrum arbitrage (DSA) system includes a dynamic spectrum policy controller (DPC) and a dynamic spectrum controller (DSC) that together dynamically manage the allocation and use of resources (e.g., spectrum resources) across different networks. The DSC component may include wired or wireless connections to eNodeBs, a policy and charging rules function (PCRF) component/server, and various other network components. The PCRF may be configured to receive eNodeB congestion state information from the eNodeB, information identifying wireless devices attached to the eNodeB, categorize each of the identified wireless devices into a category selected from a plurality of categories, select a subset of the identified wireless devices based on the category into which they are categorized, and perform congestion response operations on the selected wireless devices so as to reduce the congestion of the eNodeB. | 12-04-2014 |
20140355429 | InterfaCing between a Dynamic Spectrum Policy Controller and a Dynamic Spectrum Controller - A dynamic spectrum arbitrage (DSA) system may include a dynamic spectrum policy controller (DPC) and a dynamic spectrum controller (DSC) that together dynamically manage the allocation and use of resources (e.g., spectrum resources) across different networks. A dynamic spectrum arbitrage application part (DSAAP) protocol/component/module may allow, facilitate, support, or augment communications between the DSC and DPC so as to improve the efficiency and speed of the DSA system. The DSAAP may allow the DPC and/or DSC components to better pool resources across the different networks, better monitor traffic and resource usage in the various networks, to more efficiently communicate bids and bidding information, to quickly and efficiently register and deregister components, and better perform backoff operations. The DSAAP may improve the DSA resource auctioning operations by improving the performance and efficiency of the procedures for bidding, generating invoices, advertizing resources, requesting resources, purchasing resources, validating bid credentials, etc. | 12-04-2014 |
20140355430 | Methods and Systems for Data Context and Management via Dynamic Spectrum Controller and Dynamic Spectrum Policy Controller - A dynamic spectrum arbitrage (DSA) system may include a dynamic spectrum policy controller (DPC) and a dynamic spectrum controller (DSC) that together dynamically manage the allocation and use of resources (e.g., spectrum resources) across different networks. The DPC and DSC may store DSC context information, and use this information to perform various DSA operations. For example, the DSC may determine whether there is bandwidth available for allocation within cells in a first telecommunication network, generate a resource register request message that identifies the amount of bandwidth that is available, and send the generated resource register request message to the DPC using a DSAAP component/protocol. The DSC may receive the resource register response message and a bid success message via the DSAAP, and send a resources allocated message to the DPC via the DSAAP to commit the requested amount of bandwidth for use by the second telecommunication network. | 12-04-2014 |
20140355431 | Request Modification for Transparent Capacity Management in a Carrier Network - Some embodiments provide a capacity management agent that modifies content requests to adjust bandwidth consumption when streaming requested content from a content provider to a requesting user. The modifications include modifying a URL or header information of the request. The agent performs a process that receives a request for content of a content provider. | 12-04-2014 |
20140355432 | Adaptive Bandwidth Control with Defined Priorities for Different Networks - A computer implemented method, apparatus, and computer usable program code to receive data from a source at a plurality of gateways for distribution using a selected priority. The data is transmitted from the plurality of gateways to a plurality of receivers using the selected priority. Every gateway in the plurality of gateways has an adaptive bandwidth control process and a respective set of parameters for controlling the adaptive bandwidth control process for sending the data at the selected priority. Transmission of the data from each gateway for the selected priority has a different impact on other traffic at different gateways in the plurality gateways for the selected-priority when different values are set for the set of parameters for the different gateways. | 12-04-2014 |
20140355433 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SCHEDULING COMMUNICATION TRAFFIC FLOWS - In one or more embodiments of the disclosed technology, an Access Point (AP) schedules communication traffic flows or service tasks between an Access Point (AP) and one or more member stations in a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN). The communication traffic flows or service tasks may include both control and management flows and data traffic flows. The communication traffic flows or service tasks may include traffic flows or streams of different types, each of which may have different service intervals. The order of service tasks can be changed from cycle to cycle, randomly, by rotation, or based on historical delay records. | 12-04-2014 |
20140362687 | Method And Apparatus For Improved Multicast Rate Control Using Feedback Mobiles - Various methods and devices are provided to address the need for improved multicast operation. A sender transmits ( | 12-11-2014 |
20140362688 | System and Method for an Agile Wireless Access Network - A system and method for agile wireless access network is provided. A method embodiment for agile radio access network management includes determining, by a network controller, capabilities and neighborhood relations of radio nodes in the radio access network. The network controller then configures a backhaul network infrastructure for the radio access network in accordance with the capabilities and the neighborhood relations of the radio nodes. | 12-11-2014 |
20140362689 | MECHANISM TO ENABLE WIFI OFFLOAD BASED ON POWER PREFERENCE OF USER EQUIPMENT - In typical UEs, scanning for WiFi access points (APs) can consume a significant amount of power. This scanning occurs when the UE is connected through the cellular network, but does not occur when the UE is connected to a WiFi network. As a result, offloading a UE from a cellular network to a WiFi network can allow the UE to conserve power. An issue with existing cellular networks is that the UE cannot inform a cellular network that the UE is running low on power, and therefore cannot direct the cellular network to offload the UE for power conservation reasons. A technique discussed herein allows the UE to indicate its power saving needs to the cellular network. In response, the cellular network can lower (or raise) a particular threshold, so that the UE now exceeds (or no longer exceeds) the threshold, and initiates offloading. | 12-11-2014 |
20140362690 | COMMUNICATION APPARTUS, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A communication apparatus includes a packet output unit that performs normal transmission of a normal packet and retransmission of at least one retransmission packet, a feedback receiver that receives a retransmission request that designates a retransmission packet to request retransmission, and a controller that determines that the retransmission packet for the received retransmission request is to be transmitted or is scheduled to be transmitted based on an amount of data scheduled to be transmitted for a predetermined period. | 12-11-2014 |
20140362691 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR AUTONOMOUS OPERATION IN CELLULAR-BASED LOCAL AREA NETWORKS - In accordance with an example embodiment of the present invention, a method comprises configuring an autonomous mode for traffic offloading; and indicating the autonomous mode towards at least one terminal, wherein said autonomous mode supports local area radio access connectivity by internet protocols to reduce control from a core network. Related apparatus and computer program product are also described. | 12-11-2014 |
20140362692 | DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD, ACCESS POINT, RELAY NODE, AND DATA NODE FOR PACKET AGGREGATION - Embodiments of the present invention relate to a data transmission method, an access point, a relay node, and a data node for packet aggregation. The data transmission method for packet aggregation includes: determining an aggregation relay node in a service area, for aggregating a Medium Access Control (MAC) frame that is sent by a data node to an access point (AP) and is forwarded by the aggregation relay node; and receiving an aggregated MAC frame sent by the aggregation relay node, where the aggregated MAC frame is a MAC frame that is sent by the data node and is aggregated by the aggregation relay node. According to the embodiments of the present invention, a relay node is selectively used to aggregate data, so that aggregated packet data quickly reaches a scale for transmission, and the packet data is sent to a destination node within a short time, thereby significantly enhancing quality of service of a delay-sensitive application service. | 12-11-2014 |
20140362693 | Systems and Methods for Dynamically Adjusting QoS Parameters - A method for dynamically adjusting QoS parameters associated with a virtual circuit is disclosed. The virtual circuit includes a first end connected to a first router and a second end connected to a second router. The method includes receiving an offer message at the second router, and sending a request message to the first router. The offer message includes a first set of QoS parameters and the request message includes a second set of QoS parameters. The method further includes receiving a request confirmation message at the second router, receiving a new offer message at the second router, and sending information compliant with the second set of QoS parameters to the first router. The new offer message includes the second set of QoS parameters. | 12-11-2014 |
20140362694 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR DYNAMICALLY SWITCHING BETWEEN UNICAST AND MULTICAST DELIVERY OF MEDIA CONTENT IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Systems and methods for dynamically switching between unicast and multicast delivery of media content are disclosed. An exemplary method includes a user device 1) accessing, over a wireless network, a unicast stream carrying data representative of a media content program, 2) detecting, during the accessing of the unicast stream, an instruction to switch to a multicast stream carrying data representative of the media content program, and 3) switching, in response to the instruction, from the accessing of the unicast stream to accessing the multicast stream by way of the wireless network. Corresponding systems and methods are also disclosed. | 12-11-2014 |
20140362695 | DOWNLINK FLOW CONTROL - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate providing flow control feedback for controlling downlink data transmission rates. Various schemes can be utilized to send the flow control feedback from an access terminal to a base station. For example, a control PDU (e.g., MAC control PDU, PDCP control PDU) can be generated based upon a level of resource utilization of the access terminal, and sent to the base station for controlling the downlink data transmission rate. Following this example, a type of control PDU, a value included within the control PDU, etc. can be selected as a function of the level of resource utilization. By way of another illustration, a CQI report that includes a value selected as a function of the level of resource utilization associated with the access terminal can be generated and transmitted to the base station for controlling the downlink data transmission rate. | 12-11-2014 |
20140362696 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ADAPTIVE CHANNEL SCANNING WITHIN A WIRELESS NETWORK - An access point device that is adapted to a wireless network and a wired network is disclosed. The access point includes a transceiver to receive wireless frames from a plurality of wireless devices of the wireless network, respectively, and at least one component to process information extracted from the wireless frames and to control channel scanning based upon at least one of an amount of wireless device traffic and a type of call. | 12-11-2014 |
20140369189 | METHOD OF CONTROLLING PACKET TRANSMISSION IN NETWORK SYSTEM AND NETWORK SYSTEM TRANSMITTING PACKET USING PSEUDO-TCP AGENT - Provided are a method of controlling packet transmission in a network system and a network system that transmits a packet using a pseudo-transmission control protocol (TCP) agent. The method includes, when a packet is received from a transmitting device or a previous router, storing, at a router, the packet in a buffer and determining whether traffic exceeds a packet processing capacity, when it is determined that the traffic exceeds the packet processing capacity, controlling, at the router, an incoming packet rate to be reduced, when a congestion window is not filled with the packet to be transmitted to a next router or a receiving device due to the reduction in the incoming packet rate, waiting, at the router, until the congestion window is fully filled with a packet received thereafter, and transmitting, at the router, the packets filling the congestion window to the next router or the receiving device. | 12-18-2014 |
20140369190 | TIER-BASED CONGESTION CONTROL FOR MULTIMODE USER EQUIPMENT - A network device may receive, from a user device, a connection request. The connection request may correspond to a request to access a first network. The network device may determine a network congestion level associated with the first network. The network device may determine priority class information associated with the user device. The network device may selectively provide access to the first network based on the network congestion level and the priority class information. The network device may selectively provide access to a second network when access to the first network is denied. | 12-18-2014 |
20140369191 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING SOURCE TRANSMISSION RATE FOR VIDEO STREAMING BASED ON QUEUING DELAY - A method for controlling transmission rate for video streaming based on queuing delay, includes determining a queuing delay for a packet transmitted from a source to a destination over a packet switched network and adjusting a transmission rate of the source in response to the determined queuing delay. | 12-18-2014 |
20140369192 | ACCESS METHOD AND SYSTEM, USER EQUIPMENT, AND NETWORK SIDE DEVICE - Embodiments of the present invention provide an access method and system, a user equipment, and a network side device. The method includes: receiving, by a user equipment, a first message that carries an identifier of a second network access point, where the second network access point can perform air interface offloading on a first network in which a user equipment is currently located; and when the first message carries identifiers of a plurality of second network access points, selecting, by the user equipment, one second network access point from the plurality of second network access points according to first auxiliary information, and accessing the selected second network access point. By adopting the technical solutions in the embodiments of the present invention, an access delay can be effectively shortened, and access efficiency can improved, thereby effectively implementing offloading. | 12-18-2014 |
20140369193 | UNSCHEDULED PEER POWER SAVE MODE - Embodiments of unscheduled peer power save systems, devices and methods are disclosed. For example, a method of saving power for nodes configured to communicate via a direct link is provided. In one embodiment, among others, the method comprises forming, at an access point node (AP node), a indication frame for a client node, when no service period has occurred for the client node for a period of time at least equal to an indication window; sending the formed indication frame from the AP node to the client node through an access point; receiving, at the client node, the peer traffic indication from the access point; and determining, at the client node, that the AP node has traffic to send to the client node based on the indication frame. | 12-18-2014 |
20140376366 | IP MULTICAST LAYERED DISTRIBUTION METHOD AND SYSTEM - The present invention relates to IP network communication technology. It provides a kind of IP multicast data layer distribution method and system. The method includes: first code original multicast data into multiple sub-flow, separately specify different shunt sub-source for every sub-flow, distribute sub-group address, create sub-group state, etc, form shunt structure. Then the sink send join news to each shunt sub-source, join each shunt sub-source sub-group and become the leaf node of each sub-tree. And then each shunt sub-source determine the intermediate node according to the port receiving join news and construct multicast distribution-tree. If the overlapping portion between the multicast distribution trees produce congestion, in the congestion nodes network coding is used to eliminate congestion and construct coding sub-tree according to the way of building multicast distribution tree from the below of the coding nodes. | 12-25-2014 |
20140376367 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DISTRIBUTION OF POLICY ENFORCEMENT POINT - The disclosure herein describes an edge device of a network for distributed policy enforcement. During operation, the edge device receives an initial packet for an outgoing traffic flow, and identifies a policy being triggered by the initial packet. The edge device performs a reverse lookup to identify at least an intermediate node that is previously traversed by the initial packet and traffic parameters associated with the initial packet at the identified intermediate node. The edge device translates the policy based on the traffic parameters at the intermediate node, and forwards the translated policy to the intermediate node, thus facilitating the intermediate node in applying the policy to the traffic flow. | 12-25-2014 |
20140376368 | COMPOUND TOKEN BUCKETS FOR BURST-MODE ADMISSION CONTROL - Methods and apparatus for compound token buckets usable for burst-mode admission control are disclosed. A peak burst rate and a sustained burst rate of work requests that are to be supported at a work target are determined. The maximum token populations of a peak-burst token bucket and a sustained-burst token bucket are configured, based on the peak burst rate and the sustained burst rate respectively. In response to receiving a work request directed at the work target, a determination to accept the work request for execution is made based at least in part on the token population of the peak-burst token bucket and/or the sustained-burst token bucket. | 12-25-2014 |
20140376369 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DYNAMICALLY ADJUSTING UPLINK-DOWNLINK CONFIGURATION - Embodiments of the disclosure provide a method and apparatus for dynamically adjusting UL-DL configuration. In the method according to embodiments of the present invention, downlink traffic load and uplink traffic load for transmission between a BS and a UE in a TDD system may be obtained, a UL-DL traffic load relation may be determined based on the downlink traffic load and the uplink traffic load and a UL-DL configuration may be selected based on the UL-DL traffic load relation. | 12-25-2014 |
20140376370 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR TRAFFIC AGGREGATION ON MULTIPLE WAN BACKHAULS AND MULTIPLE DISTINCT LAN NETWORKS - In accordance with embodiments disclosed herein, there are provided methods, systems, mechanisms, techniques, and apparatuses for traffic aggregation on multiple WAN backhauls and multiple distinct LAN networks; for traffic load balancing on multiple WAN backhauls and multiple distinct LAN networks; and for performing self-healing operations utilizing multiple WAN backhauls serving multiple distinct LAN networks. For example, in one embodiment, a first Local Area Network (LAN) access device is to establish a first LAN; a second LAN access device is to establish a second LAN; a first Wide Area Network (WAN) backhaul connection is to provide the first LAN access device with WAN connectivity; a second WAN backhaul connection is to provide the second LAN access device with WAN connectivity; and a traffic aggregation unit is to form a logically bonded WAN interface over the first WAN backhaul and the second WAN backhaul. In some embodiments an optional traffic de-aggregation unit may be used. | 12-25-2014 |
20140376371 | Method and Device for Conveying Data Across at Least Two Domains - A Method and device for conveying data across at least two domains A method and a device for conveying data across at least two domains are provided, wherein at least one service is advertised across the at least two domains; wherein the at least one service is requested across the at least two domains; wherein the at least one service is utilized across the at least two domains. Furthermore, a communication system is suggested comprising said device. | 12-25-2014 |
20140376372 | Session Management Method and System Based on M2M Application, and Apparatus - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a session management method and system based on an M2M application and an apparatus. In one embodiment, a session management method is based on a machine-to-machine application. Gateway equipment information and group number information of a group user device are acquired and it is determined that group information of the group user device has changed. A gateway equipment is instructed to execute bearer change processing on the group user device. The instructing is based on the gateway equipment information and the group number information of the group user device. The bearer change processing is executed on the group user device. | 12-25-2014 |
20150009809 | Intelligent Software-Defined Networking Based Service Paths - An example method embodiment for networking includes managing, by a network controller, network services for one or more network devices connected to the network controller. Managing network services includes receiving a packet in a traffic flow from a network device. The network device is one of the one or more network devices connected to the network controller. Managing network services further includes determining applicable services for the packet, transmitting the packet to a service provider in accordance with the applicable services for the packet, receiving, from the service provider, service results corresponding to the packet, and creating a forwarding entry providing instructions for handling the traffic flow in a service path table at the network device in accordance with the service results corresponding to the packet. | 01-08-2015 |
20150009810 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, PROTOCOL PROCESSING COMPUTER, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A communication system couples a first communication network including a data transfer apparatus and a second communication network including a router to each other. The first communication network is constructed by centralized control by the network control computer. The second communication network is constructed by autonomous distributed control by using a protocol on an IP layer of the router. The router transmits protocol data requiring protocol processing on the IP layer to the data transfer apparatus. The data transfer apparatus transfers the protocol data from the router to the protocol processing computer. The protocol processing computer being configured to: carry out, when receiving the protocol data, the protocol processing on the IP layer for the received protocol data; and hold identification information on an interface included in the data transfer apparatus for transferring the protocol data to the protocol processing computer. | 01-08-2015 |
20150009811 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR OPTIMIZING DATA ROUTE IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed are a method and an apparatus for optimizing a data route in a mobile communication system. A method of setting an internet protocol (IP) session in a mobile communication system, by a Mobile Station (MS) includes querying and obtaining an IP address of a corresponding node corresponding to a predetermined application and an IP address of a corresponding gateway corresponding to the corresponding node. The method also includes accessing the corresponding gateway based on the IP address of the corresponding gateway. The method further includes receiving a corresponding gateway allocation IP address from the corresponding gateway and forming a tunnel between the MS and the corresponding gateway. The method includes setting an IP session between the MS and the corresponding node based on the IP address of the corresponding node and the corresponding gateway allocation IP address. | 01-08-2015 |
20150009812 | NETWORK LOAD CONTROL METHOD AND REGISTRATION SERVER - A network load control method and a registration server are disclosed. The method includes, upon acquiring that a target area is overloaded, the registration server adding a node into the target area, or, upon acquiring that the load in the target area is lower than a load threshold, the registration server selecting a node in the target area and making the selected node exit from the target area. | 01-08-2015 |
20150009813 | METHOD OF CONTROLLING MACHINE-TYPE COMMUNICATIONS (MTC) IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - There is provided a method of controlling machine-type communications (MTC) in a wireless communications network ( | 01-08-2015 |
20150009814 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND NETWORK SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING NETWORK CONGESTION - The invention provides a method, an apparatus and a system for controlling network congestion. The method includes: sending a control frame or a beacon frame to a station in a network when network congestion occurs, so as to instruct the station to enlarge a contention window when the station needs to send data. The method can achieve the congestion control for a network before collision occurs to a station, avoiding more serious network congestion caused by each station still contending for a channel after the network congestion occurs; since an access point can send a control frame or a beacon frame to the station when determining that congestion occurs to the current network, to instruct the station which needs to send data to re-determine a backoff time, a rapidly congestion relief of the whole network is achieved, and also a fair channel contention of each station is guaranteed. | 01-08-2015 |
20150016247 | METHODS AND APPARATUSES FOR DISTRIBUTED PACKET FLOW CONTROL - Techniques for network packet flow management are described herein. For example, example methods may include receiving, at a first network device, a first flow identifier that identifies a first content of a first packet flow and a second flow identifier that identifies a second content of a second packet flow, wherein the first flow identifier and the second flow identifier are generated by a second network device. Such methods may also include receiving priority information indicating that the first content has a first priority and that the second content has a second priority that is lower than the first priority. Moreover, example methods may include transmitting the first packet flow and a modified second packet flow that includes the priority information to one or more other network devices. | 01-15-2015 |
20150016248 | SYSTEM FOR COMMUNICATION IN A TACTICAL NETWORK - A system is described for communication in a tactical network. A gateway is communicatively couplable to one or more tactical nodes and to one or more other gateways. The gateway is programmed to transmit information to and/or receive information from other gateways. Information exchanged includes gateway attributes, link attributes, service availability, and/or data availability. The gateway optionally provides quality of service, distributed persistence, load balancing, and/or transformation services. Services are provided in a modular, service-oriented architecture (SOA) to accommodate the addition of services and/or applications. | 01-15-2015 |
20150016249 | EDGE-GATEWAY MULTIPATH METHOD AND SYSTEM - In one exemplary aspect, an edge-gateway multipath method includes the step of providing an edge device in a local network communicatively coupled with a cloud-computing service in a cloud-computing network. A set of wide area network (WAN) links connected to the edge device are automatically detected. The WAN links are automatically measured without the need for an external router. The edge device is communicatively coupled with a central configuration point in the cloud-computing network. The method further includes the step of downloading, from the central configuration point, an enterprise-specific configuration data into the edge device. The enterprise-specific configuration data includes the gateway information. The edge device is communicatively coupled with a gateway in the cloud-computing network. The communicatively coupling of the edge device with the gateway includes a multipath (MP) protocol. | 01-15-2015 |
20150016250 | Capacity Estimates Using Burst-Trailer Trains - The present invention relates to methods and devices ( | 01-15-2015 |
20150016251 | CONGESTION INDUCED VIDEO SCALING - Access nodes and methods adjust a bit rate of a data stream in a communication network. The access nodes and methods have a packet inspection unit configured to inspect one or more of the data packets to determine that the data stream includes video data. A congestion unit is coupled to the packet inspection unit and is configured to determine a level of congestion in the communication network, the level of congestion associated with a capacity of the wireless channel, the level of congestion capable of varying over time, and the capacity of the wireless channel capable of varying with the level of congestion. A video scaling unit is configured to adjust the bit rate of the data stream responsive to the packet inspection unit and the congestion unit. | 01-15-2015 |
20150016252 | SOURCE-DRIVEN SWITCH PROBING WITH FEEDBACK REQUEST - Embodiments relate to proactively probing the packet queues of elements in a physical or virtual network to predict and prevent the occurrence of congestion points. An aspect includes receiving a first feedback request at a central controller connected to a plurality of switches in a network. The first feedback request includes a request to periodically probe a status of queues of switches in the network. A second feedback request is then transmitted to one or all the switches in a path leading to a designated destination. Responses to the second feedback request are received at the central controller from a designated proxy switch, which aggregated the responses into a single data packet. Accordingly, the responses extracted from the single data packet at the central controller are used to preventing future congestion points. | 01-15-2015 |
20150023159 | PROXY SERVER ASSOCIATED WITH A MOBILE CARRIER FOR ENHANCING MOBILE TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT IN A MOBILE NETWORK - A proxy server or component associated with or residing on a mobile carrier or mobile operator side for enhancing mobile traffic management in a mobile network and system and methods therefor are disclosed. The proxy server, in some embodiments, can delay, clump, block or otherwise manage incoming traffic initiated by one or more application servers and directed to one or more mobile applications associated with the one or more applications servers installed on a mobile device. The proxy server can manage the incoming traffic based on traffic category, time criticality, priority and/or other criteria. The proxy server can further transfer the traffic that was delayed to the mobile device in response to a trigger such as promotion of a radio state on the mobile device or a start of an interval for transferring incoming to the mobile device and outgoing traffic from the mobile device. | 01-22-2015 |
20150023160 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR ENHANCING MOBILE TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT AT A PROXY SERVER ASSOCIATED WITH OR RESIDING ON A MOBILE CARRIER FOR ALIGNING TRAFFIC IN THE MOBILE NETWORK - Systems and methods for enhancing mobile traffic management at a proxy server or component associated with or residing on a mobile carrier or mobile operator side for aligning traffic in the mobile network are disclosed. The proxy server, in some embodiments, can align requests initiated by one or more third-party servers or application servers with a radio state of a mobile device to reduce a number of network connection. The proxy server can align the requests by delaying the requests such that the requests that were delayed can be transferred to the mobile device over a single connection between the mobile device and a mobile network. | 01-22-2015 |
20150023161 | MODIFYING SYSTEM TIMERS FOR OPTIMIZING MOBILE TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT - Systems and methods for optimizing mobile traffic management are disclosed. In a mobile device, network stack timers or protocol stack timers are modified to extend delay tolerance of applications for radio alignment. In an embodiment, using a variable gating delay, that takes into consideration the delay tolerance of applications that is extended and other information such as radio state information, are used to align and transfer outgoing traffic from multiple applications to one or more application servers, receive requests and/or responses from one or more application servers or a carrier-side proxy server to minimize the number of times the mobile device connects to the network, reducing the power consumption on the mobile device and unnecessary signaling in the network. | 01-22-2015 |
20150023162 | EXTENDING DELAY TOLERANCE OF MOBILE APPLICATIONS FOR OPTIMIZING MOBILE TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT - Systems and methods for extending delay tolerance of mobile applications to optimize mobile traffic management are disclosed. In a mobile device, network stack timers or protocol stack timers are modified to extend delay tolerance of applications for radio alignment. In an embodiment, tolerance of mobile applications on a mobile device to delay in establishing a connection to a wireless network is extended by an application or a local proxy on a mobile device. Based on the tolerance that is extended, requests intercepted from the mobile applications are aggregated, over a period of time, such that transfer of the requests intercepted during the period of time is delayed. This minimizes the number of times the mobile device connects to the network, reducing the power consumption on the mobile device and unnecessary signaling in the network. | 01-22-2015 |
20150023163 | System and Methods for Multi-Objective Cell Switch-Off in Wireless Networks - Embodiments are provided for a multi-objective scheme for solving a cell switch-off problem. The multi-objective solution seeks to minimize or reduce network energy consumption by switching off some of the cells in the network while allowing enough capacity according to traffic needs and quality of service requirement. An embodiment method includes determining, for each one of a plurality of established traffic profiles, a set of solutions with respect to a number of active cells from a plurality of cells in the network and an aggregate network capacity. The method further includes matching a given traffic profile to one of the established traffic profiles, and evaluating performances of the solutions corresponding to that traffic profile. A solution from the solutions is then selected in accordance with the evaluation. The selected solution indicates which of the cells in the wireless network to be switched off. | 01-22-2015 |
20150023164 | Capillary Device Charging - When a capillary network device connects to user equipment and the user equipment establishes or modifies a bearer to support traffic from the capillary device, the user equipment may request that the network provide some indication that the user equipment will not be charged for the traffic. The network may indicate to the user equipment that the flow is sponsored or that the user equipment will otherwise not be charged for the flow. Existing messages between a UE/GW, P-GW, PCRF, and an application server (AS) may be modified and new messages may be used so that the user equipment can request a guarantee of sponsorship or of non-charging and so that the AS may indicate to the user equipment that the flow is sponsored. The messaging can also be used by user equipment on its own behalf. | 01-22-2015 |
20150023165 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE CAPABLE OF MEASURING AND INTERWORKING BETWEEN DIFFERENT RADIO TECHNOLOGIES AND METHOD THEREOF - A communication device includes a first transceiving circuit, a second transceiving circuit and a processing circuit. The first transceiving circuit and the second transceiving circuit are respectively configured to communicate by utilizing a first radio access technology and a second radio access technology. The processing circuit is coupled with the first transceiving circuit and the second transceiving circuit for configuring the first transceiving circuit to receive a measurement control message from a first communication station to measure a signal quality of a second communication station. The processing circuit configures the second transceiving circuit to measure the signal quality of the second communication station when the first communication station is in a high traffic load condition or when the first communication station requests the communication device to offload at least some traffic load of data communications to the second communication station. | 01-22-2015 |
20150023166 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING NETWORK ACCESS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention is directed to a wireless communication system. Specifically, the present invention is directed to a method of controlling network access and an apparatus therefore, wherein the method comprises: receiving a message related with access parameters, the message including a first N-bit field, a second N-bit field and a third 1-bit field, wherein the first N-bit field indicates a maximum number of slots the wireless device is to delay due to random back-off between consecutive access probes, the second N-bit field indicates a maximum number of slots the wireless device is to delay due to random back-off between successive enhanced access probe sequences, and the third 1-bit field for indicating a network congestion situation. | 01-22-2015 |
20150023167 | Method, Device, and System for Processing Acknowledgement Packet - Embodiments of the present application disclose a method, a device, and a system for processing an acknowledgement packet, and relate to the field of communications technologies. A sending period and a data volume threshold are set on a data transmission device, and the data volume threshold is used to control acknowledgement packets sent by the data transmission device to a data sending end within each sending period, so that a total data volume that is reflected by all the sent acknowledgement packets as having been acknowledged by a data receiving end is within the data volume threshold. Thereby a problem of sending a large quantity of packets by the data receiving end is solved. | 01-22-2015 |
20150029839 | APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR BLOCK ACKNOWLEDGMENT COMPRESSION - Systems, methods, and devices for compressing block acknowledgment (ACK) frames/packets are described herein. In some aspects, a method of communicating in a wireless network includes a compressed block acknowledgment frame including a bitmap, the bitmap indicating receipt of a plurality of fragments of a single data unit. The method further includes transmitting the compressed block acknowledgment frame. | 01-29-2015 |
20150029840 | TRANSMITTING DATA VIA A PRIVATE SUB-NETWORK OF A SERVICE PROVIDER NETWORK - A first device may receive data associated with a second device from within a first network and independently of a second network. The second device may include a sensor or an application to form or process a data record. The first device may establish a bearer between the first device and a particular user device, of multiple user devices, in accordance with a bearer policy; and provide the data towards the particular user device via a first sub-network, of multiple sub-networks, of the second network and via the bearer. The first sub-network may be independent of a second sub-network of the multiple sub-networks. The second sub-network may permit user device data to be transmitted between the multiple user devices. The first sub-network and the second sub-network may consume different levels of network resources. | 01-29-2015 |
20150029841 | SYSTEM FOR SPECIFYING CAUSE OF MICROBURST OCCURRENCE AND METHOD FOR SPECIFYING CAUSE OF MICROBURST OCCURRENCE - A microburst detection apparatus configured to detect a microburst of a control plane packet and to extract, from the control plane packet which forms the detected microburst, call information for identifying call of a data plane, a packet extraction apparatus configured to extract a data plane packet corresponding to the extracted call information, and a cause analysis apparatus configured to analyze a payload of an application layer of the extracted data plane packet, specify a service/application which causes occurrence of the microburst, count the number of data plane packets in response to the specified service/application, and display the counted number of packets associated with the specified service/application are included. | 01-29-2015 |
20150029842 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR THE TRANSMISSION OF DATA AND STREAMS CONTAINING VIDEO DATA DVIDEO IN A CHANNEL WITH GIVEN BITRATE - System and method for multiplexing data Di and one or more streams containing video data D | 01-29-2015 |
20150029843 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING WEB SERVICE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to an apparatus and method for providing a web service in a wireless communication system. The apparatus for providing the web service includes: a proxy unit receiving/sending data through the internet; a packet data conversion protocol (PDCP) unit producing and outputting at least one PDCP protocol data unit (PDU) by using the data; and a control unit monitoring the data received from the proxy unit and controlling the proxy unit to transmit data of a size acceptable by the PDCP unit on the basis of the data capacity of the PDCP unit. | 01-29-2015 |
20150029844 | METHOD AND A COMMUNICATION TERMINAL FOR MODULATING A MESSAGE FOR TRANSMISSION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - The present invention is directed to a communication terminal in a wireless communication network. The communication terminal includes a receiver configured to receive a first message comprising a media access control (MAC) frame at a first transmission rate from a communication device in the wireless communication network; a message generator configured to generate a second message in response to the received first message, the second message comprising a control response frame; and a transmitter configured to transmit the control response frame at a second transmission rate, wherein the second transmission rate is lower than or equal to the first transmission rate; and wherein the second transmission rate is dependent on a difference in qualities between downlink communication and uplink communication between the communication device and the communication terminal. Methods of modulating a message for transmission in the wireless communication network are also disclosed. | 01-29-2015 |
20150029845 | MECHANISM TO PREVENT LOAD IN 3GPP NETWORK DUE TO MTC DEVICE TRIGGERS - Embodiments of methods and apparatus to manage MTC device trigger load in a wireless network are described herein. Other embodiments may be described and claimed. | 01-29-2015 |
20150036488 | DYNAMIC GROUPING AND CONFIGURATION OF ACCESS POINTS - A method is described for moving one or more access points between neighboring enterprise networks such that one or more threshold requirements of the networks are met. By reconfiguring access points to move between enterprise networks, the method provides a highly flexible network system that utilizes environmental and/or operational data to dynamically meet the needs of associated client devices and consumers. | 02-05-2015 |
20150036489 | GRANULAR NETWORK ACCESS CONTROL AND METHODS THEREOF - A method and system that enhances the existing access barring mechanism as specified in the current 3GPP specification is disclosed. The method disclosed provides enhancing the access barring mechanism to accommodate application level barring between the User equipment (UE) and the network. The method disclosed individually restricts or permits access of network to every requesting application on the UE, based on granular category of the application and priority levels of the application within the granular category. The method disclosed also specifies handling of back-off timers; reject cause values and Access Point Name (APN) configuration by Access Stratum (AS) and Non Access Stratum (NAS) layer to support application level barring of UEs using the enhanced access barring mechanism. The enhanced access barring mechanism enables providing service to applications independent of other barred applications or priorities. The method disclosed provides a mechanism for access control for connected mode UEs. | 02-05-2015 |
20150036490 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, CONTROL DEVICE, BASE STATION DEVICE, SYSTEM CONTROL METHOD AND DEVICE CONTROL METHOD - A mobile communication system includes a control device and a base station device. Data communication between the control device and the base station device is conducted using a fixed-length data size and a variable-length data size. The control device transmits information indicating whether a data size of the data communication has a fixed length or a variable length. The base station device receives the information from the control device. | 02-05-2015 |
20150036491 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, CONTROL DEVICE, BASE STATION DEVICE, SYSTEM CONTROL METHOD AND DEVICE CONTROL METHOD - A mobile communication system includes a control device and a base station device. Data communication between the control device and the base station device is conducted using a fixed-length data size and a variable-length data size. The control device transmits information indicating whether a data size of the data communication has a fixed length or a variable length. The base station device receives the information from the control device. | 02-05-2015 |
20150036492 | TERMINAL TRIGGERING METHOD AND RELATED DEVICE - The present invention discloses a terminal triggering terminal and a related device, where, the terminal triggering method includes: receiving, by a network device, a trigger request message sent by a server to a terminal, where, the trigger request message is configured to trigger the terminal to set up a data connection with the server; sending, when the network device determines that the terminal is unable to set up a data connection with the server, indicating information used to indicates data gateway overload or indicating information used to indicate that an access point name corresponding to the server is congested, so that the server suspends sending a subsequent trigger request message to the terminal. | 02-05-2015 |
20150043333 | MEDIA RATE ADAPTION USING A MEDIAN FILTER - In an exemplary embodiment of this disclosure, a computer-implemented method includes encoding a first portion of media at an encoding rate. The first portion of the media is streamed over a network from a sending device to a receiving device. Feedback is received related to packet events occurring during transmission of the first portion of the media over the network. Adjusted feedback is generated, by a computer processor, by applying a median filter to the feedback data. The encoding rate of the media is adjusted based on the adjusted feedback data. An additional portion of the media is encoded at the adjusted encoding rate. | 02-12-2015 |
20150043334 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING NETWORK STORM - A method is provided for managing a network storm associated with a physical port of a physical switch. The method, performed by a management application, includes receiving a notification of the network storm associated with the physical port, identifying a virtual switch supported by a server host that is coupled to the physical port, identifying a virtual machine coupled to the virtual switch that causes the network storm, and isolating the identified virtual machine while the physical port remains enabled. | 02-12-2015 |
20150043335 | HIGH PERFORMANCE QUALITY-OF-SERVICE PACKET SCHEDULING FOR MULTIPLE PACKET PROCESSING ENGINES - A system and method is provided for optimizing network traffic. The system includes a packet engine of a plurality of packet engines configured to acquire a data packet, to store the data packet in a queue, and to provide a request including a packet token representing the data packet, information regarding the size of the data packet, and a connection token. The system also includes a packet scheduler configured to receive the request; schedule the data packet using the connection token and the information regarding the size of the data packet; and provide the packet token and a notification to the packet engine for allowing the packet engine for transmitting the data packet. | 02-12-2015 |
20150043336 | RESOURCE MANAGEMENT IN MULTIPLE RADIO ACCESS NETWORKS - Embodiments of the present disclosure describe techniques and configurations for resource management associated with communications in multiple radio access networks. In one example, a method of resource management may include obtaining quality of experience (QoE) information from a network server running deep packet inspection or an application executing on a computing device and configured to provide content to the computing device for user access, and determining whether to adjust the content delivery via at least one of the two radio access networks, based at least in part on the quality experience information. The adjustment may include increasing or reducing the content delivery via one of the radio access networks. The content may be delivered to the computing device via at least two radio access networks substantially simultaneously. Other embodiments may be described and/or claimed. | 02-12-2015 |
20150043337 | METHODS AND APPARATUSES FOR ADAPTING APPLICATION UPLINK RATE TO WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - Various apparatuses and methods for transmitting uplink data of an application at a user equipment are provided. In one aspect of the disclosure, uplink data of an application at a user equipment (UE) is transmitted to a network. A first amount of the uplink data expected to be buffered at a radio link control (RLC) layer is determined based on a latency of the application. A second amount of the uplink data available for transmission at the RLC layer is determined based on information provided by a modem of the UE. A data rate of the application is dynamically adjusted based on a difference between the first amount and second amount of the uplink data. In another aspect of the disclosure, an amount of the application data buffered at the RLC layer is maintained to be greater than a predetermined threshold that sets a Happy bit at an unhappy setting. The unhappy setting is communicated to the network, a data rate of the application is increased in response to an increased grant from the network due to the unhappy setting. In another aspect of the disclosure, a maximum modem supported data rate at which the user equipment (UE) transmits uplink data of an application is determined based on an uplink channel capacity estimate, a modem queue length estimate, a codec rate change frequency of the application, and a delay threshold of the modem queue. | 02-12-2015 |
20150043338 | Method for Selecting a Master CM in a Coexistence Network - The present invention relates to a method for requesting the selection of a master management apparatus through a server by a management apparatus enabling television white space (TVWS) apparatuses to coexist in a TVWS. The method includes the steps of: determining whether the trigger condition of the process for selecting the master management apparatus is satisfied; and requesting the selection of the master management apparatus by the server, wherein the master management apparatus is configured to determine a channel selection in the TVWS for terminals connected to the master management apparatus and a slave management apparatus, and the trigger condition can be based on the load balance parameters or geographical coverage parameters of the management apparatus. | 02-12-2015 |
20150043339 | TCP CONGESTION CONTROL FOR LARGE LATENCY NETWORKS - A congestion control mechanism for TCP communication sessions is described. The congestion control mechanism adjusts the size of the congestion window based on a number of parallel virtual TCP Hybla connections. The number of parallel virtual TCP Hybla connections used to determine the congestion window can be dynamically adjusted. The enhanced TCP Hybla congestion control mechanism provides improved throughput for heterogenous networks having a high latency link and having possible packet loss. | 02-12-2015 |
20150043340 | METHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR ACCESSING IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - The invention relates to a method of accessing, in a first access sub-network of a wireless communication network, the method including the steps of: establishing an initial link with a user equipment; receiving a second service request from the user equipment; forwarding the second service request to a core network; receiving second service downlink data from the core network or second service uplink data from a second access sub-network; and transmitting the second service downlink data to the second access sub-network or transmitting the second service uplink data to the core network, wherein, the first access sub-network and the second access sub-network adopt different wireless communication access technologies. With the solution of the invention, a limitation of the different wireless access technologies on a data rate of the user equipment can be eliminated so that the user equipment can access various types of services concurrently and the network architecture can be simplified. | 02-12-2015 |
20150043341 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RESOURCE ALLOCATION IN A MIMO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of controlling uplink multiple input multiple output transmission between user equipment and a base station of a wireless communications network, user equipment and a computer program product are disclosed. The method comprises the steps of: identifying whether insufficient capacity exists on a primary uplink stream to carry pending uplink data packets; and if insufficient capacity exists, preventing establishment of a secondary uplink stream when it is determined that pending uplink data packets which would not be carried by the primary uplink stream would under-utilise the secondary uplink stream. In this way, the disproportionate interference and consumption of resources that would otherwise result from the establishment of a secondary stream in order to carry relatively little data is avoided which reduces the resources utilized, increases power efficiency and minimizes interference. | 02-12-2015 |
20150043342 | MANAGEMENT DEVICE, CONTROL DEVICE, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A management device includes: an estimator configured to estimate whether or not mobile station devices each requests a wireless connection at a target time after a current time; and an instructor configured to instruct a control device, configured to control calls of the mobile station devices, to execute a process of causing a first mobile station device to request the wireless connection at a first time before the target time and causing a second mobile station device that is different from the first mobile station device to request the wireless connection at a second time that is before the target time and different from the first time, in a case where the number of mobile station devices that are each estimated to request the wireless connection to the control device at the target time exceeds a predetermined value. | 02-12-2015 |
20150043343 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A home base station via which a plurality of mobile communication devices are connectable in a communication network, the home base station having an associated closed subscriber group (CSG) and including a unit for receiving a connection request from a mobile communication device wherein the connection request includes an indication of whether the mobile communication device is a member of the CSG associated with the home base station, a unit for monitoring congestion levels for the home base station and for indicating when the home base station is in a congested situation, a unit for determining if the mobile communication device requesting connection is the member of the CSG associated with the home base station from the indication of whether the mobile communication device is the member of the CSG associated with the home base station, and a unit for controlling access to the home base station. | 02-12-2015 |
20150049603 | APN-AMBR AUTHORIZATION IN GPRS MOBILE NETWORK - Various exemplary embodiments relate to a method performed by a policy and charging rules node (PCRN), the method including: receiving a credit control request (CCR) message from a packet data network gateway (PGW) based upon a general radio packet service (GPRS) internet protocol connectivity access network (IP-CAN) session request; determining that an operator policy rule specifies an aggregate maximum bit rate (APN-AMBR) value; determining that the CCR message includes an APN-AMBR value; setting an APN-AMBR value for the GPRS IP-CAN session to the APN-AMBR value specified by the operator policy rule; setting a GPRS IP-CAN session maximum bit rate download/upload (MBR DL/UL) value to the lowest of the APN-AMBR value specified by the operator policy rule and a subscriber MBR DL/UL value; and sending a credit control answer (CCA) message to the PGW with the selected APN-AMBR and MBR DL/UL values. | 02-19-2015 |
20150049604 | Efficient In-Band Communication of Quality-Of-Service Policies Between Virtual Classification Devices and Enforcement Devices - The embodiments are directed to methods and appliances for configuring a classification tree. The methods and appliances, can receive data packets having a source media access control (MAC) address. The methods and appliances can encode the source MAC address based on a determination of a message type. The methods and appliances can provide the encoded source MAC address to a quality-of-service (QoS) engine, wherein the encoded source MAC address configures the classification tree used by the QoS engine for authorizing the transmission of one or more data packets. | 02-19-2015 |
20150049605 | RULES-BASED OVERLOAD PROTECTION OF A DIAMETER DEVICE - Various exemplary embodiments relate to a method performed by a Diameter Routing Agent (DRA) for processing a Diameter message, the method including: receiving a Diameter message at the DRA; evaluating an overload state of the DRA; evaluating a shedding rule based upon the overload state of the DRA; and shedding the received Diameter message based upon the evaluation of the shedding rule. | 02-19-2015 |
20150049606 | TIER-BASED ADMISSION CONTROL FOR USER EQUIPMENT - A device may receive information associated with a network resource request. The network resource request may be a request, by a user device, for access to a network resource associated with a network. The device may determine a subscriber class associated with the user device based on receiving the information associated with the network resource request. The device may determine a service type associated with the network resource request based on receiving the information associated with the network resource request. The device may determine an allocation and retention priority (ARP) level based on the determined subscriber class and the determined service type. The device may assign the ARP level to the network resource. | 02-19-2015 |
20150049607 | METHOD OF MANAGING POLICY FOR REDUCING NETWORK LOAD OF WIRELESS TERMINAL EXCEEDING DATA LIMIT, SYSTEM AND RECORDING MEDIUM THEREOF - The present invention relates to a method managing a policy for reducing network load of a wireless terminal exceeding data limit, a system and a recording medium thereof. The system according to the present invention comprises a storage medium for storing identification information of the wireless terminal in connection with identification information of a policy agent equipped in the wireless terminal, a communication section for receiving identification information of a user's wireless terminal whose data limit is exceeded from a server over a communication network, a checking section for checking the identification information of the policy agent corresponding to the received identification information of the wireless terminal by using the storage medium, and a processing section for processing so that policy information for blocking network usage is transmitted to the policy agent corresponding to the identification information checked by the checking section. | 02-19-2015 |
20150049608 | INVERSE SERVICE SPECIFIC ACCESS CONTROL (SSAC) - According to some embodiments, a wireless communication device is operable to perform a process for initiating a session with a radio network node. As a part of the process, the wireless communication device is operable to determine that the radio network node has enabled an access class barring test, determine whether to perform or bypass the access class barring test for the session, and perform or bypass the access class barring test according to the determination. | 02-19-2015 |
20150049609 | MODIFIED ACCESS CLASSES FOR MACHINE TYPE COMMUNICATION (MTC) DEVICES DURING EMERGENCIES - A method for determining whether to attempt to attach to a network by a machine type communication (MTC) device is described. A triggering event is detected. A radio frame is received from a base station. The radio frame includes a current access class of the base station. The radio frame is the first radio frame to include the current access class after the triggering event. It is determined if the MTC device has access privileges to the base station. It is then decided whether to attempt to attach to a network based on if the MTC device has access privileges. | 02-19-2015 |
20150055454 | USER EQUIPMENT AND METHOD FOR ENHANCED UPLINK POWER CONTROL - Embodiments of user equipment and methods for improved uplink transmission power management and scheduling, are generally described herein. For example, in an aspect, a method of uplink power management is presented, the method includes determining whether a total desired transmission power exceeds a total configured maximum output power for a subframe. When the total desired transmission power exceeds the total configured maximum output power, the method includes allocating a minimum proactive power limitation to each serving cell, assigning a remaining power to one or more channels based on priority, and computing a total power assignment based on the allocating and the assigning. | 02-26-2015 |
20150055455 | CONTROLLING WI-FI ACCESS IN A PUBLIC LOCATION - A method, computer system, and/or computer program product controls access to a wireless local area network (WLAN) access point in a retail establishment. A predetermined retail activity threshold is established for a retail establishment, where the retail establishment has a patron service area with a WLAN access point, and where a determination has been made that exceeding the predetermined retail activity threshold without increasing patron traffic out of the retail establishment will cause an excessive wait time for occupying the patron service area. In response to determining that the predetermined retail activity threshold is being exceeded, a secondary criterion is examined in order to determine if the mobile device should be disconnected from the WLAN access point, in order to motivate a user of the mobile device to leave the patron service area. If so, then the mobile device is disconnected from the WLAN access point. | 02-26-2015 |
20150055456 | TRAFFIC AND LOAD AWARE DYNAMIC QUEUE MANAGEMENT - Some embodiments provide a queue management system that efficiently and dynamically manages multiple queues that process traffic to and from multiple virtual machines (VMs) executing on a host. This system manages the queues by (1) breaking up the queues into different priority pools with the higher priority pools reserved for particular types of traffic or VM (e.g., traffic for VMs that need low latency), (2) dynamically adjusting the number of queues in each pool (i.e., dynamically adjusting the size of the pools), (3) dynamically reassigning a VM to a new queue based on one or more optimization criteria (e.g., criteria relating to the underutilization or overutilization of the queue). | 02-26-2015 |
20150055457 | TRAFFIC AND LOAD AWARE DYNAMIC QUEUE MANAGEMENT - Some embodiments provide a queue management system that efficiently and dynamically manages multiple queues that process traffic to and from multiple virtual machines (VMs) executing on a host. This system manages the queues by (1) breaking up the queues into different priority pools with the higher priority pools reserved for particular types of traffic or VM (e.g., traffic for VMs that need low latency), (2) dynamically adjusting the number of queues in each pool (i.e., dynamically adjusting the size of the pools), (3) dynamically reassigning a VM to a new queue based on one or more optimization criteria (e.g., criteria relating to the underutilization or overutilization of the queue). | 02-26-2015 |
20150055458 | VIDEO TRANSMISSION DEVICE, VIDEO TRANSMISSION METHOD, AND PROGRAM - Provided is a video transmission device including an encoding unit configured to encode video data, a transfer rate setting unit configured to set a transfer rate of a physical layer based on an encoding rate of the encoded video data, and a transmission unit configured to transmit the encoded video data at the transfer rate. | 02-26-2015 |
20150055459 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING OVERLOAD CONTROL FOR HSS RECOVERY - A method and apparatus can transmit communications traffic to a home subscriber server on a network. An overload indicator is received from the home subscriber server, with the overload indicator including a severity indicator. Traffic volume transmitted to the home subscriber server can be adjusted based upon the severity indicator. | 02-26-2015 |
20150055460 | Method and Radio Network Node for Managing Radio Resources - A set of radio resources are allocated to a first user equipment ( | 02-26-2015 |
20150055461 | Gateway Selection for Mobile Communications Network Architecture Optimization - A gateway control apparatus of a mobile communications network system, which is a termination point of signaling messages according to a first protocol, detects a first selection request via an interface of a first network technology from a mobility management entity, of selecting the gateway control apparatus for communicating user data in the mobile communications network system between an entity of the first protocol and a network of a second protocol. Based on the detected first selection request, the gateway control apparatus selects a distributed gateway device from plural distributed gateway devices for communicating the user data, and provides a second selection request of selecting the distributed gateway device via an interface of a second network technology independent from the first network technology. | 02-26-2015 |
20150055462 | COMMUNICATION METHOD, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A communication method includes transmitting a first data from a first communication device to a second communication device, transmitting, from the second communication device to the first communication device, a limiting request that requests limiting of a transmission band from the first communication device to the second communication device, in a case where the data amount of the first data is less than a first threshold value, and executing limiting of the transmission band, based on the limiting request. | 02-26-2015 |
20150055463 | MODIFYING SYSTEM TIMERS FOR OPTIMIZING MOBILE TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT - A mobile device for optimizing mobile traffic is provided. The device includes a radio. The mobile device is configured to modify system timers to increase tolerance to delay in establishing a connection to the wireless network, intercept requests to establish a connection to a wireless network, wherein the requests correspond to non-user interactive traffic, accumulate the requests that are intercepted over a period of time, and transfer the requests that are accumulated over the wireless network at the end of the period of time. | 02-26-2015 |
20150055464 | Methods and Nodes in a Communication System - Embodiments herein include a method in a server for scheduling of an information transmission from an information providing device to a subscriber equipment in a communication system. The method comprises determining a moment in time at which the subscriber equipment desires information. Also, an estimation of the communication intensity in the communication system at the determined moment in time is obtained. If the estimated communication intensity exceeds a certain threshold value, an appropriate period in time for the information providing device to send desired information to the subscriber equipment is calculated, based on the communication intensity in the communication system. Furthermore, a trigger signal is sent to the information providing device, requesting the information providing device at what moment in time to provide information to the subscriber equipment. A method in an information providing device is also disclosed. | 02-26-2015 |
20150063100 | Data Communications In A Distributed Computing Environment - Data communications may be carried out in a distributed computing environment that includes computers coupled for data communications through communications adapters and an active messaging interface (‘AMI’). Such data communications may be carried out by: issuing, by a sender to a receiver, an eager SEND data communications instruction to transfer SEND data, the instruction including information describing data location at the sender and data size; transmitting, by the sender to the receiver, the SEND data as eager data packets; discarding, by the receiver in dependence upon data flow conditions, eager data packets as they are received from the sender; and transferring, in dependence upon the data flow conditions, by the receiver from the sender's data location to a receive buffer by remote direct memory access (“RDMA”), the SEND data. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063101 | 3GPP BEARER-BASED QOS MODEL SUPPORT ON WIFI - A method is disclosed for providing broadband access to a Packet Data Network (PDN) from a WLAN. A network node receives a request for a dedicated bearer from a PDN gateway, along with one or more Quality of Service (QoS) requirements. Responsive to the bearer request, the network node sends a request to an access point in the WLAN for load information indicative of a load of the access point, and receives the requested load information. Based on the load information, the network node determines whether the access point would be able to meet the one or more QoS requirements if the bearer request was granted. If the determining indicates that the access point would be able to meet the one or more QoS requirements, the network node creates the dedicated bearer between the wireless terminal and the PDN gateway according to the one or more QoS requirements. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063102 | Flow Based Network Service Insertion - Techniques are provided to generate and store a network graph database comprising information that indicates a service node topology, and virtual or physical network services available at each node in a network. A service request is received for services to be performed on packets traversing the network between at least first and second endpoints. A subset of the network graph database is determined that can provide the services requested in the service request. A service chain and service chain identifier is generated for the service based on the network graph database subset. A flow path is established through the service chain by flow programming network paths between the first and second endpoints using the service chain identifier. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063103 | BANDWIDTH-DEPENDENT COMPRESSOR FOR ROBUST HEADER COMPRESSION AND METHOD OF USE THEREOF - A bandwidth-dependent robust header compression (RoHC) compressor and a method of RoHC. One embodiment of the bandwidth-dependent RoHC compressor is embodied in a protocol stack, including: (1) a bandwidth estimator operable to generate an indicator of excess bandwidth on a channel over which a data flow having original packet headers compressed at an initial compression level is transmitted, and (2) a robust header compression (RoHC) compressor operable to gain access to the indicator and select a reduced compression level based on the indicator. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063104 | USER EQUIPMENT AND METHOD FOR REDUCING DELAY IN A RADIO ACCESS NETWORK - Embodiments of user equipment and methods for reducing delay in a radio-access network (RAN) are generally described herein. Embodiments disclosed herein provide enhancements that may be applicable to a 3GPP LTE RAN for reducing delay that may be particularly beneficial for real-time over-the-top (OTT) applications. Some embodiments provide for an uplink delayed buffer status report. Some embodiments provide for a downlink congestion and buffer report. Some embodiments provide for traffic characteristic based inter-UE prioritization. | 03-05-2015 |
20150071059 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING IP DATA PACKET - A method and device for transmitting Internet Protocol (IP) data packet are disclosed by the present invention, the method comprising: an Access Point (AP) device obtains an IP data packet needing to be sent to an User Equipment (UE); said AP device use the type information of said IP data packet to determine the corresponding Data Radio Bearer (DBR) of said IP data packet; Said AP device sends said IP data packet to said UE through said DBR; in the embodiments of the present invention, when the AP device accesses the IP network locally or directly through the IP network, the Quality of Service (QoS) insurance of IP data packet in the air interface transmission is implemented, on the basis of the direct mapping between the type information and the data radio bearer. | 03-12-2015 |
20150071060 | COUPLING UPLINK AND DOWNLINK CCA IN LTE-U - Methods, systems, and devices are described contention-based channel access procedures that may enhance efficiency in communications using unlicensed spectrum. A time period may be identified during which base stations perform contention-based downlink channel access procedures for access to a channel in an unlicensed spectrum. The base stations may be coordinated such that different base stations may seek channel access during different time intervals during the time period. Contention-based uplink channel access procedures for UEs may then be modified to favor one or more UEs that are associated with a base station that has won channel access. | 03-12-2015 |
20150071061 | METHOD FOR DATA TRANSMISSION IN WIRELESS NETWORK ENVIRONMENT AND DATA TRANSMITTER - A method of transmitting data via a data transmitting device in a wireless network environment is provided. The method includes determining whether traffic is saturated or not based on an access category (AC) into which the data is classified according to a type of application that transmits the data, a queue size, and a predetermined threshold value and determining a transmission scheme according to a determination result of whether traffic is saturated or not and the AC of the data. | 03-12-2015 |
20150071062 | TRANSMISSION MODE SELECTING METHOD, ANTENNA TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION COMBINATION DETERMINING METHOD, DEVICE AND SYSTEM - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a transmission mode selecting method, an antenna TX/RX combination determining method, device, and system. The transmission mode selecting method includes: obtaining a first system capacity in a half-duplex transmission mode; obtaining a second system capacity in a full-duplex transmission mode, where the second system capacity is the maximum value among system capacities of a universal set of candidate antenna TX/RX combinations in the full-duplex transmission mode, or the maximum value among system capacities of a first subset of the candidate antenna TX/RX combinations in the full-duplex transmission mode, or a system capacity exceeding a system capacity threshold; and selecting a target transmission mode according to a comparison result between the first system capacity and the second system capacity, where the target transmission mode is a transmission mode corresponding to a larger value between the first system capacity and the second system capacity. | 03-12-2015 |
20150071063 | ACCESS METHOD, BASE STATION, ACCESS POINT AND USER EQUIPMENT - Embodiments of the present invention provide an access method, a base station, an access point and a user equipment. The access method includes: a base station sends a first message to an access point through a first communication interface, for requesting the access point to establish a second bearer with a user equipment UE, the second bearer being based on a second communication interface, wherein the first message carries an identifier of the UE and an identifier of an E-RAB; and the base station establishes a first bearer with the access point, the first bearer being based on the first communication interface, wherein the first bearer and the second bearer correspond to the E-RAB. | 03-12-2015 |
20150071064 | ACCESS CONTROL METHOD, TERMINAL AND ACCESS NETWORK DEVICE - The present application provides an access control method, a terminal, and an access network device. The access control method includes: receiving, by a terminal from an access network device, a message that is used to reject or release a service originated or performed by the terminal, where the message includes domain wait time information or service type wait time information, where the domain wait time information is used to indicate a wait time specific to a domain of the service, or the service type wait time information is used to indicate a wait time specific to a service type of the service; and refraining, by the terminal, from originating the service in a time indicated by the domain wait time information or the service type wait time information. | 03-12-2015 |
20150071065 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ENHANCED UPLINK MULTIPLEXING - A method and apparatus for multiplexing are disclosed. Data is received over a plurality of logical channels. Data from the plurality of logical channels is multiplexed into a medium access control (MAC) protocol data unit (PDU) based on a priority associated with each of the plurality of the logical channels. The MAC PDU is transmitted over an uplink transport channel. | 03-12-2015 |
20150078153 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR APPLYING SIGNALING OF WLAN-3GPP INTERWORKING - A method and apparatus are disclosed for applying signaling of WLAN-3GPP interworking. The method includes receiving a first configuration of an interworking parameter by dedicated signalling, wherein the first configuration is not released when the UE enters idle mode. The method also includes receiving a second configuration of the interworking parameter by broadcast signalling when the UE is in idle mode, and overriding the first configuration with the second configuration. | 03-19-2015 |
20150078154 | CONGESTION CONTROL FOR SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE IN 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP) SYSTEMS - A mobility management entity or serving general packet radio service support node controls short message loads by communicating diameter-based messages over, respectively, SGd and Gdd interfaces with associated short message service-service center entities. | 03-19-2015 |
20150078155 | CONTROLLING A PACKET FLOW FROM A USER EQUIPMENT - A method and User Equipment (UE) for limiting excessive packet flow from the UE to a communication network. The UE receives from the network, an instruction to activate a logic parameter for controlling the packet flow from the UE to the network. In response to receiving the instruction, the UE requests configuration of a network connection for transmitting packets to the network according to the logic parameter. The UE then requests deactivation of all other network connections upon successful configuration of the network connection for transmitting packets to the network according to the logic parameter. | 03-19-2015 |
20150078156 | Integrated Multi-Radio Access Technology Multi-Frequency Admission Control - A node of a multiple radio access technology (multi-RAT) system acquires resource status information associated with each RAT of the multi-RAT system. The resource status information of the RATs of the multi-RAT system can be acquired by sniffing higher layer protocol information pertaining to call setup requests and/or call terminated messages. The node further maintains a flag representing overall resource availability associated with the RATs of the multi-RAT system, based on the acquired resource status information, for use in admission control and/or load balancing. The flag is associated with a pre-defined set of overall resource availability states of the multi-RAT system, where the availability states are defined in terms of admission control decisions. | 03-19-2015 |
20150078157 | Multi-Carrier Communication Systems Employing Variable Symbol Rates and Number of Carriers - A multi-carrier communication system such as an OFDM or DMT system has nodes which are allowed to dynamically change their receive and transmit symbol rates, and the number of carriers within their signals. Changing of the symbol rate is done by changing the clocking frequency of the nodes' iFFT and FFT processors, as well as their serializers and deserializers. The nodes have several ways of dynamically changing the number of earners used. The selection of symbol rate and number of earners can be optimized for a given channel based on explicit channel measurements, a priori knowledge of the channel, or past experience. Provision is made for accommodating legacy nodes that may have constraints in symbol rate or the number of carriers they can support. The receiver can determine the correct symbol rate and number of earners through a priori knowledge, a first exchange of packets in a base mode that all nodes can understand, or an indication in the header of the data packet which is transmitted in a base mode of operation that all nodes can understand. | 03-19-2015 |
20150078158 | DEQUEUING AND CONGESTION CONTROL SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR SINGLE STREAM MULTICAST - A system that processes single stream multicast data includes multiple queues, a dequeue engine, and/or a queue control engine. The queues temporarily store data. At least one of the queues stores single stream multicast data. A multicast count is associated with the single stream multicast data and corresponds to a number of destinations to which the single stream multicast data is to be sent. The dequeue engine dequeues data from the queues. If the data corresponds to the single stream multicast data, the dequeue engine examines the multicast count associated with the single stream multicast data and dequeues the single stream multicast data based on the multicast count. The queue control engine examines one of the queues to determine whether to drop data from the queue and marks the data based on a result of the determination. | 03-19-2015 |
20150085648 | CONGESTION CONTROL IN DATA NETWORKS - A method of modifying transmission of packets over a network path comprises operating a processor to: transmit packets over the network path; determine, based on a number of unacknowledged packets transmitted over the network path, whether a congestion event has occurred, wherein an unacknowledged packet is a transmitted packet for which no acknowledgement has been received; and responsive to detecting a congestion event, operating a processor to modify the number of unacknowledged packets transmitted by a multiplicative factor β | 03-26-2015 |
20150085649 | CHANNEL LOAD BALANCING SYSTEM - In one example, an apparatus, by a processor, can identify a number of modems in each bonding group of a plurality of bonding groups, resulting in a first data structure. The apparatus can also determine a configuration for each bonding group of the plurality of bonding groups, resulting in a second data structure. The apparatus can also determine channel load for each channel of a plurality of channels, according to the first data structure and the second data structure, resulting in a third data structure. | 03-26-2015 |
20150085650 | NETWORK SELECTION ARCHITECTURE - A user equipment device intelligent network selection architecture is provided that enables service provider policy driven dynamic intelligent network selection of a radio technology for user traffic delivery. The network selection is based on radio network conditions, user subscription profile, and device mobility state, including speed and movement pattern. Also provided are application program interfaces that allow access network discovery and selection function carrier clients decision as to communication with a connection manager or other lower layer functions. The architecture and associated application program interface enable automatic network selection and connection, which provides a consistent implementation across different device original equipment manufacturers and operating systems. | 03-26-2015 |
20150085651 | ANALYSIS SERVER AND MOBILE NETWORK SYSTEM - Congestion determination of a base station is not communicated based on a theoretical traffic amount, but higher accurate congestion determination is communicated based on an effective traffic amount which can be transmitted and received by the base station under an environment in which the base station is deployed. | 03-26-2015 |
20150085652 | METHOD OF LIMITING TRANSMISSION RATE - A method for limiting a transmission rate is provided. The method includes receiving a pause management message comprising pause scheduling information including a pause time at which an uplink transmission of a data frame is to be paused and a paused duration indicating a duration during which transmission of the data frame is to be paused, and pause station information indicating a station which is to pause transmission the data frame, from an access point (AP); and pausing transmission of the data frame during the paused duration starting from the pause time according to the pause management message, and then resuming transmission. According to exemplary embodiments of the present invention, a transmission rate limiting mechanism suitable for a VHT WLAN can be provided. | 03-26-2015 |
20150085653 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING MODULATION-CODING SCHEME SET IN VERY HIGH THROUGHPUT WIRELESS SYSTEMS - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to techniques for designing Modulation-Coding Scheme (MSC) set fields in a transmission frame of Very High Throughput (VHT) wireless systems. | 03-26-2015 |
20150085654 | CACHING SYSTEM, APPARATUS, AND METHOD APPLIED TO NETWORK - A caching system, apparatus, and method applied to a network. The system includes a caching policy control device and at least one main cache device, where the caching policy control device is configured to receive a content caching request sent by an external packet data network PDN, and control, according to the content caching request, the at least one main cache device to cache external content, where the external content is content sent by the external PDN; and the at least one main cache device is connected to the caching policy control device, located on a data channel between an anchor gateway of the network and the external PDN, and configured to cache the external content according to the control of the caching policy control device. External content can be cached in a main cache device according to a request of an external PDN, thereby implementing active caching. | 03-26-2015 |
20150092540 | System and Method for Traffic Offload - Embodiments of the disclosure generally relate to a system and method for traffic offload from a first access technology to a second access technology. For example, packets originally destined for transmission over a bearer channel associated with Long Term Evaluation (LTE) can be offloaded to a Wi-FI bearer channel in a seamless manner when available, or a non-seamless manner. | 04-02-2015 |
20150092541 | Methods, Systems And Devices For Improving Discontinuous Reception In Wideband Wireless Networks - Methods, systems and devices for improving discontinuous reception (DRX) in wireless telecommunication networks are disclosed. According to an embodiment, a retransmission buffer status report (BSR) timer is implemented in a user equipment (UE) as an attribute that is configurable for each logical channel of the UE. According to another embodiment, a data flush token is implemented as a logical channel attribute in a UE in order to expedite emptying of the UE's uplink buffer. According to another embodiment, improvements are provided to the manner in which a UE determines to cancel regular BSRs. According to other embodiments, features are implemented at a base station such as an E-UTRAN Node B (eNB) to improve downlink and uplink transmission scheduling between the base station and a UE. According to further embodiments, improved methods of detecting and handling late and delayed BSRs are implemented at a base station. The disclosed embodiments promote improved battery life of a UE as well as improved network data performance. | 04-02-2015 |
20150092542 | Techniques For Improving Discontinuous Reception In Wideband Wireless Networks - Methods, systems and devices for improving discontinuous reception (DRX) in wireless telecommunication networks are disclosed. According to an embodiment, a retransmission buffer status report (BSR) timer is implemented in a user equipment (UE) as an attribute that is configurable for each logical channel of the UE. According to another embodiment, a data flush token is implemented as a logical channel attribute in a UE in order to expedite emptying of the UE's uplink buffer. According to another embodiment, improvements are provided to the manner in which a UE determines to cancel regular BSRs. According to other embodiments, features are implemented at a base station such as an E-UTRAN Node B (eNB) to improve downlink and uplink transmission scheduling between the base station and a UE. According to further embodiments, improved methods of detecting and handling late and delayed BSRs are implemented at a base station. The disclosed embodiments promote improved battery life of a UE as well as improved network data performance. | 04-02-2015 |
20150092543 | Mobile Data Collection in a Wireless Sensing Network - A mobile gateway device collects identities of a first set of radio nodes which are within one hop of the mobile gateway; and checks at least the collected identities against a first table and a second table. The first table lists node identities and corresponding data validity timers. The second table lists node identities and no corresponding data validity timers. From the checking the device selects a group of radio nodes to activate for collecting and reporting data. The device determines parent child relations among the radio nodes, which are sensor nodes of a wireless sensing network in an embodiment, and uses the list to activate only those nodes for which it does not have valid data to sense new data and transmit their sensing results. | 04-02-2015 |
20150092544 | FULL SPECTRUM SHARING - Coordination of the use of radio resource between a first Radio Access Network (RAN) and a second RAN is provided, each RAN being configured to communicate over the same predefined bandwidth range. A first priority associated with traffic to be carried over the first RAN and a second priority associated with traffic to be carried over the second RAN are determined. A first portion of the radio resource comprising one or more first bandwidth segments is assigned to the first RAN and a second portion of the radio resource comprising a plurality of second bandwidth segments is assigned to the second RAN, based on the first and second priorities. The first portion is indicated to a first RAN scheduler and/or the second portion is indicated to a second RAN scheduler. At least one first bandwidth segment is assigned between two of the second bandwidth segments. | 04-02-2015 |
20150092545 | SHORT PACKET COMMUNICATION IN A POWERLINE COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A network device may transmit a short packet when the length of application data that will be transmitted does not exceed a threshold length. In some embodiments, the network device may transmit the application data in a frame control field of the short packet. The short packet may not include a payload field. In other embodiments, the network device may support multiple short payload field lengths and may transmit the application data in a short payload field with an appropriate short payload field length. The network device may also support communication techniques to transmit the application data in the short packet. | 04-02-2015 |
20150092546 | QUEUE CREDIT MANAGEMENT - To prevent buffer overflow, a receiving entity may use credits to control the total amount of packets any single transmitting entity can forward. Once the assigned credits are spent, the transmitting entity cannot send data portions to the receiving entity until additional credits are provided. However, the logic in the receiving entity may be designed to manage a maximum number of credits that is less than the capacity of the buffer in the transmitting entity. For example, the receiving entity is designed to manage a maximum of eight credits but the buffer has room for twelve data portions. To use the buffer efficiently, the transmitting entity may identify when extra buffer storage is available and provide additional credits. In addition, the transmitting entity may control when the credits are provided such that the receiving entity is not allocated more credits that it was designed to manage. | 04-02-2015 |
20150092547 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR PROCESSING MESSAGE OVERLOAD - Disclosed are a method and a device for processing message overload. The method comprises: a base station receiving a downlink NAS transmission message sent by a network device, the downlink NAS transmission message comprising indication information indicating whether to transmit an SMS; when being congested, the base station determining, according to the indication information, that the received downlink NAS transmission message is used to transmit an SMS; and processing the downlink NAS transmission message used for transmitting an SMS. | 04-02-2015 |
20150092548 | SHARED CELL RECEIVER FOR UPLINK CAPACITY IMPROVEMENT IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - A wireless communication method and system are provided in which an uplink data stream that has uplink data associated with a user device is received. Channel performance data based at least in part on a portion of the uplink data stream is determined. A determination is made whether the channel performance data meets a predetermined performance level. The portion of the uplink data stream is discarded when the channel performance data does not meet the predetermined performance level. The portion of the uplink data stream is tagged for additional processing when the channel performance data meets the predetermined performance level. | 04-02-2015 |
20150098320 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS OF INTER DATA CENTER OUT-BOUND TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT - An information handling system is provided. The information handling system includes a first network device that forms at least part of a first set of network devices. The first network device provides an interface between a local first server rack and a cloud and has one or more processors in communication with a memory. The first network device is configured to receive information from a second set of network devices that identifies a default gateway for a virtual machine running on a remote server rack. The first network device is also configured to create a local destination address entry associated with information, to store the entry in an address table in the memory, and to receive a packet having the information identifying the default gateway as a destination address. The first network device is further configured to forward the packet into the cloud on in proxy for the default gateway. | 04-09-2015 |
20150098321 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING SERVICE IN RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - In a user equipment of a wireless communication system, a method for signal transmission and reception may include: sending a request for a Circuit Switched voice network (CS) service to a Gateway Mobile Switching Center (GMSC) to send and receive data to and from a second user equipment; and receiving a call reject response corresponding to the service request from the GMSC, wherein the call reject response is sent by an entity in a core network of the second user equipment. According to an embodiment, it is possible to provide a suitable service to a sender terminal making a CS service request to a receiver terminal having subscribed only to a PS service without increasing network load. | 04-09-2015 |
20150098322 | Method for Buffer Status Report in Dual Connectivity - A method for buffer status report (BSR) in dual connectivity for a communication device in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method comprises connecting to at least two base stations including a first base station and a second base station in the wireless communication system, receiving a BSR configuration from the first base station, wherein the BSR configuration indicates a calculation scheme for a BSR, and calculating buffer sizes indicated in a first BSR and a second BSR respectively for the first base station and the second base station according to the calculation scheme in the received BSR configuration, wherein at least a first logical channel of a first logical channel group reported by the first BSR and at least a second logical channel of a second logical channel group reported by the second BSR are mapped to the same split radio bearer. | 04-09-2015 |
20150098323 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING TRAFFIC IN MOBILE NETWORK - A method and apparatus for transmitting traffic in a mobile network is provided. The traffic transmission method includes receiving data traffic including chunk information. The traffic transmission method also includes modifying bearer characteristics based on the chunk information of the received data traffic. The traffic transmission method further includes transmitting the data traffic to user equipment (UE) based on the modified bearer characteristics. A method for transmitting data traffic of a Deep Packet Inspection (DPI) node includes receiving data traffic from a data server. The method for transmitting data traffic of the DPI node also includes extracting chunk information regarding the received data traffic. The method for transmitting data traffic of the DPI node further includes transmitting the received data traffic and the extracted chunk information to an eNB. | 04-09-2015 |
20150098324 | METHOD, DEVICE AND NETWORK SYSTEM OF ESTABLISHING A TUNNEL - A method, a device, and a network system of establishing a tunnel are provided in embodiments of the present disclosure. The method of establishing the tunnel includes: obtaining, by a WTP, an address of an AC and an address of a BRAS from a DHCP server; using, by the WTP, the address of the AC to establish a CAPWAP control tunnel with the AC; and using, by the WTP, the address of the BRAS to establish a CAPWAP data tunnel with the BRAS. By using the technical scheme provided in the embodiments of the present disclosure, the CAPWAP data tunnel may be established between the WTP and the BRAS. | 04-09-2015 |
20150098325 | CONGESTION STATE REPORTING METHOD AND ACCESS NETWORK DEVICE - A congestion state reporting method and an access network device are provided by the present invention. The method comprises: obtaining, by an access network device, an identifier of a gateway device corresponding to bearers, and reporting to the gateway device congestion state information of a cell covered by the access network device via part of bearers from the bearers corresponding to the identifier. The method mentioned above can avoid the problem in the prior art that the congestion state is further aggravated, so that the gateway device can process the problem of cell congestion more rapidly, and can reduce the processing complexity of the gateway device in the prior art. | 04-09-2015 |
20150098326 | Techniques for Handling Network Traffic - In a mobile communication environment, the data traffic is mapped to a number of bearers. In a downlink direction, this is accomplished by filtering data packets on the basis of an identifier which is included into the data packets in response to packet inspection. In the uplink direction, a mirroring function is applied which detects incoming data packets, which are received on one of a plurality of bearers and have a first identifier, and outgoing data packets having a second identifier which is complementary to the first identifier. The outgoing data packets having the complementary second identifier are routed to the same bearer from which the incoming data packets are received. | 04-09-2015 |
20150098327 | Enhancing Performance of Rapid Channel Changes and Other Playback Positioning Changes in Adaptive Streaming - Content is received within a network at a content receiver and that is communicated from a content source, where the content comprises packets to be sent to the content receiver that are marked with a first drop priority or a second drop priority. A network priority is detected at the content receiver that is based at least in part upon a ratio of packets marked with the first drop priority to packets marked with the second drop priority within the content and also a determination at the content receiver of a rate of packets dropped that are marked with the first drop priority and a rate of packets dropped that are marked with the second drop priority. | 04-09-2015 |
20150098328 | REAL-TIME CHARGING SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING QoS AND CHARGING RULE OF SERVICE - Provided is a method and apparatus for controlling a charging condition and policy by a first entity, in which information for policy decision information is received from a second entity and an acknowledgement message is transmitted to the second entity. A policy based on the information for policy decision information is determined, the policy is transmitted to a third entity, and an acknowledgement message for the policy is received from the third entity. | 04-09-2015 |
20150103647 | POLICY APPLICATION FOR A GROUP OF SUBSCRIBERS IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - An example method includes reporting location changes for one or more users from a first network element to a second network element based on transitions for each of the one or more users in relation to a policy location area, wherein the policy location area is defined by one or more first user location information (ULI) information elements (IEs); communicating a per-peer Rx authorization and accounting request (Rx AAR) message to initiate a policy change, wherein the per-peer Rx AAR message comprises the one or more first ULI IEs; communicating a per-Diameter-peer Gx reauthorization request (Gx RAR) message including the one or more first ULI IEs; identifying one or more users for the policy change based, at least in part, on a corresponding ULI IE for each user and the one or more first ULI IEs; and applying the policy change to each of the identified one or more users. | 04-16-2015 |
20150103648 | PERFORMANCE MONITORING OF WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK (WLAN) OFFLOADING IN WIRELESS CELLULAR NETWORKS - Generally, this disclosure provides devices, systems and methods for performance monitoring of WLAN data traffic offloading in wireless cellular networks. A wireless local area network (WLAN) access point (AP) may include a performance measurement module to measure the number of User Equipment (UEs) connected to the WLAN AP for data traffic offload and further to measure packet throughput from the UEs to the WLAN AP; a measurement granularity timer to trigger the performance measurement module to perform the measurements; a performance report generation module to generate a WLAN report based on the measurements provided from the performance measurement module; and a performance report timer to trigger the performance report generation module to generate the WLAN report. | 04-16-2015 |
20150103649 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, CONGESTION AVOIDANCE METHOD THEREOF, AND METER READING SYSTEM USING COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention increases accommodation efficiency in a wireless master station for wireless slave stations, and efficiently uses wireless resources while controlling traffic. In a communication system in which a plurality of wireless slave stations | 04-16-2015 |
20150103650 | CONGESTION CONTROL ON A CELLULAR FREQUENCY PROVIDING BROADCAST SERVICES - There are provided measures for congestion control on a cellular frequency providing broadcast services. Such measures exemplarily include removing an entry of a first system information block from a list included in a second system information block to be broadcasted, said first system information block includinq information related to multimedia broadcast and multicast services, said list including information related to broadcasted system information elements; prohibiting modification of an information tag included in said second system information block to be broadcasted, said information tag being indicative of a change of system information including at least said list; and prohibiting inclusion of a modification indicator in any paging messages to be transmitted, said modification indicator being indicative of said change of said system information. | 04-16-2015 |
20150103651 | METHOD FOR MANAGING DEVICE BEHAVIOR DURING INCREASED LOAD OR CONGESTION USING POLICIES - An apparatus for enabling provision of one or more policies to manage behavior of one or more communications devices may include a processor and memory storing executable computer code causing the apparatus to at least perform operations including analyzing data of at least one policy. The policy includes information instructing a communication device(s) regarding a manner to behave according to a designated network condition(s) designated by a network operator. The computer program code may further cause the apparatus to apply the policy responsive to detecting a load of a network is increased or that the network is congested. The computer program code may further cause the apparatus to behave in the manner designated by the network operator according to the applied policy responsive to detecting the increased load or that the network is congested to minimize congestion in the network. Corresponding methods and computer program products are also provided. | 04-16-2015 |
20150103652 | CONFIGURING TRAFFIC ALLOCATIONS IN A ROUTER - Disclosed herein are methods and calculators for configuring traffic allocations for service classes with different Quality of Service (QoS) in a router. Example embodiments involve setting allocations at a router based on traffic rate values and/or traffic weight values provided by a user. The router may monitor actual traffic rates to ensure that traffic is not being dropped due to improper rate allocations and to provide historical data for optimizing traffic allocations. In addition, the router may automatically adjust traffic allocations to avoid dropping high(er) priority traffic. The router may also transmit alarms to the user and/or to other network devices to prompt traffic re-routing and/or re-allocation of traffic rates. Example methods and apparatus ensure appropriate traffic allocation to meet certain QoS metrics | 04-16-2015 |
20150103653 | CONSERVING NETWORK CAPACITY BY RELEASING QOS RESOURCES - A broadband service is provided by allocating air interface resources in a wireless network that conforms to the 1xEV-DO standard. The air interface resources are characterized by various quality of service (QoS) parameters, such as bandwidth, packet priority and error rate. Packetized information is transmitted in data flows between a base station and cell phones. A particular QoS level is reserved for each of the data flows that support the broadband service. An operating system on a cell phone monitors one data flow as well as another data flow in the opposite direction. When the base station runs out of an air interface resource, the base station suspends the QoS reservation of a data flow. The operating system determines that the QoS reservation in one direction has been suspended and sends an unsolicited message to the base station releasing the QoS reservation in the opposite direction, thereby conserving network resources. | 04-16-2015 |
20150103654 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING MANAGEMENT INFORMATION IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM - A method for transmitting load information in a wireless local area network. The method according to one embodiment includes generating, by an access point (AP), basic service set (BSS) load information, the BSS load information including a multiple input multiple output (MIMO) channel underutilization field; and transmitting, by the AP, the BSS load information. The MIMO channel underutilization field indicates a spatial stream underutilization that is defined as a percentage of time that the AP has one or more underutilized spatial domain resources for a given busy time of a wireless medium. The spatial stream underutilization is calculated based on a maximum number of spatial streams supported by the AP and a number of one or more utilized spatial streams transmitted by the AP. | 04-16-2015 |
20150103655 | DATA FORWARDING METHOD, DEVICE, AND BASE STATION - The present invention provides a data forwarding method, device, and base station and belongs to the field of communications. According to the present invention, when forwarding data, radio equipment can forward data according to a rate different from a rate at which the data is received. | 04-16-2015 |
20150109908 | MANAGING HIDDEN SECURITY FEATURES IN USER EQUIPMENT - A device determines whether a PTT application is authenticated to access a first API and a second API, and prevents the PTT application from accessing the first and second APIs when the PTT application is not authenticated. The device permits the PTT application to access the first and second APIs when the PTT application is authenticated, and modifies, via the first API, a timer that dictates when the device checks for traffic received from a network. The device establishes, via the second API, a data connection with the network, and determines, based on the data connection, a QoS framework for the network. The device utilizes the PTT application and the timer to establish a PTT session with another device via the network, and prioritizes, based on the QoS framework, PTT traffic provided in the PTT session with the other device. | 04-23-2015 |
20150109909 | USER-BASED PROFILING AND NETWORK ACCESS - A subscriber domain in a cable network environment can include an access manager. During operation, the access manager receives input indicating an identity of a user operating a communication device to access a remote network such as the Internet. The user may be one of multiple possible users that use the communication device to access the remote network. To provide access, the access manager maps the received identity of the user to corresponding access profile information assigned to the user. In accordance with the corresponding access profile information assigned to the user, the access manager provides the communication device access to the remote network. Accordingly, in contrast to conventional techniques, each of multiple different users can be afforded different network access rights even though they happen to use the same computer device to access a respective network. | 04-23-2015 |
20150109910 | METHOD AND NETWORK NODE FOR DETERMINING ADMITTANCE BASED ON REASON FOR NOT ACHIEVING QUALITY OF SERVICE - Network node ( | 04-23-2015 |
20150109911 | METHOD OF MANAGING POLICY FOR REDUCING NETWORK LOAD IN OVERLOADED AREA, SYSTEM AND RECORDING MEDIUM THEREOF - The present invention relates to a method of managing a policy for reducing a network load in an overloaded area, a system and a recording medium thereof. The system includes a communication section for receiving information of an area in which overloaded occurs at a specific time slot from a server over a communication network and a processing section for transmitting the information of the overloaded area at a specific time, that is received by the communication section, to a policy agent installed in a wireless terminal, and processing so that the policy agent blocks network connection of one or more applications in the wireless terminal in case the current time and position of the wireless terminal correspond to the time and position according to the information of the overloaded area at a specific time. | 04-23-2015 |
20150109912 | METHOD FOR MOBILE TERMINAL TO ACCESS WIRELESS ACCESS POINT AND WIRELESS ACCESS POINT - A method for a mobile terminal accessing wireless access points and a wireless access point are disclosed. The method includes: after acquiring an access request of a mobile station, when determining that its load exceeds a preset first load upper limit, according to acquired connection information of other wireless access points, a first wireless access point sends a load balance request to all the other wireless access points; a wireless access point receiving the request sends a load balance feedback message to the first wireless access point, carrying its load and connection authentication information required; the first wireless access point selects a load balance feedback message carrying a minimum load from all received messages, and then sends the connection authentication information carried in the selected message to the mobile station; and the mobile station initiates an access flow to a corresponding wireless access point according to the received information. | 04-23-2015 |
20150109913 | PACKET PROCESSING APPARATUS, PACKET PROCESSING METHOD, AND NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER-READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM - A packet processing apparatus receiving a packet includes a memory storing a flow information, and a processor coupled to the memory and configured to, when a processing method for the received packet is defined in the flow information, store the packet into a buffer in the packet processing apparatus and process the packet stored in the buffer using the processing method, when the processing method is not defined in the flow information and a utilization rate of the buffer exceeds a threshold value, transmit the packet to another packet processing apparatus, and when the processing method is not defined in the flow information and the utilization rate of the buffer does not exceed the threshold value, store the packet into the buffer and issue an inquiry about the processing method. | 04-23-2015 |
20150109914 | MODIFYING SYSTEM TIMERS FOR OPTIMIZING MOBILE TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT - A computer-readable storage medium storing instructions that when executed by a processor is provided. The instructions cause the processor to intercept requests from mobile applications on a mobile device, modify system timers to extend delay tolerance impacting the mobile applications, and bundle the requests that are intercepted for radio alignment. Associated methods are also provided. | 04-23-2015 |
20150109915 | NETWORK TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT - In an aspect, the present application is directed to managing traffic in a network. A capacity request is received, wherein the capacity request comprises a request for capacity on the network. The capacity request is evaluated to determine whether the capacity requested by the capacity request in view of a measure of currently in-use network capacity on the network would exceed a threshold level. If the threshold level would not be exceeded, the capacity request is fulfilled so that a corresponding network request can be granted for transmission over the network; and if the threshold level would be exceeded, retrieving and analyzing real-time capacity data to determine an available network capacity of the network to be compared to the capacity requested in the capacity request. | 04-23-2015 |
20150109916 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING REPROGRAMMING OR RECONFIGURING - A method includes setting a first indicator to a first value, which causes an apparatus to stop receiving traffic from a traffic source. At least one register is accessed to read or write at least one new value, and a second indicator is set indicating that accessing of the at least one register has completed. The first indicator is set to a second value. When the first indicator has the second value and the second indicator is set, the apparatus is again allowed to receive traffic from the traffic source. | 04-23-2015 |
20150109917 | MOBILE TERMINAL OF COMMUNICATION NETWORK HAVING AN INFORMATION ELEMENT AND METHOD OF HANDLING COMMUNICATION - The present invention relates to a mobile terminal of a communication network for communication via circuit-switched (CS) domain and packet-switched (PS) domain of the communication network. The mobile terminal is characterized in that at least one information element (IE) is provided on the mobile terminal (UE), which comprises instructions on usage of Mobile Originating circuit-switched (MO-CS) services in case of unavailability of the packet-switched (PS) network. In addition, the invention discloses a method of handling communication from a mobile terminal (UE) in a communication network for communication via circuit-switched (CS) domain and packet-switched (PS) domain of the communication network. The method is characterized in that at least one information element (IE) is provided on the mobile terminal (UE), which comprises instructions on usage of Mobile Originating circuit-switched (MO-CS) services in case of unavailability of the packet-switched (PS) network and in that instructions from the information element (IE) are used when trying to start an Mobile Originating circuit-switched (MO-CS) service from the mobile terminal (UE) after detection of unavailability of the PS network. | 04-23-2015 |
20150109918 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR OPTIMIZING USER EQUIPMENT PERFORMANCE IN LONG TERM EVOLUTION CO-EXISTENT NETWORKS - The present invention provides a method and system for optimizing user equipment performance by having faster resumption of services during co-existence of LTE Frequency division duplexing (FDD) and Time division duplexing (TDD) networks. The method includes determining whether the UE is able to acquire essential system information (SI) associated with a cell or frequency which is barred by the UE. Further, the method includes removing the barring restriction conditionally for that cell or frequency which is barred by the UE if the UE is able to acquire the essential system information associated with the cell frequency. Furthermore, the method includes, allowing the UE to camp on the cell or frequency whose essential SI has been acquired by the UE and resuming the service with the cell and frequency. Furthermore, it also includes the method to have seamless handover between TDD and FDD and vice versa. | 04-23-2015 |
20150109919 | SCALING WIFI PERFORMANCE FOR LARGE-AUDIENCE ENVIRONMENTS - A network device connecting a client station with a TCP/IP server, the device includes a transmitter configured to transmit signals from at least one of the server and the client station, and a receiver configured to receive signals from at least one of the server and the client station. The device also includes a controller. The controller is configured to determine a priority level of the network device based on a dynamic traffic load of the network device, and assign a high priority setting to a first data packet received during a predetermined period of time. Duration of the predetermined period of time is based on the priority level of the network device. | 04-23-2015 |
20150109920 | Traffic Management for Base Stations Backhauled over Data-Capped Network Connections - A method includes receiving a connection request from a mobile device at a network device to allow connection of the mobile device to a core network of the first service provider through a first base station and determining whether a backhaul connection between the core network of the first service provider and the first base station is congested by the network device. The backhaul connection is determined to be congested when L is greater than (D−B)/T. When the first backhaul connection is determined to be congested, the method also includes preventing the first base station from connecting the mobile device to the core network. | 04-23-2015 |
20150109921 | METHOD FOR SWITCHING STATION WORKING MODE AND COMMUNICATIONS DEVICE - A method includes: obtaining, by a transmit end, switching information of a STA, where the switching information includes that the STA switches to a TIM STA or the STA switches to a Non-TIM STA; and sending, by the transmit end, a first message to a receive end, where the first message includes a flag bit, and the flag bit identifies the switching information. According to the embodiments of the present invention, both a STA and an AP can learn switching of a STA working mode, so that correct switching of the STA can be implemented, and the AP can perform correct processing according to a switching situation of the STA. | 04-23-2015 |
20150109922 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR BANDWIDTH ADJUSTMENT IN NETWORK VIRTUALIZATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for bandwidth adjustment in a network virtualization system is described herein. The network virtualization system includes a central module and m remote modules, where the m remote modules are connected to a physical interface of the central module by n PWs. The method includes: acquiring, from the m remote modules, a real-time bandwidth of each PW of the n PWs; when a sum of the acquired real-time bandwidths of the n PWs is greater than a bandwidth of the physical interface, adjusting configured bandwidths of P PWs; and separately sending values of adjusted configured bandwidths of the P PWs to the remote modules separately connected to the P PWs. | 04-23-2015 |
20150117184 | MANAGEMENT OF ACCESS NETWORK RETRY ACROSS POWER CYCLE - A device creates a list of permanent evolved packet system (EPS) mobility management (EMM) failure events associated with the device, where the list includes information associated with one or more permanent EMM failure events encountered by the device. The device stores the list of permanent EMM failure events, provides an attach request message to an access network, and receives, from the access network, a reject message as a response to the attach request message. The device performs a power cycle based on receiving the reject message, and erases, based on the power cycle, a forbidden public land mobile network (PLMN) list and a forbidden tracking area list maintained by the device. The device repopulates the forbidden PLMN list and the forbidden tracking area list with information included in the list of permanent EMM failure events. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117185 | Method and Apparatus Relating to Congestion Control - A method and apparatus for enabling service aware congestion control of PS (Packet Switched) data to be performed in a communication network. In the communication network PS data is communicated between a core network of the communication network and one or more User Equipments, UE, via the communication network node. Each UE is associated to the core network by one or more PS connections, and each of the PS connections is applied by the UE for a respective PS data service. When performing the service aware congestion control, information related to a respective PS data service is obtained, and priority information is provided to a resource manager arranged in the communication network. The priority information is based on the information related to the respective PS data service for a plurality of the PS connections. The resource manager is then enabled to perform congestion control of the PS connections based on the priority information. By determining for which PS data services the PS connections are currently applied, and prioritise the PS connections accordingly, the communication network node may reallocate RAN communication resources to higher prioritised PS data services from less prioritised PS data services. Thereby, a more flexible and effective use of available RAN communication resources may be achieved. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117186 | WIRELESS ACCESS POINT DEVICE AND BAND CONTROL METHOD - A wireless access point device that is connected to one or more wireless client terminals and communicates with each of the wireless client terminals by using one of a plurality of bandwidths, and includes a transmission managing unit that individually determines a transmission rate with respect to each of the connected wireless client terminals; and a used bandwidth determining unit that calculates an approximation of a system communication capacity on the basis of the transmission rate and the number of the connected wireless client terminals and determines a bandwidth to be used by subjecting the approximation to determination based on a threshold. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117187 | TECHNIQUES AND CONFIGURATIONS ASSOCIATED WITH USER EQUIPMENT-INITIATED CONGESTION REPORTING - Embodiments of the present disclosure describe systems and methods for user equipment (UE)-initiated reporting of congestion information. Various embodiments may include systems and methods for reporting congestion information to an evolved node B (eNB) by UEs. In embodiments, the congestion information may be utilized in managing access requests made by the UEs. Other embodiments may be described and/or claimed. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117188 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ADAPTIVE FAST START IN LINK AGGREGATION - In one embodiment, a period between periodic transmissions of protocol data units (PDUs) used to form or maintain a link aggregation group is initially set to a fixed value. When a stress condition is detected, the period between periodic transmissions of PDUs is increased from the initial value. When the stress condition is determined to have eased, the period between periodic transmissions of PDUs is reduced back toward the fixed value. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117189 | METHOD AND CORE NETWORK DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING DEVICE TRIGGER MESSAGE - In transmitting a device trigger message operation, a core network device receives a device trigger message sent by a first device, where the device trigger message includes information that indicates validity time of the device trigger message; when it is determined that a timer exists, compares the validity time with duration of the timer; if the validity time is greater than the duration of the timer, sends the device trigger message to a user equipment UE after the timer times out; and if the validity time is not greater than the duration of the timer, sends a message to the first device and/or discarding the device trigger message, where the message is used to indicate that triggering is rejected, or transmission fails, or device triggering fails. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117190 | SERVICE PACKET PROCESSING METHOD AND DEVICES - A service packet processing method and a device are disclosed. The method includes: receiving service class information sent by a core network; acquiring indication information of the core network; and processing a service packet of a user equipment according to the service class information and the indication information. According to the present invention, a service packet can be correctly processed, and the stability of an access network can be improved. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117191 | RATE CONTROL FOR A COMMUNICATION - Methods and systems for communicating with rate control. A communication is sent and received from a first device to a second device over a network, wherein the communication comprises at least one audio stream and a second communication stream. A capacity of the network is probed at the first device for the sending and receiving the communication. A presence of a voice in the at least one audio stream is detected at the first device via a voice activity detection of the at least one audio stream. A rate limit is set for the sending and receiving the communication at the first device based on the capacity of the network and the detection of the presence of the at least one audio stream. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117192 | Method for Controlling Connection Between User Equipment and Network, and Mobility Management Entity - A method for controlling a connection between a user equipment and a network, and a mobility management entity. The method includes: receiving, by a mobility management entity, a network connection request sent by a user equipment; determining a priority of the network connection request and a network overload state; and controlling a connection between the user equipment and a network according to the priority of the network connection request and the network overload state. The mobility management entity according to the embodiments of the present invention can selectively control the connection between the user equipment and the network by determining the priority of the network connection request and the network overload state. | 04-30-2015 |
20150124594 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING NETWORK ACCESS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention is directed to a wireless communication system. Specifically, the present invention is directed to a method of controlling network access and an apparatus therefore, wherein the method comprises: receiving a first field for indicating network overload situation and a second field for indicating a network access priority; and receiving at least one of a N-bit field for indicating a first back-off window and a M-bit field for indicating a second back-off window, wherein if a configured priority is equal to or higher than the network access priority, a random access (RA) procedure is performed using the first back-off window, wherein if the configured priority is lower than the network access priority, the RA procedure is selectively barred or performed using at least one of the first back-off window and the second back-off window. | 05-07-2015 |
20150124595 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, ACCESS CONTROL APPARATUS, SWITCH, NETWORK CONTROL METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A communication system includes: a control apparatus setting control information in a forwarding node(s); a forwarding node(s); and an access control apparatus. The forwarding node(s) forwards packets by using first control information set by the control apparatus and second control information for forwarding packets that do not match a matching condition(s) in the first control information set by the control apparatus from a predetermined port of the forwarding node(s). The access control apparatus includes a determination unit determining whether to generate control information for the packets forwarded from the predetermined port of the forwarding node(s) and requesting the control apparatus to generate control information. | 05-07-2015 |
20150124596 | Method and system for adaptive bandwidth allocation - A method and system for adaptive bandwidth allocation are disclosed. The method includes evenly allocating the whole bandwidth to each user according to the number of the users currently connecting to a gateway, making statistics on the traffic usage of each user within a preset period, and dynamically allocating a bandwidth to each user according to the traffic usage and the theoretical traffic of the allocated bandwidth. According to the technical scheme of the disclosure, when there is a user connecting to or disconnecting from the gateway, the bandwidth can be evenly allocated according to the number of the users currently connecting to the gateway, the bandwidth of each user can be dynamically adjusted according to actual bandwidth utilization rates of the users, the bandwidths of the users with lower bandwidth utilization rates are reduced, and the bandwidths of the users with higher bandwidth utilization rates are increased, so that reasonable bandwidth allocation is fulfilled. | 05-07-2015 |
20150124597 | COMMUNICATION MANAGEMENT APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION MANAGEMENT METHOD FOR VEHICLE NETWORK - A plurality of in-vehicle control apparatuses ( | 05-07-2015 |
20150124598 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR PROCESSING BUFFER STATE REPORT IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING INTER-ENB CARRIER AGGREGATION TECHNOLOGY - The present invention proposes a method of processing a buffer state report when a wireless communication system uses inter-eNB carrier aggregation technology. According to the present invention, a terminal may be provided with a proper amount of uplink resource allocations by notifying base stations of a buffer state. | 05-07-2015 |
20150124599 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND TRANSMISSION FRAME CONTROL METHOD - A wireless communication apparatus which switches between plural wireless communication schemes that are different from each other in maximum transmission frame size includes a means for selecting one of the plural wireless communication schemes, a means for generating a transmission frame, a means for dividing the generated transmission frame if the size of the transmission frame is larger than a maximum transmission frame size of the selected wireless communication scheme, and a means for transmitting the transmission frame or divided transmission frames according to the selected wireless communication scheme. | 05-07-2015 |
20150124600 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING DATA IN A PACKET-ORIENTED COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK AND CORRESPONDINGLY CONFIGURED USER TERMINAL IN SAID COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A method for transmitting data in a packet-oriented communications network, in particular of a motor vehicle, with a guaranteed maximum transmission time for the data packets in the communications network, and to a user terminal in the communications network. In the method, a specific quality of service as a capacity of the communication link is reserved prior to a data transmission by a reservation request from the sender of the data to the receiver of the data and the requested quality of service as a capacity of the communication link between the sender and the receiver is guaranteed in the network for the data stream by the confirmation of the reservation request, or an indication is given by a rejection that transmission is not possible. In addition, the capacity of the communications network is determined cyclically prior to a reservation request, after a rejection and/or at predefinable time intervals. | 05-07-2015 |
20150124601 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR NETWORK TRAFFIC OFFLOADING - A method, apparatus and computer program product are provided for managing network traffic offloading. In the context of a method, a method is provided that includes determining, based at least in part on a QoS (Quality of Service) mapping scheme, whether a data flow should be offloaded from a first access point to a second access point. The method may further include, if it is determined that the offload should be performed, causing the data flow to be offloaded to the second access point according to the QoS mapping scheme and causing a perceived QoS of the data flow to be monitored. The method may further include, in an instance in which the perceived QoS does not satisfy a predetermined desired QoS threshold, causing a remedial action to be performed. | 05-07-2015 |
20150124602 | TRANSMISSION APPARATUS AND TRANSMISSION METHOD - There is provided a transmission apparatus including: a buffer provided with a queue for each of user flows, the buffer configured to store data in the queue for the user flow to which the data belongs; a storage unit configured to store a link list indicating an output order of the user flows; an issuing unit configured to issue a predetermined output permissible amount to the queue for the user flow by referring to the link list; and an output control unit configured to output data from the queue to which the output permissible amount is issued. | 05-07-2015 |
20150124603 | Channel Bandwidth Estimation on Hybrid Technology Wireless Links - A bandwidth estimation algorithm on shared links detects peaks and/or average per-user bandwidth. Estimating is performed at the transport or IP layer with no assistance from lower layer (PHY, MAC, etc.) and the techniques can be used for any of adjusting the level of video optimization to the available bandwidth; driving QoS decisions at the transmitter based on available bandwidth; improving QoS enforcement during transitions among hybrid technologies on a wireless links; and correcting estimates on devices delivering bursty payload. | 05-07-2015 |
20150131434 | TIME WEIGHTED QUEUING SCHEDULER FOR MACHINE-TO-MACHINE COMMUNICATIONS - A device may receive machine-to-machine (M2M) traffic associated with two or more M2M applications. The M2M traffic may include information that identifies two or more priority levels associated with the M2M traffic. The device may determine parameters associated with managing the M2M traffic. The device may determine a traffic rate, an overall holding time, and an outgoing traffic rate associated with the M2M traffic. The device may determine a normalization factor based on the overall holding time and the parameters. The device may determine a set of priority level holding times based on the normalization factor, the overall holding time, and the parameters. Each priority level holding time may be associated with a priority level of the two or more priority levels. The device may manage the M2M traffic based on the set of priority level holding times and the outgoing traffic rate. | 05-14-2015 |
20150131435 | Efficiency in Wireless Network - There is provided a method comprising: causing a station capable of communication in a wireless network to acquire knowledge of a medium usage indicator with respect to at least one channel applicable for transmission of a scanning request; and determining a transmission time for a next scanning request at least partly based on the medium usage indicator. | 05-14-2015 |
20150131436 | GENERALIZATION OF QUALITY CLASS INDICES IN A WIRELESS NETWORK | 05-14-2015 |
20150131437 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR UPDATING AREA IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system and, more specifically, to a method and a device for updating an area of a terminal. A method for processing an area update request of a terminal in a network node, according to one embodiment of the present invention, comprises the steps of: receiving an area update request message from the terminal; and determining whether or not the area update request is accepted on the basis of indication information included in the area update request message when the network is in a congestion state, wherein if the indication information indicates that the terminal has moved to a new area that is not registered, it can be determined that the area update request has been accepted. | 05-14-2015 |
20150131438 | OPTIMIZING KEEPALIVE AND OTHER BACKGROUND TRAFFIC IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Systems and methods of optimizing network transaction traffic originating at a mobile device are provided. The systems and methods includes identifying network transaction parameters corresponding to an application and utilizing the network transaction parameters to execute a network transaction in advance of an expected schedule or after a delay to optimize the network transaction traffic. | 05-14-2015 |
20150131439 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A communication device has: a sensor configured to output sensing data; a count signal communication part configured to count a count signal received from a control device directly or via another communication device and transmit the counted count signal and to store a value of the received count signal; and a data communication part configured to transmit the sensing data outputted by the sensor or the sensing data received from another communication device, in correspondence with the stored value of the count signal. | 05-14-2015 |
20150138962 | Method and Apparatus for Using a Local Area Network to Offload Demand of a Wide Area Network - A method includes receiving, at a first computing device, first data associated with a performance indicator of a wireless wide area network for a first time period. The method also includes determining, at the first computing device, whether the performance indicator satisfies a performance threshold. The method further includes, based on determining that the performance indicator does not satisfy the performance threshold, offloading one or more communication devices from the wireless wide area network so that the performance indicator satisfies the performance threshold. The method finally includes sending a first instruction to a second computing device. The second computing device enables one or more access points to provide mobile communication services to the one or more communication devices. | 05-21-2015 |
20150138963 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING WIRELESS ACCESS TO A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method that incorporates the subject disclosure may include, for example, transmitting movement information for the mobile communication device to a cellular network, receiving a request from a first communication device of a plurality of communication devices to access the cellular network through the mobile communication device, where the plurality of communication devices are coupled to the plurality of communication devices via a wireless local area network and wherein the mobile communication device is coupled to the cellular network, and providing access to the cellular network for the first communication device responsive to the cellular network determining that the mobile communication device has a required network capability based on the movement information and according to the request. Other embodiments are disclosed. | 05-21-2015 |
20150138964 | METHOD OF MANAGING POLICY FOR REDUCING NETWORK LOAD IN OVERLOADED AREA, SYSTEM AND RECORDING MEDIUM THEREOF - The present invention relates to a method of managing a policy for reducing a network load in an overloaded area, a system and a recording medium thereof. The system includes a storage medium for storing identification information of a wireless terminal in connection with identification information of a policy agent installed in the wireless terminal, a communication section for receiving identification information of the wireless terminal positioned in an overloaded area at a specific time slot from a server over a communication network, a checking section for checking the identification information of the policy agent corresponding to the received identification information of the wireless terminal through the storage medium, and a processing section for transmitting policy information for blocking network usage to the policy agent corresponding to the checked identification information of the policy agent. | 05-21-2015 |
20150138965 | MOBILE STATION - To improve the probability of successfully performing transmission processing by a priority terminal and transmission processing of an emergency call even during congestion. A mobile station UE according to the present invention includes: a reception unit | 05-21-2015 |
20150138966 | Method, Device and System for Processing Service Overhead - Disclosed are a method, device and system for processing service overheads. The method comprises: multi-channel services are multiplexed into a single-channel time division service according to a preset rule; overheads at specific locations of the multiplexed multi-channel services are serially extracted from the single-channel time division service; and according to the network monitoring information indicated by the overheads at the specific locations, a corresponding overhead processing is performed. The disclosure is applied to solve the problem in the related art that a large amount of resources are occupied by parallel processing of overheads, thereby saving resources, simplifying the overhead processing device, and increasing the versatility of the processing system. | 05-21-2015 |
20150138967 | COMMUNICATION METHOD, COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication method for causing a communication apparatus included in a network to perform a process. The method includes: specifying an arrangement of the communication apparatus in the network, using the number of adjacent apparatuses, which are apparatuses adjacent to the communication apparatus, and the number of adjacent apparatuses of each of the adjacent apparatuses; determining the number of times of broadcast of a broadcast frame, using number-of-times-information in which candidates for an arrangement of the communication apparatus in the network and the number of times at which the communication apparatus broadcasts a frame are associated; and broadcasting the broadcast frame the determined number of times. | 05-21-2015 |
20150138968 | SCALING REDUNDANCY ELIMINATION MIDDLEBOXES - A capability is provided for scaling Redundancy Elimination (RE) middleboxes. The RE middleboxes include an RE encoding middlebox and an RE decoding middlebox. The RE middleboxes may employ max-match-based RE techniques or chunk-match-based RE techniques. The RE middleboxes may utilize Distributed Hash Tables (DHTs) to maintain content stores, respectively. The RE middleboxes may be scaled for use with cloud applications (e.g., for use in transfer of data between a customer network and a cloud side, for use in transfer of data between two cloud sites, or the like). | 05-21-2015 |
20150138969 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMPUTER-READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM - According to one embodiment, a communication apparatus includes a communication unit that performs radio communication with a corresponding apparatus. The communication apparatus includes a measuring unit that measures a communication state of the radio communication performed by the communicating unit. The communication apparatus includes a determining unit that determines appropriateness of data communication with the corresponding apparatus performed by the communicating unit, based on a plurality of parameters with respect to the communication state obtained by measurement made by the measuring unit. | 05-21-2015 |
20150138970 | FACILITATING NETWORK FLOWS - In various embodiments, a system includes a switch comprising a resource that is shared between multiple objects. The switch comprises circuitry that determines a congestion metric for the switch in response to an amount of used of the resource by the objects. The circuitry determines a feedback parameter that is responsive to the congestion metric. The circuitry generates a congestion notification message that comprises a congestion feedback value responsive to the feedback parameter. In further embodiments, a system includes a switch that processes data for a first data link layer access network. The switch includes circuitry that identifies whether a received packet originated from a source device that shares the same network layer access layer as the switch. If the source device shares the same network layer access network as the switch, the circuitry generates a congestion notification message comprising a congestion feedback value for the switch. | 05-21-2015 |
20150138971 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR INTELLIGENT DISCARD IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Systems and methods for optimizing system performance of capacity and spectrum constrained, multiple-access communication systems by selectively discarding packets are provided. The systems and methods provided herein can drive changes in the communication system using control responses. One such control responses includes the optimal discard (also referred to herein as “intelligent discard”) of network packets under capacity constrained conditions. Some embodiments provide an interactive response by selectively discarding packets to enhance perceived and actual system throughput, other embodiments provide a reactive response by selectively discarding data packets based on their relative impact to service quality to mitigate oversubscription, others provide a proactive response by discarding packets based on predicted oversubscription, and others provide a combination thereof. | 05-21-2015 |
20150146522 | M2M DEVICE RETRY INSTRUCTION TO NON-PEAK NETWORK TIME - A network device stores back-off definitions for different service categories of machine-type communications (MTC). The network device receives a service connection request originating from a wireless terminal and identifies the service connection request as a MTC request. The network device identifies an available bandwidth capacity for at least one portion of a network associated with the MTC request and determines, when the available bandwidth is below an admission threshold capacity, an admission control level for the MTC request. The admission control level is selected from a group of different admission control levels. The network device calculates a retry interval for the MTC request based on the determined admission control level for the MTC request and the available bandwidth capacity, and sends the retry interval with a response for the MTC request. | 05-28-2015 |
20150146523 | MULTIPLE-INTERFACE NETWORK DEVICE AND SELECTION METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING NETWORK PACKETS - A selection method for transmitting network packets adapted to be executed by a multiple-interface network device is provided. The multiple-interface network device includes a plurality of network interfaces. Each of the network interfaces connects to one of multiple communication networks. The selection method includes the following steps: collecting a transmission status of each of the communication networks; analyzing transmission characteristics of a predetermined number of packets of a service flow to determine a traffic pattern type of the service flow; comparing the transmission status of each of the communication networks with the transmission requirements of the traffic pattern type of the service flow to select one of the network interfaces, and using the selected network interface to transmit packets of the service flow. The service flow is constituted by packets transmitted by the network interfaces through a port and packets received by the network interfaces through the same port. | 05-28-2015 |
20150146524 | AID REASSIGNMENT METHOD, AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING SAID AID REASSIGNMENT METHOD - Disclosed are an AID reassignment method capable of optimally operating a wireless LAN system, and an apparatus for performing the AID reassignment method. The method comprises the steps of: generating a reconnection request frame for an AID reassignment request; transmitting the generated reconnection request frame to the currently associated access point; and receiving a reconnection response frame including AID reassignment information from the access point. Thus, the AID of the currently associated terminal can be dynamically reassigned according to a change in the characteristics of the terminal, thus operating a wireless LAN system in an optimum manner. | 05-28-2015 |
20150146525 | TRANSFER APPARATUS, SERVER, AND ROUTE CHANGING METHOD - A transfer apparatus is configured to: calculate a total cost of a first route in a first network that starts from a source transfer apparatus and ends at a destination transfer apparatus; obtain a particular cost being a cost between the source transfer apparatus and a first line, which couples the source transfer apparatus and its own transfer apparatus, in a second route, which starts from the source transfer apparatus and reaches the destination transfer apparatus via its own transfer apparatus; calculate a differential between the total cost and the particular cost; set, based on the differential, a cost between its own transfer apparatus and a second line, which couples its own transfer apparatus and the destination transfer apparatus, to a value that causes the source transfer apparatus to select the second route rather than the first route; and notify the cost value to the source transfer apparatus. | 05-28-2015 |
20150295827 | UNIFIED CONGESTION CONTROL FOR REAL-TIME MEDIA SUPPORT - Various implementations disclosed herein enable congestion control systems and methods that are agnostic of the availability of congestion notification types, and are simultaneously responsive to multiple types of network congestion indicators—including both implicit (e.g., loss and delay) and explicit (e.g., marking) congestion indicators. For example, some implementations include a congestion control method that includes obtaining a composite congestion indicator value associated with multiple types of network congestion indicators, and determining a reference rate value based on a function of the composite congestion indicator value. The composite congestion indicator value represents a combination of one or more delay values associated with respective types of network congestion indicators. The reference rate value is representative of a baseline transmission rate from the first device that at least partially mitigates network congestion signaled by the network congestion indicators. | 10-15-2015 |
20150295839 | VIRTUAL QUANTIZED CONGESTION NOTIFICATION - Congestion management for data traffic in a virtual domain identifies a congestion source and sends a message to the source to adjust data traffic rates. The source may be a virtual machine hosted by a physical server with one or more virtual servers incorporated. A congestion manager may identify the source and send the message to the source without affecting other data sources hosted by the physical server or the virtual servers. In some embodiments, information about the congestion source may be encapsulated in a packet payload readable only by the congestion source so only the congestion source receives the instruction to adjust the transmission rate. | 10-15-2015 |
20150295847 | RESOURCE RESERVATION METHOD AND SYSTEM, AND CONVERGENCE DEVICE - Embodiments of the present invention relate to the field of communications technologies, and disclose a resource reservation method and system, and a convergence device. The method includes: receiving, by a convergence device, a first resource reservation request message based on a format of a first interface and that is from a policy server (PS); converting, by the convergence device, the first resource reservation request message into a second resource reservation request message based on a format of a second interface; and sending, by the convergence device, the second resource reservation request message based on the format of the second interface to a modulation and demodulation system, so that the modulation and demodulation system performs resource reservation according to the second resource reservation request message. | 10-15-2015 |
20150295856 | SESSION ADMISSION IN A COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A session admission process is provided which identifies the weakest link in a route between a first node and a second node and determines if the route is able to cope if the session is admitted. The suitability of a link is determined on the basis of: historical link performance; the predicted future performance of the link; and the predicted future demands on the link from other sessions supported by that link. | 10-15-2015 |
20150296402 | EVOLVED NODE B RESOURCE MANAGEMENT BASED ON INTEREST INDICATORS - A server device may store information identifying that one or more first user devices, currently connected to a network device via a particular band, should continue to communicate via the particular band when a connection threshold, associated with the particular band, has been exceeded. The particular band may be associated with a multicast service that provides multicast content to the one or more first user devices via the particular band. The server device may determine that the connection threshold has been exceeded; identify a second user device, currently connected to the network device via the particular band, that should no longer communicate via the particular band when the connection threshold has been exceeded disconnected; and prevent the second user device from communicating via the particular band based on determining that the connection threshold has been exceeded and identifying the second user device. | 10-15-2015 |
20150296404 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING DATA COMMUNICATION THROUGH A CLUSTER HEAD FOR MACHINE TYPE COMMUNICATION (MTC) BASED GROUP COMMUNICATION - A method and system for providing data communication for machine type communication (MTC) devices based wireless communication. The method comprises selecting at least one cluster head for a plurality of clusters, receiving by the cluster head a data traffic transfer request from the one or more MTC devices determining availability of a network resources for transferring the data traffic, establishing a dedicated connection with a base station for transferring the data traffic from the MTC devices to the base station through the connection established between the cluster head and the base station. The data traffic transfer request comprises one of an activation status, a buffer occupancy status and a delay tolerance of the one or more MTC devices. | 10-15-2015 |
20150296406 | TRAFFIC DISTRIBUTION METHOD, DEVICE, AND SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a traffic distribution method, apparatus, and system. The method includes: receiving a current packet sent by a first entity; acquiring layer 7 application information according to the current packet; if the layer 7 application information is acquired, matching the current packet with a layer 7 traffic distribution policy according to the layer 7 application information; and sending the current packet to a service server after the current packet matches the layer 7 traffic distribution policy. In this way, the present invention implements traffic distribution based on the layer 7 application information, enhances performance of a traffic distribution device, and reduces deployment costs of an operator. | 10-15-2015 |
20150296407 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REPORTING BUFFER STATUS FOR DEVICE TO DEVICE COMMUNICATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Methods and apparatuses for improving device to device (D2D) communication are disclosed herein. One method includes a user equipment (UE) triggering a buffer status report (BSR) upon configuration or setup of radio resource allocation mode 1 for D2D communication while the UE has data available for transmission for D2D communication. The method further includes the UE transmitting a Medium Access Control (MAC) Control Element corresponding to the BSR. | 10-15-2015 |
20150296519 | ROLE AND PROXIMITY-BASED MANAGEMENT OF NETWORKS - Various embodiments manage computing networks. In one embodiment, a set of network management data associated with one or more users is analyzed. The set of network management data includes at least electronic scheduling information associated with the one or more users. A concentration of users is predicted for a given location based on the analyzing. At least one network characteristic associated with the given location is performed based on at least the predicted concentration of users. | 10-15-2015 |
20150304116 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR TRANSMITTING BROADCAST DATA - A method carried out by a first communication gateway for transmitting broadcast data. Broadcast data is first received through a first network interface. The first communication gateway determines whether the broadcast data satisfies at least one condition, and forwards the broadcast data through at least one tunnel and through a second network interface to a second communication gateway if the broadcast data satisfies the at least one condition. The broadcast data is encapsulated in at least one encapsulating packet and the at least one encapsulating packet is decapsulated by the second communication gateway in order to retrieve the broadcast data. The broadcast data is then distributed by the second communication gateway to a second network. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304220 | CONGESTION CONTROL SYSTEM, CONTROL DEVICE, CONGESTION CONTROL METHOD AND PROGRAM - A congestion control system includes: edge devices that aggregate service request messages from clients, and distribute the messages to servers; a plurality of servers that process the service requests from the clients; and a control device. The control device: acquires a service request occurrence rate observed from the edge devices, and, on the basis of the acquired occurrence rate, determines the proportion of service request messages to be regulated as a regulation rate; determines the number of servers that should be operating, and notifies the edge devices of the regulation rate that was determined; and, on the basis of the number of servers that was determined, puts new servers into operation or stops the service of currently operating servers. In a system in which there a limit to server expansion and there is potential for congestion collapse to occur, integrated control is conducted in such a manner that revenue, which allows for input regulation in edge devices and server expansion, is maximized. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304886 | WIRELESS NETWORK CONTROLLER LOAD BALANCING - In one embodiment, a method includes selecting at a network device, seed access points from a plurality of access points and assigning each of the seed access points to a wireless network controller. The seed access points join the assigned wireless network controllers before the remaining access points join the wireless network controllers. Each of the remaining access points is associated with one of the seed access points and joins the same wireless network controller as the seed access point. An apparatus and logic are also disclosed herein. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304937 | METHOD FOR CONNECTING IMS-BASED SERVICE - The present specification provides a method for connecting an IP multimedia subsystem (IMS)-based service in a terminal. The method for connecting the IMS-based service, includes the steps of: setting a cause value denoting signaling or due to the IMS in an establishment cause field, when a session initiation protocol (SIP)-based message is required to be transmitted on a user plane for connecting the IMS-based service; transmitting a service request message of a non-access stratum (NAS) layer including service type (field) denoting signaling or due to a base station; and transmitting a radio resource control (RRC) connection request message including the set establishment cause field to the base station. | 10-22-2015 |
20150311961 | DYNAMIC CLUSTERING FOR RADIO COORDINATION IN A VIRTUAL NETWORK - An apparatus for adaptively defining clusters transmit points for coordination in a communication network includes a circuit that receives radio frequency channel information corresponding to the transmit points and defines a subset of the transmit points based at least in part on the radio frequency communication channel information. The subset is interrelated by a contiguous chain of dominant interference relationships between pairs of the transmit points. The apparatus further includes a processor that independently coordinates radio communications among the subset of transmit points. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312163 | METHOD TO ACHIEVE BOUNDED BUFFER SIZES AND QUALITY OF SERVICE GUARANTEES IN THE INTERNET NETWORK - Methods to achieve bounded router buffer sizes and Quality of Service guarantees for traffic flows in a packet-switched network are described. The network can be an Internet Protocol (IP) network, a Differentiated Services network, an MPLS network, wireless mesh network or an optical network. The routers can use input queueing, possibly in combination with crosspoint queueing and/or output queueing. Routers may schedule QoS-enabled traffic flows to ensure a bounded normalized service lead/lag. Each QoS-enabled traffic flow will buffer O(K) packets per router, where K is an integer bound on the normalized service lead/lag. Three flow-scheduling methods are analysed. Non-work-conserving flow-scheduling methods can guarantee a bound on the normalized service lead/lag, while work-conserving flow-scheduling methods typically cannot guarantee the same small bound. The amount of buffering required in a router can be reduced significantly, the network links can operate near peak capacity, and strict QoS guarantees can be achieved. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312794 | WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM, AND ACCESS POINT AND STATION FOR THE WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM - A wireless LAN system in which data communication between a wireless station whose connection method as a method for wireless connection can be set to one of a plurality of connection methods and a wireless access point whose connection method has been preset to one of the connection methods is made possible by setting the connection method of the wireless station to a method identical with the connection method of the wireless access point. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312800 | PARALLEL REGISTRATION TO OFFLOAD PLMN WITH SINGLE SIM - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided. The apparatus establishes a first cellular communication link with a first cellular network based on a subscriber identifier, establishes a second cellular communication link with a second cellular network based on the subscriber identifier, and maintains the first cellular communication link concurrently with the second cellular communication link. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312829 | OFFLOAD PROCESSING METHOD, CONTROL UNIT, AND SYSTEM - A method includes: after a user equipment UE accesses a first-standard network, acquiring, by a control unit, first resource status information of the first-standard network and second resource status information of at least one second-standard network having an overlapping area with the first-standard network, where the first-standard network or the second-standard network includes a wireless fidelity WiFi network; and determining, by the control unit according to the first resource status information and the second resource status information, whether offload processing needs to be performed for the UE. | 10-29-2015 |
20150318944 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM FOR INTERFERENCE METRIC SIGNALLING - Mobile broadband traffic has been exploding in wireless networks ( | 11-05-2015 |
20150318962 | System And Method Using A Secondary Network Node For Handling Packet Retransmissions - According to some embodiments, a method for handling packet retransmissions is implemented by a secondary network node and includes detecting a first data transmission from a first primary network node to a wireless device. A first response message from the first wireless device to the first primary network node is then detected. The response message indicates that the first data transmission included an error when received by the wireless device. A second data transmission from the secondary network node to the first wireless device is detected. The second data transmission from the secondary network node includes at least a portion of the first data transmission from the first primary network node. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319092 | CONTENT AWARE WI-FI QoS - Described herein are techniques for providing content aware quality of service (QoS) metadata for a Wi-Fi connection to nodes in a network by incorporating the QoS metadata into a packet header so that the nodes in the network can access the QoS metadata. The Wi-Fi access gateway receives a data packet for an internet protocol (IP) connection with a radio node across the network, wherein the radio node is configured to connect to one or more Wi-Fi devices located near the radio node The Wi-Fi access gateway classifies underlying data content of the IP connection to determine QoS metadata for the IP connection based on the underlying data content. The Wi-Fi access gateway incorporates the QoS metadata into a packet header of the data packet so that nodes in the network can access the QoS metadata for the IP connection. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319640 | Method of Handling Signaling and Data Transmission for Machine-Type Communication - A method of handling signaling and data transmission for machine-type communication (MTC) for a core network in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The core network includes at least one of a network control node, a data base and a network gateway node. The method includes the network gateway node selectively performing trigger suppression operation on at least a trigger request from a MTC server according to whether the core network is congested or overloaded, wherein each of the at least a trigger request is used to trigger at least an MTC application on a MTC device, wherein the trigger suppression operation is performed according to a trigger suppression setting received from the network control node. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319763 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SIGNAL INTERFERENCE AVOIDANCE - Aspects of the subject disclosure may include, for example, detecting an interferer having a periodic time of recurrence and a periodic spectral frequency range, identifying a spectral segment of a plurality of spectral segments of a wideband radio system having a time of occurrence and an operating frequency range that overlaps with the periodic time of recurrence and the periodic spectral frequency range of the interferer, identifying a communication device utilizing the spectral segment for transmitting data in accordance with a segment schedule assigned to the communication device, and generating an updated segment schedule by modifying the segment schedule of the communication device to avoid utilizing an affected portion of the spectral segment during the periodic time of recurrence and the periodic spectral frequency range of the interferer. Other embodiments are disclosed. | 11-05-2015 |
20150326487 | Method for Configuring the Link Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) in a User Equipment (UE) - In a System Architecture Evolution/Long Term Evolution (SAE/LTE) radio network, the network is set to configure the link MTU in the UE for each bearer where the network-configured link MTU can represent an MTU of a path for a SAE bearer service in complete or part of a particular SAE/LTE network. | 11-12-2015 |
20150326509 | HEADER REPLICATION IN ACCELERATED TCP (TRANSPORT CONTROL PROTOCOL) STACK PROCESSING - In one embodiment, a method is provided. The method of this embodiment provides storing a packet header at a set of at least one page of memory allocated to storing packet headers, and storing the packet header and a packet payload at a location not in the set of at least one page of memory allocated to storing packet headers. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327112 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SIGNALING REDUCTION ON RADIO ACCESS NETWORKS USING TARGETED INTELLIGENCE FOR COMMUNICATION DEVICES - An intelligent system and an algorithm at a packet network to reduce the amount of signaling in the radio access network and core network is defined. The system collects all the necessary information from the signaling exchange between the radio access network and the core network and takes the subscription characteristics and policy information into consideration to choose the optimal way of reducing the amount of signaling including selecting the optimal bearers for certain types of communications and paging selected area instead of the whole area for each device. The bearer selection algorithm takes several things as input to choose the optimal bearer to perform the task. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327259 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO BASE STATION APPARATUS, AND OPERATION CONTROL METHOD - A mobile communication system including: a first and second radio base stations apparatuses; and a terminal apparatus, wherein radio communication is performed between the first and second base station apparatuses and the terminal apparatus, and the first radio base station apparatus includes: a first control unit configured to control whether or not operation of the first radio base station apparatus is caused to be dormant based on a message exchanged between the second radio base station apparatus adjacent to the first radio base station apparatus and the first radio base station apparatus. | 11-12-2015 |
20150334021 | 5-WAY TCP OPTIMIZATION - A system and method optimizes the response speed and throughput of TCP sessions for web browsing or large-file applications. TCP sessions are classified into long and short sessions, and steered to designated devices for TCP and application optimization. A TCP session may send packets as fast as possible without regard to the ACK packets. TCP termination is applied at a point where the available bandwidth on one side of a path is significantly larger than the available bandwidth of the path on the other side. TCP sessions are classified according to groups and each group is optimized separately. | 11-19-2015 |
20150334027 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR TRANSPORTING INFORMATION TO SERVICES IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - An example method is provided in one example embodiment and may include receiving a packet for a subscriber at a gateway, wherein the gateway includes a local policy anchor for interfacing with one or more policy servers and one or more classifiers for interfacing with one or more service chains, each service chain including one or more services accessible by the gateway; determining a service chain to receive the subscriber's packet; appending the subscriber's packet with a header, wherein the header includes, at least in part, identification information for the subscriber and an Internet Protocol (IP) address for the local policy anchor; and injecting the packet including the header into the service chain determined for the subscriber. | 11-19-2015 |
20150334028 | ROBUST CONTENT-BASED SOLUTION FOR DYNAMICALLY OPTIMIZING MULTI-USER WIRELESS MULTIMEDIA TRANSMISSION - A method for congestion control in a communications network supporting a plurality of streaming video traffics, said method comprising
| 11-19-2015 |
20150334030 | PROBING AVAILABLE BANDWIDTH ALONG A NETWORK PATH - In one embodiment, a time period is identified in which probe packets are to be sent along a path in a network based on predicted user traffic along the path. The probe packets are then sent during the identified time period along the path. Conditions of the network path are monitored during the time period. The rate at which the packets are sent during the time period is dynamically adjusted based on the monitored conditions. Results of the monitored conditions are collected, to determine an available bandwidth limit along the path. | 11-19-2015 |
20150334031 | DELAY BUDGET BASED FORWARDING IN COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - In one embodiment, certain nodes in a computer network maintain a plurality of routing topologies, each associated with a different corresponding delay (e.g., dynamically adjusted). Upon receiving a packet with an indicated delay budget at a particular node, the node updates the delay budget based on an incurred delay up to and including the particular node since the indicated delay budget was last updated, and selects a particular routing topology on which to forward the packet based on the updated delay budget and the corresponding routing topology delays. The packet may then be forwarded with the updated delay budget on the selected routing topology, accordingly. | 11-19-2015 |
20150334037 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR BUFFERING DATA - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method and apparatus for buffering data, which can perform highly reliable buffering processing on a received first data packet and further improve user experience. The method includes: receiving a first data packet; determining whether to perform accelerated transmission on data in the first data packet; and if it is determined not to perform accelerated transmission on the data in the first data packet, using a first manner to buffer the first data packet; and if it is determined to perform accelerated transmission on the data in the first data packet, using a second manner to buffer the first data packet, where a buffer duration in the second manner is greater than a buffer duration in the first manner. The present invention is applicable to the communications field. | 11-19-2015 |
20150341272 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - When a proxy device is used between a transmission terminal and a reception terminal, receives final data from the transmission terminal, and fails immediately thereafter, a situation is avoided where transmission is completed in the transmission terminal, but reception is not completed in the reception terminal. There is provided a means for not returning ACK when a data packet is received in a state in which there is no data which waits for ACK and transmission of which is in progress, and there is no data which waits for arrangement and reception of which is in progress in the proxy device, for returning ACK for data received one step before when a data packet is received in a state in which there is data which waits for ACK and transmission of which is in progress, or there is data which waits for arrangement and reception of which is in progress. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341281 | SYSTEMS, PROCESSES AND INTEGRATED CIRCUITS FOR IMPROVED PACKET SCHEDULING OF MEDIA OVER PACKET - A method of processing first and second record packets of real-time information includes computing for each packet a deadline interval and ordering processing of the packets according to the respective deadline intervals. A single-chip integrated circuit has a processor circuit and embedded electronic instructions forming an egress packet control establishing an egress scheduling list structure and operations in the processor circuit that extract a packet deadline intervals, place packets in the egress scheduling list according to deadline intervals; and embed a decoder that decodes the packets according to a priority depending to their deadline intervals. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341821 | INFORMATION EXCHANGE FOR CELLULAR NON-CELLULAR INTERWORKING - There are provided measures for information exchange for cellular non-cellular interworking such as for example LTE/UTRA-WiFi interworking. Such measures may exemplarily comprise measures for reporting, e.g. from an access point of a non-cellular local-area communication system or a terminal being served in a cellular wide-area communication system, information about at least one access point of the non-cellular local-area communication system to a radio access network level of the cellular wide-area communication system, and performing, at the radio access network level of the cellular wide-area communication system, traffic offloading management for at least one terminal being served in the cellular wide-area communication system to enable offloading of terminal-related traffic from the cellular wide-area communication system to the non-cellular local-area communication system on the basis of the obtained access point information. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341823 | DEVICES AND METHODS FOR FACILITATING UPLINK TRANSMISSIONS ON TWO OR MORE CARRIERS - Wireless User Equipment (UEs) are adapted to facilitate uplink transmissions on two or more carriers. According to one example, a wireless user equipment can determine whether a size of data to be transmitted is greater than or less than a predetermined threshold. When the size of the data is less than the predetermined threshold, the wireless user equipment can transmit the data on a primary carrier. When the size of the data is greater |